Mercedes C Class Saloon 2011 w204 Owners Manual 01

Disclaimer
All
Daslanguage
folgende versions of the für
PDF-Dokument following PDF document for
dieses Fahrzeugmodell this sich
bezieht vehicle model
in allen
relate
The solely toversion
Sprachversionen
following vehicles intended
nur aufofdie for sale
theFahrzeuge,
Owner‘s on the
die für
Manual den German allmarket
deutschen
describes Marktand
models, which
bestimmt
series and
correspond
special to German
sind undequipment
die den regulations.
deutschen
of your Vorschriften entsprechen. Bitte
vehicle. Country-specific wenden
language Sie sich an
variations are
Ihren autorisierten
possible. Mercedes-Benz
Please note Servicestützpunkt,
that your vehicle might not be um equipped
ein gedrucktes
withExemplar
all the
Please
describedcontact
für andere your authorised
Fahrzeugmodelle
functions. Mercedes-Benz
und affects
This also Fahrzeugmodelljahre Service
safety-relevant Centreand
zu erhalten.
systems to obtain
functions.
a printed
Please version
contact forauthorised
your other vehicle models and vehicle
Mercedes-Benz model
dealership years.
if you Thislike
would PDF
document
Dieses
to receive aisprinted
the latest
PDF-Dokument version.
stellt
Owner‘s Possible
die Manual
aktuelle variations
Version
for otherdar. to your
Mögliche
vehicle vehicle
Abweichungen
models mayzu
and vehicle not
be taken
Ihrem
model into account
konkreten
years. Fahrzeugaskönnten
Mercedes-Benz constantlysein,
nicht berücksichtigt updates their vehicles to
da Mercedes-Benz
the
seinestate of the art
Fahrzeuge and introduces
ständig dem neuesten changes
Standinderdesign andanpasst,
Technik equipment.sowiePlease
therefore
The onlinenote
Änderungen that this
in Form
Owner‘s und PDF is
Manual document
Ausstattung in no
vornimmt.
the current way
and replaces
Bitte
validbeachten the
version. Itprinted
Sie daher,
is version
dass
possible that
which was affecting
deviations deliveredyour
dieses PDF-Dokument with yourFall
in keinem vehicle.
specific das gedruckte
vehicle could Exemplar ersetzt,
not be taken intodas mit
account
dem
as Fahrzeug ausgeliefert
Mercedes-Benz wurde.
constantly adapts its vehicles according to the latest
technology and makes changes to the form and the equipment.
Please also read the printed Owner‘s Manual, supplementary documents and
the digital Owner‘s Manual in the vehicle.
Copyright
All rights reserved. All texts, images and graphics are subject to copyright
and other laws for the protection of intellectual property. They may not be
copied or changed for any commercial use or for the purpose of being passed
on nor used on other webistes.
Internal use only

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz
Before you drive off, please familiarise your-
self with your vehicle and read this manual,
especially the safety and warning notices.
This will help you to obtain the maximum
pleasure from your vehicle and avoid endan-
gering yourself and others.
The equipment or model designation of your
vehicle may differ according to:
Rmodel
Rorder
Rcountry variant
Ravailability
The illustrations in this manual show a left-

hand-drive vehicle. On right-hand-drive vehi-
cles, the arrangement and location of vehicle
parts and controls differ accordingly.
Mercedes-Benz is constantly updating its
vehicles to the state of the art.
Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right
to introduce changes in the following areas:
Rdesign
Requipment
Rtechnical features
You cannot, therefore, base any claims on the
illustrations or text content in this manual.
The following are integral components of the
vehicle:
ROwner's Manual
RService Booklet
REquipment-dependent supplements
Keep these documents in the vehicle at all

times. When you sell the vehicle, always pass
the documents on to the new owner.
i You can get to know the important fea-
tures of your vehicle in the interactive Own-
er's Manual on the Internet at:
http://www.mercedes-benz.de/
betriebsanleitung
The technical documentation team at
Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant
motoring.
2045847082Z102 É2045847082Z102UËÍ
Contents 3
Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 31
Introduction ......................................... 26 Safety ................................................... 45
Opening and closing ........................... 83
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors . . 103
Lights and windscreen wipers ......... 117
Climate control ................................. 133
Driving and parking .......................... 151
On-board computer and displays .... 221
Stowing and features ....................... 301
Maintenance and care ...................... 321
Breakdown assistance ..................... 333
Wheels and tyres .............................. 357
Technical data ................................... 375

4 Index
1, 2, 3 ... Switching on/off (on-board com-

puter, 12-button multifunction
12-button multifunction steering steering wheel) .............................. 238
wheel Towing a trailer .............................. 215
Operating the on-board computer . 227 Active light function ......................... 121
Overview .......................................... 41 Active Service System PLUS
12 V socket see ASSYST PLUS service interval
see Sockets display
4-button multifunction steering ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 78
wheel Adaptive brake lamps ......................... 74
Overview .......................................... 40 Adaptive Highbeam Assist
4-button multifunction steering Function/notes ............................. 122
wheel Adaptive Main-beam Assist
Operating the on-board computer . 223 Display message (12-button mul-
4ETS tifunction steering wheel) .............. 267
see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Trac- Adaptive Main-Beam Assist
tion System) Switching on/off (on-board com-
4MATIC (permanent four-wheel puter) ............................................. 240
drive) .................................................. 195 Additional speedometer ................... 239
4MATIC off-road system ................... 195 Additives (engine oil) ........................ 382
Adjusting the headlamp range ......... 120
A Airbags
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Activation ......................................... 47
Display message (12-button mul- Front airbag (driver, front
tifunction steering wheel) .............. 255 passenger) ....................................... 50
Display message (4-button multi- Important safety guidelines ............. 48
function steering wheel) ................ 250 Kneebag ........................................... 50
Function/notes ................................ 72 Sidebag ............................................ 50
Important safety notes .................... 72 Windowbag ...................................... 51
Warning lamp ................................. 293 Air-conditioning system
Activating/deactivating air-recir- see Climate control
culation mode .................................... 141 Air filter
Activating/deactivating cooling Display message (12-button mul-
with air dehumidification ................. 137 tifunction steering wheel) .............. 271
Active Blind Spot Assist Display message (4-button multi-
Display message (12-button mul- function steering wheel) ................ 269
tifunction steering wheel) .............. 276 AIR FLOW ........................................... 138
Function/notes ............................. 209 Air pressure
Switching on/off (on-board com- see Tyre pressure
puter, 12-button multifunction Air vents
steering wheel) .............................. 238 Glove compartment ....................... 148
Towing a trailer .............................. 212 Important safety notes .................. 147
Active Driving Assistance package . 209 Rear ............................................... 148
Active Lane Keeping Assist Setting ........................................... 147
Display message (12-button mul- Setting the centre air vents ........... 148
tifunction steering wheel) .............. 275 Setting the side air vents ............... 148
Function/information .................... 212
Index 5
Alarm system Automatic engine start (ECO start/

see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) stop function) .................................... 157
Alertness Assistant Automatic engine switch-off (ECO
see ATTENTION ASSIST start/stop function) .......................... 157
AMGMenu (on-board computer) ....... 245 Automatic headlamp mode .............. 119
Anti-glare film .................................... 320 Automatic transmission
Anti-lock Braking System Accelerator pedal position ............. 163
see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Automatic drive program ............... 164
Anti-Theft Alarm system Changing gear ............................... 163
see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Display message (4-button multi-
Anti-theft system function steering wheel) ................ 283
Immobiliser ...................................... 80 Driving tips .................................... 163
Aquaplaning ....................................... 177 Emergency running mode .............. 168
Ashtray ............................................... 316 Kickdown ....................................... 163
ASSYST PLUS Manual drive program .................... 166
see ASSYST PLUS service interval Problem (fault) ............................... 168
display Program selector button ................ 163
ASSYST PLUS service interval dis- Pulling away ................................... 156
play Releasing the parking lock man-
Displaying service messages ......... 326 ually ............................................... 168
Hiding service messages ............... 326 Selector lever ................................ 162
Notes ............................................. 326 Shift ranges ................................... 165
Service messages .......................... 326 Starting the engine ........................ 155
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Steering wheel gearshift paddles ... 164
Activating/deactivating ................... 80 Trailer towing ................................. 163
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 80 Transmission position display ........ 162
Function ........................................... 80 Transmission positions .................. 162
Interior motion sensor ..................... 81 Automatic transmission emer-
Switching off the alarm .................... 80 gency running mode ......................... 168
Tow-away protection ........................ 81 Automatic transmissions
ATTENTION ASSIST Display message (12-button mul-
Activating/deactivating ................. 238 tifunction steering wheel) .............. 285
Display message (12-button mul- Auxiliary heating
tifunction steering wheel) .............. 273 Activating/deactivating ................. 143
Function/notes ............................. 203 Activating/deactivating (on the
Audio DVD (12-button multifunc- centre console) .............................. 143
tion steering wheel) .......................... 234 Important safety notes .................. 143
Audio menu (on-board computer, Problem (display message) ............ 147
12-button multifunction steering Remote control .............................. 144
wheel) ................................................. 233 Setting (on-board computer, 12-
AUTO lights button multifunction steering
Display message (12-button mul- wheel) ............................................ 242
tifunction steering wheel) .............. 267 Setting the departure time ............. 145
Display message (4-button multi- Auxiliary ventilation
function steering wheel) ................ 264 Activating/deactivating ................. 143
see Lights Activating/deactivating (on the
centre console) .............................. 143
6 Index
Problem (display message) ............ 147 Bonnet

Remote control .............................. 144 Closing ........................................... 323
Axle load, permissible (trailer tow- Display message (12-button mul-
ing) ...................................................... 389 tifunction steering wheel) .............. 286
Display message (4-button multi-
B function steering wheel) ................ 284
Opening ......................................... 322
Bag hook ............................................ 308
Boot
Ball coupling
Emergency release .......................... 95
Folding in ....................................... 218
Important safety guidelines ............. 92
Folding out ..................................... 217
Locking separately ........................... 95
BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 73
Opening/closing (automatically
Basic settings from outside) ................................... 93
see Settings Opening (automatically from
BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System inside) .............................................. 94
PLUS) .................................................... 73 Boot lid
Battery (key) Display message (12-button mul-
Checking .......................................... 87 tifunction steering wheel) .............. 286
Important safety notes .................... 86 Display message (4-button multi-
Replacing ......................................... 87 function steering wheel) ................ 284
Battery (vehicle) Opening/closing .............................. 92
Charging ........................................ 349 Opening dimensions ...................... 386
Connecting .................................... 348 Brake Assist System
Disconnecting ................................ 348 see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Display message (12-button mul- Brake fluid
tifunction steering wheel) .............. 271 Display message (12-button mul-
Display message (4-button multi- tifunction steering wheel) .............. 258
function steering wheel) ................ 269 Display message (4-button multi-
Important safety notes .................. 346 function steering wheel) ................ 252
Jump starting ................................. 350 Notes ............................................. 383
Location ......................................... 347 Brake lamp
Removing/fitting ........................... 348 Display message (12-button mul-
Belt tifunction steering wheel) .............. 265
see Seat belt Display message (4-button multi-
Belt force limiters (activation) ........... 47 function steering wheel) ................ 262
Belt tensioner Brake lamps
Activation ......................................... 47 Adaptive ........................................... 74
Function ........................................... 56 Changing bulbs .............................. 128
Blind Spot Assist Brakes
Activating/deactivating ................. 238 ABS .................................................. 72
Display message (12-button mul- BAS .................................................. 73
tifunction steering wheel) .............. 276 BAS PLUS ........................................ 73
Notes/function .............................. 205 Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 383
Trailer towing ................................. 207 Display message (12-button mul-
see Active Blind Spot Assist tifunction steering wheel) .............. 255
function steering wheel) ................ 250
Driving tips .................................... 175
Index 7
High-performance brake system .... 177 Cell phone

Important safety notes .................. 175 see Mobile phone
Parking brake ................................ 175 Central locking
Warning lamp ................................. 293 Automatic locking (on-board com-
Breakdown puter) ............................................. 242
see Flat tyre Locking/unlocking (key) .................. 84
see Towing away/tow-starting Centre console ..................................... 42
Bulbs Changing bulbs
see Changing bulbs Brake lamps ................................... 128
Cornering light function ................. 127
C Dipped-beam headlamps ............... 126
Important safety notes .................. 125
Calling up a fault
Main-beam headlamps ................... 127
see Display messages
Overview of bulb types .................. 126
Capacities
Parking lamps (front) ..................... 127
see Technical data
Reversing lamps ............................ 128
Car
Standing lamps .............................. 127
see Vehicle
Child-proof locks
Care
Important safety notes .................... 71
Automatic car wash ....................... 327
Rear doors ....................................... 71
Carpets .......................................... 332
Children
Display ........................................... 331
Fastening seat belts ......................... 64
Exterior lighting ............................. 330
In the vehicle ................................... 57
Gear or selector lever .................... 332
Restraint systems ............................ 57
High-pressure cleaner .................... 328
Child seat
Matt paintwork .............................. 329
Automatic recognition ..................... 59
Notes ............................................. 327
Display message (12-button mul-
Paint .............................................. 328
tifunction steering wheel) .............. 260
Plastic trim .................................... 331
Reversing camera .......................... 330
Roof lining ...................................... 332
Integrated ........................................ 63
Seat belt ........................................ 332
Integrated, ICS padded play table .... 65
Seat cover ..................................... 332
Integrated, side head restraints ....... 66
Sensors ......................................... 330
Integrated, storing ........................... 67
Steering wheel ............................... 332
ISOFIX .............................................. 60
Tail pipes ....................................... 331
On the front-passenger seat ............ 58
Trim pieces .................................... 332
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 63
Washing by hand ........................... 328
Recommendations ........................... 70
Wheels ........................................... 328
Suitable positions ............................ 68
Windows ........................................ 329
Cigarette lighter ................................ 317
Wiper blades .................................. 329
Cleaning
Wooden trim .................................. 332
Trailer tow hitch ............................. 331
Car key
Climate control
see Key
Activating/deactivating rear win-
Car wash (care) ................................. 327
dow heating ................................... 141
CD player/CD changer (12-button
Auxiliary heating/ventilation .......... 143
multifunction steering wheel) .......... 234
Controlling automatically ............... 138
8 Index
Convenience opening/closing (air Convenience closing feature .............. 97

recirculation) ................................. 142 Convenience opening/closing (air-
Cooling with air dehumidification . . 137 recirculation mode) ........................... 142
Demisting the windows .................. 140 Convenience opening feature ............ 97
Demisting the windscreen ............. 140 Coolant (engine)
Important safety notes .................. 134 Checking the level ......................... 324
Indicator lamp ................................ 138 Display message (12-button mul-
Notes on using THERMATIC auto- tifunction steering wheel) .............. 270
matic climate control ..................... 135 Display message (4-button multi-
Notes on using THERMOTRONIC function steering wheel) ................ 268
automatic climate control .............. 137 Notes ............................................. 383
Overview of systems ...................... 134 Temperature display (12-button
Problems with cooling with air multifunction steering wheel;
dehumidification ............................ 138 AMG) ............................................. 245
Problem with the rear window Temperature gauge (12-button
heating .......................................... 141 multifunction steering wheel) ........ 226
Rear control panel ......................... 136 Temperature gauge (4-button
Setting the air distribution ............. 139 multifunction steering wheel) ........ 222
Setting the airflow ......................... 139 Warning lamp ................................. 298
Setting the air vents ...................... 147 Cooling
Setting the climate mode (AIR see Climate control
FLOW) ............................................ 138 Cornering lamps
Setting the temperature ................ 138 Changing bulbs .............................. 127
Switching air-recirculation mode Cornering light function
on/off ............................................ 141 Display message (12-button mul-
Switching on/off ........................... 137 tifunction steering wheel) .............. 264
Switching residual heat on/off ...... 142 Display message (4-button multi-
Switching the ZONE function on/ function steering wheel) ................ 261
off .................................................. 140 Function/notes ............................. 121
THERMATIC automatic climate Crash-responsive emergency light-
control (2-zone) ............................. 135 ing ....................................................... 125
THERMOTRONIC (3-zone) auto- Cruise control
matic climate control ..................... 136 Cruise control lever ....................... 178
Coat hooks ......................................... 310 Deactivating ................................... 180
Cockpit Display message (12-button mul-
Overview .......................................... 32 tifunction steering wheel) .............. 279
see Instrument cluster Display message (4-button multi-
COMAND Online function steering wheel) ................ 272
see separate operating instructions Driving system ............................... 178
Combination switch .......................... 120 Important safety notes .................. 178
Combined luggage cover and net .... 309 LIM indicator lamp ......................... 178
Constant headlamp mode Selecting ........................................ 179
see Daytime driving lamps Setting a speed .............................. 180
Consumption statistics Storing and maintaining current
On-board computer (12-button speed ............................................. 179
multifunction steering wheel) ........ 231
On-board computer (4-button
Index 9
Cup holder Display message (12-button multi-

Centre console .............................. 314 function steering wheel)
Important safety notes .................. 314 ASSYST PLUS service interval ....... 326
Rear compartment ......................... 315 Calling up ....................................... 249
Driving systems ............................. 273
D Engine ............................................ 270
General notes ................................ 248
Dashboard
Hiding ............................................ 248
see Cockpit
Key ................................................ 289
Data
KEYLESS-GO .................................. 289
see Technical data Lights ............................................. 264
Daytime driving lamps Safety systems .............................. 255
Switching on/off (on-board com- Tyres .............................................. 281
puter, 12-button multifunction Vehicle ........................................... 285
steering wheel) .............................. 239 Display message (4-button multi-
Daytime driving lights function steering wheel)
Display message (12-button mul- ASSYST PLUS service interval ....... 326
tifunction steering wheel) .............. 266 Calling up ....................................... 248
Display message (4-button multi- Driving systems ............................. 272
function steering wheel) ................ 263 Engine ............................................ 268
Switching on/off (on-board com- General notes ................................ 248
puter, 4-button multifunction Hiding ............................................ 248
steering wheel) .............................. 226 Key ................................................ 288
Switching on/off (switch) .............. 119 KEYLESS-GO .................................. 288
Delayed switch-off Lights ............................................. 261
Exterior lighting (12-button multi- Safety systems .............................. 250
function steering wheel) ................ 241 Tyres .............................................. 280
Interior lighting (12-button multi- Vehicle ........................................... 283
function steering wheel) ................ 241 Distance display (on-board com-
Diesel .................................................. 170 puter, 12-button multifunction
Diesel particle filter .......................... 175 steering wheel) .................................. 237
Digital speedometer ......................... 231 Distance recorder
Dipped beam 12-button multifunction steering
Display message (4-button multi- wheel ............................................. 231
function steering wheel) ................ 261 see Trip meter
Dipped-beam headlamps Distance warning signal (warning
Changing bulbs .............................. 126 lamp) .................................................. 300
Display message (12-button mul- DISTRONIC PLUS
tifunction steering wheel) .............. 264 Deactivating ................................... 190
Setting for driving abroad (sym- Display message (12-button mul-
metrical) ........................................ 118 tifunction steering wheel) .............. 277
Setting for driving on the right/ Displays in the multifunction dis-
left ................................................. 240 play ................................................ 189
Switching on/off ........................... 119 Driving tips .................................... 190
Display (cleaning instructions) ........ 331 Function/notes ............................. 183
Selecting ........................................ 184
10 Index
Setting the specified minimum Driving safety systems

distance ......................................... 188 ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 72
Warning lamp ................................. 300 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 78
Door Adaptive brake lamps ...................... 74
Automatic door locking feature BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 73
(on-board computer, 12-button Overview .......................................... 72
multifunction steering wheel) ........ 242 PRE-SAFE® Brake ............................. 78
Automatic locking (switch) ............... 90 Driving system
Central locking/unlocking (key) ...... 84 Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 212
Control panel ................................... 44 Display message (12-button mul-
Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 273
tifunction steering wheel) .............. 286 Display message (4-button multi-
Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 272
function steering wheel) ................ 284 Driving systems
Emergency locking ........................... 91 Active Driving Assistance pack-
Emergency unlocking ....................... 91 age ................................................. 209
Important safety notes .................... 89 ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 203
Opening (from the inside) ................ 90 Blind Spot Assist ............................ 205
Drinks holder Cruise control ................................ 178
see Cup holders Distronic Plus ................................ 183
Drive program Dynamic handling package with
Automatic ...................................... 164 sports mode .................................. 192
Display ........................................... 162 HOLD function ............................... 193
Manual ........................................... 166 Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 208
Drive program selector ..................... 164 Lane package ................................ 205
Driver's door Parking Guidance ........................... 199
see Door Parktronic ...................................... 196
Driver's seat RACE START (AMG vehicles) .......... 194
see Seats Reversing camera .......................... 202
Drive system Speed Limit Assist ......................... 204
Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 209 Speedtronic ................................... 180
Driving abroad Driving tips
Service24h .................................... 327 Aquaplaning ................................... 177
Symmetrical dipped beam ............. 118 Automatic transmission ................. 163
Driving on flooded roads .................. 177 Brakes ........................................... 175
Driving safety system DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 190
BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System Downhill gradient ........................... 175
PLUS) ............................................... 73 Driving abroad ............................... 118
Electronic Brake-force Distribu- Driving in winter ............................. 177
tion .................................................. 78 Driving on flooded roads ................ 177
ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro- Driving on wet roads ...................... 177
gram) ............................................... 75 General .......................................... 175
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction Icy road surfaces ........................... 178
System) ........................................... 75 Limited braking efficiency on sal-
Important safety guidelines ............. 72 ted roads ....................................... 176
New brake pads/linings ................ 176
Running-in tips ............................... 152
Snow chains .................................. 360
Index 11
Symmetrical dipped beam ............. 118 Emergency release

Towing a trailer .............................. 215 Driver's door .................................... 91
Tyre grip ........................................ 177 Fuel filler flap ................................. 172
Wet road surface ........................... 176 Emergency spare wheel
Dynamic handling package with Notes/data .................................... 369
sports mode ....................................... 192 Storage location ............................ 336
Emergency unlocking
E Boot ................................................. 95
Tailgate ............................................ 95
EASY-ENTRY feature
Vehicle ............................................. 91
Activating/deactivating (12-but-
Engine
ton multifunction steering wheel) . . 243
ECO start/stop function ................ 156
Function/notes ............................. 111
Emergency starting ........................ 354
EASY-EXIT feature
Engine number ............................... 379
Activating/deactivating (12-but-
Running irregularly ......................... 159
Starting problems .......................... 159
Crash-responsive ........................... 112
Starting the engine with the key .... 155
Function/notes ............................. 111
Starting with KEYLESS GO ............. 155
EASY-PACK load-securing kit ........... 310
Stopping ........................................ 174
EBD (electronic brake force distri-
Warning lamp (engine diagnos-
bution)
tics) ............................................... 298
Function/notes ................................ 78
Engine electronics
EBD (Electronic Brake force Distri-
Notes ............................................. 377
bution)
Problem (fault) ............................... 159
Display message (12 button mul-
Engine oil
Additives ........................................ 382
EBD (Electronic Brake-force Distri-
Checking the oil level ..................... 323
bution)
Checking the oil level using the
dipstick .......................................... 323
ECO start/stop function
Deactivating/activating ................. 158 Display message (4-button multi-
General information ....................... 156 function steering wheel) ................ 269
Electrical fuses Filling capacity ............................... 382
see Fuses Notes about oil grades ................... 381
Electronic Brake force Distribution Notes on oil level/consumption .... 323
see EBD (Electronic Brake force Temperature (12-button multi-
Distribution) function steering wheel) ................ 245
Electronic Stability Program Topping up ..................................... 324
see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Viscosity ........................................ 382
Electronic Traction System Environmental protection
see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Trac- Note ................................................. 26
tion System) Returning an end-of-life vehicle ....... 26
Emergency key ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-
Unlocking the driver's door .............. 91 gram)
Emergency key element AMG menu (on-board computer) . . . 245
Function/notes ................................ 86 Deactivating/activating (AMG
Locking vehicle ................................ 91 vehicles) .......................................... 76
12 Index
Deactivating/activating (except Raising the vehicle ......................... 343

AMG vehicles) ................................ 237 TIREFIT kit ...................................... 337
Deactivating/activating (notes; Floormat ............................................. 319
except AMG vehicles) ...................... 75 Foglamps
Display message (12-button mul- Extended range .............................. 122
tifunction steering wheel) .............. 255 Switching on/off ........................... 119
Display message (4-button multi- Frequencies
function steering wheel) ................ 250 Mobile phone ................................. 377
ETS/4ETS ........................................ 75 Two-way radio ................................ 377
Function/notes ................................ 75 Front foglamp
Important safety guidelines ............. 75 Display message (12-button mul-
Trailer stabilisation .......................... 77 tifunction steering wheel) .............. 266
Warning lamp ................................. 295 Front foglamps
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys- Display message (4-button multi-
tem) ...................................................... 75 function steering wheel) ................ 263
Exhaust tail pipe (cleaning instruc- Switching on/off ........................... 119
tions) .................................................. 331 Front windscreen
Exterior lighting see Windscreen
see Lights Fuel
Exterior mirrors Displaying the range (12-button
Adjusting ....................................... 112 multifunction steering wheel) ........ 231
Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) ........ 114 Displaying the range (4-button
Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 113 multifunction steering wheel) ........ 226
Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 113 Important safety notes .................. 380
Folding in (12-button multifunc- Notes about consumption ............. 380
tion steering wheel) ....................... 244 Problem (malfunction) ................... 173
Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 113 Refuelling ....................................... 168
Parking position ............................. 114 Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 380
Resetting ....................................... 113 Tank content display (12-button
Storing settings (memory func- multifunction steering wheel) .......... 37
tion) ............................................... 115 Tank content display (4-button
multifunction steering wheel) .......... 34
F Fuel consumption
Current (12-button multifunction
Fatigue Assist
steering wheel) .............................. 231
see ATTENTION ASSIST
Fuel filler flap
Fault message
Emergency release ........................ 172
Opening/closing ............................ 171
Filler cap
Fuel filter
see Fuel filler flap
Fire extinguisher ............................... 335
First-aid kit ......................................... 334
Flat tyre
Changing a wheel/fitting the
spare wheel ................................... 341
MOExtended run-flat system ......... 345
Preparing the vehicle ..................... 337
Index 13
Fuel reserve Adjusting (rear) .............................. 107

Display message (12-button mul- Fitting/removing (rear) .................. 108
tifunction steering wheel) .............. 271 Luxury ............................................ 107
Display message (4-button multi- see NECK-PRO head restraints
function steering wheel) ................ 269 see NECK-PRO head restraints/
see Fuel NECK-PRO luxury head restraints
Fuel tank Heating
Capacity ........................................ 380 see Climate control
Problem (malfunction) ................... 173 High-pressure cleaners .................... 328
Fuse allocation chart (vehicle tool Hill start assist .................................. 156
kit) ...................................................... 335 HOLD function
Fuses Display message (12-button mul-
Allocation chart ............................. 355 tifunction steering wheel) .............. 273
Before changing ............................. 355 Display message (4-button multi-
Dashboard fuse box ....................... 355 function steering wheel) ................ 272
Fuse box in the boot ...................... 356 Function/notes ............................. 193
Fuse box in the engine compart- Hook ................................................... 308
ment .............................................. 355
Fuse box in the luggage compart- I
ment .............................................. 356
ICS padded play table ......................... 65
Ignition lock
see Key positions
G
Immobiliser .......................................... 80
Gear indicator (12-button multi- Indicator and warning lamps
function steering wheel) .................. 245 Coolant .......................................... 298
Gear or selector lever (cleaning DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 300
instructions) ...................................... 332 Engine diagnostics ......................... 298
Gearshift program Fuel tank ........................................ 298
SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 245 Overview (12-button multifunc-
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ......... 376 tion steering wheel) ......................... 39
Glove compartment .......................... 303 Overview (4-button multifunction
steering wheel) ................................ 36
H SPORT handling mode ................... 296
Indicator lamps
Handbrake
see Warning and indicator lamps
see Parking brake
Indicators
Hazard warning lamps ...................... 121
see Turn signals
Headlamp
Insect protection on the radiator .... 323
Cleaning system (function) ............ 120
Instrument cluster (12-button mul-
Headlamps
tifunction steering wheel)
Misting up ...................................... 123
Indicator and warning lamps ............ 39
Topping up the cleaning system .... 325
Overview .......................................... 37
see Automatic headlamp mode
Settings ......................................... 239
Head restraints
Instrument cluster (4-button mul-
Adjusting ....................................... 107
tifunction steering wheel)
Adjusting (electrically) ................... 107
Indicator and warning lamps ............ 36
Adjusting (manually) ...................... 107
Overview .......................................... 34
14 Index
Instrument cluster lighting Emergency key element ................... 86

Multifunction steering wheel with Loss ................................................. 88
12 buttons ....................................... 37 Modifying the programming ............. 85
Multifunction steering wheel with Positions (ignition lock) ................. 153
4 buttons ......................................... 34 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 88
Instrument lighting Starting the engine ........................ 155
see Instrument cluster lighting KEYLESS-GO
Integrated child seat Convenience closing ........................ 98
ICS padded play table ...................... 65 Display message (12-button mul-
Important safety guidelines ............. 63 tifunction display) .......................... 289
Side head restraints ......................... 66 Display message (4-button multi-
Storing, ICS padded play table and function display) ............................ 288
side head restraints ......................... 67 Locking ............................................ 85
Intelligent Light System Start/Stop button .......................... 153
Activating/deactivating (12-but- Starting the engine ........................ 155
ton multifunction steering wheel) . . 240 Unlocking ......................................... 85
Display message (12-button mul- Key positions
tifunction steering wheel) .............. 267 Key ................................................ 153
Setting the dipped-beam head- KEYLESS GO .................................. 153
lamps for driving on the right/left . 240 Keys
Interior lighting ................................. 124 Display message (12-button mul-
Automatic control system .............. 124 tifunction steering wheel) .............. 289
Delayed switch-off (12-button Kickdown
multifunction steering wheel) ........ 241 Driving tips .................................... 163
Emergency lighting ........................ 125 Manual drive program .................... 167
Manual control ............................... 125 Kneebag ............................................... 50
Overview ........................................ 124
Reading lamp ................................. 124 L
Interior motion sensor ........................ 81
Lamps
ISOFIX child seat securing system .... 60
see Warning and indicator lamps
Lane-change assistant
J
see Blind Spot Assist
Jack Lane detection (automatic)
Storage location ............................ 335 see Lane Keeping Assist
Using ............................................. 343 Lane Keeping Assist
Jump starting (engine) ...................... 350 Activating/deactivating ................. 238
K tifunction steering wheel) .............. 275
Function/information .................... 208
Key
Lane package ..................................... 205
Changing the battery ....................... 87
Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 245
Checking the battery ....................... 87
Lashing eyelets ................................. 307
Convenience closing feature ............ 97
Lighting
Convenience opening feature .......... 97
see Lights
Lights
Activating/deactivating the exte-
Door central locking/unlocking ....... 84
rior lighting delayed switch-off
Index 15
(12-button multifunction steering Limiting the speed

wheel) ............................................ 241 see SPEEDTRONIC
Activating/deactivating the Intel- Loading guidelines ............................ 302
ligent Light System ........................ 240 Locking
Activating/deactivating the inte- see Central locking
rior lighting delayed switch-off Locking (doors)
(12-button multifunction steering Automatic ........................................ 90
wheel) ............................................ 241 Emergency locking ........................... 91
Active light function ....................... 121 From inside (central locking but-
Automatic headlamp mode ............ 119 ton) .................................................. 90
Cornering light function ................. 121 Locking centrally
Dipped-beam headlamps ............... 119 see Central locking
Driving abroad ............................... 118 Locking verification signal (on-
Foglamps ....................................... 119 board computer) ............................... 242
Foglamps (extended range) ........... 122 Luggage compartment floor
Hazard warning lamps ................... 121 opening/closing ............................ 312
Headlamp flasher ........................... 121 stowage well, under ....................... 312
Headlamp range ............................ 120 Luggage cover ................................... 308
Light switch ................................... 118 Luggage holder (EASY-PACK load-
Main-beam headlamps ................... 120 securing kit) ....................................... 311
Motorway mode ............................. 122 Luggage net ....................................... 304
Parking lamps ................................ 118 Lumbar support
Rear foglamp ................................. 119 Adjusting ....................................... 109
Switching Adaptive Highbeam Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-
Assist on/off ................................. 240 port ................................................ 109
Switching the daytime driving Luxury head restraint ....................... 107
lights on/off (12-button multi- Luxury multifunction steering
function steering wheel) ................ 239 wheel
Switching the daytime driving see 12-button multifunction
lights on/off (4-button multifunc- steering wheel
tion steering wheel) ....................... 226
Switching the daytime driving M
lights on/off (switch) ..................... 119
Switching the surround lighting M+S tyres ........................................... 360
on/off (12-button multifunction Main beam
steering wheel) .............................. 241 Display message (4-button multi-
Turn signals ................................... 120 function steering wheel) ................ 262
see Changing bulbs Main-beam headlamps
see Interior lighting Changing bulbs .............................. 127
Light sensor Display message (12-button mul-
Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 266
tifunction steering wheel) .............. 267 Switching Adaptive Highbeam
Display message (4-button multi- Assist on/off ................................. 122
function steering wheel) ................ 264 Switching on/off ........................... 120
LIM indicator lamp Maintenance
Cruise control ................................ 178 see ASSYST PLUS service interval
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 184 display
Variable SPEEDTRONIC ................. 181
16 Index
Manual transmission Multifunction steering wheel (12-

Engaging reverse gear ................... 161 button)
Gear lever ...................................... 160 see 12-button multifunction
Pulling away ................................... 155 steering wheel
Shifting to neutral .......................... 161 Multifunction steering wheel (4
Shift recommendation ................... 161 buttons)
Starting the engine ........................ 154 see 4-button multifunction steer-
Matt finish (cleaning instructions) . . 329 ing wheel
Memory card (audio) ......................... 234
Memory function ............................... 115 N
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre
Navigation
see Qualified specialist workshop
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 232
Message memory
On-board computer (12-button
12-button multifunction steering
wheel ............................................. 249
see separate operating instructions
4-button multifunction steering
NECK-PRO head restraints
wheel ............................................. 248
Operation ......................................... 52
Messages
Resetting after being triggered ........ 52
NECK-PRO luxury head restraints
Mirrors
Operation ......................................... 52
see Exterior mirrors
Resetting after being triggered ........ 52
see Rear-view mirror
Notes on running in a new vehicle . . 152
see Vanity mirror
Mobile phone
Frequencies ................................... 377 O
Installation ..................................... 377 Occupant safety
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 235 Children in the vehicle ..................... 57
Notes/placing in the bracket ......... 318 Important safety notes .................... 46
Transmission output (maximum) .... 377 Odometer
Modifying the programming (key) ..... 85 4-button multifunction steering
MOExtended run-flat system ........... 345 wheel ............................................. 225
Motorway mode ................................ 122 see Total distance recorder
MP3 see Trip meter
Operating ....................................... 234 Oil
see Separate operating instructions see Engine oil
Multicontour seat .............................. 108 On-board computer
Multifunction display RACETIMER ................................... 245
4-button multifunction steering On-board computer (12-button
wheel ............................................. 223 multifunction steering wheel)
Permanent display (12-button AMG menu ..................................... 245
multifunction steering wheel) ........ 239 Assist menu ................................... 236
Multi-function display Audio menu ................................... 233
12-button multifunction steering Convenience submenu .................. 243
wheel ............................................. 228 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 189
Instrument cluster submenu .......... 239
Lights submenu ............................. 239
Index 17
Menu overview .............................. 230 Outside temperature

Navigation menu ............................ 232 Display (12-button multifunction
Operating ....................................... 227 steering wheel) .............................. 227
Operating the video DVD ............... 234 Display (4-button multifunction
Range ............................................ 231 steering wheel) .............................. 222
Service menu ................................. 238 Overhead control panel ...................... 43
Standard display submenu ............ 231 Override feature
Telephone menu ............................ 235 Rear side windows ........................... 72
Trip menu ...................................... 231
On-board computer (12-button P
multifunction steering wheel)
Displaying service messages ......... 326 Paint code .......................................... 379
Display messages .......................... 248 Paintwork (cleaning instructions) . . . 328
Heating submenu ........................... 242 Panorama sliding sunroof
Message memory .......................... 249 Important safety information ........... 99
Vehicle submenu ........................... 241 Opening/closing ............................ 101
On-board computer (12-button Opening/closing the roller sun-
multifunction steering wheel)Set- blind ............................................... 101
tings menu ......................................... 238 Problem (malfunction) ................... 102
On-board computer (12-button Rain closing feature ....................... 101
multifunction steering wheel) sub- Resetting ....................................... 102
menu Park Assist
Factory setting ............................... 244 Parking Guidance ........................... 199
On-board computer (4-button mul- Parking ............................................... 174
tifunction steering wheel) Important safety notes .................. 174
Important safety notes .................. 222 Parking brake ................................ 175
Menu overview .............................. 225 Position of exterior mirror, front-
Switching daytime driving lights passenger side ............................... 114
on/off ............................................ 226 Reversing camera .......................... 202
On-board computer (4-button mul- see PARKTRONIC
tifunction steering wheel) Parking aid
Displaying service messages ......... 326 see Exterior mirrors
Display messages .......................... 248 see PARKTRONIC
Individual vehicle settings .............. 223 Parking brake .................................... 175
Message memory .......................... 248 Display message (12-button mul-
Operating ....................................... 223 tifunction steering wheel) .............. 257
Range ............................................ 226 Display message (4-button multi-
Standard display ............................ 225 function steering wheel) ................ 251
Trip computer ................................ 226 Notes/function .............................. 175
On-board diagnostic interface ........... 28 Parking Guidance
Opening and closing the side trim Display message (12-button mul-
panels ................................................. 127 tifunction steering wheel) .............. 276
Operating safety Important safety notes .................. 199
On-board diagnostic interface .......... 28 Trailer towing ................................. 202
Operating system
see On-board computer
18 Index
Parking lamp Preventive occupant safety sys-

Display message (12-button mul- tem
tifunction steering wheel) .............. 266 see PRE-SAFE® (preventive occu-
Display message (4-button multi- pant safety system)
function steering wheel) ................ 263 Program selector button .................. 163
Parking lamps Pulling away
Changing bulbs .............................. 127 Automatic transmission ................. 156
Switching on/off ........................... 118 Manual transmission ...................... 155
Parking lamps (changing bulbs) ...... 127
PARKTRONIC Q
Deactivating/activating ................. 198
Driving system ............................... 196 Qualified specialist workshop ........... 28
Function/notes ............................. 196
Problem (fault) ............................... 199 R
Sensor range ................................. 196 RACE START (AMG vehicles) ............. 194
Trailer towing ................................. 198 RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 245
Warning display ............................. 197 Radar sensor system
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning Activating/deactivating ................. 242
lamp ...................................................... 59 Country overview ........................... 389
Permanent four-wheel drive Display message (12-button mul-
see 4MATIC (permanent four- tifunction steering wheel) .............. 274
wheel drive) Radiator cover ................................... 323
Petrol .................................................. 169 Radio
Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) . 331 Selecting a station (12-button
Power windows multifunction steering wheel) ........ 233
see Side windows see separate operating instructions
PRE-SAFE® (preventative occupant Rain closing feature
protection) Panorama sliding sunroof .............. 101
Display message (12-button mul- Sliding sunroof ............................... 100
tifunction steering wheel) .............. 258 Range (fuel)
Display message (4-button multi- Displaying (12-button multifunc-
function steering wheel) ................ 252 tion steering wheel) ....................... 231
PRE-SAFE® (preventive occupant Displaying (4-button multifunc-
safety system) tion steering wheel) ....................... 226
Operation ......................................... 51 Reading lamp ..................................... 124
PRE-SAFE® Brake (vehicles with Rear bench seat
DISTRONIC PLUS) Folding the backrest forwards/
Function/notes ................................ 78 back ............................................... 305
PRE-SAFE® Brake (vehicles with Rear compartment
DISTRONIC PLUS) Setting the airflow ......................... 139
Display message (12-button mul- Setting the air vents ...................... 148
tifunction steering wheel) .............. 259 Rear-compartment seat belt sta-
Switching on/off ........................... 237 tus indicator ........................................ 56
Warning lamp ................................. 300
Index 19
Rear foglamp Rev counter

Display message (12-button mul- 12-button multifunction steering
tifunction steering wheel) .............. 266 wheel ............................................. 226
Display message (4-button multi- 4-button multifunction steering
function steering wheel) ................ 263 wheel ............................................. 222
Switching on/off ........................... 119 Reverse gear
Rear seat Engaging (automatic transmis-
Display message (12-button mul- sion) ............................................... 162
tifunction steering wheel) .............. 286 Engaging (manual transmission) .... 161
Display message (4-button multi- Reversing camera
function steering wheel) ................ 284 Cleaning instructions ..................... 330
Rear-view mirror Function/notes ............................. 202
Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) ........ 114 Reversing lamp
Dipping (manual) ........................... 112 Changing bulbs .............................. 128
Rear window blind ............................ 316 Display message (12-button mul-
Rear window heating tifunction steering wheel) .............. 266
Problem (fault) ............................... 141 Display message (4-button multi-
Switching on/off ........................... 141 function steering wheel) ................ 263
Rear window wiper Roller blind
Replacing the wiper blade .............. 131 see Roller sunblind
Switching on/off ........................... 130 Roller sunblind
Refuelling Panorama sliding sunroof .............. 101
Fuel gauge ....................................... 34 Rear window .................................. 316
Important safety notes .................. 168 Roof carrier ........................................ 313
Refuelling process ......................... 171 Roof lining and carpets (cleaning
see Fuel instructions) ...................................... 332
Releasing the parking lock man- Roof load (maximum) ........................ 384
ually (automatic transmission) ........ 168 Route
Remote control see Route guidance (navigation)
Auxiliary heating/ventilation .......... 144 Route guidance (navigation) ............ 232
Changing the batteries (auxiliary
heating) ......................................... 145 S
Replacing the battery (auxiliary
heating remote control) .................... 145 Safety
Reserve (fuel tank) Children in the vehicle ..................... 57
Child restraint systems .................... 57
see Fuel
Safety net ........................................... 309
Reserve fuel
Attaching ....................................... 310
Safety systems
Display message (4-button multi- see Driving safety systems
function steering wheel) ................ 269 Seat
Warning lamp ................................. 298 Folding the backrest (rear com-
Residual heat (climate control) ........ 142 partment) forwards/back .............. 306
Restraint system
see SRS (Supplemental Restraint
System)
20 Index
Seat belt Service products

Activating/deactivating seat-belt Brake fluid ..................................... 383
adjustment (12-button multifunc- Coolant (engine) ............................ 383
tion steering wheel) ....................... 244 Engine oil ....................................... 381
Adjusting the driver's and front- Fuel ................................................ 380
passenger seat belt ......................... 55 Important safety notes .................. 379
Adjusting the height ......................... 55 Settings
Belt force limiter .............................. 56 Factory (12-button multifunction
Belt tensioner .................................. 56 steering wheel) .............................. 244
Cleaning ......................................... 332 On-board computer (12-button
Display message (12-button mul- multifunction steering wheel) ........ 238
tifunction steering wheel) .............. 259 Setting the air distribution ............... 139
Display message (4-button multi- Setting the airflow ............................ 139
function steering wheel) ................ 252 SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 245
Fastening ......................................... 55 Shifting to neutral (manual trans-
Important safety guidelines ............. 53 mission) ............................................. 161
Rear seat belt status indicator ......... 56 Sidebag ................................................ 50
Releasing ......................................... 56 Side marker lamp
Warning lamp (function) ................... 56 Display message (12-button mul-
Seat belts tifunction steering wheel) .............. 266
Warning lamp ................................. 291 Display message (4-button multi-
Seats function steering wheel) ................ 263
Adjusting (electrically) ................... 106 Side windows
Adjusting (manually and electri- Convenience closing ........................ 97
cally) .............................................. 106 Convenience opening ...................... 97
Adjusting lumbar support .............. 109 Important safety notes .................... 96
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup- Opening/closing .............................. 97
port ................................................ 109 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 99
Adjusting the head restraint .......... 107 resetting .......................................... 98
Cleaning the cover ......................... 332 Sliding sunroof
Correct driver's seat position ........ 104 Important safety information ........... 99
Important safety notes .................. 105 Opening/closing ............................ 100
Multicontour seat .......................... 108 Problem (malfunction) ................... 102
Seat heating problem .................... 110 Rain closing feature ....................... 100
Seat ventilation problem ................ 110 Resetting ....................................... 100
Storing settings (memory func- see Panorama sliding sunroof
tion) ............................................... 115 Snow chains ...................................... 360
Switching seat heating on/off ....... 109 Socket
Switching the seat ventilation on/ Centre console .............................. 317
off .................................................. 110 Luggage compartment ................... 318
Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 330 Points to observe before use ......... 317
Service Rear compartment ......................... 318
see ASSYST PLUS service interval Spare wheel
display Storage location ............................ 336
Service menu (12-button multi- see Emergency spare wheel
function steering wheel) .................. 238 Specialist workshop ............................ 28
Spectacles compartment ................. 303
Index 21
Speed, controlling Warning lamp ................................. 297

see Cruise control Warning lamp (function) ................... 47
Speed Limit Assist Starting (engine) ................................ 154
Activating/deactivating the warn- Station
ing function .................................... 236 see Radio
Displaying ...................................... 236 Steering
Display message (12-button mul- Display message (12-button mul-
tifunction steering wheel) .............. 273 tifunction steering wheel) .............. 287
Display message in the multifunc- Display message (4-button multi-
tion display .................................... 205 function steering wheel) ................ 285
Important safety notes .................. 204 Steering wheel
Speedometer Adjusting (electrically) ................... 111
Activating/deactivating the addi- Adjusting (manually) ...................... 111
tional speedometer ........................ 239 Buttons (12-button multifunction
Digital ............................................ 231 steering wheel) .............................. 227
In the instrument cluster (12-but- Buttons (4-button multifunction
ton multifunction steering wheel) .... 37 steering wheel) .............................. 223
In the instrument cluster (4-but- Cleaning ......................................... 332
ton multifunction steering wheel) .... 34 Gearshift paddles ........................... 164
Segments ...................................... 227 Important safety notes .................. 110
Selecting the unit of measure- Storing settings (memory func-
ment .............................................. 239 tion) ............................................... 115
see Instrument cluster Steering wheel gearshift paddles .... 164
SPEEDTRONIC Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 245
Deactivating variable ..................... 182 Stowage compartment
Display message (12-button mul- Spectacles compartment ............... 303
tifunction steering wheel) .............. 278 Stowage compartments
Display message (4-button multi- Armrest (under) ............................. 303
function steering wheel) ................ 272 Centre console .............................. 303
Function/notes ............................. 180 Cup holder ..................................... 314
Important safety notes .................. 180 Glove compartment ....................... 303
LIM indicator lamp ......................... 181 Important safety information ......... 302
Permanent ..................................... 183 Luggage net ................................... 304
Selecting ........................................ 181 Rear ............................................... 304
Storing the current speed .............. 182 Under driver's seat/front-
Variable ......................................... 181 passenger seat .............................. 304
SPORT handling mode Stowage well beneath the boot
Activating/deactivating (AMG floor .................................................... 312
vehicles) .......................................... 76 Summer opening
Warning lamp ................................. 296 see Convenience opening feature
SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys- Summer tyres .................................... 359
tem) Sun blind
Display message (12-button mul- Rear side windows ......................... 315
tifunction steering wheel) .............. 260 Sun visor ............................................ 315
Display message (4-button multi- Supplement Restraint System
function steering wheel) ................ 253 see SRS (Supplemental Restraint
Introduction ..................................... 47 System)
22 Index
Surround lighting (12-button mul- Rejecting/ending a call ................. 235

tifunction steering wheel) ................ 241 Telephone compartment ................ 303
Switching off the alarm (ATA) ............ 80 Telescopic rod (Easy-Pack fix kit) .... 312
Temperature
T Coolant (12-button multifunction
steering wheel; AMG) ..................... 245
Tailgate
Coolant (12-button multifunction
steering wheel) .............................. 226
Coolant (4-button multifunction
steering wheel) .............................. 222
Engine oil (12-button multifunc-
Emergency unlocking ....................... 95
Outside temperature (12-button
Limiting the opening angle ............... 94
Opening/closing .............................. 92
Outside temperature (4-button
from inside) ...................................... 94
Setting (climate control) ................ 138
TEMPOMAT
from outside) ................................... 93
Function/notes ............................. 178
Opening dimensions ...................... 386
Through-loading feature ................... 304
Tail lamp
Tilt/sliding sunroof
see Sliding sunroof
Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 245
TIREFIT kit .......................................... 337
Top Tether ............................................ 61
Tank
Total distance recorder
see Fuel tank
Displaying (12-button multifunc-
Tank content
Displaying the range (12-button
Displaying (4-button multifunc-
Displaying the range (4-button
Tow-away protection .......................... 81
Towing
Fuel gauge (12-button multifunc-
tion steering wheel) ......................... 37
With the rear axle raised ................ 353
Fuel gauge (4-button multifunc-
Towing a trailer
tion steering wheel) ......................... 34
Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 212
Technical data
Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 215
Notes ............................................. 376
Axle load, permissible .................... 389
Trailer loads ................................... 388
Bulb failure indicator for LED
Tyres/wheels ................................. 366
lamps ............................................. 220
Vehicle data ................................... 384
Lights display message (12-but-
Telephone
Accepting a call ............................. 235
Lights display message (4-button
Trailer tow hitch display message
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 235
(4-button multifunction steering
Number from the phone book ........ 235
wheel) ............................................ 285
Redialling ....................................... 236
Index 23
Towing away Turn signal

Fitting the towing eye .................... 352 Display message (12-button mul-
Removing the towing eye ............... 353 tifunction steering wheel) .............. 265
With both axles on the ground ....... 353 Display message (4-button multi-
Tow-starting function steering wheel) ................ 262
Emergency engine starting ............ 354 Turn signals
Fitting the towing eye .................... 352 Switching on/off ........................... 120
Important safety notes .................. 351 Two-way radio
Removing the towing eye ............... 353 Frequencies ................................... 377
Trailer coupling Installation ..................................... 377
see Towing a trailer Transmission output (maximum) .... 377
Trailer towing Type identification plate
7-pin connector ............................. 220 see Vehicle identification plate
Blind Spot Assist ............................ 207 Tyre pressure
Cleaning the trailer tow hitch ......... 331 Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 363
Coupling up a trailer ...................... 218 Display message (12-button mul-
Decoupling a trailer ....................... 218 tifunction steering wheel) .............. 281
Driving tips .................................... 215 Display message (4-button multi-
ESP® ................................................ 77 function steering wheel) ................ 280
Folding in the ball coupling ............ 218 Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 340
Folding out the ball coupling .......... 217 Pressure loss warning .................... 362
Important safety notes .................. 215 Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 340
Mounting dimensions .................... 387 Recommended ............................... 361
Parking Guidance ........................... 202 Tyre pressure monitor
Parktronic ...................................... 198 Function/notes ............................. 363
Power supply ................................. 219 Restarting ...................................... 365
Shift range ..................................... 163 Warning lamp ................................. 300
Trailer loads ................................... 388 Tyres
Transmission Checking ........................................ 358
see Automatic transmission Direction of rotation ...................... 366
see Manual transmission Display message (12-button mul-
Transporting the vehicle .................. 353 tifunction steering wheel) .............. 281
Trim pieces (cleaning instructions) . 332 Display message (4-button multi-
Trip computer function steering wheel) ................ 280
On-board computer (12-button Grip ................................................ 177
multifunction steering wheel) ........ 231 Important safety notes .................. 358
On-board computer (4-button Replacing ....................................... 365
multifunction steering wheel) ........ 226 Service life ..................................... 359
Trip meter Storing ........................................... 366
Displaying/resetting (4-button Tyre size (data) .............................. 366
multifunction steering wheel) ........ 225 Tyre tread ...................................... 359
Displaying (12-button multifunc- see Flat tyre
Resetting (12-button multifunc-
Trip odometer
see Trip meter
24 Index
U Video DVD (12-button multifunc-

tion steering wheel) .......................... 234
Unladen weight ................................. 384 VIN ...................................................... 379
Unlocking
Emergency unlocking ....................... 91
W
From inside the vehicle (central
unlocking button) ............................. 90 Warning and indicator lamps
ABS ................................................ 293
V Brakes ........................................... 293
Distance warning signal ................. 300
Vanity mirror (in sun visor) .............. 315
ESP® .............................................. 295
Variable SPEEDTRONIC
ESP® OFF ....................................... 295
see SPEEDTRONIC
LIM (cruise control) ........................ 178
Vehicle
LIM (DISTRONIC PLUS) .................. 184
Correct use ...................................... 28
LIM (variable SPEEDTRONIC) ......... 181
Data acquisition ............................... 29
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF ................ 59
Electronics ..................................... 377
Reserve fuel ................................... 298
Equipment ....................................... 26
Seat belt ........................................ 291
Implied warranty .............................. 29
SRS ................................................ 297
Individual settings .......................... 238
Tyre pressure monitor ................... 300
Leaving parked up ......................... 175
Warning triangle ................................ 334
Locking (in an emergency) ............... 91
Washer fluid
Locking (key) ................................... 84
Lowering ........................................ 344
Pulling away ................................... 155
Raising ........................................... 343
Registration ..................................... 28
see Windscreen washer system
Towing away .................................. 351
Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 344
Tow-starting ................................... 351
Wheel chock ...................................... 342
Transporting .................................. 353
Wheels
Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 91
Changing/replacing ....................... 365
Unlocking (key) ................................ 84
Changing a wheel .......................... 341
Vehicle data ................................... 384
Checking ........................................ 358
Vehicle battery
Cleaning ......................................... 328
see Battery (vehicle)
Fitting a wheel ............................... 344
Vehicle data ....................................... 384
see Technical data
Removing a wheel .......................... 344
Vehicle dimensions ........................... 384
Storing ........................................... 366
Vehicle emergency locking ................ 91
Tightening torque ........................... 344
Vehicle identification number
Wheel size/tyre size ...................... 366
see VIN
Windowbag
Vehicle identification plate .............. 379
Vehicle tool kit .................................. 335
Vehicle weights ................................. 384
Vents
see Air vents
Operation ......................................... 51
Video (DVD) ........................................ 234
Index 25
Windows
Cleaning ......................................... 329
see Side windows
Windscreen
Demisting ...................................... 140
Windscreen washer system ............. 325
Windscreen wipers
Problem (malfunction) ................... 132
Rear window wiper ........................ 130
Replacing the wiper blades ............ 130
Switching on/off ........................... 129
Winter operation
Radiator cover ............................... 323
Slippery road surfaces ................... 178
Snow chains .................................. 360
Winter tyres
Limiting the speed (on-board com-
puter) ............................................. 241
M+S tyres ...................................... 360
Wiper blades
Cleaning ......................................... 329
Replacing (on the rear window) ..... 131
Replacing (windscreen) .................. 131
Wooden trim (cleaning instruc-
tions) .................................................. 332
26 Introduction
Protection of the environment Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance

from the vehicle in front.
Notes Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration.
H Environmental note Rchange gear in good time and use each gear
Daimler's declared policy is one of integrated only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed.
environmental protection. Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.
The objectives are for the natural resources
which form the basis of our existence on this
planet to be used sparingly and in a manner Returning end-of-life vehicles
which takes the requirements of both nature
and humanity into account. Mercedes-Benz will take back your
Mercedes-Benz to dispose of it in an environ-
You too can help to protect the environment
mentally responsible manner, in accordance
by operating your vehicle in an environmen-
with the European Union (EU) End of Life
tally responsible manner.
Vehicles Directive.
Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,
The End of Life Vehicles Directive applies to
transmission, brake and tyre wear depend on
vehicles with a gross vehicle weight of up to
the following factors:
3.5 t, in accordance with national regulations.
Roperating conditions of your vehicle For several years, Mercedes-Benz has been
Ryour personal driving style meeting all the legal requirements for a
You can influence both factors. You should design which allows for recycling and reuse.
bear the following in mind: There is a network of return points and dis-
assembly plants which can recycle your vehi-
Operating conditions:
cle in an environmentally responsible man-
Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con- ner. The options for recycling vehicles and
sumption. parts are constantly being developed and
Rmake sure that the tyre pressures are improved. This means that your Mercedes-
always correct. Benz will also continue to meet even the
Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight. increased recycling quotas in the future in
Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump- good time. You can obtain further information
tion. from your national Mercedes-Benz homepage
Rremove roof racks once you no longer need
or your national hotline number.
them.
Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute
Vehicle equipment
to environmental protection. You should
therefore adhere to the service intervals. This Owner's Manual describes all models
Ralways have maintenance work carried out and all standard and optional equipment of
at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a your vehicle available at the time of publica-
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. tion of the Owner's Manual. Country-specific
Personal driving style: differences are possible. Please note that
Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when
your vehicle may not be equipped with all fea-
tures described. This also applies to safety-
starting the engine.
relevant systems and functions. The equip-
Rdo not warm up the engine with the vehicle
ment in your vehicle may therefore differ from
stationary. that shown in the descriptions and illustra-
tions. All the systems found in your vehicle
Introduction 27
are listed in the original purchase agreement G WARNING

of your vehicle. Should you have any ques- If work on electronic equipment and its soft-
tions concerning equipment and operation, ware is carried out incorrectly, this equipment
please consult a Mercedes-Benz Service could stop working. The electronic systems
Centre. are networked via interfaces. Tampering with
these electronic systems could cause mal-
functions in systems which have not been
Operating safety modified. Malfunctions such as these can
Safety notes seriously jeopardise the vehicle's operating
safety and therefore your own safety.
G WARNING You should therefore have all work and mod-
All work on the vehicle and, in particular, work ifications to electronic components carried
relevant to safety or on safety-related sys- out at a qualified specialist workshop.
tems must be carried out at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop. The specialist workshop
must have the necessary specialist knowl- General notes
edge and tools to carry out the work required.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a The following information applies to all radio
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this pur- system components in the vehicle and to
pose. COMAND:
The radio system components in this vehicle
G WARNING are compliant with the basic requirements
Some safety systems only function when the and all other relevant conditions of Directive
engine is running. You should therefore never 1999/5/EC. You can obtain further informa-
switch off the engine when driving. Otherwise, tion from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
the safety systems of your vehicle may not The equipment is approved by the vehicle
function correctly and as a result will no lon- manufacturer in accordance with European
ger protect you and other persons as inten- Automotive EMC Directive 95/54/EC. Oper-
ded. In addition, there is a risk that you may ation according to its intended purpose is
lose control of your vehicle and thus cause an thus approved for your vehicle. The equip-
accident. ment does not require certification.
The equipment conforms to the relevant
G WARNING equipment-specific EMC specifications in
Work carried out incorrectly, or alterations accordance with the following European
made to the vehicle, e.g. re-routing of cables standards:
under coverings, could cause the safety sys- REN 55013
tems of your vehicle to stop working properly. REN 55020
The safety systems would thus no longer pro-
tect you and other persons as intended. In Therefore, adherence to the relevant specifi-
addition, there is a risk that you may lose con- cations for electromagnetic compatibility is
trol of your vehicle and thus cause an acci- guaranteed for this device.
dent. As a result, interference caused by your
All work and alterations to the vehicle, e.g. equipment to other electrical/electronic
installations or modifications, should there- equipment and interference to your equip-
fore be carried out at a qualified specialist ment caused by other electrical/electronic
workshop. equipment can be largely prevented.
Z
28 Introduction
On-Board diagnostic interface Always have the following work carried out at
a qualified specialist workshop:
G WARNING Rwork relevant to safety
If you connect equipment to the on-board
Rservice and maintenance work
diagnostic interface, it can affect the opera-
Rrepair work
tion of the vehicle systems. This can impair
the operating safety of your vehicle while driv- Ralterations, installation work and modifica-
ing. There is a risk of accident. tions
Do not connect any equipment to the on- Rwork on electronic components
board diagnostic interface. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
G WARNING
Loose equipment or equipment cables which
are connected to the on-board diagnostic Vehicle registration
interface may infringe on the space around Mercedes-Benz may ask its Service Centres
the pedals. The equipment or the cables could to carry out technical inspections on certain
get between the pedals in the event of sudden vehicles to improve their quality or safety.
braking or acceleration. You may then no lon-
If you did not purchase your vehicle from an
ger be able to brake, operate the clutch or
authorised specialist dealer and your vehicle
accelerate as intended. There is a risk of acci-
has never been inspected at a Mercedes-
dent.
Benz Service Centre, it is possible that your
Do not attach any equipment or cables in the vehicle is not registered in your name with
driver footwell. Mercedes-Benz. Mercedes-Benz can only
inform you about vehicle checks if it has your
Connecting equipment to the on-board diag-
registration data.
nostic interface can lead to emissions moni-
toring information being reset. This may lead It is advisable to register your vehicle with a
to the vehicle failing to meet the require- Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
ments at the next emissions control test or Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possible
main inspection. about any change in address or vehicle own-
If the engine is switched off and equipment ership.
on the on-board diagnostic interface is used,
the starter battery may discharge.
Correct use
The on-board diagnostic interface is intended
for the connection of diagnostic equipment at G WARNING
a qualified specialist workshop. Various warning stickers are affixed to your
vehicle. Their purpose is to draw your atten-
tion, and the attention of others, to various
Qualified specialist workshop dangers. Therefore, do not remove any warn-
A qualified specialist workshop has the nec- ing stickers unless the sticker clearly states
essary specialist knowledge, tools and quali- that you may do so.
fications to correctly carry out the work If you remove the warning stickers, you or
required on your vehicle. This is especially the others could be injured by failing to recognise
case for work relevant to safety. certain dangers.
Observe the information in the Service Book-
let.
Introduction 29
Observe the following information when using After a fault has been rectified, the informa-
your vehicle: tion is deleted from the memory. Other mem-
Rthe safety notes in this manual ory data is constantly overwritten.
Rthe "Technical data" section in this manual
Rnational road traffic regulations
Other devices that store data
Rnational road traffic licensing regulations
Depending on the equipment level, your vehi-
cle may feature communications and/or
entertainment systems (e.g. navigation devi-
Implied warranty
ces, telephone systems). These allow you to
! Follow the instructions in this manual save and edit data required for the operation
about the proper operation of your vehicle of the respective device.
as well as about possible vehicle damage. Further information on operation (e.g. on
Damage to your vehicle that arises from deleting data) can be found in the separate
culpable contraventions against these operating instructions.
instructions are not covered either by
Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or by the
New or Used-Vehicle Warranty of
Daimler AG.
Data stored in the vehicle

Fault data
Components critical for vehicle operation are
equipped with fault data memories as stand-
ard. There are also data storage devices
which record the technical reactions of vehi-
cle components to certain driving situations
(e.g. airbag deployment or ESP® interven-
tion).
This data is used exclusively to:
Rassist in the rectification of faults and
defects
Rhelp Mercedes-Benz optimise and develop
vehicle functions
The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's
movements.
When your vehicle is serviced by Mercedes-
Benz, this technical information can be read
out from the fault memory. This is performed
by authorised employees of the Mercedes-
Benz service network using special diagnos-
tic computers.
Z
30
31
Cockpit ................................................. 32
Instrument cluster (4-button steer-
ing wheel) ............................................ 34
At a glance
Instrument cluster (12-button
steering wheel) ................................... 37
Multifunction steering wheel ............. 40
Centre console .................................... 42
Overhead control panel ...................... 43
Door control panel .............................. 44
32 Cockpit
Cockpit
At a glance
Function Page Function Page

: Automatic transmission: I On-board diagnostic inter-
steering wheel gearshift face 28
paddles 164
J Opens the bonnet 322
; Cruise control lever 178
K Releases the parking brake 175
= Instrument cluster (4-but-
L Light switch 118
ton steering wheel) 34
Instrument cluster (12-but-
? Horn
A PARKTRONIC warning dis-
play 196
B Overhead control panel 43
C Climate control systems 134
D Ignition lock 153
Start/Stop button 153
E Adjusts the steering wheel
manually 110
F Adjusts the steering wheel
electrically 110
G Combination switch 120
H Parking brake 175
Cockpit 33
At a glance
: Overhead control panel 43 E Opens the bonnet 322
; PARKTRONIC warning dis- F On-board diagnostic inter-
play 196 face 28
= Cruise control lever 178 G Ignition lock 153
? Instrument cluster (4-but- Start/Stop button 153
ton steering wheel) 34 H Adjusts the steering wheel
Instrument cluster (12-but- manually 110
I Adjusts the steering wheel
A Horn electrically 110
B Automatic transmission: J Combination switch 120
steering wheel gearshift
K Parking brake 175
paddles 164
C L Climate control systems 134
Light switch 118
D Releases the parking brake 175
34 Instrument cluster (4-button steering wheel)
Instrument cluster (4-button steering wheel)

Displays and controls
At a glance
i Instrument cluster: kilometres Function Page

Function Page C Time
: Fuel gauge Automatic transmission:
Outside temperature (vehi-
; Coolant temperature 222 cles for the United King-
= Speedometer dom: speed in km/h) 222
HOLD function 193
? Rev counter 222
Stored limit speed 180
A ECO start/stop function 156
D Brightness control knob for
Rear window wiper 130 the instrument cluster light-
Automatic transmission: ing: turn clockwise or anti-
Transmission position and clockwise
drive program 162
Manual transmission:
Gearshift recommendation 161
Outside temperature 222
HOLD function 193
B Multifunction display 223
Instrument cluster (4-button steering wheel) 35
At a glance
i Instrument cluster: miles Function Page
Function Page B Multifunction display 223
: Fuel gauge C Time
; Coolant temperature 222 Automatic transmission:
Outside temperature (vehi-
= Speedometer cles for the United King-
? Rev counter 222 dom: speed in km/h) 222
HOLD function 193
A ECO start/stop function 156
Rear window wiper 130
Automatic transmission: D Brightness control knob for
Transmission position and the instrument cluster light-
drive program 162 ing: turn clockwise or anti-
clockwise
Manual transmission:
Gearshift recommendation 161
Outside temperature 222
HOLD function 193
36 Instrument cluster (4-button steering wheel)
Warning and indicator lamps

At a glance

: Reserve fuel 298 D Engine diagnostics 298
; Coolant 298 E ESP® 295
= ABS 293 F Rear foglamp 119
? Brakes 293 G Main-beam headlamps 120
A Seat belt 291 H Dipped-beam headlamps 119
B Turn signal 120 I Front foglamps 119
C SRS 297 J Diesel engine: preglow 155
Instrument cluster (12-button steering wheel)

Displays and controls
At a glance
i Instrument cluster: kilometres
Function Page
: Fuel gauge
; Coolant temperature 226
= Speedometer with seg-
ments 227
? Multifunction display 228
A Rev counter 226
B Brightness control knob for
the instrument cluster light-
ing: turn clockwise or anti-
clockwise
38
At a glance Instrument cluster (12-button steering wheel)
i Instrument cluster: miles Function Page

Function Page A Rev counter 226
: Fuel gauge B Brightness control knob for
; Coolant temperature 226 the instrument cluster light-
ing: turn clockwise or anti-
= Speedometer with seg- clockwise
ments 227
? Multifunction display 228
Warning and indicator lamps
At a glance
: ÷ ESP® 295 G % Diesel engine: pre-
M SPORT handling glow 155
mode in AMG vehicles 296 ÷ ESP® in AMG vehicles 296
; · Distance warning 300 H ? Coolant 298
= å ESP® OFF 295 I R Rear foglamp 119
? J Brakes 293 J K Main-beam head-
lamps 120
A #! Turn signals 120
K L Dipped-beam head-
B ! ABS 293 lamps 119
C 6 SRS 297 L N Front foglamps 119
D ; Engine diagnostics 298 M 8 Reserve fuel 298
E h Tyre pressure monitor 300
F 7 Seat belt 291
40 Multifunction steering wheel
Multifunction steering wheel

4-button multifunction steering wheel
At a glance

: Multifunction display 223 B V
; Audio system; see the sep- Press briefly:
arate operating instruc- Selects a menu
tions Press and hold:
= W Selects the standard dis-
play
Increases the volume
? X
Decreases the volume
A C
Scrolls through lists
Changes values
Confirms display messages
Multifunction steering wheel 41
At a glance
: Multifunction display 228 A =;
; Audio system/COMAND Selects a menu 230
Online; see the separate 9:
operating instructions Selects the submenu or
scrolls through lists 230
= ?
a
Switches on LINGUA-
Confirms selections and
TRONIC; see the separate
hides display messages
operating instructions
B %
? ~
Back or deactivates LIN-
Rejects or ends a call 235
GUATRONIC
Exits telephone book/
redial memory
6
Makes or accepts a call
Switches to the redial mem-
ory
WX
Adjusts the volume
8
Mute
42 Centre console
Centre console
At a glance

: Audio system/COMAND E & Auxiliary heating 143
Online; see separate oper- M Dynamic driving
ating instructions package with sports mode 192
; c Seat heating 109 F Stowage compartment 302
= s Seat ventilation 110 Ashtray 316
Cigarette lighter 317
? c PARKTRONIC 196
Power socket 317
A ¤ ECO start/stop but- G Gear lever 160
ton 156
Selector lever 162
B £ Hazard warning
H Stowage compartment 302
lamps 121
Cup holder 314
C 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF indicator lamp 59 I Stowage compartment 302
D u Saloon: rear window J Audio/COMAND controller

roller sunblind 316 K Selects the drive program 163
M Dynamic driving
package with sports mode 192
Overhead control panel 43
Overhead control panel
At a glance
: u Switches the rear 3 Opens/closes the
interior lighting on/off 125 panorama sliding sunroof
with roller sunblinds 101
; | Switches the auto-
B Rear-view mirror 112
matic interior lighting con-
trol on/off 124 C ê Deactivates the inte-
= p Switches the right- rior motion sensor 81
hand reading lamp on/off 124 D p Switches the left-
? ë Deactivates tow- hand reading lamp on/off 124
away protection 81 E c Switches the front
A 3 Opens/closes the interior lighting on/off 125
sliding sunroof 100
44 Door control panel
Door control panel

At a glance
Function Page
: Opens the door 90
; %& Unlocks/locks
the vehicle 90
= Adjusts the seat electrically 106
? r45=
Stores settings for the seat,
exterior mirrors and steer-
ing wheel 115
A 7Zö\
Adjusts and folds the exte-
rior mirrors in/out electri-
cally 112
B W Opens/closes the
side windows 97
C n Activates/deacti-
vates the override feature
for the side windows in the
rear compartment 72
D o Saloon: opens the
boot lid 94
q Estate with the EASY-
PACK tailgate: opens/
closes the tailgate 94
45
Useful information .............................. 46

Occupant safety .................................. 46
Children in the vehicle ........................ 57
Driving safety systems ....................... 72
Anti-theft systems .............................. 80
Safety
46 Occupant safety
Useful information must wear their seat belt correctly at all

times, even if the vehicle is equipped with
i This Owner's Manual describes all models airbags. The airbags are not deployed in all
and all standard and optional equipment types of accidents. For example, if the pro-
available to your vehicle at the time of pub- tective capacity of correctly fastened seat
belts is not increased by deploying the air-
Safety
lication of the Owner's Manual. Country-

specific deviations are possible. Please bags, the airbags will not deploy. Airbag
note that your vehicle may not be equipped deployment only provides increased pro-
with all features described. This also tection if the seat belt is worn correctly
applies to safety-relevant systems and because:
functions. Rthe seat belt helps to keep the vehicle
occupant in the best position in relation
i Please read the information on qualified
to the airbag.
specialist workshops (Y page 28).
Rin a head-on collision, for example, the
seat belt prevents the vehicle occupant
Occupant safety from being propelled towards the point
of impact. It can thus reduce the risk of
Important safety notes injury.
Seat belts, together with the Supplemental In accidents in which an airbag is deployed,
Restraint System – SRS (Y page 47), are it provides increased protection only if the
complementary, co-ordinated restraint sys- seat belt is worn correctly.
tems. They reduce the risk of injury in spe- G WARNING
cific, pre-defined types of accident situations
If service work is not carried out correctly, the
and thereby increase occupant safety. How-
operating safety of your vehicle may be affec-
ever, seat belts and airbags generally do not
ted. This could cause you to lose control of
protect against objects penetrating the vehi-
your vehicle and cause an accident. More-
cle from the outside.
over, the safety systems may no longer be
To ensure that the restraint systems can able to protect you or others as they are
deliver their full potential protection, make designed to do.
sure that:
Always have service work carried out at a
Rthe seat and head restraint are adjusted qualified specialist workshop. The workshop
properly (Y page 104). must have the necessary specialist knowl-
Rthe seat belt has been fastened properly edge and tools to carry out the work required.
(Y page 55). Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a
Rthe airbags can inflate unrestricted if Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this pur-
deployed (Y page 48). pose. In particular, work relevant to safety or
Rthe steering wheel is adjusted properly
on safety-related systems must be carried out
at a qualified specialist workshop.
(Y page 104).
Rthe restraint systems have not been modi-
fied.
i An airbag increases the protection of
vehicle occupants wearing a seat belt. As
such, they are only an additional restraint
system which complements, but does not
replace, the seat belt. All vehicle occupants
Occupant safety 47
G WARNING G WARNING
Modifications to or work performed incor- If SRS is malfunctioning, individual systems
rectly on the following parts can result in the may be activated unintentionally or may not
restraint systems not functioning as intended: be triggered in the event of an accident with
Rthe restraint system, consisting of seat a high rate of vehicle deceleration.
Safety
belts and their anchorage points, belt ten- A malfunction has occurred if:
sioners, belt force limiters and airbags Rthe 6 SRS warning lamp does not light
Rthe wiring up when the ignition is switched on.
Rnetworked electronic systems Rthe engine is running and the 6 SRS
Airbags and belt tensioners could fail to warning lamp does not go out after a few
deploy or be triggered in an accident despite seconds.
the deceleration force being sufficient to trig- Rthe engine is running and the 6 SRS
ger the systems, or could be triggered unin- warning lamp lights up again.
tentionally. For this reason, never make any In this case, have SRS checked immediately
modifications to the restraint systems. at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-
Therefore, you must not tamper with elec- Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-
tronic components or their software. Benz Service Centre for this purpose.
In particular, work relevant to safety or on
safety-related systems must be carried out at
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) a qualified specialist workshop.
Introduction
Triggering of belt tensioners, belt force
SRS consists of: limiters and airbags
Rthe 6 SRS warning lamp During the first stage of a collision, the airbag
Rairbags control unit evaluates important physical
Rairbag control unit (with crash sensors) data relating to vehicle deceleration or accel-
Rbelt tensioners eration, such as:
Rbelt force limiters Rduration
SRS reduces the risk of occupants coming Rdirection

into contact with the vehicle's interior in the Rmagnitude
event of an accident. It can also reduce the Based on the evaluation of this data, the air-
effect of the forces to which occupants are bag control unit pre-emptively triggers the
subjected during an accident. belt tensioners in the first stage.
SRS warning lamp i The front belt tensioners can only be trig-
gered if the seat belt tongues on the front
SRS functions are checked regularly when seats are correctly engaged in the seat belt
you switch on the ignition and when the buckles.
engine is running. Therefore, malfunctions
can be detected in good time. If there is an even higher rate of vehicle decel-
eration or acceleration in a longitudinal direc-
The 6 SRS warning lamp in the instrument tion, the front airbags are also deployed.
cluster lights up when the ignition is switched
Your vehicle has adaptive, two-stage front air-
on. It goes out no later than a few seconds
bags. The airbag control unit evaluates vehi-
after the engine is started.
cle deceleration or acceleration in the event
Z
48 Occupant safety
of a collision. In the first deployment stage, ted and the rate of deceleration is not high.
the front airbag is filled with enough propel- Conversely, airbags may be deployed even
lant gas to reduce the risk of injuries. The though the vehicle suffers only minor defor-
front airbag is fully deployed if a second mation. This is the case if, for example, very
deployment threshold is exceeded within a rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal body
few milliseconds. members are hit, and sufficient deceleration
Safety
The belt tensioner and airbag triggering occurs as a result.

thresholds are variable and are adapted to the
rate of deceleration or acceleration of the
vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in nature. Airbags
The triggering process must take place in
Important safety notes
good time at the start of the collision.
Airbag deployment slows down and restricts
i Airbags are not deployed in all types of
the movement of the vehicle occupant.
accidents. Also, not all airbags are
deployed together in an accident. The dif- If the airbags are deployed, you will hear a
ferent airbag systems work independently bang and a small amount of powder may also
of each other. be released. Only in rare cases will the bang
affect your hearing. The powder that is
How the airbag system works is deter-
released generally does not constitute a
mined by the severity of the collision detec-
health hazard. The 6 SRS warning lamp
ted, especially the vehicle deceleration or
lights up.
acceleration, and the apparent type of acci-
dent: The airbag installation locations are identified
by the AIRBAG symbol.
Rhead-on collision
Rside impact G WARNING
Rrear impact Airbags provide additional protection; they
are not, however, a substitute for seat belts.
The rate of vehicle deceleration or accelera-
Observe the following notes to reduce the risk
tion and the direction of the force are essen-
of serious or even fatal injury caused by airbag
tially determined by:
deployment:
Rthe distribution of forces during the colli- Rall vehicle occupants – in particular, preg-
sion
nant women – must wear their seat belt
Rthe collision angle
correctly at all times and lean back against
Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehi- the backrest, which should be positioned
cle as close to the vertical as possible. The
Rthe characteristics of the object with which head restraint must support the back of the
the vehicle has collided head at about eye level.
Factors which can only be seen and measured Ralways secure children less than 1.50 m tall
after a collision has occurred do not play a and under 12 years of age in suitable child
decisive role in the deployment of an airbag, restraint systems.
nor do they provide an indication of airbag Rall vehicle occupants must select a seat
deployment. position that is as far away from the airbag
The vehicle may be deformed significantly, as possible. The driver's seat position must
e.g. the bonnet or the wing, without an airbag allow the vehicle to be driven safely. The
being deployed. This is the case if only parts driver's chest should be as far away from
which are relatively easily deformed are affec-
Occupant safety 49
the centre of the driver's airbag cover as Rdo not lean on the doors from inside the
possible. vehicle.
Rmove the front-passenger seat as far back Rmake sure that there are no people, ani-
as possible. This is especially important if mals or objects between the vehicle occu-
you have secured a child in a child restraint pants and the area where the airbags are
Safety
system on the front-passenger seat. deployed.
Rvehicle occupants – in particular, children Rdo not place any objects between the seat
– must not lean their heads into the area of backrest and the door.
the window in which the sidebag/window- Rdo not hang any hard objects, for example,
bag is deployed. coat hangers, on the grab handles or coat
Rrearward-facing child restraint systems hooks.
must not be fitted to the front-passenger Rdo not attach accessories, e.g. cup holders,
seat unless the front-passenger airbag has to the doors.
been disabled. On the front-passenger It is not possible to rule out a risk of injury
seat, the front-passenger airbag is disabled being caused by an airbag, due to the high
if a child restraint system with a trans- speed at which the airbag must be deployed.
ponder for automatic child seat recognition
is fitted to the front-passenger seat in a
G WARNING
vehicle equipped with automatic child seat
Airbag functionality can only be assured if the
recognition. The 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG
following parts are not covered and no badges
OFF indicator lamp must be continuously
or stickers are attached to them:
lit.
Rpadded steering wheel boss
If the front-passenger seat of your vehicle
does not have automatic child seat recog- Rkneebag cover below the steering column
nition, or your rearward-facing child Rfront-passenger airbag cover
restraint system does not have automatic Router side of front seat bolsters
child seat recognition, children must be Rside trim next to the rear seat backrest
secured in a child restraint system on a
Rroof frame cover between the front A-pillar
suitable seat in the rear. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint system to the and the C-pillar in the rear compartment
front-passenger seat, you must move the
front-passenger seat as far back as possi- G WARNING
ble. A small amount of powder is released when
Rmake sure there are no heavy or sharp- an airbag is deployed. The powder could
edged objects in the pockets of clothing. cause short-term breathing difficulties in peo-
ple with asthma or other respiratory prob-
Rdo not lean forwards, e.g. over the cover of
lems.
the driver's/front-passenger airbag, partic-
ularly when the vehicle is in motion. In order to prevent breathing difficulties, you
should leave the vehicle as soon as it is safe
Rdo not put your feet on the dashboard.
to do so. You can also open the window to
Ronly hold the steering wheel on the outside.
allow fresh air to enter the interior. The pow-
This allows the airbag to be fully deployed. der does not constitute a health hazard and
You could be injured if the airbag is does not indicate that there is a fire in the
deployed and you are holding the inside of vehicle.
the steering wheel.
Z
50 Occupant safety
G WARNING out automatic child seat recognition has been

The airbag parts are hot after the airbag has fitted or that a child restraint system with
been deployed. Do not touch them as you automatic child seat recognition is incorrectly
could burn yourself. fitted.
Have the airbags replaced at a qualified spe- ! Do not place heavy objects on the front-
Safety
cialist workshop. Otherwise, occupants are passenger seat. The system may then
not protected by the airbags in the event of detect that the seat is occupied and if there
another accident. is an accident, the restraint systems on the
front-passenger side could be deployed.
Front airbags Have restraint systems that have been trig-
gered replaced.
The front airbags increase protection for the
driver's and front-passenger's head and Driver's kneebag
chest.
i The driver's kneebag is only available in
certain countries.
The driver's kneebag increases protection of
the driver against:
Rknee injuries
Rthighinjuries
Rlower leg injuries
Driver's airbag : deploys in front of the

steering wheel; front-passenger airbag ;
deploys in front of and above the glove com-
partment.
They are deployed:
Rat the start of an accident with a high rate
of vehicle acceleration or deceleration in a
longitudinal direction Driver's kneebag : is always deployed along
Rif the system determines that airbag with the driver's airbag and inflates under-
deployment can offer additional protection neath the steering column.
to that provided by the seat belt
Rif the seat belt is fastened Sidebags
Rindependently of other airbags in the vehi-
cle
G WARNING
If you wish to use seat covers, Mercedes-Benz
Front-passenger airbag ; is only activated if
recommends that, for safety reasons, you
the system determines that the front- only use seat covers that have been approved
passenger seat is occupied. The 4 for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp on
The seat covers must have a special tear seam
the centre console is not lit (Y page 59).
for sidebags. Otherwise, the sidebags cannot
This means that a child restraint system with-
deploy correctly and would fail to provide the
Occupant safety 51
intended protection in the event of an acci-

dent. Appropriate seat covers can be
obtained from a Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre.
When deployed, the sidebags offer additional
Safety
protection for the thorax of the vehicle occu-
pants on the side of the vehicle on which the
impact occurs. However, they do not protect
the:
Rhead
Saloon (example)
Rneck
Windowbags : are deployed:
Rarms
Ron the side on which an impact occurs
Rat the start of an accident with a high rate
of lateral vehicle deceleration or accelera-
tion, e.g. in a side impact
Rregardless of whether the front-passenger
seat is occupied
Rindependently of seat belt use
Rindependently of the front airbags
PRE-SAFE® (preventative occupant

Example: Saloon
protection)
Front sidebags : and rear sidebags ;
deploy next to the outer seat cushions. PRE-SAFE® takes pre-emptive measures to
protect occupants in certain hazardous sit-
The sidebags are deployed: uations.
Ron the side on which an impact occurs PRE-SAFE® intervenes:
Rat the start of an accident with a high rate Rin emergency braking situations, e.g. if BAS
of lateral vehicle deceleration or accelera-
is activated or for vehicles with DISTRONIC
tion, e.g. in a side impact
PLUS, BAS PLUS intervenes powerfully
Rindependently of seat belt use
Rif the radar sensor system detects an immi-
Rindependently of the front airbags
nent danger of collision in certain situa-
Rindependently of the belt tensioners tions (on vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS)
Rin critical driving situations, e.g. when phys-
Windowbags ical limits are exceed and the vehicle under-
The windowbags enhance the level of protec- steers or oversteers severely
tion for the head, but not chest or arms, of the
vehicle occupants on the side of the vehicle
on which the impact occurs.
The windowbags are integrated into the side
of the roof frame and deploy in the area from
the A-pillar to the C-pillar.
Z
52 Occupant safety
PRE-SAFE® takes the following measures NECK-PRO luxury head restraints on the driv-
depending on the hazardous situation detec- er's and front-passenger seats are moved for-
ted: wards and upwards. This provides better
Rthe head support.
front seat belts are pre-tensioned.
Rvehicles with the memory function: it G WARNING
Safety
adjusts the front-passenger seat if it is in Only use head restraint covers which have
an unfavourable position. been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz
Rif the vehicle skids, the sliding sunroof/ for your vehicle model.
panorama sliding sunroof and the side win- The use of non-approved head restraint cov-
dows are closed so that only a small gap ers may prevent NECK-PRO head restraints/
remains. NECK-PRO luxury head restraints from trig-
If the hazardous situation passes without gering properly. The NECK-PRO head
resulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackens restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints
the belt pretensioning. The air pressure in the can therefore not provide the intended pro-
side bolsters on the multicontour seat is tection.
reduced again. All settings made by PRE- Consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre
SAFE® can then be reversed. regarding availability.
If the seat belts are not released:
If the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO
X Move the backrest or seat back slightly, but luxury head restraints have been triggered in
only when the vehicle is stationary. an accident, reset the NECK-PRO head
The belt pretensioning is reduced and the restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints
locking mechanism is released. on the driver's and front-passenger seats
(Y page 52). Otherwise, the additional pro-
G WARNING tection will not be available in the event of
When adjusting the seat, make sure that another rear-end collision. NECK-PRO head
nobody can become trapped. restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints
that have been triggered are moved forwards
! Make sure that there are no objects in the and can no longer be adjusted.
footwell or behind the seats when moving
the seat back. There is a risk that the seats
and/or the objects could be damaged. Resetting a triggered NECK-PRO head
More information about seat-belt adjust- restraint/NECK-PRO luxury head
ment, a convenience function integrated into restraint
PRE-SAFE®, can be found in the "Seat-belt
adjustment" section (Y page 55). Important safety notes
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury
NECK-PRO head restraint/NECK-PRO head restraints checked at a qualified spe-
luxury head restraint (except AMG cialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz
vehicles) Service Centre, if your vehicle is involved in a
NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury rear-end collision.
head restraints increase protection of the
driver's and front-passenger's head and
neck. In the event of a rear collision of a cer-
tain severity, the NECK-PRO head restraints/
Occupant safety 53
NECK-PRO head restraints

i Resetting the NECK-PRO head restraints
requires a lot of strength. If you have diffi-
culty resetting the NECK-PRO head
restraints, have this work carried out at a
Safety
qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a
X Remove resetting tool : from the vehicle

document wallet.
X Slide resetting tool : into guide ;
between the NECK-PRO luxury head
restraint and the rear cover of the head
restraint.
X Push resetting tool : downwards until you
X Tilt the top of the NECK-PRO head restraint hear the head restraint deployment mech-
cushion forwards in the direction of anism engage.
arrow :. X Pull out resetting tool :.
X Push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion X Firmly press the NECK-PRO luxury head
down in the direction of arrow ; as far as restraint cushion back = until it engages.
it will go. X Repeat this procedure for the second
X Firmly push the NECK-PRO head restraint NECK-PRO luxury head restraint.
cushion back in the direction of arrow = X Put resetting tool : back into the vehicle
until the cushion engages. document wallet.
X Repeat this procedure for the second
NECK-PRO head restraint.
Seat belts
NECK-PRO luxury head restraints Important safety notes
i If you have difficulty resetting the NECK- Seat belts are the most effective means of
PRO luxury head restraints, have this work restraining the movement of vehicle occu-
carried out at a qualified specialist work- pants in the event of an accident. This
shop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service reduces the risk of vehicle occupants coming
Centre. into contact with parts of the vehicle interior.
G WARNING
A seat belt which is not worn correctly, or
which has not been engaged in the seat belt
buckle correctly, cannot perform its intended
protective function. Under certain circum-
stances, this could cause severe or even fatal
injuries in the event of an accident.
Z
54 Occupant safety
Make sure that all occupants – in particular, installation instructions when fitting a child
pregnant women – wear their seat belt cor- restraint system.
rectly at all times. RDo not secure any objects with a seat belt
RThe seat belt must fit snugly on your body if the seat belt is also being used by one of
and must not be twisted. Therefore, avoid the vehicle's occupants.
Safety
wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat.

The shoulder belt section must be routed G WARNING
across the centre of your shoulder – on no The seat belt does not offer the intended level
account across your neck or under your of protection unless the backrest is almost
arm – and pulled tight against your upper vertical. Under certain circumstances, this
body. The lap belt must always pass across could cause severe or even fatal injuries in the
your lap as low down as possible, i.e. over event of an accident.
your hip joints – not across your abdomen. Before starting a journey, make sure that the
If necessary, push down the belt strap seat is properly adjusted and that the back-
slightly and then retighten it in the roll-up rest is almost vertical.
direction.
RDo not route the belt strap across sharp G WARNING
edges or fragile objects, especially if these A dirty or damaged seat belt or a seat belt that
are located on or in your clothing, e.g. spec- has been subjected to a load in an accident
tacles, pens, keys, etc. The seat belt strap or which has been modified no longer offers
could be damaged and tear in an accident, the intended level of protection. Under certain
and you or other vehicle occupants could circumstances, this could cause severe or
be injured. even fatal injuries in the event of an accident.
ROnly one person should use each seat belt For this reason, check regularly that the seat
at any one time. Children must never travel belts are not damaged or dirty.
sitting on the lap of other occupants. It Always have damaged seat belts or seat belts
would not be possible to restrain the child that have been subjected to a load in an acci-
in the event of a sudden change in direc- dent replaced at a qualified specialist work-
tion, braking or an accident. This could shop. Consult a qualified specialist workshop
result in severe or even fatal injuries to the which has the necessary specialist knowledge
child and other occupants. and tools to carry out the work required.
RPersons less than 1.50 m tall cannot wear Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a
the seat belts correctly. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this pur-
secure persons less than 1.50 m tall in spe- pose.
cially designed, suitable restraint systems. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
RChildren less than 1.50 m tall or under 12 mends that you only use seat belts which have
years of age cannot wear the seat belts been approved by Mercedes-Benz for your
properly. Therefore, they should always be vehicle.
secured in a suitable child restraint system
on a suitable vehicle seat. You can find
more information under "Children in the
vehicle" in the "Safety" section of the Own-
er's Manual. Follow the manufacturer's
Occupant safety 55
Fastening seat belts The belt strap is tightened slightly when:

Ryou engage the belt tongue in the belt
buckle and you then turn the key to position
2 in the ignition lock.
Rthe key is in position 2 in the ignition lock
Safety
and you then engage the belt tongue in the
buckle.
The seat-belt adjustment will apply a certain
tightening force if any slack is detected
between the occupant and the seat belt. Do
not hold on to the seat belt tightly while it is
adjusting. On vehicles with a luxury multi-
function steering wheel (12 buttons), you can
switch the seat-belt adjustment on and off
using the on-board computer (Y page 244).
The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of
Example: Saloon
the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. More
information about PRE-SAFE® can be found
X Adjust the seat and move the backrest to in the "PRE-SAFE® (preventative occupant
an almost vertical position (Y page 104). protection)" section (Y page 51).
X Pull the seat belt smoothly through belt
sash guide :. Belt height adjustment
X Without twisting it, guide the shoulder sec-
tion of the seat belt across the middle of You can adjust the seat belt height on the
your shoulder and the lap section across driver's seat and the front-passenger seat.
your hips.
X Engage belt tongue ; in buckle =.
Seat-belt adjustment: if necessary, the
driver's and front-passenger seat belts
automatically adjust to the upper body
(Y page 55).
X If necessary, adjust the seat belt to the
appropriate height (Y page 55).
X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder
section of the seat belt to tighten the belt
across your body. Adjust the height so that the upper part of the
For more information about releasing the seat seat belt is routed across the centre of your
belt with release button ?, see "Releasing shoulder.
seat belts" (Y page 56). X To raise: slide the belt sash guide upwards.
The belt sash guide engages in various posi-
Seat belt adjustment tions.
X To lower: press and hold belt sash guide
The seat-belt adjustment function adjusts the
driver's and front-passenger seat belt to the release :.
upper body of the occupants.
Z
56 Occupant safety
X Slide the belt sash guide downwards. Rear seat belt status indicator
X Release belt sash guide release : and
The rear-compartment seat belt status indi-
make sure that the belt sash guide has cator tells you if the rear passengers have
engaged. their seat belts fastened.
The rear-compartment seat belt status indi-
Safety
Releasing seat belts cator indicates the rear seat on which the belt
X Press release button ? (Y page 55) and is fastened. The ü symbol in the display
guide belt tongue ; back towards belt indicates a fastened seat belt. If a seat belt is
not fastened or if a seat is not occupied, the
sash guide :.
ý symbol is displayed.
! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled The rear-compartment seat belt status indi-
up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue cator appears in the multifunction display for
will be trapped in the door or in the seat around 30 seconds if:
mechanism. This could damage the door, Ryou drive off and reach a speed of approx-
the door trim panel and the seat belt. Dam- imately 10 km/h.
aged seat belts can no longer fulfil their Rthe rear passengers fasten or unfasten
protective function and must be replaced.
their seat belts while the vehicle is in
Consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
motion.
Rsomeone gets in or out of the vehicle and
Belt warning for driver and front
passenger the vehicle drives off again.
You can also cancel the rear seat belt status
The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru- indicator immediately (Y page 248).
ment cluster is a reminder for all occupants
to fasten their seat belts. It may light up con- i The status indicator for the rear-compart-
tinuously or flash. In addition, there may be a ment seat belts is only available for certain
warning tone. countries.
The 7 seat belt warning lamp goes out and
the warning tone ceases when the driver and Belt tensioners, belt force limiters
the front passenger have fastened their seat The front seat belts and the outer seat belts
belt. in the rear are equipped with belt tensioners.
For certain countries only: regardless of The belt tensioners tighten the seat belts in
whether the driver or the front passenger an accident, pulling them close against the
have fastened their seat belts, the 7 seat body.
belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds Belt tensioners do not correct incorrect seat
after the engine is started. It then goes out if positions or incorrectly fastened seat belts.
the driver and the front passenger have fas- Belt tensioners do not pull vehicle occupants
tened their seat belts. back towards the backrest.
i For more information on the 7 seat If the seat belt is also fitted with a belt force
belt warning lamp, see "Warning and indi- limiter and this is triggered, the force exerted
cator lamps in the instrument cluster, seat by the seat belt on the vehicle occupant is
belt" (Y page 291). reduced.
The belt force limiters on the front seats are
synchronised with the front airbags. They
take on a part of the deceleration force,
Children in the vehicle 57
resulting in the force exerted on the occupant Otherwise, the belt tensioner could be trig-
being distributed over a greater area. gered in the event of an accident.
The belt tensioners can only be activated
when:
Rthe
Children in the vehicle
ignition is switched on.
Safety
Rthe restraint systems are operational; see Child restraint systems
"SRS warning lamp" (Y page 47).
Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on
each of the three-point seat belts in the G WARNING
front. To reduce the risk of serious or even fatal
The belt tensioners on the outside seats in the injury to the child in the event of a sudden
rear compartment are triggered independ- change in direction, braking or an accident:
ently of the lock status of the seat belts. Rchildren less than 1.50 m tall and under
The belt tensioners are triggered depending twelve years of age must always be secured
on the type and severity of an accident: in special child restraint systems on a suit-
Rif, in the event of a head-on or rear-end col- able vehicle seat. This is necessary
lision, the vehicle decelerates or acceler- because the seat belts are not designed for
ates rapidly in a longitudinal direction dur- children.
ing the initial stages of the impact Rdo not secure children less than 1.50 m tall
Rif, in the event of a side impact, on the side or under twelve years of age on the front-
opposite the impact the vehicle deceler- passenger seat. Exception: the vehicle is
ates or accelerates rapidly in a lateral direc- equipped with automatic child seat recog-
tion nition on the front-passenger seat and the
If the airbags are deployed, you will hear a child is secured in a child restraint system
bang, and a small amount of powder may also with transponders for automatic child seat
be released. Only in rare cases will the bang recognition.
affect your hearing. The powder that is Rif you secure a forward-facing child
released generally does not constitute a restraint system to the front-passenger
health hazard. The 6 SRS warning lamp seat, you must move the front-passenger
lights up. seat as far back as possible.
Rchildren must never travel sitting on the lap
G WARNING of another occupant. Due to the forces
If the seat belt tensioners have been trig- which occur in the event of a sudden
gered, they provide no additional protection change of direction, heavy braking or an
in the event of another accident. Therefore, accident, it would not be possible to
have belt tensioners which have been trig- restrain the child. The child could be thrown
gered replaced at a qualified specialist work- against parts of the vehicle interior and be
shop. seriously or even fatally injured.
Comply with safety regulations when dispos-
ing of belt tensioners. Any Mercedes-Benz G WARNING
Service Centre can provide details of these The child restraint system cannot perform its
regulations. protective function if it is not correctly fitted
to a suitable vehicle seat. The child cannot be
! If the front-passenger seat is not occu-
restrained in the event of an accident, heavy
pied, do not engage the seat belt tongue in braking or sudden changes of direction. The
the buckle on the front-passenger seat.
Z
58 Children in the vehicle
child could be seriously or even fatally injured. be seriously or even fatally injured by pro-
For this reason, when fitting a child restraint longed exposure to extreme heat or cold.
system, observe the manufacturer's installa- Do not expose the child restraint system to
tion instructions and the correct use of the direct sunlight. Parts of the child restraint sys-
child restraint system. tem could heat up and the child could burn
Safety
Child restraint systems should be fitted to the herself/himself on them.

rear seats. Children are generally better pro- If a child opens a door, the child or other per-
tected there. sons could be injured as a result. They could
The entire base of the child restraint system get out and injure themselves or be injured by
must always rest on the seat cushion. There- a passing vehicle.
fore, never place objects, e.g. a cushion,
under the child restraint system. G WARNING
Only use child restraint systems with the orig- Unsecured or incorrectly positioned loads
inal cover designed for them. Only replace increase the risk of injury for children and all
damaged covers with genuine Mercedes-Benz other occupants in the event of:
covers. Ran accident
We recommend the use of child restraint sys- Ra braking manoeuvre
tems which have been approved for
Ra sudden change of direction
Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the vehi-
If a child is travelling in your vehicle, secure cle interior unless they are secured. You will
the child using a child restraint system which find further information under "Loading guide-
is appropriate to the size, age and weight of lines" in the index.
the child and recommended for Mercedes-
Benz vehicles. You should preferably fit the Child seat on the front-passenger seat
restraint system to a suitable rear seat. You
can also secure the child in the integrated
child seat (Y page 63). Make sure that the
child is secured in a child restraint system
throughout the trip.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only
use the child restraint systems listed at
(Y page 70).
You can obtain further information about the
correct child restraint system from any
i It is advisable to use Mercedes-Benz care Warning notice on the front-passenger sun visor
products to clean child restraint systems.
You can obtain information about this at
any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
G WARNING
Do not leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle, even if they are secured in a child
restraint system. They could injure them-
selves on parts of the vehicle. They could also
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp

4 is not lit.
To make you aware of this danger, a corre-
sponding warning sticker has been affixed on
the dashboard and on both sides of the sun
Safety
visor on the front-passenger side.
Information about recommended child
restraint systems is available at any
Warning symbol for a rearward-facing child Automatic child seat recognition on the
restraint system front-passenger seat
G WARNING
If the front-passenger airbag is not disabled:
Ra child secured in a child restraint system
on the front-passenger seat could be seri-
ously and even fatally injured by the front-
passenger airbag deploying. This is espe-
cially a risk if the child is in the immediate
vicinity of the front-passenger airbag when
it deploys.
Rnever secure a child on the front-passenger
seat in a rearward-facing child restraint sys-
tem. Only secure a rearward-facing child
If your vehicle does not have automatic child
restraint system on a suitable rear seat. seat recognition1 on the front-passenger
Ralways move the front-passenger seat to
seat, this is indicated by a special sticker. The
sticker is affixed to the side of the dashboard
the rearmost position if you secure a child
on the front-passenger side. The sticker is
in a forward-facing child restraint system
visible when you open the front-passenger
on the front-passenger seat.
door.
The front-passenger airbag is not disabled:
Ron vehicles without automatic child seat
recognition on the front-passenger seat
Rin vehicles with automatic child seat rec-
ognition in the front-passenger seat, if no
special child restraint system with trans-
ponders for automatic child seat recogni-
tion in the front-passenger seat has been
fitted
Ron vehicles with automatic child seat rec-
ognition on the front-passenger seat, if the
The front-passenger seat sensor system for
child restraint systems detects whether a
1 Vehicles without automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat: if you turn the key to position
2 in the ignition lock, the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up briefly but has no function.
It does not indicate that there is automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat.
Z
special Mercedes-Benz child seat with a G WARNING

transponder for automatic child seat recog- Do not place electronic devices on the front-
nition has been fitted. In this case, 4 passenger seat, e.g.:
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp :
Rlaptops, when switched on
lights up. The front-passenger front airbag is
Rmobile phones
disabled.
Safety
Rcards with transponders, e.g. ski passes or

G WARNING access cards
If the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indica- Signals from electronic equipment can cause
tor lamp does not light up when the child interference in the automatic child seat rec-
restraint system is fitted, the front-passenger ognition sensor system. This can lead to a
airbag has not been disabled. If the front- system malfunction. This may cause the
passenger airbag deploys, the child could be 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
seriously or even fatally injured. lamp to light up without there being a child
Proceed as follows: seat with transponders for automatic child
Rdo not use a rearward-facing child restraint seat recognition fitted. The front-passenger
system on the front-passenger seat. airbag will not then deploy during an accident.
Rfit a rearward-facing child restraint system It is also possible that the 6 SRS warning
on a suitable rear seat. lamp lights up and/or the 4 PASSENGER
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up
or
briefly when you turn the key in the ignition
Ronly use a forward-facing child restraint lock to position 2.
system on the front-passenger seat and
move the front-passenger seat to the rear-
most position. ISOFIX child seat securing system for
Rhave the automatic child seat recognition
the rear seats
checked at a qualified specialist workshop. ISOFIX is a standardised securing system for
To ensure that the automatic child seat rec- specially designed child restraint systems on
ognition on the front-passenger seat func- the rear seats. Securing rings for two ISOFIX
tions/communicates correctly, never place child restraint systems are fitted on the left
objects, e.g. a cushion, under the child and right of the rear seats.
restraint system. The entire base of the child
G WARNING
restraint system must always rest on the seat
A child restraint system secured by the ISOFIX
cushion. An incorrectly fitted child restraint
child seat securing system does not provide
system cannot perform its intended protec-
sufficient protection for children weighing
tive function in the event of an accident, and
more than 22 kg. For this reason, do not
could lead to injuries.
secure children weighing more than 22 kg in
i If the front-passenger front airbag is dis- a child restraint system secured by the ISOFIX
abled by the automatic child seat recogni- child seat securing system. If the child weighs
tion, the following remain enabled on the more than 22 kg, secure the child restraint
front-passenger side: system using a three-point seat belt.
Rthe sidebag G WARNING
Rthe windowbag The child restraint system cannot perform its
Rthe belt tensioner protective function if it is not correctly fitted
to a suitable vehicle seat. The child cannot be
restrained in the event of an accident, heavy

braking or sudden changes of direction. The
child could be seriously or even fatally injured.
For this reason, when fitting a child restraint
system, observe the manufacturer's installa-
Safety
tion instructions and the correct use of the
child restraint system.
For reasons of safety, only use child restraint
systems with the ISOFIX child seat securing
system on the rear seats.
We recommend that you use the ISOFIX child Illustration showing a vehicle equipped with
restraint systems that have been recommen- through-loading facility in the rear bench seat
ded for Mercedes-Benz.
X Vehicles without a through-loading facility
An incorrectly fitted child restraint system
in the rear bench seat (Saloon): pull the
could come loose and seriously or even fatally
protective caps from securing rings :.
injure the child or other vehicle occupants.
X Install the ISOFIX child restraint system.
When fitting the child restraint system, always
make sure that it is engaged correctly in the Comply with the manufacturer's instruc-
securing rings on both sides. tions when installing the ISOFIX child
restraint system.
G WARNING
Please note that if child restraint systems, or Top Tether
their retaining systems, are damaged or sub- Top Tether provides an additional connection
jected to a load in an accident, they may not between the child restraint system secured
be able to provide their protective function. with ISOFIX and the rear seat. It helps reduce
This could result in serious or even fatal inju- the risk of injury even further.
ries to the secured child in the event of an
The Top Tether anchorage points are located
accident, heavy braking or a sudden change
in the rear compartment behind the head
in direction.
restraints.
For this reason, have child restraint systems
and their anchorages which have been dam-
aged or subjected to a load in an accident
checked immediately at a qualified specialist
workshop.
! When fitting the child restraint system,

make sure that the seat belt for the centre
seat does not get trapped. Otherwise, the
seat belt could be damaged.
Saloon
Z
62
Safety Children in the vehicle
Estate
X Move head restraint : upwards.

X Saloon: fold up cover ; of Top Tether
anchorage =.
X Route Top Tether belt A under head
restraint : between the two head restraint
bars.
X Hook Top Tether hook ? into Top Tether
anchorage =.
X Make sure that Top Tether belt A is not
twisted.
X Saloon: fold down cover ; of Top Tether
anchorage =.
X Move head restraint : back down again
slightly if necessary (Y page 107). Make
sure that you do not interfere with the cor-
rect routing of Top Tether belt A.
X Fit the ISOFIX child restraint system with
Top Tether. Comply with the manufactur-
er's installation instructions when doing so.
Make sure that Top Tether belt A is tight.
Problems with child seat recognition
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The 4 PASSENGER A special Mercedes-Benz child seat with a transponder for auto-
AIRBAG OFF indicator matic child seat recognition has been fitted to the front-passenger
Safety
lamp on the centre con- seat. The front-passenger airbag has therefore been disabled as
sole is lit. desired.
G Risk of injury
There is no child seat fitted to the front-passenger seat. Automatic
child seat recognition is malfunctioning.
It is also possible that the 6 SRS warning lamp lights up and/
or the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp does not light
up briefly when you switch the ignition on.
X Remove electronic equipment from the front-passenger seat,
e.g.
Rlaptop
Rmobile phone
Rcards with transponders, such as ski passes or access cards
If the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is still lit:

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Integrated child seat trapped or damaged. This could happen

when you
- close the doors
G WARNING - adjust the seat
To reduce the risk of serious or even fatal - store the ICS padded play table and the
injury to the child in the event of a sudden side head restraints
change in direction, braking or an accident:
- transport heavy objects
Ryou must follow the manufacturer's instal- Rreplace the integrated child seat, the pad-
lation instructions for the child seat when ded play table and the side head restraints
fitting the integrated child seat (ICS) pad- if these were damaged or subjected to
ded play table and side head restraint and heavy loads during an accident.
when fastening the seat belt.
Rnote: children who weigh less than
Rdo not modify the integrated child seat, the
12.5 kg require a different child restraint
ICS padded play table or the side head system. Information about other child
restraint. Do not use protective covers. restraint systems is available from any
Rmake sure that the ICS padded play table Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
and the side head restraints do not become Rthe vehicle's rear seat backrest must be
locked in position.
The child seats are integrated into the right

and left-hand rear seat cushions. In conjunc-
Z
tion with the components listed in the follow- Folding out the child seat
ing table, they comply with the legal require- X Pull release handle ? forwards.
ments of ECE R 44.04. X Lift integrated child seat = and press it
Weight Integra- ICS pad- Side back until it engages.
catego- ted ded play head
Safety
ries child table restrain Fastening a child's seat belt

seat ts G WARNING
Group I: Folded Manda- Manda- To reduce the risk of serious or even fatal
12.5 to out tory tory injury to the child in the event of a sudden
18 kg change in direction, braking or an accident:
Rthe shoulder section of the seat belt must
Group II: Folded Not per- Manda-
be routed across the centre of the child's
15 to out missible tory
shoulder – never across the child's neck –
25 kg
and must fit snugly against the child's
Group III: Folded Not per- Manda- chest. The lap section of the seat belt must
22 to out missible tory be routed across the child's pelvis – not
36 kg across the abdomen – and pulled snug
against the child's body. Retighten the belt
Mercedes-Benz recommends using the inte- strap if necessary.
grated child seat for children who weigh Rnever secure more than one child at a time
between 12.5 and 36 kg. in the child restraint system.

For children weighing between approximately Rthe belt strap must not be trapped or twis-
12.5 kg and 18 kg: an ICS padded play table ted, nor rub against any sharp edges.
and a side head restraint which have been Rif you have not fitted the side head restraint,
specially approved for the integrated child the head restraint must always be adjusted
seat must also be used. correctly when driving with a child in the
integrated child seat. If the head restraint
is correctly adjusted, the back of the head
is supported by the centre of the head
restraint at about eye level.
Observe the installation instructions for the
ICS padded play table and the additional
warnings and information about risk of injury.
X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the inertia

reel.
X Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt
Example: Saloon buckle.
: Side head restraints X If you are using integrated child seat =
; Seat belt guide without the ICS padded play table, make
= Integrated child seat sure that the seat belt:
? Release handle
Ris routed as low as possible across the pel- could result in serious or even fatal injury to
vic area, in front of the hips the child. For this reason, observe the follow-
Ris tightened across the lap by pulling ing description when fitting the ICS padded
upwards on the shoulder section of the seat play table:
belt The ICS padded play table is only suitable for
Safety
Ris tight and is routed across the centre of use together with the folded out integrated
the child's shoulder child seat.
Ris not twisted and does not pass across the On the rear seats, only use the ICS padded
child's neck or under the child's arm play table which is recommended for
X Adjust the head restraint if necessary Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
(Y page 107). An incorrectly fitted ICS padded play table
could come loose and seriously or even fatally
Folding in the child seat injure the child or other vehicle occupants.
After fitting the ICS padded play table, make
sure that it is secured correctly.
G WARNING
Do not modify the ICS padded play table, inte-
grated child seat or seat belts. The ICS pad-
ded play table must not be used without a
cover. The cover must not be removed from
the ICS padded play table or replaced with a
cover from another manufacturer. Otherwise,
the official approval is invalidated and the
X Pull release handle : forwards. padded play table's protective function could
X Push the centre of the integrated child seat be restricted.
forwards and down ; until it engages.
! Make sure that the ICS padded play table
is not trapped or damaged, for example
Padded table for the integrated child when you:
seat
Rclose the doors
Important safety notes Radjust the seat
Use the ICS padded play table in accordance Rstore the ICS padded play table or trans-
with the instructions in table (Y page 63). port heavy objects
You must not use the integrated child seat
with ICS padded play table directly attached
to a baby car seat on which a body weight of
up to 10 kg is permissible.
G WARNING
If the ICS padded play table is not installed
and used correctly on the integrated child
seat, it cannot provide the intended protec-
tion. It would then not be possible to restrain
the child in the event of an accident, sudden
braking or abrupt change in direction and this
Z
X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the inertia

reel.
X Attach the lower and upper sections of the
belt in left seat belt guide point =.
X Guide both sections of the belt to right seat
Safety
belt guide point = and attach.

X Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt
buckle.
X Slide ICS padded play table ; close to the
child's body.
X Pull both parts of the belt tight. Make sure
that the seat belt is not twisted.
X Adjust the head restraint if necessary
(Y page 107).
Example: Saloon
: Side head restraints Side head restraints for the integrated
child seat
; ICS padded play table
= Seat belt guide points Use the side head restraints in accordance
with the instructions in table (Y page 63).
? Left leg
A Integrated child seat i Should a side head restraint be required
B Right leg for the second integrated child seat, this
can be ordered at any Mercedes-Benz
Fitting the ICS padded play table Service Centre.
X Fold out integrated child seat
A(Y page 63).
X Place the child on integrated child seat A.
X Fold both legs ? and B down.
X Place ICS padded play table ; over inte-
grated child seat A.
G WARNING
Make sure that:
Rthe belt is routed as described below.
Example: Saloon
Rthe seat belt is not twisted.
Rthe ICS padded play table is right up against G WARNING
the child's body. If you do not secure the side head restraint at
Rthe belt strap is not trapped or twisted and the anchor points intended, it cannot provide
does not rub against any sharp edges. the intended level of protection. It would then
not be possible to protect the child in the
Otherwise, it may not be possible to restrain
event of an accident, sudden braking or
the child in the event of an accident, sudden
abrupt change in direction and this could
braking or abrupt change in direction and this
result in serious or even fatal injury to the
could result in serious or even fatal injury to
child.
the child.
Only attach the side head restraint to the otherwise, they may come loose. In the event
intended anchor points on the rear head of an accident, sudden braking or abrupt
restraint. change in direction, they could injure vehicle
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- occupants or cause damage to the vehicle.
mends that you only use side head restraints When you are not using the ICS padded play
Safety
which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz table and the side head restraints, store these
for your vehicle. in a suitable place, such as the boot.
Fitting side head restraints For example, on vehicles with TIREFIT, you
X Slide head restraint ; upwards and posi- can store the side head restraints in the stow-
age compartment under the boot/luggage
tion it upright.
compartment floor (Y page 312)/
X Slide side head restraints B from the front
(Y page 312).
to the centre of both head restraint bars
until they engage.
The right- and left-hand lock verification
indicators = must be folded in. The red
surfaces should no longer be visible.
X Make sure that side head restraint B is
engaged in both head restraint bars.
X Slide head restraint ; downwards
(Y page 107) until it rests on the upper
edge of side head restraints B.
X Guide the seat belt through seat belt guide
A on the door side on side head restraint
B.
X Secure the child (Y page 64).
Removing the side head restraints

X Take the seat belt out of seat belt guide
A.
X Move head restraint ; upwards.
X Press left or right release button ? and pull
side head restraint B forward to remove
it.
The left and right lock verification indica-
tors : fold out briefly.
X Adjust head restraint ; (Y page 107).
Storing the padded table and the side

head restraints
G WARNING
Secure the ICS padded play table and the side
head restraints in the vehicle as specified;
Z
Suitable positioning of the child restraint systems

Key to the letters used in the table:
X Seat which is unsuitable for children in this weight category.
U Suitable for child restraint systems in the Universal category that are approved for use in
this weight category.
Safety
UF Suitable for forward-facing child restraint systems that belong to the "Universal" category
and are approved for use in this weight category.
L Suitable for child restraint systems as recommended, see the following table of "Recom-
mended child restraint systems" (Y page 70).
Seat positions
Weight catego- Front-passenger seat Rear seat
ries
Front- The front- Left, right Centre
passenger air- passenger air-
bag is not disa- bag is disa-
bled: bled2
Group 0: up to X U3, L3 U, L L
10 kg
Group 0+: up X U3, L3 U, L L
to 13 kg
Group I: 9 to U3, L3 U3, L3 U, L U, L
18 kg
Group II: 15 to U3, L3 U3, L3 U, L U, L
25 kg
Group III: 22 to U3, L3 U3, L3 U, L U, L
36 kg
"Universal" category child restraint systems can be recognised by their orange approval label.
2 Vehicles with automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat: a child restraint system of the
"Universal" category with a transponder for automatic child seat recognition must be fitted. The 4
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
3 Adjust the front-passenger seat to the rearmost position and the belt outlet height to the lowest position.
Safety
Approval label on the child restraint system (example)
Key to the letters used in the table:
X ISOFIX position that is not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in this weight cat-
egory and/or size category.
IUF Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX child seat securing systems that belong to the "uni-
versal" category which are approved for use in this weight category.
IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems as recommended; see the following table of
"Recommended child restraint systems" (Y page 70).
Suitability of the rear seats for attaching ISOFIX child restraint systems
Weight categories Size category Equipment Rear seat, left and

right
Carry-cot F ISO/L1 X
G ISO/L2 X
0: up to 10 kg E ISO/R1 IL
up to approximately 6
months
0+: up to 13 kg E ISO/R1 IL
up to approximately D ISO/R2 IL
15 months
C ISO/R3 IL
I: 9 to 18 kg D ISO/R2 IL
between approx- C ISO/R3 IL
imately 9 months and
4 years B ISO/F2 IUF
B1 ISO/F2X IUF
A ISO/F3 IUF
Z
Recommended child restraint systems

If you fit a child restraint system without a transponder for automatic child seat recognition
to the front-passenger seat, position the front-passenger seat in its rearmost position.
Weight catego- Manufac- Type Approval Order num- Automatic
ries turer number ber child seat
Safety
(E1 ...) (A 000 ...) recognition

Group 0: up to Britax BABY 03 301146 970 10 00 Yes
10 kg Römer SAFE 04 301146
up to approx- PLUS4
imately 6
months
Group 0+: up Britax BABY 03 301146 970 10 00 Yes
to 13 kg Römer SAFE 04 301146
up to approx- PLUS4
imately 15
months
Group I: 9 to Britax DUO 03 301133 970 11 00 Yes
18 kg Römer PLUS4 04 301133 970 16 00 No
between
approximately
9 months and
4 years
Category II/III: Britax KIDFIX 04 301198 970 18 00 Yes
15 to 36 kg Römer
970 19 00 No
between
approximately
4 and 12 years
Suggested ISOFIX child restraint systems from the Universal category.
Weight Size cate- Manufac- Type Approval Order Auto-

catego- gory turer number number matic
ries (E1 ...) child seat
recogni-
tion
Carry-cot F – – – – –
G – – – – –
Group 0: E – – – – –
up to
10 kg
4 Move the front-passenger seat to the rearmost and highest position.

Weight Size cate- Manufac- Type Approval Order Auto-

catego- gory turer number number matic
ries (E1 ...) child seat
recogni-
tion
Safety
Group 0+: E Britax BABY SAFE 04 301146 B6 6 86 No
up to Römer ISOFIX 8224
13 kg PLUS
D – – – – –
C – – – – –
Group I: D – – – – –
9 to 18 kg C – – – – –
B – – – – –
B1 Britax DUO PLUS 03 301133 A 000 970 Yes
Römer 04 301133 11 00
A – – – – –
Child-proof locks If a child opens a door, the child or other per-

sons could be injured as a result. They could
Important safety notes get out and injure themselves or be injured by
G WARNING a passing vehicle.
Activate the child-proof locks for the rear
doors and the override switch for the rear Child-proof locks for the rear doors
windows when children are travelling in the You secure each door individually with the
vehicle. Otherwise, the children could open child-proof locks on the rear doors. A door
doors or side windows while the vehicle is in secured with a child-proof lock cannot be
motion and injure themselves or others. opened from inside the vehicle. When the
vehicle is unlocked, the door can be opened
G WARNING from the outside.
vehicle, even if they are secured in a child
restraint system. They could injure them-
selves on parts of the vehicle. They could also
be seriously or even fatally injured by pro-
longed exposure to extreme heat or cold.
Do not expose the child restraint system to
direct sunlight. Parts of the child restraint sys-
tem could heat up and the child could burn
herself/himself on them.
Z
72 Driving safety systems
RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

RBAS (Brake Assist System)
RBAS PLUS (Brake Assist System Plus*)
RAdaptive brake lamps
RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Safety
REBD (electronic brake force distribution)

RADAPTIVE BRAKE
RPRE-SAFE® Brake
Saloon (example)
X To activate: press the child-proof lock
lever up in the direction of arrow :. If you fail to adapt your driving style, the driv-
X Make sure that the child-proof locks are
ing safety systems can neither reduce the risk
working properly. of accident nor override the laws of physics.
Driving safety systems are merely aids
X To deactivate: press the child-proof lock designed to assist driving. You are responsi-
lever down in the direction of arrow ;. ble for the distance to the vehicle in front, for
vehicle speed and for braking in good time.
Override feature for the rear side win- Always adapt your driving style to suit the
dows prevailing road and weather conditions, as
well as the traffic conditions and maintain a
safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive
carefully.
i Please note that the driving safety sys-
tems described only work as effectively as
possible when there is adequate contact
between the tyres and the road surface.
Pay particular attention to the information
regarding tyres, recommended minimum
tyre tread depths etc. in the "Wheels and
tyres" section (Y page 358).
X To activate/deactivate: press button ;. In wintry driving conditions, always use
If indicator lamp : is lit, operation of the winter tyres (M+S tyres) and if necessary,
rear side windows is disabled. Operation is snow chains. Only in this way will the driv-
only possible using the switches in the driving safety systems described in this section
er's door. If indicator lamp : is off, oper- work as effectively as possible.
ation is possible using the switches in the
rear compartment.
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Driving safety systems
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
Driving safety systems overview tion (Y page 72).
In this section, you will find information about ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way
the following driving safety systems: that the wheels do not lock when you brake.
Driving safety systems 73
This allows you to continue steering the vehi- BAS operates in emergency braking situa-
cle when braking. tions. If you depress the brake pedal quickly,
ABS works from a speed of about 8 km/h BAS automatically boosts the braking force,
upwards, regardless of road-surface condi- thus shortening the stopping distance.
tions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even X Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until
when you only brake gently.
Safety
the emergency braking situation is over.
ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
G WARNING
If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when The brakes will function as usual once you
braking. This limits the steerability of the vehi- release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.
cle when braking and the braking distance G WARNING
may increase.
If BAS has malfunctioned, the braking system
If ABS is deactivated due to a malfunction, remains available with full brake boosting
then BAS and ESP are also deactivated. There effect. However, braking force is not auto-
is an increased risk of your vehicle skidding in matically increased in emergency braking sit-
certain situations. uations and the stopping distance may
You should always adapt your driving style to increase.
suit the prevailing road and weather condi-
tions.
BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System Plus)
Braking BAS PLUS is only available on vehicles with
If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel DISTRONIC PLUS.
a pulsing in the brake pedal. i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the tion (Y page 72).
brake pedal with force until the braking sit-
BAS PLUS assists you in braking during haz-
uation is over.
ardous situations at speeds above 30 km/h
X To make a full brake application:
and uses the radar sensor system to evaluate
depress the brake pedal with full force. the traffic situation.
The pulsating brake pedal can be an indica- With the help of the radar sensor system, BAS
tion of hazardous road conditions and func- PLUS can detect obstacles that are in the
tions as a reminder to take extra care while path of your vehicle for an extended period of
driving. time.
G WARNING At speeds up to approximately 70 km/h, BAS
Do not depress the brake pedal several times PLUS may also detect stationary obstacles,
in quick succession (pumping). Pumping the for example, stopped or parked vehicles.
brake pedal reduces the braking effect. You Should you approach an obstacle and BAS
might otherwise not be able to stop the vehi- PLUS has detected a risk of collision, BAS
cle in time and could cause an accident. PLUS calculates the braking force necessary
Depress the brake pedal firmly and smoothly. to avoid a rear-end collision. Should you apply
the brakes forcefully, BAS PLUS can auto-
matically increase the braking force to a level
BAS (Brake Assist) suitable for the traffic conditions.
If BAS PLUS demands particularly high brak-
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- ing force, preventative passenger protection
tion (Y page 72).
Z
measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated simul- Ra narrow vehicle travelling in front, e.g. a
taneously. motorbike
X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the Ra vehicle travelling in front on a different
emergency braking situation is over. line

ABS prevents the wheels from locking. G WARNING
Safety
The brakes will work normally again if: BAS PLUS does not react:
Ryou release the brake pedal. Rto people or animals
Rthere is no longer any danger of a rear-end Rto oncoming vehicles
collision. Rto crossing traffic
Rno obstacle is detected in front of your
Rwhen cornering
vehicle.
As a result, BAS PLUS may not intervene in
BAS PLUS is then deactivated. critical situations. There is a risk of an acci-
Vehicles with COMAND and navigation sys- dent. Always pay careful attention to the traf-
tem: the radar sensor system is switched off fic situation and be ready to brake.
automatically in the vicinity of radio telescope
facilities (Y page 389). Following damage to the front end of the vehi-
Vehicles without COMAND and a navigation cle, have the configuration and operation of
system and vehicles for Australia: the radar the radar sensors checked at a qualified spe-
sensor system and on-board computer must cialist workshop. This also applies to colli-
be switched off in the vicinity of radio tele- sions at slow speeds where there is no visible
scope facilities (Y page 242). damage to the front of the vehicle.
For BAS PLUS to assist you when driving, the If BAS PLUS is not available due to a malfunc-
radar sensor system must be switched on and tion in the radar sensor system, the brake
operational; see "Radar sensor system" in the system remains available with full brake
index. boosting effect and BAS.
G WARNING
BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify Adaptive brake lamps
objects and complex traffic situations. BAS
PLUS cannot intervene in these cases.
i Adaptive brake lamps are only available in
certain countries.
There is a risk of an accident. Always pay
careful attention to the traffic situation and be If you brake sharply from a speed of more
ready to brake. than 50 km/h or if braking is assisted by BAS
or BAS PLUS, the brake lamps flash rapidly.
In particular, the detection of obstacles can In this way, traffic travelling behind you is
be impaired if there is: warned in an even more noticeable manner.
Rdirt on the sensors or anything else cover- If you brake sharply from a speed of more
ing the sensors than 70 km/h to a standstill, the hazard warn-
Rsnow or heavy rain ing lamps are activated automatically. If the
brakes are applied again, the brake lamps
Rinterference by other radar sources
light up continuously. The hazard warning
Rthe possibility of strong radar reflections,
lamps switch off automatically if you travel
for example in multi-storey car parks faster than 10 km/h. You can also switch off
the hazard warning lamps using the hazard
warning switch button (Y page 121).
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
Important safety notes Traction control is part of ESP®.

Traction control brakes the drive wheels indi-
i See the "Important safety notes" section vidually if they spin. This enables you to pull
(Y page 72). away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for
Safety
If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating example if the road surface is slippery on one
from the direction desired by the driver, one side. On vehicles with 4MATIC, more drive
or more wheels are braked to stabilise the torque is also transferred to the wheel or
vehicle. If necessary, the engine output is also wheels with traction.
modified to keep the vehicle on the desired Traction control remains active if you deacti-
course within physical limits. ESP® assists vate ESP®.
the driver when pulling away on wet or slip-
pery roads. ESP® can also stabilise the vehi-
G WARNING
cle during braking. Traction control cannot reduce the risk of an
accident if you drive too fast. Traction control
If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warning
cannot override the laws of physics.
lamp flashes in the instrument cluster.
G WARNING Deactivating/activating ESP® (except
If the ÷ warning lamp in the instrument AMG vehicles)
cluster flashes, proceed as follows:
You cannot activate and deactivate ESP® on
Rdo not deactivate ESP® under any circum- vehicles with a 4-button multifunction steer-
stances. ing wheel.
Ronly depress the accelerator pedal as far as
ESP® is activated automatically when the
necessary when pulling away.
engine is started.
Radapt your driving style to suit the prevail-
ing road and weather conditions. i Vehicles with ECO start/stop function:
the ECO start/stop function switches the
Otherwise, the vehicle could go into a skid.
engine off automatically when the vehicle
ESP® cannot reduce the risk of an accident if comes to a stop. The engine starts auto-
you drive too fast. ESP® cannot override the matically when the driver wants to pull
laws of physics. away again. ESP® remains in its previously
selected status. Example: if ESP® was
! Switch the ignition off when:
deactivated before the engine was
Rthe parking brake is being tested using a
switched off, ESP® remains deactivated
dynamometer when the engine is switched on again.
Rthe vehicle is being towed with the front/
It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the fol-
rear axle raised
lowing situations:
Application of the brakes by ESP® may oth-
Rwhen using snow chains
erwise destroy the brake system.
Rindeep snow
! Do not tow vehicles with 4MATIC with the Ron sand or gravel
front or rear axle raised.
i Only use wheels with the recommended G WARNING
tyre sizes. Only then will ESP® function Activate ESP® as soon as the situations
properly. described above no longer apply. ESP® will
otherwise not be able to stabilise the vehicle
Z
if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts It may be best to activate SPORT handling
to spin. mode in the following situations:
Rwhen using snow chains
If you deactivate ESP®: Rin deep snow
RESP® no longer improves driving stability. Ron sand or gravel
Safety
Rthe engine's torque is no longer limited, and

Otherwise, you should only use SPORT han-
the drive wheels can spin. The spinning of dling mode on designated race circuits.
the wheels results in a cutting action, which
provides better grip. G WARNING
Rtraction control is still activated. Deactivate SPORT handling mode and acti-
RESP® still provides support when you vate ESP® as soon as the situations described
above no longer apply. Otherwise, SPORT
brake.
handling mode will only be able to stabilise
If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels the vehicle to a limited degree if the vehicle
start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin.
the instrument cluster flashes. In such situa-
tions, ESP® will not stabilise the vehicle. When SPORT handling mode is activated:
X To deactivate:(Y page 237). RESP® only improves driving stability to a
The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the limited degree.
instrument cluster lights up. Rthe engine's torque is restricted to a limited
degree and the drive wheels can spin. The
G WARNING spinning of the wheels results in a cutting
ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lamp action, which provides better grip.
in the instrument cluster lights up continu- Rtraction control is still activated.
ously when the engine is running. RESP® still provides support when you brake
If the ÷ warning lamp and å warning firmly.
lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not availa-
If SPORT handling mode is activated and one
ble due to a malfunction.
or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP®
There is an increased risk of your vehicle skid-
warning lamp in the instrument cluster
ding in certain situations.
flashes. ESP® only stabilises the vehicle to a
You should always adapt your driving style to limited degree.
suit the prevailing road and weather condi-
tions.
X To activate:(Y page 237).

The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out.
Deactivating/activating ESP® (AMG

vehicles)
Activating/deactivating SPORT handling
mode
ESP® is activated automatically when the
engine is started.
X To activate: briefly press button :.

The M SPORT handling mode warning
lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
The SPORT handling mode message
appears in the multifunction display.
Safety
X To deactivate: briefly press button :.
The M SPORT handling mode warning
lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.
Activating/deactivating ESP®
ESP® is activated automatically when the X To deactivate: press button : until the
engine is started. å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up in
It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the fol- the instrument cluster.
lowing situations: The ÷OFF message appears in the mul-
Rwhen using snow chains tifunction display.
Rindeep snow G WARNING
Ron sand or gravel
ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lamp
G WARNING in the instrument cluster lights up continu-
ously when the engine is running.
Activate ESP® as soon as the situations
described above no longer apply. ESP® will If the ÷ warning lamp and å warning
otherwise not be able to stabilise the vehicle lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not availa-
if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts ble due to a malfunction.
to spin. There is an increased risk of your vehicle skid-
ding in certain situations.
If you deactivate ESP®: You should always adapt your driving style to
RESP® no longer improves driving stability. suit the prevailing road and weather condi-
Rthe engine's torque is no longer limited and tions.
the drive wheels are able to spin. The spin- X To activate: briefly press button :.
ning of the wheels results in a cutting
action, which provides better grip. The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the
Rtraction control is still activated.
instrument cluster goes out. The ÷ON
message appears in the multifunction dis-
RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available; it is also
play.
not activated if you brake firmly and ESP®
intervenes.
ESP® trailer stabilisation
RPRE-SAFE® Brake is no longer available;
nor is it activated if you brake firmly and ESP® trailer stabilisation is not available in
ESP® intervenes. AMG vehicles.
RESP® still provides support when you brake If your vehicle with trailer (vehicle/trailer
firmly. combination) begins to lurch, you can only
stabilise the vehicle/trailer combination by
If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels
depressing the brake firmly.
start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in
the instrument cluster does not flash. In such In this situation, ESP® assists you and can
situations, ESP® will not stabilise the vehicle. detect if the vehicle/trailer combination
Z
begins to lurch. ESP® slows the vehicle down ADAPTIVE BRAKE

by braking and limiting the engine output until
ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety
the vehicle/trailer combination has stabi-
and offers increased braking comfort. In addi-
lised.
tion to the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE
Trailer stabilisation is active above speeds of also has the HOLD function (Y page 193) and
Safety
about 65 km/h. hill start assist (Y page 156). For further

G WARNING information, see Driving tips (Y page 175).
If road and weather conditions are poor,
trailer stabilisation will not be able to prevent
the trailer from swerving and will thus be PRE-SAFE® Brake
unable to reduce the risk of an accident. Trail- PRE-SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicles
ers with a high centre of gravity can tip over with DISTRONIC PLUS.
before ESP® can detect this.
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
Trailer stabilisation does not work if ESP®
is tion (Y page 72).
deactivated or disabled because of a mal- PRE-SAFE® Brake can help you to minimise
function. the risk of a frontal collision with a vehicle
ahead or reduce the effects of such a colli-
sion. If PRE-SAFE® Brake has detected a risk
EBD (electronic brake force distribu- of collision, you will be warned visually and
tion) acoustically as well as by automatic braking.
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot prevent a collision
tion (Y page 72). without your intervention.
EBD monitors and controls the brake pres- This function will issue a warning at speeds of
sure on the rear wheels to improve driving around 30 km/h or more if:
stability while braking. Rfor a period of several seconds, the dis-
tance to the vehicle in front is too short for
G WARNING
the speed at which you are travelling. The
If EBD has malfunctioned, the braking system · distance warning lamp then lights up
remains available with full brake boosting in the instrument cluster.
effect. However, the rear wheels can still lock,
Ryou are rapidly approaching the vehicle in
e.g. under full braking. This could cause you
to lose control of your vehicle and cause an
front. An intermittent warning tone will
accident. You should therefore adapt your
then sound and the · distance warning
driving style to the different handling charac- lamp will light up in the instrument cluster.
teristics. X Brake immediately in order to increase the
distance from the vehicle in front.
X Observe the notes on warning and indicator or
lamps (Y page 293) as well as display mes- X Take evasive action provided it is safe to do
sages (Y page 251) (4-button multifunc-
so.
tion steering wheel) and (Y page 257) (12-
button multifunction steering wheel).
If the driver and passengers have fastened performed until immediately prior to an acci-
their seat belts, PRE-SAFE® Brake can also dent that can no longer be avoided.
can also perform the following at speeds of
G WARNING
above approximately 30 km/h:
Even if PRE-SAFE® Brake slows the vehicle
Rbrake the vehicle automatically from a before an imminent rear-end collision, the
Safety
speed of up to approximately 200 km/h system cannot avert a collision without the
Rtrigger preventative passenger protection intervention of the driver. There is a risk of an
measures (PRE-SAFE®) (Y page 51) accident. Brake according to the situation or
Due to the nature of the system, particularly take evasive action. Delayed intervention by
complicated driving conditions may cause the driver can lead to an accident.
unnecessary warnings or the unnecessary
intervention of PRE-SAFE® Brake. To end this, G WARNING
you can either depress the accelerator pedal PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearly iden-
further, activate kickdown or release the tify objects and complex traffic conditions.
brake pedal. In these cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake may:
The braking action of PRE-SAFE® Brake is Rgive an unnecessary warning and then
ended automatically if:
brake the vehicle
Ryou drive slower than approximately Rnot give a warning or intervene
15 km/h.
There is a risk of an accident. Always pay par-
Ryou manoeuvre to avoid the obstacle.
ticular attention to the traffic situation and be
Rthere is no longer any danger of a rear-end ready to brake, especially if PRE-SAFE® Brake
collision. warns you. Terminate the intervention in a
Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected in non-critical driving situation.
front of your vehicle.
With the help of the radar sensor system, In particular, the detection of obstacles can
be impaired if there is:
PRE-SAFE® Brake can detect obstacles that
are in front of your vehicle for an extended Rdirt on the sensors or anything else cover-
period of time. ing the sensors
At speeds up to approximately 70 km/h, Rsnow or heavy rain
PRE-SAFE® Brake may also detect stationary Rinterference by other radar sources
obstacles, for example stopped or parked Rthe possibility of strong radar reflections,
vehicles. for example in multi-storey car parks
If you approach an obstacle and PRE-SAFE® Ra narrow vehicle travelling in front, e.g. a
Brake detects a risk of a collision, the system motorbike
will initially alert you both visually and acous- Ra vehicle travelling in front on a different
tically. If you do not brake or take evasive line
action, the system will warn you by automat-
ically braking the vehicle gently. If there is an G WARNING
increased risk of collision, preventative PRE-SAFE® Brake does not react:
passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) Rto people or animals
are activated (Y page 51). If the risk of colli-
Rto oncoming vehicles
sion remains and you do not brake, take eva-
Rto crossing traffic
sive action or accelerate significantly, the
vehicle may perform automatic emergency Rwhen cornering
braking. Automatic emergency braking is not
Z
80 Anti-theft systems
As a result, PRE-SAFE® Brake may not give X To activate with the key: remove the key
warnings or intervene in critical situations. from the ignition lock.
There is a risk of an accident. Always pay X To activate with KEYLESS-GO: switch the
careful attention to the traffic situation and be ignition off and open the driver's door.
ready to brake. X To deactivate: switch on the ignition.
Safety
In order to maintain the appropriate distance i The immobiliser is always deactivated

to the vehicle in front and thus prevent a col- when you start the engine.
lision, you must apply the brakes yourself.
X To activate/deactivate: activate or deac-
tivate PRE-SAFE® Brake in the on-board ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
computer (Y page 237). A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the
The Ä symbol appears in the multifunc- alarm system is primed and you open:
tion display as long as the HOLD function Ra door
is not activated (Y page 193).
Rthe vehicle with the emergency key ele-
On vehicles with parking guidance, the ment
Ä symbol is displayed when P is
Rthe boot lid/tailgate
engaged or you are driving faster than
Rthe bonnet
35 km/h.
The alarm is not switched off, even if you
Vehicles with COMAND and navigation sys-
close the open door that has triggered it, for
tem: the radar sensor system is switched off
example.
automatically in the vicinity of radio telescope
facilities (Y page 389).
Vehicles without COMAND and a navigation
system and vehicles for Australia: the radar
sensor system and on-board computer must
be switched off in the vicinity of radio tele-
scope facilities (Y page 242).
For PRE-SAFE® Brake to assist you when driv-
ing, the radar sensor system must be
switched on (Y page 242) and be opera-
tional.
Following damage to the front end of the vehi- X To prime: lock the vehicle with the key or
cle, have the configuration and operation of KEYLESS-GO.
the radar sensors checked at a qualified spe- Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm sys-
cialist workshop. This also applies to colli- tem is primed after approximately 15 sec-
sions at slow speeds where there is no visible onds.
damage to the front of the vehicle.
X To deactivate: unlock the vehicle with the
key or KEYLESS-GO.
Anti-theft systems
Immobiliser
The immobiliser prevents your vehicle from
being started without the correct key.
Anti-theft systems 81
X To stop the alarm using the key: insert

the key into the ignition lock.
The alarm is switched off.
or
X Press the % or & button on the key.
Safety
X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:
grasp the outside door handle. The key
must be outside the vehicle.
or X Press button :.
X Press the Start/Stop button on the dash- Indicator lamp ; lights up briefly.
board. The key must be inside the vehicle. X Lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-
The alarm is switched off. GO.
Tow-away protection is deactivated.
Tow-away protection remains deactivated
Tow-away protection until:
An audible and visual alarm is triggered if your Rthe vehicle is unlocked again.
vehicle's angle of inclination is altered while Ra door is opened and closed again.
tow-away protection is primed. This occurs if Rthe vehicle is locked again.
the vehicle is jacked up on one side, for exam-
ple.
X To prime: lock the vehicle with the key or Interior motion sensor
KEYLESS-GO.
Tow-away protection is primed after If the interior motion sensor is primed, a vis-
approximately 30 seconds. ual and audible alarm is triggered if move-
ment is detected in the vehicle interior while
X To deactivate: unlock the vehicle with the
the vehicle is locked. This occurs if someone
key or KEYLESS-GO.
reaches into the vehicle interior, for example.
Tow-away protection is deactivated auto-
matically. To activate:
To prevent a false alarm, deactivate tow-away X Make sure that:
protection manually if your vehicle: Rthe side windows are closed.
Ris Rthe sliding sunroof/panorama sliding

being transported
Ris sunroof is closed.
being loaded onto a ferry or car trans-
Rthere are no objects, e.g. mascots, hang-
porter, for example
Ris parked on a movable surface, e.g. in a ing on the rear-view mirror or on the grab
handles on the roof trim.
split-level garage
This will prevent false alarms.
Deactivating: X Lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-
X Remove the key from the ignition lock. GO.
The interior motion sensor is primed after
approximately 30 seconds.
Z
82 Anti-theft systems
To switch off: outside with the key. Observe the "Impor-

X Unlock the vehicle with the key or KEY- tant safety notes" (Y page 89).
LESS-GO.
The interior motion sensor is deactivated
automatically.
Safety
To prevent a false alarm, deactivate the inte-

rior motion sensor if you lock your vehicle
and:
Rpeople or animals remain in the vehicle.
Rthe side windows remain open.
Rthe sliding sunroof/panorama sliding sun-
roof remains open.
Deactivating:
X Remove the key from the ignition lock.
X Press button :.
Indicator lamp ; flashes briefly.
X Lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-
GO.
The interior motion sensor is deactivated.
The interior motion sensor remains deactiva-
ted until:
Rthe vehicle is unlocked again.
Ra door is opened and closed again.
Rthe vehicle is locked again.
i UK only: Your vehicle is equipped with a

double lock function. The doors cannot be
opened from the inside if the vehicle has
been locked with the key (Y page 90).
Deactivate the interior motion sensor
before locking the vehicle with the key. The
doors can then be opened from the inside
after the vehicle has been locked from the
83
Useful information .............................. 84

Key ....................................................... 84
Doors .................................................... 89
Boot/luggage compartment .............. 92
Side windows ...................................... 96
Sliding sunroof .................................... 99
Opening and closing

84 Key
Useful information vehicle has been locked from the outside with
the key.
i This Owner's Manual describes all models
and all standard and optional equipment G WARNING
available to your vehicle at the time of pub- If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
lication of the Owner's Manual. Country- they could:
specific deviations are possible. Please Ropen a door from inside the vehicle at any
note that your vehicle may not be equipped time, even if it has been locked
Opening and closing
with all features described. This also Rstart the vehicle using a key which has been
applies to safety-relevant systems and
left in the vehicle
functions.
Rrelease the parking brake
i Please read the information on qualified They could thereby endanger themselves and
specialist workshops (Y page 28). others. Never leave children unsupervised in
the vehicle. Always take the key with you
when leaving the vehicle, even if you are only
Key leaving it for a short time.
Key functions
G WARNING
Locking and unlocking centrally If a key ring is too heavy or too large, the
The key centrally locks/unlocks: weight acting on the key could cause it to turn
in the ignition lock or catch on the steering
Rthe doors wheel. This could cause the engine to be
Rthe boot lid/tailgate switched off suddenly. You may lose control
Rthe fuel filler flap of the vehicle and cause an accident. Do not
attach any heavy or large key rings to the key
G WARNING that is inserted in the ignition.
Only for the United Kingdom: if the vehicle
has been locked with the key, the double lock
function is activated as standard. It is then not
possible to open the doors from inside the
vehicle.
Therefore, do not leave any people behind in
the vehicle, particularly children, elderly peo-
ple or people in need of special assistance if
the vehicle has been locked with the key. As
a result, they may not be able to free them-
selves in the event of an emergency. As a
result, they could be seriously or even fatally
injured by prolonged exposure to extremely : & To lock the vehicle
high or low temperatures, for example. In this ; F To unlock the boot lid/tailgate
case, rescuing people from outside the vehi- = % To unlock the vehicle
cle is difficult.
When unlocking, the turn signals flash once.
Deactivate the interior motion sensor before When locking, they flash three times.
you lock the vehicle with the key. The doors
When it is dark, the surround lighting also
can then be opened from the inside after the
comes on if it is activated in the on-board
computer (Y page 241).
Key 85
If you activate the acoustic locking confirma-

tion function, you will hear the following,
depending on the date of production of the
vehicle:
Ran acoustic signal when locking
or
Rone acoustic signal when unlocking and
three when locking.
Opening and closing

The audible signal can be activated and deac-
tivated using the on-board computer
(Y page 242). X To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner
X To unlock centrally: press the % but- surface of the door handle.
ton. X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor sur-
face :.
If you do not open the vehicle within approx-
X Convenience closing feature: touch
imately 40 seconds of unlocking:
recessed sensor surface ; for an exten-
Rthe vehicle is locked again.
ded period (Y page 98).
Rthe anti-theft system is primed again.
If you pull on the handle of the boot lid/tail-
X To lock centrally: press the & button.
gate, only the boot/luggage compartment of
the vehicle is unlocked.
KEYLESS-GO
You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using Changing the settings of the locking
KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry system
the key with you. When you touch the surface You can change the setting of the locking
of the sensors on the vehicle's outside door system in such a way that only the driver's
handles, KEYLESS-GO establishes a radio door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked. This
connection between the vehicle and the key. is useful if you frequently travel on your own.
When the engine is started and whilst you are X To change the setting: press and hold
driving, KEYLESS-GO also checks whether a down the % and & buttons simulta-
valid key is in the vehicle by periodically
neously for approximately six seconds until
establishing radio contact.
the battery check lamp (Y page 87)
When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, flashes twice.
the distance between the key and the door
handle you wish to lock or unlock must not i If the setting of the locking system is
be greater than 1 m. changed within the signal range of the vehi-
cle, pressing the & or % button locks
or unlocks the vehicle.
The key now functions as follows:
X To unlock the driver's door: press the
% button once.
X To unlock centrally: press the % but-
ton twice.
X To lock centrally: press the & button.
Z
86 Key
The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as fol- X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the
lows: key in the ignition lock.
X To unlock the driver's door: touch the
inner surface of the door handle on the Removing the emergency key element
driver's door.
X To unlock centrally: touch the inner sur-
face of the door handle on the front-
passenger door or the rear door.
Opening and closing
X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor

surface on one of the door handles.
Restoring the factory settings

X Press the % and & buttons simulta-
neously for approximately six seconds until X Push release catch : in the direction of
the battery check lamp flashes twice. the arrow and at the same time, remove
emergency key element ; from the key.
Emergency key element

General notes Key battery
If the vehicle can no longer be locked or Important safety notes
unlocked with the key, use the emergency
Have the batteries changed at a qualified spe-
key element.
cialist workshop.
If you use the emergency key element to
unlock and open the driver's door or the boot G WARNING
lid/tailgate, the anti-theft alarm system will Batteries are toxic and contain caustic sub-
be triggered (Y page 80). stances. For this reason, keep batteries out of
There are several ways to turn off the alarm: the reach of children.
X To turn the alarm off with the key: press If a battery has been swallowed, visit a doctor
the % or & button on the key. immediately.
or
H Environmental note
X Insert the key into the ignition lock.
Batteries contain pollutants.
or It is illegal to dispose of them
X To deactivate the alarm with KEYLESS- with the household rubbish.
GO: press the Start/Stop button in the igni- They must be collected sep-
tion lock. The key must be in the vehicle. arately and disposed of in an
or environmentally responsible
X Lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS- recycling system.
GO. The key must be outside the vehicle. Dispose of batteries in an
environmentally responsible
If you unlock the vehicle using the emergency
manner. Take discharged
key element, the fuel filler flap will not be
batteries to a qualified spe-
unlocked automatically.
cialist workshop or to a col-
Key 87
lection point for used batter- X Press emergency key element ; into the
ies. opening in the key in the direction of the
arrow until battery tray cover : opens.
When doing so, do not hold cover : shut.
Checking the battery
X Remove battery tray cover :.
Opening and closing

X Press the & or % button.
The battery is working properly if the bat- X Repeatedly tap the key against your palm
tery check lamp : lights up briefly until battery = falls out.
X Insert the new battery with the positive ter-
If battery check lamp : does not light up
briefly during the test, the battery is dis- minal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth
charged. to do so.
X Make sure that the surface of the battery is
X Changing the battery (Y page 87)
free from lint, grease and all other forms of
i If the key battery is checked within the contamination.
signal reception range of the vehicle, press- X Insert the front tabs of battery tray
ing the & or % button locks or cover : and then press to close it.
unlocks the vehicle. X Insert the emergency key element into the
key.
Changing the battery X Check the function of all key buttons on the
You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery. vehicle.

X Take the emergency key element out of the
key (Y page 86).
Z
88 Key
Problems with the key

You cannot lock or The key battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
unlock the vehicle X Try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control
using the key. function of the key. Point the tip of the key at the driver's door
handle from close range and press the % / & button.
Opening and closing
If this does not work:

X Check the key battery (Y page 87) and replace it if necessary
(Y page 87).
X Lock (Y page 91) or unlock (Y page 91) the vehicle using
the emergency key element.
The key is faulty.

X Have the key checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
You can no longer lock There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.
or unlock the vehicle X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of
using KEYLESS-GO. the key. Point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle from
close range and press the % / & button.
There is a fault with KEYLESS-GO.

X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of
the key. Point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle from
close range and press the % / & button.
X Have KEYLESS-GO checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

X Check the key battery (Y page 87) and replace it if necessary
(Y page 87).
You have lost a key. X Have the key deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.
X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
You have lost the emer- X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
gency key element. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
Doors 89

The engine cannot be The on-board voltage is too low.
started using the key. X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior
lighting, and try to start the engine again.
X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary
Opening and closing

(Y page 346).
or
X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 350).
or
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine cannot be The steering lock is mechanically blocked.

started using the key. X Remove the key and reinsert it into the ignition lock. While doing
this, turn the steering wheel in both directions.
The engine cannot be A door is open. Therefore, the key cannot be detected as easily.
started using KEYLESS- X Close the door and try to start the vehicle again.
GO. The key is in the
vehicle. There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.
X Start your vehicle with the key in the ignition lock.
Doors Deactivate the interior motion sensor before

Important safety notes can then be opened from the inside after the
G WARNING vehicle has been locked from the outside with
the key.
function is activated as standard. It is then not
G WARNING
possible to open the doors from inside the If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
vehicle. they could:
Ropen a door from inside the vehicle at any
Therefore, do not leave any people behind in
the vehicle, particularly children, elderly peo- time, even if it has been locked
ple or people in need of special assistance if Rstart the vehicle using a key which has been
the vehicle has been locked with the key. As left in the vehicle
a result, they may not be able to free them- Rrelease the parking brake
selves in the event of an emergency. As a They could thereby endanger themselves and
result, they could be seriously or even fatally others. Never leave children unsupervised in
injured by prolonged exposure to extremely the vehicle. Always take the key with you
high or low temperatures, for example. In this when leaving the vehicle, even if you are only
case, rescuing people from outside the vehi- leaving it for a short time.
cle is difficult.
Z
90 Doors
Unlocking and opening the doors i It is only possible to lock the vehicle cen-
from the inside trally if the front-passenger door is closed.
For all countries except the United King-
dom: you can open a door from inside the
vehicle even if it has been locked.
Opening and closing
function is activated as standard. It is then

not possible to open the doors from inside the
vehicle. Deactivate the interior motion sensor
(Y page 81) before you lock the vehicle with
the key. The doors can then be opened from
the inside after the vehicle has been locked
X To unlock: press button :.
from the outside with the key.
X To lock: press button ;.
You can only open the rear doors from inside
the vehicle if they are not secured by the
child-proof locks (Y page 71).
Automatic locking feature
The vehicle is locked automatically when the
ignition is switched on and the wheels are
turning.
You could therefore be locked out when:
Rthe vehicle is being pushed.
Rthe vehicle is being towed.
Rthe vehicle is being tested on a dynamom-
eter.
X Pull door handle ;.

If the door is locked, locking knob : pops
up. The door is unlocked and can be
opened.
Centrally locking and unlocking the

vehicle from the inside
You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle
from the inside. X To deactivate: press and hold button :
The central locking/unlocking button does for about five seconds until a tone sounds.
not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap. X To activate: press and hold button ; for
i You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally about five seconds until a tone sounds.
from the inside if the vehicle has been i If you press one of the two buttons and
locked with the key or KEYLESS-GO. do not hear a tone, the relevant setting has
already been selected.
Doors 91
On vehicles with a luxury multifunction steer- X Open the driver's door.

ing wheel, you can also activate and deacti- X Close the front-passenger door, the rear
vate the automatic locking via the on-board doors and the boot lid/tailgate.
computer (Y page 242). X Press the locking button (Y page 90).
X Check whether the locking knobs on the
front-passenger door and the rear doors
Unlocking the driver's door (emer-
are still visible. Press down the locking
gency key element)
knobs by hand, if necessary.
Opening and closing

If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked with X Close the driver's door.
the key, use the emergency key element. X Take the emergency key element out of the
If you use the emergency key element to key (Y page 86).
unlock and open the driver's door, the anti- X Insert the emergency key element into the
theft alarm system will be triggered
lock of the driver's door as far as it will go.
(Y page 80).
key (Y page 86).
X Insert the emergency key element into the
lock of the driver's door as far as it will go.
X Turn the emergency key element clockwise

as far as it will go to position 1.
i On right-hand-drive vehicles, turn the
emergency key element anti-clockwise.
XTurn the emergency key element anti- X Turn the emergency key element back and
clockwise to position 1. remove it.
The door is unlocked. X Make sure that the doors and the boot lid/
i On right-hand-drive vehicles, turn the tailgate are locked.

emergency key element clockwise.
key.
X Turn the emergency key element back and
remove it. i If you lock the vehicle as described above,
X Insert the emergency key element into the the fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti-
key. theft alarm system is not primed.
Locking the vehicle (emergency key

element)
If the vehicle can no longer be locked with the
key, use the emergency key element.
Z
92 Boot/luggage compartment
Boot/luggage compartment Opening/closing manually

Important safety notes Opening
Do not leave the key in the boot/luggage X Press the % button on the key.
compartment. You could otherwise lock your-
self out.
G WARNING
Opening and closing
Exhaust fumes could enter the vehicle interior

if the engine is running and the boot lid/tail-
gate is open. This could poison you. There-
fore, you should make sure that the boot lid/
tailgate is always closed when the engine is
running.
! The boot lid/tailgate swings upwards and

to the rear when opened. Therefore, make Handle (example: Estate)
sure that there is sufficient clearance X Pull handle :.
above and behind the boot lid/tailgate. X Raise the boot lid/tailgate.
i You will find details on the boot lid/tail- Estate with the EASY-PACK tailgate: if you
gate opening dimensions in the Technical pull handle : and keep it in this position, you
data section (Y page 386). can open the tailgate manually. If you release
On the Saloon, the boot lid can be: the handle, the tailgate opens automatically.
Ropened and closed manually from outside
Ropened
Closing
automatically from outside
Ropened automatically from inside G WARNING
Rlocked separately Make sure that nobody can become trapped
Runlocked with the emergency key element as you close the tailgate.
On the Estate without EASY-PACK tail-
gate, the tailgate can be:
Ropened and closed manually from outside
Runlocked from the inside with the emer-
gency key element
On the Estate with EASY-PACK tailgate,
you can:
Rclose the tailgate manually from outside
Ropen and close the tailgate automatically
from outside
Ropen and close the tailgate automatically Recess (example: Estate)
from inside
Rlimit the opening angle of the tailgate
Runlock the tailgate from inside with the
emergency key element
Boot/luggage compartment 93
X Pull the boot lid/tailgate down using become trapped. To stop the opening or clos-
recess :. ing procedure, press the closing button on the
X Estate: push the tailgate closed from out- tailgate again or pull the handle on the outside
side the vehicle. of the tailgate.
X If necessary, lock the vehicle with
! The boot lid/tailgate swings upwards and
the & button on the key (Y page 84) or
to the rear when opened. Therefore, make
with KEYLESS-GO (Y page 85).
sure that there is sufficient clearance
i If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected in the
Opening and closing

above and behind the boot lid/tailgate.
boot/luggage compartment, the boot lid/
tailgate will not lock. i You will find details on the boot lid/tail-
Saloon: the boot lid then opens again. gate opening dimensions in the Technical
data section (Y page 386).
Opening/closing automatically from Opening

outside You can open the boot lid/tailgate automati-
Important safety notes cally with the key or the handle in the boot
lid/tailgate.
G WARNING Estate with EASY-PACK tailgate: open/
Only for the United Kingdom: if the vehicle close the tailgate fully using the automatic
has been locked with the key, the double lock function after stopping the tailgate in an inter-
function is activated as standard. It is then not mediate position.
possible to open the doors from inside the X Press and hold the F button on the key
vehicle. until the boot lid/tailgate opens.
Therefore, do not leave any people behind in or
the vehicle, particularly children, elderly peo- X If the boot lid/tailgate is unlocked, pull the
ple or people in need of special assistance if
handle of the boot lid/tailgate and let it go
the vehicle has been locked with the key. As
again immediately.
a result, they may not be able to free them-
selves in the event of an emergency. As a
result, they could be seriously or even fatally Closing
injured by prolonged exposure to extremely You can close the tailgate automatically using
high or low temperatures, for example. In this the closing button5 or the locking button6.
case, rescuing people from outside the vehi-
cle is difficult.
Deactivate the interior motion sensor before
can then be opened from the inside after the
vehicle has been locked from the outside with
the key.
G WARNING
Monitor the tailgate opening and closing pro-
cedures to make sure that nobody can
5 For vehicles with the EASY-PACK tailgate only.

6 For vehicles with the EASY-PACK tailgate and KEYLESS-GO only.
Z
94
Opening and closing Boot/luggage compartment
Closing button and locking button (example: vehi- Remote operating switch (example: Estate)
cle with the EASY-PACK tailgate and KEYLESS-GO)
X To open: press the upper section of remote
X To close: press closing button : on the operating switch : for the tailgate/boot
tailgate. lid until the tailgate/boot lid opens.
X To close and lock simultaneously:
X To close (Estate): turn the key to position
Press locking button ; on the tailgate. 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
i If you leave a KEYLESS-GO key in the lug- X Press the lower section of tailgate remote
gage compartment, the tailgate will not operating switch : until the tailgate is
lock. closed.
Opening/closing automatically from Limiting the opening angle of the tail-

the inside gate (Estate)
G WARNING Important safety notes
Monitor the tailgate closing procedure to You can limit the opening angle of the tail-
make sure that nobody can become trapped. gate. This is possible in the top half of its
Release the tailgate's remote operating but- opening range, up to approximately 20 cm
ton to stop the closing procedure. before the stop.
Saloon: you can open the boot lid from the Limiting the opening angle can be useful if
driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary there is not sufficient clearance above the
and unlocked. open tailgate, for example.
Estate with EASY-PACK tailgate: you can ! Make sure there is sufficient clearance to
open/close the tailgate from the driver's seat open the tailgate fully when setting the
when the vehicle is stationary and unlocked. opening angle. The tailgate could otherwise
be damaged. Ideally, set the opening angle
outside.
Activating
X To open the tailgate: pull the handle on
the tailgate.
X To stop the opening procedure at the
desired position: press the closing button
Boot/luggage compartment 95
(Y page 93) in the tailgate or pull the handle X Remove the emergency key element.
on the outside of the tailgate again. X Insert the emergency key element into the
X To store the position: press and hold the key.
closing button in the tailgate until you hear
a short tone.
The opening angle limiter is activated. The Unlocking the boot (Saloon)
tailgate will now stop in the stored position
when opening. ! The boot lid swings upwards when
Opening and closing

opened. Therefore, make sure that there is
i If you wish to open the tailgate fully, pull
sufficient clearance above the boot lid.
the handle of the tailgate again after it has
stopped automatically. This does not If the boot cannot be unlocked with the key
delete the stored position. or KEYLESS-GO, use the emergency key ele-
ment.
Deactivating If you use the emergency key element to
unlock and open the boot lid, the anti-theft
X Press and hold the closing button alarm system will be triggered (Y page 80).
(Y page 93) in the tailgate until you hear
two short tones.
key (Y page 86).
Locking the boot separately (Saloon) boot lid lock as far as the stop.
In some countries, you can lock the boot sep-

arately. If you then unlock the vehicle cen-
trally, the boot remains locked and cannot be
opened.
X Close the boot lid.
key (Y page 86).
X Turn the emergency key element anti-

clockwise from position 1 as far as it will
go to position 2.
The boot is unlocked.
X Turn the emergency key element back to
position 1 and remove it.
key.
boot lid lock as far as the stop.
X Turn the emergency key element clockwise
Tailgate emergency release (Estate)
from position 1 to position 2.
If the tailgate can no longer be opened from
outside the vehicle, use the emergency
release on the inside of the tailgate.
Z
96 Side windows
X Take the emergency key element out of the G WARNING

key (Y page 86). Make sure that nobody can become trapped
i You will find details on the tailgate open- as you close a side window. If there is a risk
ing dimensions in the Technical data sec- of becoming trapped, release the switch or
tion (Y page 386). press it again to open the side window again.
G WARNING
Children may injure themselves if they open
Opening and closing
or close the side windows.

Never leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
cle. Always take the key with you when leaving
the vehicle, even if you are only leaving it for
a short time.
G WARNING
! When opening, the tailgate swings up and vehicle, even if they are secured in a child
out. Therefore, make sure that there is suf- restraint system. The children could:
ficient clearance above and behind the tail- Rbe seriously or even fatally injured on parts
gate. of the vehicle
X Insert emergency key element ; into Rbe seriously or even fatally injured by pro-
opening in trim :. longed exposure to extremely high or
X Turn emergency key element ; 90° clock-
extremely low temperatures
wise. If children open a door, they could:
X Push emergency key element ; in the Rseriously or even fatally injure other people
direction of the arrow and open the tail- Rget out of the vehicle and injure them-
gate. selves, or be seriously or even fatally
injured by a passing vehicle
Activate the child-proof locks/override fea-
Side windows ture if children are travelling in the vehicle.
They could otherwise open doors or side win-
Important safety notes dows while the vehicle is in motion and
G WARNING thereby injure themselves or others.
Make sure that nobody can become trapped
between the side window and the door frame
when a side window is opened. Do not touch
or lean against the side window during the
opening procedure. You could become trap-
ped between the side window and the door
frame as the side window moves down. If
there is a risk of becoming trapped, release
the switch or pull the switch upwards to close
the side window again.
Side windows 97
Opening and closing the side win- Convenience opening feature

dows
You can ventilate the vehicle before you start
driving. To do this, the key is used to carry out
the following functions simultaneously:
Runlock the vehicle
Ropen the side windows
Ropen the sliding sunroof or the panorama
Opening and closing

sliding sunroof and the roller sunblinds
Rswitch on the seat ventilation for the driv-
er's seat
i The convenience opening feature can
: Front left only be operated using the key. The key
must be close to the driver's door handle.
; Front right
= Rear right
X Point the tip of the key at the driver's door
handle.
? Rear left
X Press and hold the % button until the
The switches for all side windows are located side windows and the sliding sunroof or the
on the driver's door. There is also a switch on panorama sliding sunroof are in the desired
each door for the corresponding side window. position.
The switches on the driver's door take prec- If the roller sunblinds of the panorama sliding
edence. sunroof are closed, the roller sunblinds are
i The side windows cannot be operated opened first.
from the rear when the override feature for X Press and hold the % button again until
the side windows is activated (Y page 72). the panorama sliding sunroof is in the
X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition desired position.
lock. X To interrupt convenience opening:
X To open: press the corresponding switch. release the % button.
X To close: pull the corresponding switch.
i If you press the switch beyond the point
of resistance, an automatic opening/clos- Convenience closing feature
ing process is started in the corresponding General notes
direction. You can stop automatic opera-
tion by pressing again. When you lock the vehicle, you can simulta-
neously:
i You can continue to operate the side win-
Rclose the side windows
dows after switching off the engine or
removing the key. This function remains Rclose the sliding sunroof or the panorama
active for five minutes or until the driver's sliding sunroof
or front-passenger door is opened. On vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof,
you can then close the roller sunblinds.
G WARNING
When using the convenience closing feature,
make sure that nobody can become trapped.
Z
98 Side windows
Proceed as follows if there is a risk of entrap-

ment:
With the key:
Rrelease the & button.
Rpress and hold the % button until the
side windows and the sliding sunroof or the
panorama sliding sunroof open again.
Opening and closing
With KEYLESS-GO:
Rrelease the sensor surface on the door han-
dle. XTouch recessed sensor surface : on the
Rpull the door handle immediately and hold door handle until the side windows and the
it. sliding sunroof or the panorama sliding
The side windows and the sliding sunroof sunroof are fully closed.
or the panorama sliding sunroof open. i Make sure you only touch recessed sen-
sor surface :.
Using the key X Make sure that all the side windows and the
i The key must be close to the driver's door sliding sunroof or panorama sliding sunroof
handle. are closed.
X Point the tip of the key at the driver's door On vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof:
handle. X Touch recessed sensor surface : on the
X Press and hold the & button until the
door handle again until the roller sunblinds
side windows and the sliding sunroof or the of the panorama sliding sunroof close.
panorama sliding sunroof are fully closed.
X To interrupt convenience closing:
X Make sure that all the side windows and the
release recessed sensor surface : on the
sliding sunroof or panorama sliding sunroof
are closed. door handle.
On vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof:

X Press and hold the & button again until Resetting the side windows
the roller sunblinds of the panorama sliding You must reset each side window if a side
sunroof close. window can no longer be closed fully.
X To interrupt convenience closing: X Close all the doors.
release the & button. X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition
lock.
Using KEYLESS-GO X Pull the corresponding switch on the door
The KEYLESS-GO key must be outside the control panel until the side window is com-
vehicle. All the doors must be closed. pletely closed. (Y page 97).
X Hold the switch for an additional second.
Sliding sunroof 99
If the side window opens again slightly: Sliding sunroof

X Immediately pull the corresponding switch
on the door control panel until the side win-
dow is completely closed (Y page 97). Your vehicle may be fitted with a sliding sun-
X Hold the switch for an additional second. roof or a panorama sliding sunroof. In the fol-
X If the corresponding side window remains
lowing section, the term "sliding sunroof"
refers to both types of sliding sunroof.
closed after the button has been released,
the side window has been reset correctly.
Opening and closing

G WARNING
If this is not the case, repeat the steps Make sure that nobody can become trapped
above again. when opening and closing the sliding sunroof.
If there is a risk of entrapment, release the
switch immediately. During automatic opera-
Problems with the side windows tion, push the switch briefly in any direction
Problem: a side window cannot be closed to stop the sliding sunroof.
because it is blocked by objects, e.g.
leaves in the window guide. G WARNING
X Remove the objects. Children could injure themselves if they oper-
ate the sliding sunroof.
X Close the side window.
Problem: a side window cannot be closed cle. Always take the key with you when leaving
and you cannot see the cause. the vehicle, even if you are only leaving it for
G WARNING a short time.
Closing the side windows with increased force
or without the anti-entrapment feature could G WARNING
lead to serious or even fatal injury. Make sure The glass in the panorama sunroof could
that nobody can become trapped when clos- break in an accident. If you are not wearing a
ing the side windows. seat belt, there is a risk that you could be
thrown through the opening in the event of the
If a side window is obstructed during closing vehicle overturning. Therefore, always wear a
and reopens again slightly: seat belt to reduce the risk of injuries.
X Immediately after the window blocks, pull ! Only open the panorama sliding sunroof
the corresponding switch again until the if it is free of snow and ice. Otherwise, mal-
side window has closed. functions may occur.
The side window is closed with increased
force. Do not allow anything to protrude from the
sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could
If a side window is obstructed again during be damaged.
closing and reopens again slightly:
i Resonance noises can occur in addition
X Immediately after the window blocks, pull to the usual airflow noises when the sliding
the corresponding switch again until the sunroof is open. They are caused by minor
side window has closed. pressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior.
The side window is closed without the anti- Change the position of the sliding sunroof
entrapment feature. or open a side window slightly to reduce or
eliminate these noises.
Z
100 Sliding sunroof
Operating the sliding sunroof Rafter six hours

Rif there is a malfunction in the power supply
Opening and closing
The rear of the sliding sunroof is then raised
i You can continue to operate the sliding in order to ventilate the vehicle interior.
sunroof after switching off the engine or i If the sliding sunroof is obstructed when
removing the key. This function remains
being closed by the rain closing feature, it
active for five minutes or until the driver's
opens again slightly. The rain closing fea-
or front-passenger door is opened.
Opening and closing
ture is then deactivated.

The sliding sunroof does not close if:
Ritis raised at the rear.
Ritis blocked.
Rno rain is falling on the area of the wind-
screen being monitored by the rain sensor
(e.g. because the vehicle is under a bridge
or in a carport).
Resetting
Overhead control panel Reset the sliding sunroof if it does not move
: To raise smoothly.
; To open X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition
= To close/lower lock.
X Raise the sliding sunroof fully at the rear
X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition
lock. (Y page 100).
X Keep the 3 switch pressed for another
X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corre-
sponding direction. second.
X Make sure that the sliding sunroof can be
i If you press the 3 switch beyond the
fully opened and closed again
point of resistance, an automatic opening/
(Y page 100).
closing process is started in the corre-
X If this is not the case, repeat the steps
sponding direction. You can stop automatic
operation by pressing again. above again.
The sun protection cover automatically opens ! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be
along with the sliding sunroof. You can open opened or closed fully after resetting, con-
or close the sun protection cover manually tact a qualified specialist workshop.
when the sliding sunroof is raised or closed.
Rain closing feature

When the key is in position 0 in the ignition
lock or is removed, the sliding sunroof closes
automatically:
Rif it starts to rain
Rat extreme outside temperatures
Sliding sunroof 101
Operating the panorama sliding sun- The panorama sliding sunroof does not close
roof if:
Ritis raised at the rear.
Opening and closing
Ritis blocked.
Rno rain is falling on the area of the wind-
screen being monitored by the rain sensor
(e.g. because the vehicle is under a bridge
or in a carport).
Opening and closing

Operating the panorama sliding sun-
roof roller sunblinds
General notes
Overhead control panel The roller sunblinds shield the vehicle interior
: To raise from sunlight. The two roller sunblinds can
only be opened and closed together when the
; Opening
panorama sliding sunroof is closed.
= To close/lower
G WARNING
X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition
lock.
as you open or close the roller sunblinds.
X Push or pull the 3 switch in the corre-
sponding direction.
Opening and closing
i If you press the 3 switch beyond the
point of resistance, an automatic opening/
closing process is started in the corre-
sponding direction. You can stop automatic
operation by pressing again.
Rain closing feature

When the key is in position 0 in the ignition
lock or is removed, the panorama sliding sun-
roof closes automatically:
Rif it starts to rain
Rat extreme outside temperatures Overhead control panel
: To open
Rafter six hours
Rif there is a malfunction in the power supply
; To open
= To close
The panorama sliding sunroof remains raised
at the rear in order to allow ventilation of the X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition
vehicle interior. lock.
i If the panorama sliding sunroof is obstruc- X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corre-
ted when being closed by the rain closing sponding direction.

feature, it opens again slightly. The rain i If you press the 3 switch beyond the
closing feature is then deactivated. point of resistance, an automatic opening/
Z
102 Sliding sunroof
closing process is started in the corre- lowing section, the term "sliding sunroof"
sponding direction. You can stop automatic refers to both types of sliding sunroof.
operation by pressing again. Problem: the sunroof cannot be closed
and you cannot see the cause.
Resetting the panorama sliding sunroof
and the roller sunblinds G WARNING
You could be severely or even fatally injured
Reset the panorama sliding sunroof and the when closing the sliding sunroof with
roller sunblinds if the panorama sliding sun-
Opening and closing
increased closing force or if the anti-entrap-

roof or the roller sunblinds do not move ment feature is deactivated. Make sure that
smoothly. nobody can become trapped when closing the
X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition sliding sunroof.
lock.
X Press the 3 switch to the point of resist- If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during
ance in the direction of arrow ; and hold closing and reopens again slightly:
it until the panorama sliding sunroof has X Immediately after the sliding sunroof
opened about 10 cm. blocks, pull the 3 switch in the over-
X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point head control panel down to the point of
of resistance in the direction of arrow = resistance and hold it until the sliding sun-
until the panorama sliding sunroof is fully roof is closed.
closed. The sliding sunroof is closed with increased
force.
X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an addi-
tional second. If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again dur-
X Press the 3 switch to the point of resist- ing closing and reopens again slightly:
ance in the direction of arrow ; and hold X Immediately after the sliding sunroof
it until the roller sunblinds are open 10 cm. blocks, pull the 3 switch in the over-
X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point head control panel down to the point of
of resistance in the direction of arrow = resistance and hold it until the sliding sun-
until the roller sunblinds are fully closed. roof is closed.
The sliding sunroof is closed without the
X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an addi-
anti-entrapment feature.
tional second.
X Make sure that the panorama sliding sun-
roof and the roller sunblinds can be fully
opened and closed again (Y page 101).
X If this is not the case, repeat the steps
above again.
! If the panorama sliding sunroof and the
roller sunblind cannot be fully opened or
closed after resetting, contact a qualified
specialist workshop.
Problems with the sliding sunroof

Your vehicle may be fitted with a sliding sun-
roof or a panorama sliding sunroof. In the fol-
103
Useful information ............................ 104

Correct driver's seat position .......... 104
Seats .................................................. 105
Steering wheel .................................. 110
Mirrors ............................................... 112
Memory function .............................. 115
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

104 Correct driver's seat position
Useful information Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly.

Ryou have moved the backrest to an
i This Owner's Manual describes all models almost vertical position.
and all standard and optional equipment Ryou have set the seat cushion angle so
available to your vehicle at the time of pub- that your thighs are gently supported.
lication of the Owner's Manual. Country- Ryou can depress the pedals properly.
specific deviations are possible. Please
X Check whether the head restraint is adjus-
note that your vehicle may not be equipped
ted properly (Y page 107).
with all features described. This also
applies to safety-relevant systems and When doing so, make sure that you have
functions. adjusted the head restraint so that the back
of your head is supported at eye level by

i Please read the information on qualified the centre of the head restraint.
Observe the safety guidelines on steering
wheel adjustment (Y page 110).
Correct driver's seat position X Check whether steering wheel : is adjus-
ted properly.
Adjust the steering wheel manually
(Y page 111)
Adjusting the steering wheel electrically
(Y page 111)
When adjusting the steering wheel, make
sure:
Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your
arms slightly bent.
Ryou can move your legs freely.
Ryou can see all the displays in the instru-
ment cluster clearly.
Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts
(Y page 53).
X Check whether you have fastened seat
belt ; properly (Y page 55).
Observe the safety guidelines on seat adjust-
ment (Y page 105). The seat belt should:
Rfit snugly across your body
X Check whether you have adjusted seat =
Rbe routed across the middle of your
properly.
Manual and electrical seat adjustment shoulder
Rbe routed in your pelvic area across the
(Y page 106)
Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 106) hip joints
X Before starting off, adjust the rear-view mir-
When adjusting the seat, make sure:
ror and the exterior mirrors (Y page 112)
Ryou are as far away from the driver's air-
bag as possible.
Ryou are sitting in a normal upright posi-
tion.
Seats 105
in such a way that you have a good view of G WARNING

road and traffic conditions. Make sure that the back of your head is sup-
X Vehicles with a memory function: save ported at eye level by the central area of the
the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirror head restraint. If your head is not supported
settings (Y page 115). correctly by the head restraint, you could suf-
fer a severe neck injury in the event of an
accident. Never drive if the head restraints are
Seats not engaged and set correctly.
Important safety notes G WARNING

G WARNING A seat belt can only offer its intended degree
The seats can still be adjusted when there is of protection when the backrest is almost ver-
no key in the ignition lock. For this reason, tical and the occupant is sitting upright. Avoid
children should never be left unsupervised in seat positions that do not allow the seat belt
the vehicle. They could adjust the seats and to be routed correctly. Adjust the backrest so
become trapped. that it is as upright as possible. Never travel
with the backrest reclined too far backwards.
G WARNING You could otherwise be seriously or even
fatally injured in the event of an accident or
Only adjust the driver's seat when the vehicle
sudden braking.
is stationary. You will otherwise be distracted
from the road and traffic conditions and you ! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat
could lose control of the vehicle as a result of
heating, observe the following information:
the seat moving. This could cause an acci-
Rdo not spill any liquids on the seats. If
dent.
liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as
G WARNING soon as possible.
Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or
others could be trapped and thereby injured. switch on the seat heating. The seat
Children in particular could unintentionally heating should also not be used to dry
press the buttons to electrically adjust the the seats.
seats and become trapped. Rclean the seat covers as recommended;
Take care that: see the "Interior care" section.

Rdo not transport heavy loads on the
Rwhile moving the seats, your hands do not
get under the lever assembly of the seat seats. Do not place sharp objects on the
adjustment system. seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools.
The seats should only be occupied by
Rchildren in the vehicle do not slide their
passengers, if possible.
hands under the levers.
Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do
not cover the seats with insulating mate-
G WARNING
rials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat cov-
ers, child seats or booster seats.
when adjusting the seats.
Observe the notes on airbags. ! When you move the seats, make sure that
there are no objects in the footwell or
Secure children as recommended; see the
behind the seats. Otherwise, you could
"Children in the vehicle" section.
damage the seats and the objects.
Z
106 Seats
i The head restraints in the front seats are Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
fitted with the NECK-PRO system X Lift handle ? and slide the seat forwards
(Y page 52). For this reason, it is not pos-
or backwards.
sible to remove the head restraints from
the front seats. X Release lever ? again.
Vehicles without the through-loading fea- Make sure that you hear the seat engage in
ture: the head restraints cannot be position.
removed from the rear compartment seats.
Please contact a Mercedes-Benz Service Seat cushion angle
Centre for more information. X Turn handwheel = in the desired direction.
i Related topics:
RThrough-loading feature in the rear
bench seat (Saloon) Adjusting the seats electrically
RLuggage compartment enlargement
(Estate) (Y page 306)
Adjusting the seats manually and

electrically
: Head restraint height

; Seat cushion angle
= Seat height
? Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
A Backrest angle
: Backrest angle i Vehicles with memory function: if PRE-

; Seat height SAFE® has been triggered, the front-
= Seat cushion angle
passenger seat will be moved to a better
position if it was previously in an unfavour-
? Seat fore-and-aft adjustment able position.
i AMG vehicles are equipped with a seat i You can store the seat settings using the
with an integrated head restraint. It is, memory function (Y page 115).
therefore, not possible to set the height and
angle of the head restraint. i AMG vehicles are equipped with a seat
featuring an integrated head restraint and
i Adjust the seat cushion angle so that your the head restraint adjustment button is dis-
thighs are lightly supported. abled. It is therefore not possible to set the
height and angle of the head restraint.
Seats 107
Adjusting the head restraints Adjusting the luxury head restraints

Adjusting the head restraints manually G WARNING
When folding back the head restraint side bol-
Adjusting the head restraint height sters, do not put your hands between the side
bolster and the cushion holder. There is a
danger of becoming trapped.

X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the
desired position.
X To lower: press release catch : in the
X To adjust the side bolsters of the head
direction of the arrow and push the head
restraint: push or pull right and/or left-
restraint down to the desired position.
hand side bolster : into the desired posi-
Adjusting the angle of the head restraints tion.
X To adjust the angle of the head
restraint: push or pull the head restraint in
the direction of arrow ;.
Rear seat head restraints

Adjusting the rear seat head restraint
height
X Push or pull the lower edge of the head

restraint in the direction of the arrow.
Adjusting the head restraints electri-

cally
X To adjust the head restraint height: slide
the switch for head restraint adjustment
(Y page 106) up or down in the direction of If the head restraint is fully lowered, it is nec-
the arrow. essary to press release catch :.
X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the
desired position.
Z
108 Seats
X To lower: press release catch : and push X Release the rear seat backrest and fold it
the head restraint down until it is in the slightly forwards (Y page 305).
desired position. X To remove: pull the head restraint up to
the stop.
Adjusting the rear seat head restraint X Press release catch : and pull the head
angle
restraint out of the guides.
Adjust the head restraints so that they are as
X To refit: insert the head restraint so that
close as possible to your head.
the notches on the bar are on the left when
You can only adjust the two outer head viewed in the direction of travel.
restraints.
X Push the head restraint down until you hear
it engage in position.
X Fold back the rear seat backrest until it
engages.
Adjusting the multicontour seat

You can adjust the contour of the front seats
individually so as to provide optimum support
for your back and sides.
X Pull or push the bottom of the head

restraint until it is in the desired position.
Fitting/removing the rear seat head

restraints7
G WARNING
Occupants should only travel sitting on seats
which have the head restraints installed. This
reduces the risk of injury to the passengers in
the rear in the event of an accident.
: To adjust the thigh cushion
; To adjust the backrest contour in the lum-
bar region
= To adjust the backrest contour in the
upper back region
? To adjust the side bolsters of the seat
backrest
X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in
the ignition lock.
7 Except for Saloons without the through-loading feature.

Seats 109
Adjusting the lumbar support Switching the seat heating on/off

You can adjust the contour of the driver's seat Switching on/off
so as to provide optimum support for your
back. G WARNING
Repeatedly setting the seat heating to level
3 may result in excessive seat temperatures.
The health of passengers that have limited
temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to
react to excessively high temperatures may
be affected or they may even suffer burn-like

injuries. Therefore, do not use seat heating
level 3 repeatedly.
The three red indicator lamps in the button

indicate the heating level you have selected.
X Move adjustment lever : in the direction i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat
of the arrow until the desired backrest con- heating may switch off.
tour is achieved.
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support

You can adjust the contour of the front seat
backrests individually to provide optimum
support for your back.
Driver's and front-passenger seat

The system automatically switches down
from level 3 to level 2 after approximately
eight minutes.
The system automatically switches down
from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten
minutes.
: To raise the backrest contour The system automatically switches off
; To soften the backrest contour approximately 20 minutes after it is set to
level 1.
= To lower the backrest contour
X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or
? To harden the backrest contour
2 in the ignition lock.
X To switch on: press button : repeatedly
until the desired heating level is set.
X To switch off: press button : repeatedly
until all the indicator lamps go out.
Z
110 Steering wheel
Problems with the seat heating Problems with the seat ventilation
The seat heating has switched off prema- The seat ventilation has switched off prema-
turely or cannot be switched on. The vehicle's turely or cannot be switched on. The vehicle's
electrical system voltage is too low because electrical system voltage is too low because
too many electrical consumers are switched too many electrical consumers are switched
on. on.
X Switch off electrical consumers that you do X Switch off electrical consumers which you
not need, such as the rear window heating do not need, such as the rear window heat-
or interior lighting. ing or interior lighting.
Switching the seat ventilation on/off Steering wheel

Switching on/off Important safety notes
The three blue indicator lamps in the buttons G WARNING
indicate the ventilation level you have selec- The electrically adjustable steering wheel can
ted. still be adjusted when there is no key in the
i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat ignition lock. Therefore, do not leave children
ventilation may switch off. unsupervised in the vehicle, as they could
become trapped if the steering wheel is adjus-
ted.
G WARNING
Only adjust the steering wheel when the vehi-
cle is stationary and do not pull away until the
steering wheel adjustment mechanism is
locked in position. You might otherwise drive
without the steering wheel adjustment mech-
anism being locked in position. As a result,
you could be distracted from road and traffic
X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or conditions by an unintentional movement of
2 in the ignition lock. the steering wheel and thereby cause an acci-
dent.
X To switch on: press button : repeatedly
However, the steerability of the vehicle is not
until the desired ventilation level is set.
affected.
i You can open the side windows and the
sliding sunroof using the "Convenience
opening" feature (Y page 97). The seat ven-
tilation of the driver's seat automatically
switches to the highest level.
X To switch off: press button : repeatedly
until all the indicator lamps go out.
Steering wheel 111
Adjusting the steering wheel man- i Related topics:

ually REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature
(Y page 111)
RStoring settings (Y page 115)
EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature
The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting

in and out of your vehicle easier.
You can activate and deactivate the EASY-
: Release lever ENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-board com-
puter (Y page 243).
; To adjust the steering wheel height
= To adjust the steering wheel position G WARNING
(fore-and-aft adjustment) Make sure that nobody can become trapped
when you activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT fea-
X Push release lever : down completely.
ture.
The steering column is unlocked.
If there is a risk of someone becoming trap-
X Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
ped, stop the adjustment procedure. To halt
position. the procedure:
X Push release lever : up completely.
Rpress the steering column adjustment but-
The steering column is locked.
ton.
X Check if the steering column is locked.
Rbriefly press one of the memory function
When doing so, try to push the steering
position buttons.
wheel up or down or try to move it in the
fore-and-aft direction. The steering column stops moving immedi-
ately.
Do not keep the memory function position
Adjusting the steering wheel electri- button pressed down, otherwise the memory
cally function will start and the steering wheel and
seat will begin to move.
cle. They could open the driver's door and
thereby unintentionally activate the EASY-
ENTRY feature and become trapped.
: To adjust the steering wheel height

; To adjust the steering wheel position
(fore-and-aft adjustment)
Z
112 Mirrors
Position of the steering wheel when the The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is
EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is active only operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY fea-
ture is activated in the on-board computer.
The steering wheel tilts upwards if you:
Rremove the key from the ignition lock
Ropen the driver's door and KEYLESS-GO is Mirrors
in position 1
Rear-view mirror
Ropen the driver's door and the key is in
position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock Rear-view mirror (manual anti-dazzle)
i The steering wheel only moves upwards if
it has not already reached the upper end

stop.
If you insert the key into the ignition lock with
the driver's door closed, the steering wheel is
automatically moved to the previously set
position.
Position of the steering wheel for driv-

ing
The steering wheel is moved to the previously X Anti-dazzle mode: flick anti-dazzle
set position if: switch : forwards or back.
Rthe driver's door is closed
Ryou insert the key into the ignition lock
Exterior mirrors
or
Ryou press the Start/Stop button once on Adjusting the exterior mirrors
vehicles with KEYLESS-GO.
If you close the driver's door with the key
G WARNING
inserted into the ignition lock, the steering The exterior mirrors reduce the size of the
wheel is automatically moved to the previ- image. Objects are actually closer than they
ously set position. appear. You could misjudge the distance from
vehicles driving behind and cause an acci-
The last position of the steering wheel is
dent, e.g. when changing lane. For this rea-
stored after each manual setting or when you
son, make sure of the actual distance from the
store the setting with the memory function
vehicle driving behind by glancing over your
(Y page 115).
shoulder.
Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger
If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is field of vision.
triggered in an accident, the steering column The exterior mirrors are automatically heated
will move upwards when the driver's door is if the rear window heating is switched on and
opened. This occurs irrespective of the posi- the outside temperature is low.
tion of the key in the ignition lock. This makes
it easier to exit the vehicle and rescue the
occupants.
Mirrors 113
i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are

always folded out fully while the vehicle is
in motion, as they may otherwise vibrate.
Setting the exterior mirrors

If the battery has been disconnected or com-
pletely discharged, the exterior mirrors must
be reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise
not fold in when you select the "Fold in mir-
rors when locking" function in the on-board

X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or computer (Y page 244).
2 in the ignition lock. X Make sure that the key is in position 1 in
X Press button : for the left-hand exterior the ignition lock.
mirror or button ; for the right-hand exte- X Briefly press button :.
rior mirror.
The indicator lamp in the corresponding Folding the exterior mirrors in or out
button lights up in red. automatically
The indicator lamp goes out again after
If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function
some time. You can adjust the selected
is activated in the on-board computer
mirror using adjustment button = as long
(Y page 244):
as the indicator lamp is lit.
Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as
X Press adjustment button = up, down, to
soon as you lock the vehicle from the out-
the right or to the left until the exterior mir- side.
ror is set to a position that provides you Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automat-
with a good overview of traffic conditions.
ically as soon as you unlock the vehicle and
then open the driver's or front-passenger
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out door.
electrically
i The mirrors do not fold out if they have
been folded in manually.
Exterior mirror out of position

If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of
position, proceed as follows:
X Vehicles without electrically folding
exterior mirrors: move the exterior mirror
into the correct position manually.
X Vehicles with electrically folding exte-
rior mirrors: press the mirror-folding but-
X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or ton (Y page 113) repeatedly until you hear
2 in the ignition lock. the mirror engage in position.
X Briefly press button :. The mirror housing is engaged again and
Both exterior mirrors fold in or out. you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual
(Y page 112).
Z
114 Mirrors
Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors X Engage reverse gear.

The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
G WARNING side moves to the preset parking position.
If incident light from headlamps is prevented X Use adjustment button = to adjust the
from striking the sensor in the rear-view mir- exterior mirror to a position that allows you
ror, for instance, by luggage piled too high in to see the rear wheel and the kerb.
the vehicle, the mirror's automatic anti-dazzle The parking position is stored.
function will not operate.
Incident light could then blind you. This may i If you shift the transmission to another
distract you from the traffic conditions and, position, the exterior mirror on the front-
as a result, you may cause an accident. passenger side returns to the driving posi-
tion.
The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror i You can also store the parking position
on the driver's side automatically go into anti-
using memory button M ?.
dazzle mode if the ignition is switched on and
incident light from headlamps strikes the sen- X Make sure that the key is in position
sor in the rear-view mirror. 2 in the ignition lock.
The mirrors do not go into anti-dazzle mode if X With the exterior mirror on the front-
reverse gear is engaged or the interior lighting passenger side activated, use adjust-
is switched on. ment button = to adjust the exterior
mirror to a position which allows you
to see the rear wheel and the kerb.
Parking position for the exterior mir- X Press memory button M ? and one of
ror on the front-passenger side the arrows on adjustment button =
Setting and storing the parking position within three seconds.
The parking position is stored if the
You can position the front-passenger side exterior mirror does not move.
exterior mirror in such a way that you can see
If the mirror moves out of position, repeat
the rear wheel on that side as soon as you
the steps.
engage reverse gear. You can store this posi-
tion.
Calling up a stored parking position set-
ting
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock.
X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front-
passenger side with the corresponding but-
ton (Y page 112).
X Engage reverse gear.
side moves to the stored parking position.
X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and

that the key is in position 2 in the ignition
lock.
X Press button ; for the exterior mirror on
the front-passenger side.
Memory function 115

side moves back to its original position:
Ras soon as you exceed a speed of
10 km/h
Rabout ten seconds after you have disen-
gaged reverse gear
Rif you press button : for the exterior mir-
ror on the driver's side

Memory function X Adjust the seat (Y page 106).
Storing settings X On the driver's side, adjust the steering
wheel (Y page 111) and the exterior mirrors
With the memory function, you can store up (Y page 112).
to three different settings, e.g. for three dif- X Press memory button M and then press
ferent people. storage position button 1, 2 or 3 within
The following settings are stored as a single three seconds.
memory preset: The settings are stored in the selected pre-
Rposition of the seat, backrest and head set position. A tone sounds when the set-
restraint tings have been completed.
Rdriver's side: steering wheel position
Rdriver's side: position of the exterior mir-
rors on the driver's and front-passenger Calling up a stored setting
sides ! If you want to move the seat from the fully
G WARNING reclined position to a stored seat position,
The memory function can still be used when first raise the backrest. The seat could oth-
the key has been removed. For this reason, erwise be damaged.
children should never be left unsupervised in X Press and hold the relevant storage posi-
the vehicle. They could otherwise become tion button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat, steering
trapped when adjusting the seat or the steer- wheel and exterior mirrors are in the stored
ing wheel. position.
G WARNING i The setting procedure is interrupted as

soon as you release the storage position
Only use the memory function on the driver's
button.
side when the vehicle is stationary. Other-
wise, you could be distracted from the traffic
conditions by the steering wheel and seat
moving of their own accord, and as a result
cause an accident.
Z
116
117

Exterior lighting ................................ 118
Interior lighting ................................. 124
Changing bulbs ................................. 125
Windscreen wipers ........................... 129
Lights and windscreen wipers

118 Exterior lighting
Useful information If the headlamps are converted to symmetri-

cal dipped beam, the "motorway mode" and
i This Owner's Manual describes all models "extended range foglamps" functions (Intelli-
and all standard and optional equipment gent Light System) are not available.
available to your vehicle at the time of pub-
specific deviations are possible. Please Light switch
note that your vehicle may not be equipped Operation
functions.
Exterior lighting
For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you drive with the lights switched 1W Left-hand parking lamps
on even during the daytime. In some coun- 2X Right-hand parking lamps
tries, operation of the headlamps varies due
3T Side lamps, licence plate and instru-
to legal requirements and self-imposed obli-
ment cluster lighting
gations.
4Ã Automatic headlamp mode/daytime
driving lights
Notes on driving abroad 5L Dipped-beam/main-beam head-
lamps
Convert to symmetrical dipped beam BR Rear foglamp
when driving abroad: switch the headlamps
to symmetrical dipped beam in countries in CN Foglamps8
which traffic drives on the opposite side of the The turn signals, main-beam headlamps and
road to the country where the vehicle is reg- the headlamp flasher are operated using the
istered. This prevents glare to oncoming traf- combination switch (Y page 120).
fic. Symmetrical lights do not illuminate as
! Switch off the side lamps and parking
large an area of the edge of the carriageway.
lamp when you leave the vehicle. This pre-
Convert the headlamps as close to the border vents the battery from discharging.
as possible before driving in these countries
(Y page 240). The exterior lighting (except the side lamps/
Convert to asymmetrical dipped beam parking lamps) switches off automatically if
after returning: convert the headlamps back you:
to asymmetrical dipped beam as soon as pos- Rremove the key from the ignition lock
sible after crossing the border when returning Ropen the driver's door with the key in posi-
(Y page 240). tion 0
8 Only vehicles with front foglamps have the "Foglamps" function.

Exterior lighting 119
If you hear a warning tone when you leave the When the dipped-beam headlamps are
vehicle, the lights may still be switched on. switched on, the L indicator lamp in the
X Turn the light switch to Ã. instrument cluster lights up.
G WARNING
Dipped-beam headlamps If the light switch is set to Ã, the dipped-
X To switch on the dipped-beam head- beam headlamps will not come on automati-
lamps: turn the key in the ignition lock to cally if it is foggy. This could endanger you and
position 2 or start the engine. others. Therefore, turn the light switch to
X Turn the light switch to L. L in fog.
The L indicator lamp in the instrument The automatic headlamp feature is only an
cluster lights up. aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's
lighting at all times.

Daytime driving lights
Foglamps
You can activate or deactivate the daytime
driving lights function using the on-board Only vehicles with front foglamps have the
computer (Y page 239). "Foglamps" function.
X To activate the daytime driving lights: G WARNING
you can activate the daytime driving lights If you suspect that driving conditions will be
function using the on-board computer foggy, turn the light switch to L before you
(vehicles with a 12-button multifunction start your journey. Otherwise, your vehicle
steering wheel). may not be visible and you could endanger
X Turn the light switch to Ã. yourself and others.
When the engine is on: depending on the
ambient light conditions, the daytime driv- X To switch on the foglamps: turn the key
ing lights or the parking and dipped-beam in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the
headlamps are switched on. engine.
When the dipped-beam headlamps are X Turn the light switch to T, L or
switched on, the L indicator lamp in the Ã.
instrument cluster lights up. X Press the N button.
The green N indicator lamp in the instru-
Automatic headlamp mode ment cluster lights up.
X To switch off the front foglamps: press
X To switch on automatic headlamp
mode: turn the light switch to Ã. the N button.
Key in position 1 in the ignition lock: the The green N indicator lamp in the instru-
side lamps are switched on or off automat- ment cluster goes out.
ically depending on the brightness of the
ambient light. Rear foglamp
With the engine running: depending on the X To switch on the rear foglamp: turn the
brightness of the ambient light, the daytime key in the ignition lock to position 2 or start
driving lights9 or the dipped-beam head- the engine.
lamps are switched on or off automatically. X Turn the light switch to L or Ã.
9 Only if daytime driving lights have been activated via the on-board computer.
Z
X Press the R button. Headlamp cleaning system

The yellow R indicator lamp in the
The headlamps are cleaned automatically if
instrument cluster lights up. the "Wipe with washer fluid" function is oper-
X To switch off the rear foglamp: press the ated ten times while the lights are on and the
R button. engine is running (Y page 129).
The yellow R indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out.
Vehicles with front foglamps: when the light Combination switch
switch is in the T position, the rear fog- Turn signals
lamp can only be switched on if the foglamps
(without dipped-beam headlamps) are
switched on.
Adjusting the headlamp range (halogen

headlamps)
The headlamp range control allows you to
adjust the cone of light from the headlamps
to suit the vehicle load.
: Main-beam headlamps
; Turn signal, right
= Headlamp flasher
? Turn signal, left
X To indicate briefly: press the combination
switch briefly to the pressure point in the
direction of arrow ; or ?.
The corresponding turn signal flashes three
Headlamp range control times.
g Driver's seat and front-passenger seat X To indicate: press the combination switch
occupied beyond the pressure point in the direction
1 Driver's seat, front-passenger seat and of arrow ; or ?.
rear seats occupied
2 Driver's seat, front-passenger seat and Main-beam headlamps
rear seats occupied, luggage compart-
ment/boot laden X To switch on the main-beam head-
3 Driver's and front-passenger seats occu- lamps: turn the key in the ignition lock to
pied and maximum permissible rear axle position 2 or start the engine.
load utilised, e.g. when towing a trailer X Turn the light switch to L or Ã.
X Start the engine.

X Turn headlamp range control to the posi-
tion which corresponds to the load in your
vehicle.
X Press the combination switch beyond the only the turn signal lamp on the corre-
pressure point in the direction of sponding side of the vehicle will flash.
arrow :. X To switch off the hazard warning
In the Ã position, the main-beam headlamps: press button :.
lamps are only switched on when it is dark
The hazard warning lamps switch off auto-
and the engine is running.
matically if the vehicle reaches a speed of
The K indicator lamp in the instrument over 10 km/h again after full brake applica-
cluster lights up when the main-beam head- tion.
lamps are switched on.
X To switch off the main-beam head-
i The hazard warning lamps still operate if
lamps: move the combination switch back the ignition is switched off.
to its normal position.
The K indicator lamp in the instrument

Intelligent Light System
cluster goes out.
Active light function
Headlamp flasher
X To switch on: turn the key in the ignition
lock to position 1 or 2 or start the engine.
X Pull the combination switch in the direction
of arrow =.
Hazard warning lamps
The active light function is a system that

moves the headlamps according to the steer-
ing movements of the front wheels. In this
way, relevant areas remain illuminated while
driving. This allows you to recognise pedes-
trians, cyclists and animals.
Active: when the lights are switched on.
Cornering light function

The hazard warning lamps automatically
switch on if:
Ran airbag is deployed.
Rthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from a
speed of more than 70 km/h and comes to
a standstill.
X To switch on the hazard warning lamps:
press button :.
All turn signals flash. If you now switch on
a turn signal using the combination switch,
Z
The cornering light function improves the illu- Extended range foglamps
mination of the road over a wide angle in the
direction you are turning, enabling better vis-
ibility in tight bends, for example. It can only
be activated when the dipped-beam head-
lamps are switched on.
Active:
Rif you are driving at speeds below
40 km/h, the cornering light function is
activated either by the turn signal or by the
steering wheel being turned.
Rif you are driving at speeds between
40 km/h and 70 km/h, the cornering light The extended range foglamps reduce the
function is activated by the steering wheel glare experienced by the driver and improve
being turned. the illumination of the edge of the carriage-
way.
Not active: if you are driving at speeds above
40 km/h or switch off the turn signal or turn Active: if you are driving at speeds below
the steering wheel to the straight-ahead posi- 70 km/h and you switch on the rear foglamp
tion. Not active: if you are driving at speeds above
The cornering light function may remain lit for 100 km/h or if you switch off the rear foglamp
a short time, but is automatically switched off following activation
after no more than three minutes.
Motorway mode Adaptive Highbeam Assist

You can use this function to set the head-
lamps to change between dipped beam and
main beam automatically. The system recog-
nises vehicles with their lights on, either
approaching from the opposite direction or
travelling in front of your vehicle, and conse-
quently switches the headlamps from main
beam to dipped beam.
The system automatically adapts the dipped-
beam headlamp range depending on the dis-
tance to the other vehicle. Once the system
Motorway mode increases the range of the no longer detects any other vehicles, it reac-
beam. tivates the main-beam headlamps.
Active: The system's optical sensor is located behind
Rif
the windscreen near the overhead control
you are driving at speeds above
panel.
110 km/h and do not make any large steer-
ing movements for 1000 m
Rif you are driving at speeds above
130 km/h
Not active: if you are driving at speeds below
80 km/h following activation.
indicator lamp in the instrument cluster

stays on.
X To deactivate: move the combination
switch back to its normal position.
The _ indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster goes out.
G WARNING
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid
designed to assist driving. The driver is
responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting
to the prevailing light, vision and traffic con-
ditions.

The system may be impaired or deactivated:
Rif there is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow,
rain, fog or spray
X To activate: activate the Adaptive High-
Rif the area of the windscreen around the
beam Assist function using the on-board
computer (Y page 240). optical sensor is dirty, misted up or covered
X Turn the light switch to Ã.
up, e.g. by a sticker
The system may not recognise the following
X Press the combination switch beyond the
road users:
pressure point in the direction of
arrow : (Y page 120). Rroad users that have no lighting, e.g. pedes-
If it is dark and the light sensor activates trians

the dipped-beam headlamps, the _ Rroad users that have poor lighting, e.g.
indicator lamp in the instrument cluster cyclists
lights up. Rroad users whose lighting is not clearly visi-
If you are driving at speeds above ble, e.g. road users behind a crash barrier
45 km/h: Ron rare occasions: road users that have
the headlamp range is set automatically lights that may be recognised too late or not
depending on the distance between the at all
vehicle and other road users. The automatic main-beam headlamps will not
If you are driving at speeds above be deactivated, or they may be activated
55 km/h and no other road users are rec- despite road users travelling in front of or
ognised: approaching the vehicle.
the main-beam headlamps are switched on Thus, you could cause an accident and injure
automatically. The K indicator lamp in yourself and others. Always observe traffic
the instrument cluster also lights up. conditions and, if necessary, dip the lights
If you are driving at speeds below manually.
45 km/h or other road users are recog-
nised or the roads are adequately lit:
the main-beam headlamps are switched off Headlamps misted up inside
automatically. The K indicator lamp in The headlamps may mist up on the inside if
the instrument cluster goes out. The _ there is high atmospheric humidity.
Z
124 Interior lighting
X Drive with the headlamps switched on.

The level of moisture diminishes, depend-
ing on the length of the journey and the
weather conditions (humidity and temper-
ature).
If the level of moisture does not diminish:
X Have the headlamps checked at a qualified
Interior lighting Rear-compartment overhead control panel

: p To switch the right-hand reading
Overview of interior lighting lamp on/off
; p To switch the left-hand reading lamp

on/off
Interior lighting control

Important notes
In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from
discharging, the interior lighting functions are
automatically deactivated after some time
except for when the key is in position 2 in the
Front overhead control panel
ignition lock.
: u To switch the rear interior lighting
on/off
Automatic interior lighting control
; | To switch the automatic interior
lighting control on/off X To switch on/off: press the | button.
= p To switch the right-hand front read- When the automatic interior lighting con-
ing lamp on/off trol is activated, the button is flush with the
? c To switch the front interior lighting overhead control panel.
on/off The interior lighting automatically switches
A p To switch the left-hand front reading on if you:
lamp on/off Runlock the vehicle
Ropen a door
Rremove the key from the ignition lock
The interior light is activated for a short while

when the key is removed from the ignition
lock. You can activate this delayed switch-off
Changing bulbs 125
Manual interior lighting control Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a

X To switch the front interior lighting on/ Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this pur-
off: press the c button. pose. In particular, work relevant to safety or
X To switch the rear interior lighting on/
off: press the u button.
X To switch the reading lamps on/off: Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of
press the p button. vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure
that these function correctly at all times.
Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.
Crash-responsive emergency lighting
Other bulbs
The interior lighting is activated automatically
if the vehicle is involved in an accident. There are bulbs other than the xenon bulbs

X To switch off the crash-responsive that you cannot replace. Replace only the
emergency lighting: press the hazard bulbs listed (Y page 126). Have the bulbs that
warning lamp button. you cannot replace yourself changed at a
qualified specialist workshop.
or
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a
X Lock and then unlock the vehicle using the
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this pur-
key.
pose. In particular, work relevant to safety or
Changing bulbs
If you require assistance changing bulbs, con-
Important safety notes sult a qualified specialist workshop.
Do not touch the glass tube of new bulbs with
Xenon bulbs your bare hands. Even minor contamination
If your vehicle is equipped with xenon bulbs, can burn into the glass surface and reduce
you can recognise this by the following: the the service life of the bulbs. Always use a lint-
cone of light from the xenon bulbs moves free cloth or only touch the base of the bulb
from the top to the bottom and back again when fitting.
when you start the engine. For this to be Only use bulbs of the correct type.
observed, the lights must be switched on If the new bulb still does not light up, consult
before starting the engine. a qualified specialist workshop.
G DANGER Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of
Xenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You could vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure
get an electric shock and be seriously or even that these function correctly at all times.
fatally injured if you touch the electric con- Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.
tacts on xenon bulbs. Therefore, never G WARNING
remove the cover from xenon bulbs.
Bulbs and lights can become very hot. For this
Do not change xenon bulbs yourself, but have reason, allow them to cool down before
them replaced at a qualified specialist work- changing them. Otherwise, you could burn
shop which has the necessary specialist yourself when you touch them.
knowledge and tools to carry out the work
Keep bulbs out of the reach of children. Oth-
required.
erwise, they could damage them, for example,
and injure themselves.
Z
126 Changing bulbs
Never use a bulb which has been dropped.

Such a bulb may explode and injure you.
Halogen bulbs are pressurised and could
explode when you change them, especially if
they are very hot. You should therefore wear
eye protection and gloves when you are
changing them.
Overview of bulb replacement – bulbs

You can replace the following bulbs. The Tail lamps
details for the bulb type can be found in the : Reversing lamp: P 21 W
legend. ; Brake lamp: P 21 W

= Brake lamp/side lamp: P 21 W
Changing the front bulbs

Dipped-beam headlamps (halogen
headlamps)
Halogen headlamps
: Side lamp/parking lamp: W 5 W
; Main-beam headlamp: H7 55 W
= Dipped-beam headlamp: H7 55 W
X Switch off the lights.

X Open the bonnet.
X Turn housing cover : anti-clockwise and
pull it out.
X Turn bulb holder ; anti-clockwise and pull
it out.
X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;.
Bi-xenon headlamps X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.
: Cornering lamp: H7 55 W X Insert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn
it clockwise.
X Align housing cover : and turn it clock-
wise until it engages.
Changing bulbs 127
Main-beam headlamps (halogen head- X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;.
lamps) X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.
X Insert bulb holder ;.
Cornering light function (Intelligent

Light System)

X Open the bonnet.
pull it out.
X Turn bulb holder ; anti-clockwise and pull
it out.
X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;. X Switch off the lights.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;. X Open the bonnet.
X Insert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn X Turn housing cover : anti-clockwise and
it clockwise. pull it out.
X Align housing cover : and turn it clock- X Turn bulb holder ; anti-clockwise and pull
wise until it engages. it out.
X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;.
Side lamps/parking lamps (halogen X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.
headlamps)
X Insert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn
it clockwise.
Changing the rear bulbs

Opening and closing the side trim pan-
els
You must open the side trim panel in the lug-
X Switch off the lights. gage compartment/boot and remove the
X Open the bonnet.
first-aid kit before you can change the bulbs
in the tail lamps.
pull it out.
X Pull out bulb holder ;.
Z
128 Changing bulbs
Saloon
Right-hand side trim panel

Left-hand side trim panel X To open: turn release knob : in the direc-
tion of the arrow and remove side trim

panel ;.
X To close: insert side trim panel ; and
press it down firmly until it snaps into place.
Tail lamps
X Open the boot or luggage compartment.
X Open the side trim panel (Y page 127).
Right-hand side trim panel

X To open: turn rotary catch : 90° in the
direction of the arrow and remove side trim
panel ;.
X To close: insert side trim panel ; and turn
release knob : 90° in the opposite direc-
tion to the arrow.
Estate
Saloon
Left-hand side trim panel
Estate
Windscreen wipers 129
X Remove the tail lamp connector X Reinsert the connector for LED light func-
X Simultaneously press retaining lugs : in tions in the bulb holder.
the direction of the arrow and slightly pull X Insert the bulb holder again and lock it in
out the bulb holder with the bulbs. place.
X Remove the connector for LED light func- X Insert the tail lamp connector.
tions from the top of the bulb holder. X Close the side trim panel (Y page 127).
X Pull the bulb holder out with the bulbs.
Windscreen wipers
Switching the windscreen wipers on/
off

G WARNING
The windscreen will not longer be wiped prop-
erly if the wiper blades are worn. This could
prevent you from observing the traffic condi-
tions, thereby causing an accident. Replace
the wiper blades twice a year, ideally in spring
Saloon and autumn.
: reversing lamp
; brake lamp ! Do not operate the windscreen wipers
= Side lamp/brake lamp when the windscreen is dry, as this could
damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust
that has collected on the windscreen can
scratch the glass if wiping takes place when
the windscreen is dry.
! If the windscreen wipers leave smears on
the windscreen after the vehicle has been
washed in an automatic car wash, this may
be due to wax or other residue. Clean the
windscreen with washer fluid after an auto-
matic car wash.
Estate
: reversing lamp
; brake lamp
= Side lamp/brake lamp
X Press the respective bulb :, ; or = back
and turn it anti-clockwise to remove it from
the bulb holder.
X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder and
turn it clockwise.
Z
130 Windscreen wipers
Switching the rear window wiper on/

off
Combination switch
1 $ Windscreen wipers off
2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low10 Combination switch

3 Å Intermittent wipe, high11 : è Switch
4 ° Continuous wipe, slow 2 ô To wipe with washer fluid
5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fast 3 I To switch on intermittent wiping
B í Single wipe/ î To wipe the 4 0 To switch off intermittent wiping
windscreen using washer fluid 5 ô To wipe with washer fluid
X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition
lock. lock.
X Turn the combination switch to the corre-
X Turn switch : on the combination switch
sponding position. to the corresponding position.
! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due When the rear window wiper is switched on,
to optical influences and the windscreen the icon appears in the instrument cluster.
becoming dirty in dry weather conditions,
the windscreen wipers may be activated
inadvertently. This could damage the wind- Replacing the wiper blades
screen wiper blades or scratch the wind-
screen.
For this reason, you should always switch G WARNING
off the windscreen wipers in dry weather. The wiper arms could start moving and cause
In the Ä or Å position, the appropriate an injury if you leave the windscreen wipers
wiping frequency is set automatically accord- switched on.
ing to the intensity of the rain. In the Å Remove the key from the ignition lock before
position, the rain sensor is more sensitive replacing the wiper blades.
than in the Ä position, causing the wind-
screen wiper to wipe more frequently. ! To avoid damaging the windscreen wiper
blades, make sure that you touch only the
wiper arm of the windscreen wiper.
10 Rain sensor set to low sensitivity.

11 Rain sensor set to high sensitivity.
Windscreen wipers 131
! Never open the bonnet if a windscreen Make sure that the wiper blade slides fully
wiper arm has been folded away from the onto the retaining pin on the wiper arm.
windscreen. X Turn the wiper blade parallel to the wiper
Never fold a windscreen wiper arm without arm.
a wiper blade back onto the windscreen/ X Fold the wiper arm back onto the wind-
rear window. screen.
Hold the windscreen wiper arm firmly when
you change the wiper blade. If you release Replacing the rear window wiper blade
the windscreen wiper arm without a wiper
blade and it falls onto the windscreen, the G WARNING
windscreen may be damaged by the force The wiper arm could be set in motion and
of the impact. injure you if the windscreen wipers are
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have switched on.

the wiper blades replaced by a qualified Remove the key from the ignition lock before
specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes- replacing the wiper blade.
Benz Service Centre.
Removing the wiper blade
Replacing the windscreen wiper blades
Removing the wiper blades
X Remove the key from the ignition lock or
turn the key to position 0 (KEYLESS-GO).
X Fold the wiper arm away from the wind-
screen until it engages.
X Set the wiper blade at right angles to the
wiper arm.

X Fold wiper arm : away from the rear win-
dow until it engages.
X Position wiper blade ; at a right angle to
wiper arm :.
X Hold wiper arm : and press wiper
blade ; in the direction of the arrow until
it releases.
X Remove wiper blade ;.
X Remove the wiper blade from the retaining
pin on the wiper arm in the direction of the Fitting the wiper blade
arrow.
X Place new wiper blade ; onto wiper
Fitting the wiper blades arm :.

X Push the new wiper blade onto the retain- X Hold wiper arm : and press wiper
ing pin on the wiper arm in the opposite blade ; in the opposite direction to the
direction to the arrow. arrow until it engages.
Z
132 Windscreen wipers
X Make sure that wiper blade ; is seated

correctly.
X Position wiper blade ; parallel to wiper
arm :.
X Fold wiper arm : back onto the rear win-
dow.
Problems with the windscreen wipers

The windscreen wipers are obstructed
Leaves or snow, for example, may be
obstructing the windscreen wiper movement.

The wiper motor has been deactivated.
X For safety reasons, you should remove the
key from the ignition lock.
or
X Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop
button and open the driver's door.
X Remove the cause of the obstruction.
X Switch the windscreen wipers back on.
The windscreen wipers are inoperative

The windscreen wiper drive is malfunctioning.
X Select another wiper speed on the combi-
nation switch.
X Have the windscreen wipers checked at a
The spray nozzles are misaligned

The windscreen washer fluid from the spray
nozzles no longer hits the centre of the wind-
screen. The spray nozzles are misaligned.
X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a quali-
fied specialist workshop.
133

Overview of climate control sys-
tems ................................................... 134
Operating the climate control sys-
tem ..................................................... 137
Adjusting the air vents ..................... 147
Climate control
134 Overview of climate control systems
Useful information pollen. A clogged filter reduces the amount

of air supplied to the vehicle interior. For
i This Owner's Manual describes all models this reason, you should always observe the
and all standard and optional equipment interval for replacing the filter, which is
available to your vehicle at the time of pub- specified in the Service Booklet. As it
lication of the Owner's Manual. Country- depends on environmental conditions, e.g.
specific deviations are possible. Please heavy air pollution, the interval may be
note that your vehicle may not be equipped shorter than stated in the Service Booklet.
with all features described. This also i It is possible that the residual heat func-
applies to safety-relevant systems and tion may be activated automatically an hour
functions. after the key is removed. The vehicle is then
i Please read the information on qualified ventilated for 30 minutes to dry the air-
specialist workshops (Y page 28). conditioning system.
Climate control
Overview of climate control systems

G WARNING
Observe the settings recommended on the
following pages. Otherwise, the windows
could mist up. This may obstruct your view of
the traffic situation and, as a result, you may
cause an accident.
THERMATIC/THERMOTRONIC automatic cli-

mate control controls the temperature and
the humidity of the vehicle interior and filters
out undesirable substances from the air.
THERMATIC/THERMOTRONIC automatic cli-
mate control is only operational when the
engine is running12. Optimum operation is
only achieved when you drive with the side
windows and sliding sunroof/panorama slid-
ing sunroof closed.
i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period
during warm weather, e.g. using the con-
venience opening feature (Y page 97). This
will speed up the cooling process and the
desired vehicle interior temperature will be
reached more quickly.
i The integrated filter can filter out most
particles of dust and completely filters out
12 THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control: the residual heat function can only be activated/deactivated
when the ignition is switched off.
Overview of climate control systems 135
Control panel for THERMATIC automatic climate control (2-zone)
Climate control
: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 138)
; Demists the windscreen (Y page 140)
= Activates/deactivates the ZONE function (Y page 140)
? Activates/deactivates cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 137)
A Switches the rear window heating on/off (Y page 141)
B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 138)
C Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 141)
D Sets the air distribution (Y page 139)
E Increases the airflow (Y page 139)
F Reduces the airflow (Y page 139)
G Switches climate control on/off (Y page 137)
H Sets climate control to automatic mode (Y page 138)
Notes on using THERMATIC automatic ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.
climate control if there are unpleasant outside odours or

when in a tunnel. The windows could oth-
The following contains notes and recommen- erwise mist up, as in air-recirculation mode,
dations on optimum use of THERMATIC auto- no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle.
matic climate control. RUse the ZONE function to adopt the tem-
RActivate climate control using the Ã and
perature settings on the driver's side for
¿ buttons. The indicator lamps in the the front-passenger side as well. The indi-
Ã and ¿ buttons light up. cator lamp in the á button goes out.
RSet the temperature to 22 †.
ROnly use the demisting function briefly until
the windscreen is clear again.
Z
136 Overview of climate control systems
Control panel for THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control (3-zone)

Climate control
Front control panel

: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 138)
; Demists the windscreen (Y page 140)
= Activates/deactivates the residual heat function (Y page 142)
? Activates/deactivates cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 137)
A Switches the rear window heating on/off (Y page 141)
B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 138)
C Activates/deactivates the ZONE function (Y page 140)
D Switches climate control on/off (Y page 137)
E Sets the air distribution (Y page 139)
F Increases the airflow (Y page 139)
G Reduces the airflow (Y page 139)
H Sets the climate mode (Y page 138)
I Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 141)
J Sets climate control to automatic mode (Y page 138)
Rear control panel

K Increases the airflow (Y page 139)
L Reduces the airflow (Y page 139)
M Display
N Reduces the temperature (Y page 138)
O Increases the temperature (Y page 138)
Operating the climate control system 137
Notes on using THERMOTRONIC auto- Activating/deactivating

matic climate control X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
Below, you can find a number of notes and lock.
recommendations to help you use X To switch on: press the Ã button.
THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control The indicator lamp in the Ã button lights
optimally. up. Airflow and air distribution are set to
RSwitch on climate control using the Ã automatic mode.
and ¿ buttons. The indicator lamps in or
the Ã and ¿ buttons light up. X Press button ^.
RIn automatic mode, you can also use the The indicator lamp in the ^ button goes
ñ button to set a climate mode out. The previously selected settings come
(FOCUS/MEDIUM/DIFFUSE). The into effect again.
MEDIUM level is recommended. X To switch off: press the ^ button.
RSet the temperature to 22 †. The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights
Climate control
ROnly use the demisting function briefly until up.
the windscreen is clear again.
ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.
if there are unpleasant outside odours or Activating/deactivating the cooling
when in a tunnel. The windows could oth- with air dehumidification function
erwise mist up, as in air-recirculation mode,
no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle. Important information
RUse the ZONE function to adopt the tem- The cooling with air dehumidification function
perature settings on the driver's side for is only available when the engine is running.
the front-passenger side and the rear com- The air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehu-
partment as well. The indicator lamp in the midified according to the temperature selec-
á button goes out. ted.
RUse the residual heat function if you want
G WARNING
to heat or ventilate the vehicle interior
If the "cooling with air dehumidification" func-
when the ignition is switched off. The resid-
tion is deactivated, the air inside the vehicle
ual heat function can only be activated or
will not be cooled (during warm weather) or
deactivated with the ignition switched off.
dehumidified. The windows could mist up
more quickly. This may prevent you from
observing the traffic conditions, thereby caus-
Operating the climate control system
ing an accident.
Switching climate control on/off
Condensation may drip from the underside of
Important information the vehicle when THERMOTRONIC is in cool-
i When climate control is switched off, the ing mode. This is normal and not a sign that
there is a malfunction.
air supply and air circulation are also
switched off. Only select this setting i The cooling with air dehumidification
briefly. Otherwise, the windows may mist function uses refrigerant R134a. This cool-
up. ant does not contain chlorofluorocarbons,
i Switch on climate control primarily using and therefore does not damage the ozone
layer.
the Ã button (Y page 138).
Z
138 Operating the climate control system
Activating/deactivating X To switch off: press the _ button.

X To activate: press the ¿ button. or
The indicator lamp in the ¿ button lights X Press the K or I button.
up. The indicator lamp in the Ã button goes
X To switch off: press the ¿ button. out. Automatic air distribution and airflow
The indicator lamp in the ¿ button goes are deactivated.
out. The cooling with air dehumidification
function has a delayed switch-off feature.
Setting the climate mode
Problems with the cooling with air This function is only available with the
dehumidification function THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control.
When you press the ¿ button, the indica- The climate control settings are especially
tor lamp in the button flashes three times or effective at high temperatures.
remains off. You can no longer switch on the You can select the following climate control
Climate control
cooling with air dehumidification function. settings in automatic mode:

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. FOCUS high airflow that is set slightly
cooler
MEDIUM medium airflow, standard setting
Setting climate control to automatic DIFFUSE low airflow that is set slightly
mode warmer and with a lower rate of
airflow
In automatic mode, the set temperature is
maintained automatically at a constant level. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
The system automatically regulates the tem- lock.
perature of the dispensed air, the airflow and X Press the Ã button.
the air distribution. X Press the ñ button repeatedly until the
Automatic mode will achieve optimal opera- desired climate mode appears in the dis-
tion if cooling with air dehumidification is also play.
activated. If desired, cooling with air dehu-
midification can be deactivated.
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition Setting the temperature
lock.
X Set the desired temperature.
THERMATIC automatic climate control
X To activate: press the Ã button. Different temperatures can be set for the
The indicator lamp in the Ã button lights driver's and front-passenger sides.
up. Automatic air distribution and airflow X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
are activated. lock.
i THERMOTRONIC automatic climate con- X To increase/reduce: turn controls : and
trol: when automatic mode is activated, you B clockwise or anti-clockwise

can select a climate mode setting (Y page 135).
(Y page 138). Only change the temperature setting in
small increments. Start at 22 †.
THERMOTRONIC automatic climate Setting the air distribution

control
Air distribution settings
P Directs the airflow through the centre
and side air vents.
O Directs the airflow through the foot-
well air vents.
S Directs the airflow through the centre
and side air vents and the footwell air
vents.
¯ Directs the airflow through the demis-
ter vents.
THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control zones b Directs the airflow through the centre
and side air vents as well as the demis-
You can select different temperature settings
ter vents.
Climate control
for the driver's and front-passenger sides as
well as for the rear compartment. a Directs the airflow through the foot-
well and demister vents.
_ Directs the airflow through the demis-
lock.
ter, centre and side air vents as well as
X To increase/reduce the temperature in
the footwell air vents.
the front: turn controls : and B clock-
wise or anti-clockwise (Y page 136). i Regardless of the air distribution setting,
Only change the temperature setting in airflow is always directed through the side
small increments. Start at 22 †. air vents. The side air vents can only be
closed when the controls on the side air
vents are turned downwards.
the rear compartment using the front
control panel: press the á button. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
The indicator lamp in the á button goes lock.
out. X Press the _ button repeatedly until the
X Turn control : clockwise or anti-clockwise desired symbol appears in the display.
(Y page 136). The indicator lamp in the Ã button goes
Only change the temperature setting in out. Automatic control is deactivated and
small increments. Start at 22 †. the air distribution is controlled according
to the selected setting.
the rear compartment using the rear
control panel: press the r or s
button on the rear control panel. Setting the airflow
Only change the temperature setting in X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
small increments. Start at 22 †. lock.
X To increase/reduce: press the K or
i If you leave the vehicle parked for longer
I button.
than 30 minutes, the temperature setting
for the rear compartment then switches i You can use THERMOTRONIC automatic
back to 22 †. climate control to set the airflow in the rear
compartment separately.
Z
Switching the ZONE function on/off The climate control system switches to the
following functions:
X To switch on: press the á button.
Rcooling with air dehumidification on
The indicator lamp in the á button lights
up. Rhigh airflow13
THERMATIC automatic climate control: the Rhigh temperature13
temperature setting for the driver's side is Rair distribution to the windscreen and
not adopted for the front-passenger side. front side windows
THERMOTRONIC automatic climate con- Rair-recirculation mode off
trol: the temperature setting for the driver's
side is not adopted for the front-passenger
X To switch off: press the ¬ button.
side and the rear compartment. The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes
out. The previously selected settings come
When the buttons for temperature, airflow or into effect again. The cooling with air dehu-
air distribution are activated, the temperature midification function remains on. Air-recir-
setting for the driver's side is not adopted for culation mode remains deactivated.
the other climate control zones.
Climate control
or
X To switch off: press the á button.
X Press the Ã button.
The indicator lamp in the á button goes The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes
out. out. Airflow and air distribution are set to
THERMATIC automatic climate control: the automatic mode.
temperature setting for the driver's side is or
adopted for the front-passenger side.
X Turn temperature control : or B clock-
THERMOTRONIC automatic climate con-
wise or anti-clockwise (Y page 135),
trol: the temperature setting for the driver's
(Y page 136).
side is adopted for the front-passenger side
and the rear compartment. or
X Press the K or I button.
Demisting the windscreen

Demisting the windows
You can use this function to defrost the wind-
screen or to demist the inside of the wind- Windows misted up on the inside
screen and the side windows.
X Activate the ¿ cooling with air dehu-
i You should only select the demisting midification function.
function until the windscreen is clear again. X Activate automatic mode Ã.
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition X If the windows continue to mist up, activate
lock. the demisting function (Y page 140).
X To activate: press the ¬ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button lights i You should only select this setting until
up. the windscreen is clear again.
13 Depending on the outside temperature.

Windows misted up on the outside Activating/deactivating air-recircula-

XActivate the windscreen wipers. tion mode
XPress the _ button repeatedly until the You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if
O or P symbol appears in the dis- unpleasant odours are entering the vehicle
play. from outside. The air already inside the vehi-
i You should only select this setting until cle will then be recirculated.
the windscreen is clear again. The operation of air-recirculation mode is the
same for all control panels.
G WARNING
Rear window heating
Only switch over to air-recirculation mode
Activating/deactivating briefly at low outside temperatures. Other-
wise, the windows could mist up, thus impair-
G WARNING ing visibility and endangering yourself and
Clear all windows of ice or snow before setting others. This may prevent you from observing
Climate control
off. Otherwise, impaired visibility could the traffic conditions, thereby causing an
endanger you and others. accident.
The rear window heating has a high current X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
draw. You should therefore switch it off as lock.
soon as the window is clear. as it only X To activate: press the g button.
switches off automatically after several The indicator lamp in the g button lights
minutes. up.
If the battery voltage is too low, the rear win-
dow heating may switch off. i In the event of high pollution levels14 or at
high outside temperatures, air-recircula-
tion mode is automatically activated. When
lock.
air-recirculation mode is activated auto-
X Press the ¤ button.
matically, the indicator lamp in the g
The indicator lamp in the ¤ button lights button is not lit.
up or goes out.
Outside air is added after about 30
minutes.
Problems with the rear window heating
X To switch off: press the g button.
The rear window heating has switched off The indicator lamp in the g button goes
prematurely or cannot be activated. out.
X Switch off any consumers that are not
required, e.g. reading lamps or interior
lighting.
When the battery is sufficiently charged,
the rear window heating is activated again
automatically.
14 THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control only.
Z
i Air-recirculation mode deactivates auto- sliding sunroof move back to their original
matically: position.
Rafter approximately five minutes at out- The indicator lamp in the g button goes
side temperatures below approximately out. Air-recirculation mode is deactivated.
5† i If you open the side windows or the sliding
Rafter approximately five minutes if cool- sunroof/panorama sliding sunroof man-
ing with air dehumidification is deactiva- ually after closing them with the conveni-
ted ence closing feature, they will remain in this
Rafter approximately 30 minutes at out- position when opened using the conveni-
side temperatures above approximately ence opening feature.
5†
Activating/deactivating the residual

Convenience opening/closing using heat function
the air-recirculation button The residual heat function is only available
Climate control
G WARNING with THERMOTRONIC automatic climate con-

Make sure that nobody can become trapped trol.
between the side window and the door frame It is possible to make use of the residual heat
as the side windows are opened and closed. of the engine to continue heating the station-
Make sure that all objects and body parts are ary vehicle for up to 30 minutes after the
clear of the side windows when they are being engine has been switched off. The heating
opened or closed. You or the objects could be time depends on the temperature that has
drawn in or become trapped between the side been set.
window and the door frame as the window i The blower will run at a low speed regard-
moves. If there is a risk of entrapment, oper- less of the airflow setting.
ate the W switch to move the side window
in the opposite direction. i If you activate the residual heat function
at high temperatures, only the ventilation
will be activated. The blower runs at
as the sliding sunroof/panorama sliding sun-
medium speed.
roof is opened and closed. If there is a risk of
entrapment, operate the 3 switch to move X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition
the sliding sunroof/panorama sliding sunroof lock or remove it.
in the opposite direction. X To activate: press the Ì button.
The indicator lamp in the Ì button lights
X Convenience closing feature: press and up.
hold the g button until the side win-
dows and the sliding sunroof/panorama X To switch off: press the Ì button.
sliding sunroof are closed. The indicator lamp in the Ì button goes
The indicator lamp in the g button lights out.
up. Air-recirculation mode is activated. i Residual heat is deactivated automati-
X Convenience opening feature: press and cally:
hold the g button until the side win- Rafter about 30 minutes
dows and the sliding sunroof/panorama Rwhen the ignition is switched on
sliding sunroof are opened. The side win-
Rif the battery voltage drops
dows and the sliding sunroof/panorama
Rif the coolant temperature is too low
Auxiliary heating You cannot use the auxiliary ventilation to

cool the vehicle interior to a temperature
Important safety notes lower than the outside temperature.
G WARNING
Before switching on
Exhaust fumes are produced when the auxili-
ary heating is in operation. Inhaling these X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
exhaust fumes can be poisonous. You should lock.
therefore switch off the auxiliary heating in X Set the temperature.
confined spaces without an extraction sys-
The auxiliary heating/ventilation can be acti-
tem, e.g. a garage.
vated even when the climate control is being
controlled manually. Optimum comfort can
G WARNING be attained when the system is set to auto-
When operating the auxiliary heating, parts of matic mode. Set the temperature to 22 †.
the vehicle may become very hot, and highly
The auxiliary heating/ventilation can be acti-
inflammable material such as fuels could be
vated or deactivated using the remote control
Climate control
ignited. Operating the auxiliary heating is thus
or the button on the centre console.
prohibited at filling stations or when your vehi-
cle is being refuelled. You must therefore The on-board computer can be used to spec-
switch off the auxiliary heating at filling sta- ify up to three departure times, one of which
tions. may be preselected (Y page 242).
! Operating the auxiliary heating/ventila- Switching the auxiliary heating/venti-

tion draws on the vehicle battery. After you lation on/off using the centre console
have heated or ventilated the vehicle a button
maximum of two times, drive for a longer
distance.
i Switch on the auxiliary heating regularly,
e.g. for about ten minutes every month.
The auxiliary heating heats the air in the vehi-
cle interior to the set temperature without
using the heat of the running engine. The aux-
iliary heating is operated directly using the
vehicle's fuel. For this reason, the tank con-
tent must be at least at reserve fuel level to
ensure that the auxiliary heating functions. Button on the centre console
The auxiliary heating/ventilation automati- The colours of the indicator lamps on the but-
cally adjusts to changes in temperature and ton have the following meanings:
weather conditions. For this reason, the aux-
iliary heating could switch from ventilation Blue Auxiliary ventilation switched on
mode to heating mode or from heating mode Red Auxiliary heating switched on
to ventilation mode. Yellow Departure time preselected
The auxiliary heating switches off automati- (Y page 242)
cally after 50 minutes. This time limit can be
altered. To do this, visit a qualified specialist
workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre.
Z
Switching on auxiliary heating/ventila-

tion
X Press button :.
The red or blue indicator lamp in but-
ton : lights up.
Switching off auxiliary heating/ventila-

tion
X Press button :.
The red or blue indicator lamp in but-
ton : goes out. Auxiliary heating remote control
: Display
Switching the auxiliary heating/venti- ; . To check the status/set the depar-
lation on/off using the remote control ture time
Your vehicle comes with one remote control. = ^ To switch off the auxiliary heating/
Climate control
You may use two additional remote controls ventilation

for your vehicle. For further information, con- ? u To switch on the auxiliary heating/
sult a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a ventilation
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. A , To check the status/set the depar-
The remote control has a maximum range of ture time
approximately 300 metres. This range is
reduced by: Switching on auxiliary heating/ventila-
tion
Rsources of radio interference
X Press the u button.
Rsolid objects between the remote control
ON is shown in the remote control display.
and the vehicle
Rthe remote control being in an unfavoura- Switching off auxiliary heating/ventila-
ble position in relation to the vehicle tion
Rtransmitting from an enclosed space X Press the ^ button.
i The optimum range can be achieved if you OFF is shown in the remote control display.
hold the remote control vertically, pointing
Checking the status of the auxiliary heat-
upwards when you press one of the but-
ing/ventilation
tons.
X Press the , or . button.
i A battery symbol appears in the display
when the battery in the remote control is The following messages can appear in the
low. Replace the remote control battery display:
(Y page 145). Display Meaning
The auxiliary heating/
ventilation is switched
off.
The auxiliary ventilation

X Press the u and ^ buttons simulta-
is switched on. The num- neously.
ber in the display shows The new departure time is stored.
the remaining time (in
Activating the set departure time
minutes) for the auxiliary
X Press the , or . button repeatedly
ventilation.
until the desired departure time appears in
The auxiliary heating is the display.
switched on. The number X Press the u button.
in the display shows the The Í symbol and the departure time
remaining time (in
appear in the display.
minutes) for the auxiliary
heating. Deactivating a set departure time
A departure time has X Press the , or . button.
been activated. The The status of the auxiliary heating is shown
Climate control
departure time appears in the display.
in the display. X Press the . button.
A departure time has The first departure time stored appears in

been activated. The aux- the display.
iliary ventilation is cur- X Press the ^ button.
rently selected. The The display message OFF appears in the

departure time appears display.
in the display.
A departure time has
Replacing the remote control battery
been activated. The aux- One 6 V pin battery, type 2CR11108 is
iliary heating is currently required.
selected. The departure
time appears in the dis-
play.
Setting a departure time

X Press the , or . button repeatedly
until the time to be changed appears in the
display.
X Press the u and ^ buttons simulta-
neously.
The Î symbol in the remote control dis-
play flashes. X Prise apart the side arms of battery
X Press the , or . button to set the cover ; and pull off battery cover ;.
desired departure time. X Remove old battery :.
X Insert the new battery. Observe the polarity
i The longer you press the , or .
signs on the back of the remote control
button, the faster the time changes.
when doing so.
Z
X Slide battery cover ; back onto the

remote control.
X Use the remote control to check the vehi-
cle's auxiliary heating functions.
Climate control
Adjusting the air vents 147
Problems with the auxiliary heating/ventilation
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
FAIL The starter battery is not charged sufficiently or the system is

faulty.
X Charge the starter battery.
X Make another attempt to switch on the auxiliary heating using
the remote control.
X Have the auxiliary heating checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
$ The signal transmission between the transmitter and the vehicle

is faulty.
FAIL
X Change your position in relation to the vehicle, moving closer if
necessary.
Climate control
X Make another attempt to switch the auxiliary heating on or off
using the remote control.
© There is not enough fuel in the fuel tank, or the auxiliary heating
is faulty.
FAIL
X Refuel at the nearest filling station.
X Make another attempt to switch on the auxiliary heating using
the remote control.
X Have the auxiliary heating checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Adjusting the air vents In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air
through the air vents into the vehicle interior,
Important safety notes please observe the following notes:
G WARNING Rkeep the air inlet between the windscreen
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air and the bonnet free of blockages, such as
vents. This could cause burns or frostbite to ice, snow or leaves
bare skin in the immediate vicinity of the Rnever cover the vents or air inlets in the
vents. Keep bare skin away from these air vehicle interior.
outlets. If necessary, direct the airflow away i For virtually draught-free ventilation,
to a different area of the vehicle interior.
adjust the sliders of the air vents to the
centre position.
Z
148 Adjusting the air vents
Setting the centre air vents flow depends on the airflow and air distribu-
tion settings.
! Close the air vent when heating the vehi-
cle.
At high outside temperatures, open the air
vent and activate the "cooling with air dehu-
midification" function. Otherwise, temper-
ature-sensitive items stored in the glove
compartment could be damaged.
: Centre air vent, left

; Centre air vent, right
= Centre vent thumbwheel, right
Climate control
? Centre vent thumbwheel, left

X To open/close: turn thumbwheels =
and ? up or down.
: Air vent thumbwheel

Setting the side air vents ; Air vent
X To open/close: turn thumbwheel :
clockwise or anti-clockwise.
Setting the rear-compartment air

vents
Setting the centre vents in the rear com-
partment
X To open/close: turn thumbwheel = to the

left or right.
i Side window demister vent : is never
completely shut, even if side air vent ; is
shut.
Setting the glove compartment air

vent : Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheel
When automatic climate control is activated, ; Rear-compartment air vent, right
the glove compartment can be ventilated, for
instance to cool its contents. The level of air-
Adjusting the air vents 149
= Rear control panel for THERMOTRONIC

automatic climate control
? Rear-compartment air vent, left
X To open/close: turn thumbwheel : up or
down.
Climate control
Z
150
151

Running-in notes ............................... 152
Driving ............................................... 152
Manual transmission ........................ 160
Driving and parking

Automatic transmission ................... 161
Refuelling ........................................... 168
Parking ............................................... 174
Driving tips ........................................ 175
Driving systems ................................ 178
Towing a trailer ................................. 215
152 Driving
Useful information Vehicles with automatic transmission:

RIf possible, do not depress the accelerator
i This Owner's Manual describes all models pedal past the point of resistance (kick-
and all standard and optional equipment down).
available to your vehicle at the time of pub- ROnly select shift ranges 3, 2 or 1 when driv-
Driving and parking
lication of the Owner's Manual. Country- ing slowly, e.g. in mountainous terrain.
After 1,500 km, you may gradually bring the
vehicle up to full road and engine speeds.
applies to safety-relevant systems and Additional running-in notes for AMG vehicles:
functions. Rdo not drive at speeds above 140 km/h for
i Please read the information on qualified the first 1,500 km.

Ronly allow the engine to reach a maximum
engine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly.
i You should also observe these notes on
Running-in notes running in if the engine or parts of the drive
Important safety notes train on your vehicle have been replaced.
G WARNING
New brake pads/linings only have optimal AMG vehicles with rear axle locking
braking performance after several hundred differential
kilometres. Until then, compensate for this by Your vehicle is fitted with a self-locking dif-
applying greater force to the brake pedal. This ferential on the rear axle. Change the oil after
also applies when brake pads/linings or a running-in period of 3,000 km to improve
brake discs have been changed. protection of the rear axle differential. This oil
change extends the service life of the differ-
ential. Have the oil change carried out at a
The first 1,500 km qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-
The more you look after the engine when it is Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-
new, the more satisfied you will be with its Benz Service Centre for this purpose.
performance in the future.
RTherefore, drive at varying speeds and Driving
engine speeds for the first 1,500 km.
RAvoid heavy loads on the engine during this Important safety notes
period, e.g. driving at full throttle. G WARNING
RChange gear in good time, at the latest
Do not place any objects in the driver's foot-
when the rev counter needle is 2/3 of the well. If you use a floormat or carpet in the
way to the red area in the rev counter dis- driver's footwell, make sure that it is correctly
play. secured and that there is sufficient clearance
RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to for the pedals.
brake the vehicle. Do not place several floormats on top of one
another.
Loose objects or the floormats could other-
wise get caught between the pedals if you
Driving 153
accelerate or brake suddenly. You will then Key positions

not be able to brake, declutch or accelerate
as intended. This could lead to accidents and Key
injury.
Driving and parking

G WARNING
Do not change down for additional engine
braking on a slippery road surface. This could
cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and
the vehicle could skid. This could cause you
accident.
! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not use

the engine's full performance until it has g To remove the key
reached operating temperature. 1 Power supply for some consumers, such
Only set the automatic transmission to the as the windscreen wipers
respective drive positions when the vehicle 2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)
is stationary. and drive position
Where possible, avoid spinning the drive 3 To start the engine
wheels when pulling away on slippery If the key is at position 0 in the ignition lock
roads. Otherwise, you could damage the for a longer period, it can no longer be turned
drive train. in the ignition lock. The steering is then
! AMG vehicles: at low engine oil tempera- locked. To unlock it, remove the key and rein-
tures (below +20 †), the maximum engine sert it into the ignition lock.
speed is restricted in order to protect the The steering wheel is locked when the key is
engine. To protect the engine and maintain removed from the ignition lock.
smooth engine operation, avoid driving at
i If the key does not belong to the vehicle
full throttle when the engine is cold.
it can still be turned in the ignition lock.
However, the ignition will not be switched
on The engine cannot be started.
KEYLESS-GO
General notes
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with
a key featuring an integrated KEYLESS-GO
function and a detachable Start/Stop button.
The Start/Stop button must be inserted into
the ignition lock and the key must be in the
vehicle.
Pressing the Start/Stop button several times
in succession corresponds to the different
key positions in the ignition lock. This is only
the case if you are not depressing the brake
pedal.
Z
154 Driving
If you depress the brake pedal and press the

Start/Stop button, the engine starts immedi-
ately.
Driving and parking
X Remove Start/Stop button : from ignition

lock ;.
i When you insert Start/Stop button :
X Position 0: if Start/Stop button : has not
into ignition lock ;, the system needs
yet been pressed, this corresponds to the
key being removed from the ignition. approximately two seconds recognition
time before you can use Start/Stop but-
X Position 1: press Start/Stop button :.
ton :.
You can now activate the windscreen wip-
ers, for example.
i If you then open the driver's door when in Starting the engine
this position, the power supply is deactiva- Important safety notes
ted.
X Position 2 (ignition): press Start/Stop but- G WARNING
ton : twice. Never leave the engine running in enclosed
spaces. The exhaust gases contain carbon
i If you press Start/Stop button : once monoxide. Inhaling exhaust fumes consti-
when in this position and the driver's door tutes a health hazard and could lead to loss
is open, the power supply is deactivated of consciousness or even death.
again.
! Do not depress the accelerator pedal
Removing the Start/Stop button when starting the engine.
You can remove the Start/Stop button from
i Vehicles with a petrol engine: the cat-
the ignition lock and start the vehicle as nor-
alytic converter is preheated for up to 30
mal using the key.
seconds after a cold start. The sound of the
i You do not have to remove the Start/Stop engine may change during this time.
button from the ignition lock when you
leave the vehicle. Manual transmission
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed.
X Fully depress the clutch pedal.
X Shift to neutral N.
i You can only start the engine when the

clutch pedal is fully depressed.
Driving 155
Automatic transmission the key into the ignition lock. The key must
be in the vehicle and the Start/Stop button
X Shift the transmission to position P.
must be inserted in the ignition lock. This
The transmission position display in the
mode for starting the engine operates inde-
multifunction display shows P.
pendently of the ECO start/stop automatic
Driving and parking

i You can also start the engine when the engine start function.
transmission is in position N. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed.
Starting procedure with the key X To start a petrol engine: press the Start/
i To start the engine using the key instead Stop button (Y page 153) once.
of KEYLESS-GO, pull the Start/Stop button The engine starts.
out of the ignition lock. X To start a diesel engine: press the Start/
Stop button (Y page 153) once.
X To start a petrol engine: turn the key to
Preglow is activated and the engine starts.
position 3 in the ignition lock
(Y page 153) and release it as soon as the
engine is running.
Pulling away
X To start a diesel engine: turn the key to
position 2 in the ignition lock Manual transmission
(Y page 153).
The % preglow indicator lamp in the
depressed.
instrument cluster lights up.
X Fully depress the clutch pedal.
X When the % preglow indicator lamp
X Shift to either first gear or reverse gear R.
goes out, turn the key to position 3
(Y page 153) and release it as soon as the X Release the parking brake (Y page 175).
engine is running. X Release the brake pedal.
X Slowly release the clutch pedal and gently
i You can start the engine without preglow
depress the accelerator pedal.
if the engine is warm.
i Vehicles with automatic transmis- ! Change gear in good time and avoid spin-
sion: you can also use the touch-start func- ning the wheels. Otherwise, you could dam-
tion. To do this, turn the key to position 3 age the vehicle.
(Y page 153) and release it immediately. i Follow the shift recommendations in the
The engine then starts automatically. multifunction display for an economical
driving style (Y page 161).
Using KEYLESS-GO to start the engine
i The vehicle locks centrally once you have
G WARNING pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors
Your vehicle can be started using a valid KEY- drop down.
LESS-GO key. For this reason, children should You can open the doors from the inside at
never be left unsupervised in the vehicle. any time.
Always take the key with you when leaving the You can also deactivate the automatic lock-
vehicle, even if you are only leaving it for a ing feature (Y page 242).
short time.
i The Start/Stop button can be used to

start the vehicle manually without inserting
Z
156 Driving
Automatic transmission Hill start assist will not function if:

i It is only possible to shift the transmission Ryou are pulling away on a level road or a
from position P to the desired position if downhill gradient.
you depress the brake pedal. Only then is Ron vehicles with automatic transmission,
the selector lever lock released. the transmission is in position N.
Driving and parking
Rthe parking brake is applied.

depressed. RESP® is malfunctioning.
X Shift the transmission to position D or R.
X Release the parking brake (Y page 175).
ECO start/stop function
X Release the brake pedal.
X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal. General notes
i The vehicle locks centrally once you have The ECO start/stop function switches the
pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors engine off automatically if the vehicle stops
drop down. moving.
You can open the doors from the inside at The engine starts automatically when you pull
any time. away again. The ECO start/stop function
You can also deactivate the automatic lock- thereby helps you to reduce the fuel con-
ing feature (Y page 242). sumption and emissions of your vehicle.
The ECO start/stop function is activated each
i Upshifts take place at higher engine time the engine is switched on. If all condi-
speeds after a cold start. This helps the tions for automatic engine switch-off are ful-
catalytic converter to reach its operating filled (Y page 157), the ¤ ECO symbol is
temperature more quickly. shown in green in the multifunction display.
If not all conditions are fulfilled, the ¤ ECO
Hill start assist
symbol is shown in yellow.
Hill start assist helps you when pulling away If the ECO start/stop function is deactivated
forwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. (Y page 158), ECO symbol ¤ is not
It holds the vehicle for a short time after you shown.
have removed your foot from the brake pedal.
This gives you enough time to move your foot G WARNING
from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal If the engine is switched off and the ECO sym-
and depress it before the vehicle begins to bol is shown in green in the multifunction dis-
roll. play, the engine has been switched off auto-
matically. All of the vehicle's systems remain
G WARNING active. If you open the door, unfasten your
Never leave the vehicle when it is held by hill seat belt or remove your foot from the brake
start assist. After approximately one second, pedal, the engine will automatically start. The
hill start assist will no longer brake your vehi- vehicle may begin moving. You could suffer
cle and it could roll away. serious or even fatal injury or cause an acci-
dent resulting in injury or death.
X Take your foot off the brake pedal.
Never leave the vehicle while the ECO symbol
i Once you have taken your foot off the in the multifunction display is shown in green
brake pedal, the vehicle is held for around or yellow. Always secure the vehicle against
one second. rolling away before leaving it.
X Pull away.
Driving 157
! Always switch the ignition off and take the Vehicles with manual transmission
key with you when leaving the vehicle.
Automatic engine switch-off

The engine is only switched off if:
Driving and parking

Rthe outside temperature is within the range
that is suitable for the system.
Rthe engine is at normal operating temper-
ature.
Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior
has been reached.
Rthe battery is sufficiently charged. The ECO start/stop function switches off the
Rthe system detects that the windscreen is engine automatically at low speeds.
not misted up when the air-conditioning X Brake the vehicle until it comes to a stand-
system is switched on. still.
Rthe bonnet is closed. X Engage neutral N(Y page 161) (follow
Rthe vehicle is not being steered. gearshift instruction : to engage neutral
Rthe driver's door is closed and the seat belt N, if necessary).
is fastened. X Release the clutch pedal.
The engine is switched off automatically.
i The engine can be switched off automat-
ically a maximum of four times (first stop Vehicles with automatic transmission
and three subsequent stops) in succession. The ECO start/stop function switches the
The ¤ ECO symbol is shown in yellow in engine off automatically if the vehicle is
the multifunction display after the engine braked to a standstill and the brake remains
has been started automatically for the depressed with the transmission in position
fourth time. The engine can only be D or N.
switched off automatically again when the
¤ ECO symbol is shown in green in the i You can still activate the HOLD function
multifunction display. when the vehicle is stationary, even if the
engine has been switched off automati-
i During automatic engine switch-off, the cally. It is then not necessary to continue
climate control system only operates at a applying the brakes during the automatic
reduced capacity. If you require full climate stop phase. When you depress the accel-
control capacity, the ECO start/stop func- erator pedal, the engine starts automati-
tion can be deactivated by pressing the cally and the braking effect of the HOLD
ECO button (Y page 158). function is deactivated. Depress the accel-
erator pedal carefully, as the engine must
be started first.
Automatic engine start

The engine is started automatically if:
Rthe ECO start/stop function is deactivated
by pressing the ECO button.
Rthe vehicle starts to roll.
Z
158 Driving
Rthe brake system requires this. Deactivating

Rthe battery's charge status is too low. X Press button :.
Rthe driver's seat belt is removed or the driv- Indicator lamp ; on button : and the
er's door is opened. ¤ ECO symbol in the multifunction dis-
Rthe bonnet is opened. play go out.
Driving and parking
Ryou shift the transmission from position D

Activating
to R.
Ryou steer the vehicle.
X Press button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up. If all conditions
Vehicles with manual transmission are fulfilled, the ¤ ECO symbol appears
The engine is started automatically if you: in green in the multifunction display.
Rdepress the clutch pedal If not all conditions are fulfilled, the ¤
Rdepress ECO symbol is shown in yellow in the mul-
the accelerator pedal
tifunction display. If this is the case, the
! Only engage gear when the clutch pedal ECO start/stop function is not available.
is depressed. If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/stop
Vehicles with automatic transmission function has been deactivated manually or as
The engine is started automatically if you: the result of a malfunction. The engine will
then not be switched off automatically when
Rrelease the brakes when in transmission the vehicle stops.
position D or N, unless the HOLD function
is activated or i The ECO start/stop function is activated
Rengage reverse gear R or each time the engine is switched on.
Rdepress the accelerator pedal
i Shifting the transmission to position P

does not start the engine.
Deactivating/activating the ECO start/

stop function
Driving 159
Problems with the engine

The engine does not The HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated.
start.
Driving and parking

X Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 193) or DISTRONIC
PLUS (Y page 183).
X Try to start the engine again.
The engine does not RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.

start. The starter motor RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.
can be heard. X Before attempting to start the engine again, turn the key in the
ignition back to position 0 or press the Start/Stop button
repeatedly until all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go
out.
X Try to start the engine again (Y page 154). Avoid excessively
long and frequent attempts to start the engine, as this will drain
the battery.
If the engine does not start after several attempts:
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre.
The engine does not The fuel tank is empty.

start. The starter motor X Refuel the vehicle.
can be heard. The
reserve fuel warning
lamp is lit and the fuel
gauge display shows 0.
The engine does not The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak
start. You cannot hear or discharged.
the starter motor. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 350).
If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:

Service Centre.
The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.
X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two
minutes.
X Try to start the engine again.
If the engine still does not start:

Service Centre.
Z
160 Manual transmission

Vehicles with a petrol There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical
engine: component of the engine management system.
The engine is not run- X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.
Driving and parking
ning smoothly and is X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist
misfiring. workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic con-
verter and damage it.
The coolant tempera- The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine
ture display is showing is no longer being cooled sufficiently.
more than 120 †. The X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant
coolant warning lamp to cool down.
may also be lit and a X Check the coolant level (Y page 324). Observe the warning
warning tone may
notes as you do so and top up the coolant if necessary.
sound.
If the coolant level is correct, the engine radiator fan may be faulty.
The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled
sufficiently.
X At coolant temperatures under 120 †, drive on to the nearest
qualified specialist workshop, e.g. to a Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre.
X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving on
mountain roads and stop-start traffic.
Manual transmission to lose control of your vehicle and cause an

accident.
G WARNING
The movement of the pedals must not be Gear lever
impaired in any way. Do not keep any objects
in the driver's footwell. Make sure that floor-
mats or carpets are correctly secured and
that there is sufficient clearance for the ped-
als.
Do not place several floormats on top of one
another.
G WARNING
Gear lever
the vehicle could skid. This could cause you ! Only engage gear when the clutch pedal
is depressed.
Automatic transmission 161
! When shifting between 5th and 6th gear, Engaging reverse gear
you should always push the gear lever all
the way to the right. Otherwise, you could
! Only shift into reverse gear R when the
shift unintentionally into 3rd or 4th gear vehicle is stationary. Otherwise, you could
and damage the transmission. damage the transmission.
Driving and parking

If you shift down at too high a speed (trans- i The ECO start/stop function is not avail-
mission braking), this can cause the engine able when reverse gear is engaged.
to overrev, leading to engine damage. For further information on the ECO start/
Do not use the clutch bite point to keep the stop function, see (Y page 156).
vehicle stationary on uphill gradients. X Move the gear lever firmly to the left
There is otherwise a risk of damaging the beyond the point of resistance and then
clutch. forwards.
! On long and steep downhill gradients,
especially if the vehicle is laden or towing
a trailer, you must shift into gear 1, 2 or 3 Shift recommendation
in good time. This uses the engine's braking The gearshift recommendations assist you in
effect. This relieves the load on the brake adopting an economical driving style. The rec-
system and prevents the brakes from over- ommended gear is shown in the multifunction
heating and wearing too quickly. display.
Shifting to neutral N
X Shift gear according to gearshift recom-

mendation : shown in the multifunction
display of the instrument cluster.
X Depress the clutch pedal fully.
X Move the gear lever to position N:.
Automatic transmission
Neutral N with ECO start/stop func- Important safety notes

tion activated
G WARNING
In neutral N, the engine is switched off if the The movement of the pedals must not be
vehicle speed is below a certain threshold and impaired in any way. Do not keep any objects
the clutch pedal is not depressed. in the driver's footwell. Make sure that floor-
For further information on the ECO start/stop mats or carpets are correctly secured and
function, see (Y page 156). that there is sufficient clearance for the ped-
als.
Z
162 Automatic transmission
Do not place several floormats on top of one Transmission position and drive pro-
another. gram display
G WARNING
Driving and parking

the vehicle could skid. This could cause you
accident.
i Bear in mind that the power transmission

between the engine and the transmission
is interrupted when the engine is switched : Transmission position display
off. Therefore, to prevent the vehicle from ; Drive program display
rolling away, shift the automatic transmis-
sion to position P and apply the parking The current transmission position and drive
brake when the engine is switched off and program appear in the multifunction display.
the vehicle is stationary.
Transmission positions
Selector lever
B Park position
Overview of transmission positions Prevents the vehicle from rolling
away when stopped. Do not shift
the transmission into position P
(Y page 174) unless the vehicle is
stationary.
The key can only be removed if the
transmission is in position P. If the
key is removed from the ignition
lock, the selector lever is locked.
C Reverse gear
Only shift the transmission to R
Selector lever (example) when the vehicle is stationary.
P Park position with selector lever lock
R Reverse gear
N Neutral
D Drive
A Neutral reduces load change reactions and is condu-

cive to a sporty driving style. The sound gen-
Do not shift the transmission to N
erated by the double-clutch function depends
while driving. Otherwise, the auto- on the drive program selected.
matic transmission could be dam-
aged.
Driving and parking

Kickdown
Releasing the brakes will allow you
to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to Use kickdown for maximum acceleration.
push it or tow it. X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
If ESP® is deactivated or faulty: pressure point.
only shift the transmission to posi- The transmission shifts to a lower gear
tion N if the vehicle is in danger of depending on the engine speed.
skidding, e.g. on icy roads. X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the
! Rolling in neutral N can lead to desired speed is reached.

damage to the transmission. The automatic transmission shifts back up.
7 Drive Trailer towing

The automatic transmission
changes gear automatically. All
X Drive in the middle of the engine speed
forward gears are available. range on uphill gradients.
X Shift down to shift range 3 or
2(Y page 165) depending on the uphill or
Changing gear downhill gradient, even if cruise control or
SPEEDTRONIC is activated.
The automatic transmission shifts to the indi-
vidual gears automatically when it is in trans-
mission position D. This automatic gearshift- Program selector button
ing behaviour is determined by:
Ra shift range restriction, if selected General notes
Rthe selected drive program (Y page 163) The program selector button allows you to
Rthe position of the accelerator pedal choose between different driving character-
Rthe road speed istics.
Driving tips
Accelerator pedal position
Your style of driving influences how the auto-
matic transmission shifts gear:
Rlittle throttle: early upshifts
Rmore throttle: late upshifts
AMG vehicles Example: program selector button
When shifting down, the double-clutch func-

tion is active regardless of the currently selec-
ted drive program. The double-clutch function
Z
E Economy Comfortable, economical

X Turn drive program selector : until the
driving desired drive program appears in the mul-
tifunction display in the speedometer.
S Sport Sporty driving style The drive program indicator on drive pro-
gram selector : lights up in red.
M Manual Manual gearshifting
Driving and parking
i The automatic transmission switches to

i For further information on the automatic automatic drive program C each time the
drive program, see (Y page 164). engine is started.
X Press program selector button : repeat- i RS cannot be selected during normal driv-
edly until the letter for the desired gearshift ing. For further information on RACE START
program appears in the multifunction dis- (Y page 194).
play.
i The automatic transmission switches to Steering wheel gearshift paddles
automatic drive program E each time the
engine is started.
AMG vehicles
: Left-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle

; Right-hand steering wheel gearshift pad-
dle
Drive program selector with manual drive program In the automatic drive program, you can
restrict or derestrict the shift range by using
C Controlled Comfortable, economical the steering wheel gearshift paddles or the
Efficiency driving selector lever (Y page 165).
S Sport Sporty driving style In the manual drive program, you can change
gear using the steering wheel gearshift pad-
S+ SportPlus Extremely sporty driving dles or the selector lever (Y page 166).
style
i You can only change gear with the steer-
M Manual Manual gearshifting ing wheel gearshift paddles when the trans-
mission is in position D.
RS RACE Optimal vehicle accelera-
START tion from a standstill
Automatic drive program
i For further information on the automatic
Drive program E (drive program C on AMG
drive program, see (Y page 164).
vehicles) is characterised by the following:
Rcomfort-oriented engine and automatic 5 To use the braking effect of the

transmission settings. engine on downhill gradients and
Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from
for driving:
the automatic transmission shifting up
Ron steep mountain roads
sooner.
Driving and parking

Rin mountainous terrain
Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in
Rin arduous conditions
forward and reverse gears, unless the
accelerator pedal is depressed fully. 4 To use the braking effect of the
Rincreased sensitivity. This improves driving engine on extremely steep downhill
stability on slippery road surfaces, for gradients and on long downhill
example. stretches
Rthe automatic transmission shifting up
sooner. This results in the vehicle being Restricting the shift range
driven at lower engine speeds and the
wheels being less likely to spin. X Press the selector lever to the left towards
Drive program S (or, in the case of AMG vehi- D–.
cles, drive programs S and S+) is character- or
ised by the following: X Pull the left-hand steering wheel gearshift
Rsporty engine and automatic transmission paddle.
settings The automatic transmission shifts down
Rthe vehicle pulling away in first gear one gear and restricts the shift range to the
Rthe automatic transmission shifting up
relevant gear.
later i If the engine exceeds the maximum
Ras a result of the later automatic transmis- engine speed when shifting down, the auto-
sion shift points, the fuel consumption pos- matic transmission protects against engine
sibly being higher damage by not shifting down.
i If the maximum engine speed for the shift
range is reached and you continue to accel-
Shift ranges
erate, the automatic transmission shifts up
Introduction in order to prevent the engine from over-
revving, even if the shift range is restricted.
When the automatic transmission is in posi-
tion D, it is possible to restrict or derestrict Derestricting the shift range
the shift range (Y page 165).
The shift range selected is shown in the mul- X Briefly press the selector lever to the right
tifunction display. The automatic transmis- towards D+.
sion shifts only as far as the selected gear. or
Shift range X Pull the right-hand steering wheel gearshift
paddle.
= To use the engine's braking effect The shift range is derestricted.
Z
Clearing the shift range restriction Upshifting

X Press and hold the selector lever towards X Briefly press the selector lever to the right
D+ until D is shown once more in the mul- towards D+.
tifunction display. or
Driving and parking
or X Pull the right-hand steering wheel gearshift

X Pull and hold the right-hand steering wheel paddle (Y page 164).
gearshift paddle until D is shown again in The automatic transmission shifts up to the
the multifunction display. next gear.
The automatic transmission shifts from the X Shift up a gear when the ^ upshift symbol
current shift range directly to D.
appears in the display instead of M.
Vehicles with AMG engines
Selecting the ideal shift range
! In manual gearshift program M, the auto-
X Press the selector lever to the left towards
matic transmission does not shift up auto-
D– and hold it in position.
matically even when the engine limiting
or speed for the current gear is reached.
X Pull the left-hand steering wheel gearshift When the engine limiting speed is reached,
paddle and hold it in position. the fuel supply is cut to prevent the engine
The automatic transmission shifts to the from overrevving. You must make sure that
gear which allows optimum acceleration the engine speed does not reach the red
and deceleration. To do this, the automatic area of the rev counter. Otherwise, there is
transmission shifts down one or more a risk of engine damage.
gears. X Shift up a gear if the colour in the multi-
function display in the speedometer
changes to red and the UP display message
Manual drive program is shown.
Switching on the manual drive program
Downshifting
Manual drive program M can be selected
using the program selector or the drive pro- X Briefly press the selector lever to the left
gram selector button. You can change gear towards D–.
using the steering wheel gearshift paddles or or
the selector lever in manual drive program X Pull the left-hand steering wheel gearshift
M if the transmission is in position D. paddle (Y page 164).
X Press the program selector button The automatic transmission shifts down to
(Y page 163) repeatedly until M appears in the next gear.
the multifunction display.
i If you slow down or stop without shifting
X AMG vehicles: turn the drive program down, the automatic transmission auto-
selector (Y page 164) until M appears in the matically shifts down.
multifunction display.
The indicator M on the drive program selec- i If you desire maximum acceleration, push
tor lights up in red. the selector lever to the left or pull and hold
the left-hand steering wheel gearshift pad-
dle until the transmission shifts to the opti-
mal gear for the current speed.
Kickdown
i Vehicles with an AMG engine: it is not
possible to use kickdown in manual drive
program M.
Driving and parking

You can also use kickdown for maximum
acceleration in manual drive program M.
X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
pressure point.
The transmission shifts to a lower gear
depending on the engine speed.
Switching off the manual drive program

X Vehicles without the dynamic handling
package with sports mode: press the
program selector button (Y page 163)
repeatedly until E or S appears in the mul-
tifunction display.
X Vehicles with the dynamic handling
package with sports mode: press the
program selector button (Y page 163). M
is no longer shown in the multifunction dis-
play.
X AMG vehicles: turn the drive program
selector (Y page 164) until C, S or S+
Z
168 Refuelling
Problems with the transmission

The transmission has The transmission is losing oil.
problems shifting gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist work-
Driving and parking
shop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, immediately.
The acceleration ability The transmission is in emergency mode.

is deteriorating. It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear.
The transmission no X Stop the vehicle.
longer changes gear. X Shift the transmission to position P.
X Switch off the engine.
X Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting the engine.
X Shift the transmission to position D or R.
If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R is
selected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.
X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, immediately.
Releasing the parking lock manually cloth) from the right-hand edge, pulling it
up and out.
In the event of an electrical fault, it is possible
X Press release button ; down and simul-
to release the selector lever lock manually to
move it out of position P, e.g. if you wish to taneously move the selector lever out of
tow the vehicle away. position P.
The selector lever can now be moved freely
until it is returned to position P.
Refuelling
G WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable. Fire, naked flames
and smoking are therefore prohibited when
handling fuels.
! Do not use any sharp-edged objects to Switch off the engine and the auxiliary heating
remove the selector lever gaiter from the before refuelling.
centre console. This could damage the
selector lever gaiter. G WARNING
X Apply the parking brake. Do not come into contact with fuels.
X Prise out selector lever gaiter : with a flat, It is hazardous to your health if your skin
blunt object, (e.g. a screwdriver wrapped in comes into direct contact with fuels or you
breathe in fuel vapours.
Refuelling 169
G WARNING ! Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuel

Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a die- can. The fuel lines and/or the diesel injec-
sel engine. Do not mix diesel with petrol. This tion system could otherwise be blocked by
would result in damage to the fuel system and particles from the fuel can.
engine, which could lead to a vehicle fire. i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol.
Driving and parking

Your vehicle is E10 compatible. You can
! Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a refuel your vehicle using E10 premium-
diesel engine. Do not use diesel to refuel grade petrol.
vehicles with a petrol engine. Even small
amounts of the wrong fuel result in damage i If the recommended fuel is not available,
to the fuel system and the engine. but only as a temporary measure, you may
also use regular unleaded petrol,
! Do not switch on the ignition if you acci- 91 RON/82.5 MON. This may reduce
dentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Other- engine performance and increase fuel con-
wise, the fuel will enter the fuel lines. Notify sumption. Avoid driving at full throttle.
a qualified specialist workshop and have
In some countries, the fuel grade available
the fuel tank and fuel lines drained com-
may not be adequate and could cause
pletely.
deposits to build up. In consultation with a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, this petrol
may be mixed with the additive recommen-
Petrol (EN 228, DIN 51626)
ded by Mercedes-Benz (part no.
Fuel grade A000989254510). You must observe the
notes and mixing ratios specified on the
! Only refuel using unleaded premium- container.
grade petrol with at least
95 RON/85 MON, which conforms to Euro- For further information on "Fuel", see
pean standard EN 228 or an equivalent (Y page 380).
specification.
AMG vehicles
! Do not use the following:
! Only refuel using super-grade unleaded
RE85 (petrol with 85% ethanol)
petrol with at least 98 RON/88 MON,
RE100 (100% ethanol)
which conforms to European standard EN
RM15 (petrol with 15% methanol) 228 or equivalent.
RM85 (petrol with 85% methanol) You can otherwise impair engine output or
RM100 (100% methanol) damage the engine.
RPetrol with metallic additives i If the recommended fuel is not available
RDiesel and only as a temporary measure, you may
Do not mix fuels such as this with petrol also use premium-grade unleaded petrol,
and do not use any additives. Doing so may 95 RON/85 MON. This may reduce engine
cause engine damage. This does not performance and increase fuel consump-
include additives for the removal and pre- tion. Avoid driving at full throttle.
vention of residue build-up. Petrol must ! In emergencies, and only if the recom-
only be mixed with additives recommended mended fuel is not available, you may also
by Mercedes-Benz. More information about use standard unleaded petrol, 91 RON/
recommended additives can be obtained 82.5 MON.
from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Z
170 Refuelling
However, using this fuel results in consid- ! Vehicles without a diesel particle fil-
erably higher petrol consumption and sig- ter: in countries where only diesel fuels
nificantly reduced engine performance. with a higher sulphur content are available,
Avoid driving at full throttle. the vehicle's oil change intervals are
If no fuel other than regular petrol with shorter. More information about intervals
Driving and parking
91 RON/82.5 MON or a lower grade is per- for changing the oil can be obtained from
manently available, you should have the any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
vehicle adapted to run on this fuel in a ! Only use fuel that complies with the EN
qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes- 590 European standard. Fuel that does not
Benz recommends that you use a comply with EN 590 can lead to increased
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this pur- wear, engine damage and damage to the
pose. exhaust system.
Do not use the following:
C 350 BlueEFFICIENCY and C 350
4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY Rmarine diesel
Rheating oil
! Only refuel using unleaded, sulphur-free
Rbio-diesel
premium-grade petrol with at least
95 RON/85 MON, which conforms to Euro- Rvegetable oil
pean standard EN 228 or an equivalent Rpetrol

specification. Rparaffin
You can otherwise impair engine output or Rkerosene
damage the emission control system. Do not mix these fuels with diesel fuels and
i In some countries, the available petrol do not use any special additives. Other-
may not be sufficiently low in sulphur. This wise, this can lead to damage to the engine.
fuel can temporarily produce unpleasant This excludes flow improver; see "Low out-
odours, especially on short journeys. As side temperatures".
soon as sulphur-free fuel (sulphur content ! Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuel
< 10 ppm) is used for refuelling, the odours can. Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or the
are reduced. diesel injection system could be blocked by
particles from the fuel can.
Diesel (EN 590) For further information on "Fuel", see
(Y page 380).
Fuel grade
! When refuelling, only use diesel fuel that Low outside temperatures
conforms to the European standard EN 590 Diesel fuel with improved cold flow qualities
or is of equivalent quality. You can other- is available during the winter months. In
wise impair engine output or damage the Europe, various climate-dependent low-tem-
engine. perature classes are defined in EN 590. Refu-
! Vehicles with diesel particle filters: in elling with diesel fuel which complies with the
countries outside the EU, only use low sul- climatic specifications of standard EN 590
phur Euro diesel with a sulphur content of can help to prevent operating problems. At
under 50 ppm. Otherwise, the emission exceptionally low temperatures, it is possible
control system could be damaged. that the flow properties of the fuel may be
inadequate. This also applies to fuel that has
Refuelling 171
not been adapted to suit the climatic condi-

tions, e.g. diesel fuel from warmer regions.
i Further information about country-spe-
cific fuel properties can be obtained from
oil companies, e.g. at filling stations.
Driving and parking

Flow improver
Flow improvers can be added to improve the
cold resistance of diesel fuel. The effective-
ness of a flow improver is not guaranteed with
every diesel fuel. Saloon (example)
: To open the fuel filler flap
Correct dosage and thorough mixing are deci-
sive factors in ensuring improvement in low- ; To insert the fuel filler cap
temperature resistance. Avoid excessive dos- = Tyre pressure table
age. Excessive dosage may actually decrease ? Fuel type
low-temperature resistance under certain cir-
cumstances. Follow the manufacturer's dos- Opening
ing instructions.
Mix the additive with the diesel in good time, X Switch off the engine.
before the flow properties of the diesel X Remove the key from the ignition lock.
become inadequate. Malfunctions can other- KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door. This
wise only be rectified by heating the entire switches the ignition to position 0, which
fuel system, e.g. by parking the vehicle in a corresponds to having removed the key.
heated garage. The driver's door can be closed again.
Observe the information provided by the man- X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of
ufacturer when using a flow improver. Only arrow :.
use flow improvers that have been tested and The fuel filler flap opens slightly.
approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain
X Open the fuel filler flap.
further information from any Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre. X Turn the fuel filler cap anti-clockwise and
remove it.
X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder
Refuelling bracket on the inside of filler flap ;.
X Completely insert the pump nozzle into the
Fuel filler flap
filler neck and refuel.
The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked auto- X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle
matically when you open or close the vehicle switches off.
with the key or using KEYLESS-GO.
The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed ! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the
in the instrument cluster 8. The arrow fuel system.
next to the filling pump indicates the side of
the vehicle. Closing
X Replace the fuel filler cap and turn it clock-
wise. The fuel filler cap audibly engages.
X Close the fuel filler flap.
Z
172 Refuelling
i Close the fuel filler flap before locking the

vehicle. A locking pin otherwise prevents
the fuel filler flap from closing after the
vehicle has been locked.
Driving and parking
Fuel filler flap emergency release

G WARNING
The edges on the inside of the vehicle body
can be sharp. You could injure yourself when
using the fuel filler flap emergency release.
Avoid contact with the edges on the inside of
the vehicle body.
The emergency release is located in the

boot/luggage compartment behind the side
trim on the right-hand side, when viewed in
the direction of travel.
X Open the boot lid/tailgate.
X Saloon: open the right-hand side trim panel
(Y page 356).
X Estate: open the right-hand side trim panel
(Y page 356).
Example: Saloon
X Pull emergency release : in the direction
of the arrow.
The fuel filler flap is released.
X Open the fuel filler flap.
Refuelling 173
Problems with the fuel and fuel tank

Fuel is leaking from the G Risk of explosion or fire
vehicle.
Driving and parking

The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.
X Turn the key to position 0(Y page 153) in the ignition lock
immediately and remove it.
X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.
The engine does not The fuel tank of a vehicle with a diesel engine has been run com-
start. pletely dry.
X Refuel the vehicle with at least five litres of diesel.
X Turn the ignition on for at least 10 seconds (Y page 153).
X Start the engine continuously for up to 10 seconds until it runs
smoothly.
If the engine does not start:
X Turn the ignition on again for approximately 10 seconds
(Y page 153).
X Start the engine again continuously for up to 10 seconds until
it runs smoothly.
If the engine does not start after three attempts:
The fuel filler flap can- The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.
not be opened. or
The key battery is discharged.
X Unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element
(Y page 86).
X Open the boot lid or the tailgate.
X Manually unlock the fuel filler flap using the emergency release
(Y page 172).
The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jam-
med.
Z
174 Parking
Parking Therefore, do not switch off the engine while

you are driving.
G WARNING Vehicles with manual transmission
Only remove the key from the ignition lock
Driving and parking
X Shift to either first gear or reverse gear R.

when the vehicle is stationary, as you cannot
steer the vehicle when the key is removed.
lock and remove it.
Never leave children unsupervised in the vehi- The immobiliser is activated.
cle. They could release the parking brake. This
X Apply the parking brake firmly.
could lead to a serious or fatal accident.
G WARNING Vehicles with automatic transmission

Under no circumstances should the exhaust X Apply the parking brake firmly.
system come into contact with flammable X Shift the transmission to position P.
materials such as dry grass or petrol, for
example. Do not park the vehicle on dry grass- Using the key
land or harvested grain fields. The hot exhaust X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition
system could otherwise ignite the flammable
lock and remove it.
material and set the vehicle on fire.
The immobiliser is activated.
To ensure that the vehicle is secured against i The key can only be removed if the trans-
rolling away unintentionally: mission is in position P.
Rthe parking brake must be applied. Using KEYLESS-GO
Ron vehicles with manual transmission,
XPress the Start/Stop button (Y page 153).
engage first gear or reverse gear.
The engine stops and all the indicator
Ron vehicles with automatic transmission,
lamps in the instrument cluster go out.
the transmission must be in position P and
i When the driver's door is closed, this cor-
the key must be removed from the ignition
responds to key position 1. When the driv-
lock.
er's door is open, this corresponds to key
Ron steep uphill or downhill gradients, turn
position 0, i.e. key removed.
the front wheels towards the kerb.
i The engine can be turned off while the
vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding
Switching off the engine the Start/Stop button for three seconds.
This function operates independently of the
Important safety notes ECO start/stop automatic engine switch-
off function.
G WARNING
If the engine is not running, there is no power
assistance for the steering and brakes. Steer-
ing and braking then requires significantly
greater effort.
As a result, you might lose control of the vehi-
cle, cause an accident and injure yourself and
others.
Driving tips 175
Parking brake Driving tips

General driving tips
Rolling with the engine switched off
Driving and parking

G WARNING
Never switch the engine off while the vehicle
is in motion.
There is no power assistance for the steering
and the service brake when the engine is not
running.
You will require considerably more effort to
X To apply: depress parking brake ; firmly. steer and brake, and you could therefore lose
The J indicator lamp in the instrument control of the vehicle and cause an accident.
cluster lights up if the engine is running.
X To release: depress the brake pedal and
keep it depressed. Engine oil
X Pull release handle :. ! Vehicles with a diesel particle filter:
The J indicator lamp in the instrument If the vehicle is mostly driven for short dis-
cluster goes out. tances, it is possible that malfunctions may
occur during the automatic cleaning of the
diesel particle filter. This can lead to engine
Parking up the vehicle damage. Therefore, if you frequently drive
If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer short distances, make sure to drive on
than four weeks, the battery may be damaged motorways or country roads for 20 minutes
by exhaustive discharge. at least every 500 km.
X Disconnect the battery (Y page 348) or
connect it to a trickle charger. Brakes
i You can obtain information about trickle
chargers from a qualified specialist work- Important safety notes
shop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre. G WARNING
If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer
than six weeks, the vehicle may suffer dam-
age as a result of lack of use.
the vehicle could skid.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and
seek advice. G WARNING
Make sure that other road users are not
endangered by your braking.
Downhill gradients
On long and steep downhill gradients, espe-
cially if the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer,
you must shift to a lower gear in good time or,
Z
176 Driving tips
on vehicles with automatic transmission, Limited braking performance on salt-

select shift range 1, 2 or 3. treated roads
i This also applies if you have activated G WARNING
cruise control, SPEEDTRONIC or DIS- The layer of salt on the brake discs and the
TRONIC PLUS.
Driving and parking
brake pads/linings may cause a delay in the

This will use the braking effect of the engine, braking effect, resulting in a significantly lon-
so less braking will be required to maintain ger braking distance, which could lead to an
the speed. This relieves the load on the brake accident.
system and prevents the brakes from over- To avoid this danger, you should:
heating and wearing too quickly. Roccasionally brake carefully, without put-
ting other road users at risk, when you are
Heavy and light loads driving on salted roads. This helps to
remove any salt that may have started to
G WARNING
build up on the brake discs and the brake
Never depress the brake pedal continuously pads/linings.
while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. never cause
Rmaintain a greater distance to the vehicle
the brakes to rub by applying constant slight
ahead and drive with particular care.
pedal pressure. This causes the brake system
Rcarefully apply the brakes at the end of a
to overheat, increases the braking distance
and can lead to the brakes failing completely. trip and immediately after commencing a
new trip, so that salt residues are removed
If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy from the brake discs.
load, do not stop the vehicle immediately, but
drive on for a short while. This allows the air- New brake pads/linings
flow to cool the brakes more quickly.
If the brakes have been used only moderately, G WARNING
you should occasionally test their effective- New brake pads/linings only reach their opti-
ness. To do this, brake more firmly from a mum braking effect after several hundred kil-
higher speed. This improves the grip of the ometres of driving. Before this optimum brak-
brakes. ing effect is reached, you should compensate
for the reduced braking effect by applying
Wet road surface greater pressure when braking. This also
applies after the brake discs or the brake
If driving in heavy rain for a prolonged period pads/linings have been replaced.
of time without braking, there may be a
delayed reaction from the brakes when brak- For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
ing for the first time. This may also occur after mends that you only have brake pads/linings
the vehicle has been washed. fitted to your vehicle which have been
You have to depress the brake pedal more approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or
firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the which correspond to an equivalent quality
vehicle in front. standard. Brake pads/linings which have not
After driving on a wet road or having the vehi- been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or
cle washed, brake firmly while paying atten- which are not of an equivalent quality could
tion to the traffic conditions. This will warm affect your vehicle's operating safety.
up the brake discs, thereby drying them more
quickly and protecting them against corro-
sion.
Driving tips 177
High-performance brake system for Driving on wet roads

AMG vehicles
Aquaplaning
The high-performance brake system is
designed for heavy loads. This may lead to If water has accumulated to a certain depth
noise when braking. This will depend on: on the road surface, there is a danger of aqua-
Driving and parking

Rspeed
planing occurring, even if:
Ryou drive at low speeds
Rbraking force
Rthe tyres have adequate tread depth
Renvironmental conditions, such as temper-
ature and humidity For this reason, do not drive in tyre ruts, and
The wear of individual components of the brake carefully.
brake system, such as the brake pads/linings
or brake discs, depends on the individual driv- Driving on flooded roads
ing style and operating conditions. If you have to drive on stretches of road on
For this reason, it is impossible to state a which water has collected, please bear in
mileage that will be valid under all circum- mind that:
stances. An aggressive driving style will lead Rthe maximum permitted still water depth is
to high wear. You can obtain further informa- 25 cm.
tion about this from your Mercedes-Benz
Ryou should drive no faster than at walking
Service Centre.
pace.
! Bear in mind that vehicles travelling in
Tyre traction front or in the opposite direction create
waves. This may cause the maximum per-
G WARNING missible water depth to be exceeded.
Whereas the vehicle can be fully controlled at
These notes must be observed under all
a certain speed on dry roads, you must reduce
circumstances. You could otherwise dam-
your speed on wet or icy roads to achieve the
age the engine, the electronics or the trans-
same road safety. You could otherwise cause
mission.
an accident.
Pay particular attention to the road conditions
at temperatures around freezing point. Winter driving
If ice has formed on the road surface (e.g.
from fog), a thin film of water rapidly forms on General notes
the ice when you brake, considerably reduc-
G WARNING
ing tyre traction. Drive with particular care in
such weather conditions. If the vehicle becomes trapped in snow,
ensure that snow is kept away from the
exhaust pipe and from around the vehicle as
long as the engine is running. Otherwise, poi-
sonous carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the
vehicle, resulting in loss of consciousness and
even death.
To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation, open
a window slightly on the side of the vehicle
not facing the wind.
Z
178 Driving systems
At the onset of winter, have your vehicle win- use of the braking effect of the engine. This
terproofed at a qualified specialist workshop, relieves the load on the brake system and
e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. prevents the brakes from overheating and
Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" wearing too quickly.
section (Y page 359). G WARNING
Driving and parking

Driving with summer tyres braking on a slippery road surface. This could
Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and
section (Y page 359). the vehicle could skid.
Slippery road surfaces Use cruise control only if road and traffic con-
ditions make it appropriate to maintain a
G WARNING steady speed for a prolonged period. You can
Do not shift down for additional engine brak- store any road speed above 30 km/h.
ing on a slippery road surface. This could G WARNING
Cruise control cannot take account of road
and traffic conditions.
You should drive particularly carefully on slip- Always pay attention to traffic conditions
pery road surfaces. Avoid sudden accelera- even when cruise control is activated.
tion, steering and braking manoeuvres. Cruise control is only an aid designed to assist
If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be driving. You are responsible for the vehicle's
stopped when moving at low speed: speed and for braking in good time.
X Vehicles with manual transmission: engage
G WARNING
neutral.
Do not use cruise control
X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift
Rin traffic conditions that do not allow you to
the transmission to position N.
X Try to bring the vehicle under control by
drive at a constant speed (e.g. heavy traffic
or winding roads). You may otherwise
using corrective steering.
cause an accident.
i For more information on driving with Ron slippery roads. The drive wheels may
snow chains, see (Y page 360). lose their grip when braking or accelerating
and the vehicle may skid.
Rwhen there is low visibility, e.g. due to fog,
Driving systems heavy rain or snow.
Cruise control
Cruise control lever
You can operate cruise control and variable
Cruise control maintains a constant road SPEEDTRONIC with the cruise control lever.
speed for you. It brakes automatically in order
to avoid exceeding the set speed. You must
select a low gear in good time on long and
steep downhill gradients, especially if the
vehicle is laden or towing a trailer. On vehicles
with automatic transmission, select shift
range 1, 2 or 3. By doing so, you will make
Driving systems 179
The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control Storing and maintaining the current
lever indicates which system you have selec- speed
ted:
You can store the current speed if you are
RLIM indicator lamp off: cruise control is driving faster than 30 km/h.
selected. X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired
Driving and parking

RLIM indicator lamp on: variable SPEED-
speed.
TRONIC is selected. X Briefly press the cruise control lever
up : or down ?.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
Cruise control is activated. The vehicle
automatically maintains the speed.
i Cruise control may be unable to maintain
the stored speed on uphill gradients. The
stored speed is resumed when the gradient
evens out. Cruise control maintains the
stored speed on downhill gradients by
: To switch on or to increase the speed automatically applying the brakes.
; LIM indicator lamp
i Vehicles with manual transmission:
= To switch on with the current speed or
RAlways drive at adequate, but not exces-
with the last stored speed
? To switch on or to reduce the speed
sive, engine speeds.
RChange gear in good time.
A To switch between cruise control and var-
RIf possible, do not change down several
iable SPEEDTRONIC
B To deactivate cruise control gears at a time.
When you activate cruise control, the stored Storing the current speed or calling up
speed is shown in the multifunction display the last stored speed
for five seconds. Vehicles with the 4-button
multifunction steering wheel: the stored G WARNING
speed is then permanently displayed in the Only call up a stored speed if you know what
status indicator together with the ¯ sym- that speed is and if it is suitable for the current
bol. Vehicles with the 12-button multifunc- traffic and driving situation. You can other-
tion steering wheel: the segments from the wise endanger yourself or others by uninten-
stored speed up to the maximum speed light tionally triggering sudden acceleration or
up in the multifunction display. braking.
Selecting cruise control X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you =.
X Check whether LIM indicator lamp ; is off.
If it is off, cruise control is already selected. pedal.
If it is not, press the cruise control lever in The first time cruise control is activated, it
the direction of arrow A. stores the current speed or regulates the
LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control speed of the vehicle to the previously
lever goes out. Cruise control is selected. stored speed.
Z
180 Driving systems
Setting a speed or
X Press the cruise control lever up : for a X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the
higher speed or down ? for a lower speed. direction of arrow A.
Variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. LIM
X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until
indicator lamp ; in the cruise control lever
the desired speed is reached.
Driving and parking
lights up.
X Release the cruise control lever.
The new speed is stored. Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:
Ryou depress the parking brake.
i Cruise control is not deactivated if you
Ryou are driving at less than 30 km/h.
depress the accelerator pedal. For exam-
RESP® intervenes or if you deactivate ESP®.
ple, if you accelerate briefly to overtake,
cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed Ryou shift into neutral in a vehicle with man-
to the last speed stored after you have fin- ual transmission while driving or depress
ished overtaking. the clutch pedal for longer than six sec-
onds.
Making adjustments in 1 km/h incre- Ron vehicles with manual transmission, you
ments shift to a gear that is too high, and as a
result the engine speed is too low.
X Briefly press the cruise control lever to the
Ron vehicles with automatic transmission,
pressure point, up : for a higher speed or
down ? for a lower speed. you shift into position N while driving.
The last speed stored is increased or If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear
reduced. a warning tone. You will see the Cruise
control off message in the multifunction
display for approximately five seconds.
Making adjustments in 10 km/h incre-
ments i The last speed stored is cleared when you
switch off the engine.
X Briefly press the cruise control lever
beyond the pressure point, up : for a
higher speed or down ? for a lower speed. SPEEDTRONIC
The last speed stored is increased or
reduced. Important safety notes
SPEEDTRONIC brakes automatically so that
Deactivating cruise control you do not exceed the set speed. On long and
There are several ways to deactivate cruise steep downhill gradients, especially if the
control: vehicle is laden or towing a trailer, you must
shift to a lower gear in good time or select
X Briefly press the cruise control lever for- shift range 1, 2 or 3 on vehicles with auto-
wards B. matic transmission. By doing so, you will
or make use of the braking effect of the engine,
X Brake which relieves the load on the brake system
and prevents the brakes from overheating
and wearing too quickly. If you need addi-
tional braking, depress the brake pedal
repeatedly rather than continuously.
Driving systems 181
G WARNING You can use the cruise control lever to limit

Never depress the brake pedal continuously the speed to any speed above 30 km/h while
while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. never cause the engine is running.
the brakes to rub by applying constant slight
Driving and parking

to overheat, increases the braking distance
and can lead to the brakes failing completely.
G WARNING
You can set a variable or permanent limit : To store the current speed or a higher
speed: speed
; LIM indicator lamp
Rvariable for speed limits, e.g. in built-up
areas = To store the current speed or to call up
Rpermanent for long-term speed restric-
the last stored speed
? To store the current speed or a lower
tions, e.g. when driving with winter tyres
fitted (Y page 183) speed
A To switch between cruise control and var-
G WARNING iable SPEEDTRONIC
Speedtronic is only an aid designed to assist B To deactivate variable SPEEDTRONIC
driving. You are responsible for the vehicle's
speed and for braking in good time. Selecting variable SPEEDTRONIC
X Check whether LIM indicator lamp ; is on.
i The speed indicated in the speedometer
If it is on, variable SPEEDTRONIC is already
may differ slightly from the limit speed
selected.
stored.
If it is not, press the cruise control lever in
Variable SPEEDTRONIC the direction of arrow A.
LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control
General notes lever lights up. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is
With the cruise control lever, you can operate selected.
cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS and vari-
G WARNING
able SPEEDTRONIC.
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control
driver of the limit speed stored.
lever indicates which system you have selec-
ted: Only use variable SPEEDTRONIC if you will not
have to accelerate suddenly to a speed above
RLIM indicator lamp off: cruise control or that stored as the limit speed. You could oth-
DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. erwise cause an accident.
TRONIC is selected.
Z
182 Driving systems
You can only exceed the limit speed stored if Making adjustments in 1 km/h incre-
you deactivate variable SPEEDTRONIC: ments
Rusing X Briefly press the cruise control lever to the
the cruise control lever
Rby
pressure point, up : for a higher speed or
depressing the accelerator pedal
down ? for a lower speed.
beyond the pressure point (kickdown)
Driving and parking
It is not possible to deactivate variable or

SPEEDTRONIC by braking. X Keep the cruise control lever pressed to the
pressure point until the desired speed is
Storing the current speed set. Press the cruise control lever up : for
You can use the cruise control lever to limit a higher speed or down ? for a lower
the speed to any speed above 30 km/h while speed.
the engine is running.
X Briefly press the cruise control lever to the
ments
pressure point up : or down ?.
The current speed is stored. For five sec-
onds, the multifunction display shows the beyond the pressure point, up : for a
stored speed, e.g. Limit 100 km/h. higher speed or down ? for a lower speed.
Vehicles with the 4-button multifunction or
steering wheel: the stored speed is perma- X Keep the cruise control lever pressed
nently displayed in the status indicator, beyond the pressure point until the desired
e.g. LIM 100 km/h. speed is set. Press the cruise control lever
Vehicles with a 12-button multifunction up : for a higher speed or down ? for a
steering wheel: on the speedometer, the lower speed.
segments from the start of the scale up to
the stored speed are lit up. Deactivating variable SPEEDTRONIC
There are several ways to deactivate variable
Storing the current speed or calling up the SPEEDTRONIC:
last stored speed X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-
G WARNING wards B.
Only select a stored speed if you know what or
that speed is and whether it is suitable for the
current driving and traffic situation. Other-
X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the
wise, sudden braking could endanger you or direction of arrow A.
others. LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control
lever goes out. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards deactivated.
you =. Cruise control is selected.
Variable SPEEDTRONIC is automatically
deactivated:
Rif you depress the accelerator pedal
beyond the pressure point (kickdown), but
only if your current speed does not differ by
more than 20 km/h from the stored speed.
Driving systems 183
You will hear a warning tone if this is the brake and maintain the preset distance to the
case. vehicle in front.
Ron vehicles with manual transmission, if
G WARNING
you shift to a higher gear and as a result the
engine speed is too low.
Driving and parking

G WARNING cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and
It is not possible to deactivate variable Speed- the vehicle could skid.
tronic by braking.
G WARNING
i The last speed stored is cleared when you DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid designed to
switch off the engine. assist driving. The driver remains fully respon-
sible for the vehicle's distance from other
Permanent SPEEDTRONIC vehicles, the vehicle's speed and for braking
in good time.
You can use the on-board computer to limit
the speed permanently to a value between DISTRONIC PLUS does not react in particular
160 km/h (e.g. for driving on winter tyres) to:
and the maximum speed (Y page 241). Rpedestrians
Shortly before the stored speed is reached, it Rstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stop-
appears in the multifunction display. ped or parked vehicles
Permanent SPEEDTRONIC remains active, Roncoming and crossing traffic
even if variable SPEEDTRONIC is deactivated. DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow vehi-
You cannot exceed the stored limit speed, cles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or vehi-
even if you depress the accelerator pedal cles driving on a different line. Therefore,
beyond the pressure point (kickdown). always pay attention to traffic conditions even
when DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Other-
wise, you may fail to recognise dangers in
DISTRONIC PLUS time, cause an accident and injure yourself
and others.
DISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and G WARNING
automatically helps you maintain the dis- DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take account of road
tance to the vehicle detected in front. It and traffic conditions. If DISTRONIC does not
brakes automatically in order to avoid recognise or no longer recognises the vehicle
exceeding the set speed. in front, do not activate DISTRONIC or, if it is
On long and steep downhill gradients, espe- already active, deactivate it. This is especially
cially if the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer, the case:
you must select shift range 1, 2 or 3 in good Rbefore corners
time. By doing so, you will make use of the Ron filter lanes
braking effect of the engine. This relieves the
Rwhen changing to a lane with faster moving
load on the brake system and prevents the
brakes from overheating and wearing too traffic
quickly. Rin complex driving situations or where lanes
If a slower-moving vehicle is detected in front, are diverted, e.g. at roadworks on a motor-

DISTRONIC PLUS causes your vehicle to way
Z
184 Driving systems
DISTRONIC PLUS otherwise maintains the warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights
current speed set by you or accelerates up to up. Brake to avoid a collision.
the set speed.
DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take account of Cruise control lever
weather conditions. Deactivate, or do not
Driving and parking
activate, DISTRONIC PLUS: With the cruise control lever, you can operate
DISTRONIC PLUS and variable SPEED-
Rif the roads are slippery, snow-covered or TRONIC.
icy. The wheels could lose their grip when
The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control
braking or accelerating. The vehicle could
lever indicates which system you have selec-
start to skid.
ted:
Rif the sensors are dirty or there is poor vis-
RLIM indicator lamp off: DISTRONIC PLUS
ibility, e.g. due to snow, rain or fog. Dis-
tance control may be impaired. is selected.
Always pay attention to traffic conditions
even when DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. TRONIC is selected.
Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers
in time, cause an accident and injure yourself
and others.
The radar sensor system is automatically

deactivated near radio telescope facilities
(Y page 389).
If you want DISTRONIC PLUS to assist you,
the radar sensor system must be activated
(Y page 242) and operational.
If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC
: To store the current speed or a higher
PLUS operates in the same way as cruise
speed
control in the speed range between
30 km/h and 200 km/h. If a vehicle is driving ; To set the specified minimum distance
in front of you, DISTRONIC operates in the = LIM indicator lamp
speed range between 0 km/h and ? To store the current speed or call up the
200 km/h. last stored speed
Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving on A To store the current speed or a lower
roads with steep gradients. speed
B To switch between DISTRONIC PLUS and
G WARNING
variable SPEEDTRONIC
DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle up to a
C To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS
maximum of 4 m/s2 depending on its speed.
This corresponds to approximately 40% of
your vehicle's maximum braking power. You Selecting DISTRONIC PLUS
must also apply the brakes yourself if this X Check whether LIM indicator lamp = is off.
braking power is not sufficient.
If it is off, DISTRONIC PLUS is already selec-
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a risk of collision ted.
with a vehicle in front, an intermittent warning
tone sounds. In addition, the · distance
Driving systems 185
If it is not, press the cruise control lever in TRONIC PLUS is deactivated and a warning
the direction of arrow B. tone sounds.
LIM indicator lamp = in the cruise control X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
lever goes out. DISTRONIC PLUS is selec- you ?, or briefly press up : or down A.
ted. DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.
Driving and parking

X Keep the cruise control lever pressed
Switching on DISTRONIC PLUS, storing up : or down A until the desired speed
the current speed and maintaining it is set.
pedal.
G WARNING Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the
The vehicle can be braked when DISTRONIC vehicle in front, but only up to the desired
PLUS is activated. For this reason, deactivate stored speed.
DISTRONIC PLUS if the vehicle is to be set in
motion by other means (e.g. in a car wash or i If you do not fully release the accelerator
by towing). pedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS suspended
message is shown in the multifunction dis-
To activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the following play. The set distance to a slower-moving
conditions must be fulfilled: vehicle in front will then not be maintained.
Rfor vehicles not equipped with a navigation
You will be driving at the speed you deter-
mine by the position of the accelerator
system, the Becker® MAP PILOT must be
pedal.
connected. See the separate Audio 20
operating instructions. Activating when driving towards a sta-
Rthe engine must be running. It may take up tionary vehicle
to two minutes of driving before DIS- If the vehicle in front of you is stationary, you
TRONIC PLUS is ready for use. can only activate DISTRONIC PLUS once your
Rthe parking brake must not be applied. vehicle is stationary as well.
RESP® must be activated but not interven- X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
ing. you ?, or briefly press up : or down A.
Rthe transmission must be in position D. DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.
Rthe bonnet must be closed.
i DISTRONIC PLUS can only be activated at
Rthe driver's door must be closed when you under 30 km/h if a vehicle in front has been
shift from P to D or your seat belt must be detected. Therefore, the DISTRONIC PLUS
fastened. distance display in the instrument cluster
Rthe front-passenger door and the rear should be activated (Y page 237).
doors must be closed. X Keep the cruise control lever pressed
Rthe vehicle must not be skidding. up : or down A until the desired speed
Activating while driving is set.
When driving at speeds below 30 km/h, you i You can use the cruise control lever to set
can only activate DISTRONIC PLUS if the vehi- the stored speed and the control on the
cle in front has been detected and is shown cruise control lever to set the specified
in the multifunction display. If the vehicle in minimum distance (Y page 188).
front is no longer detected and shown, DIS-
Z
186 Driving systems
Pulling away If these conditions are met, your vehicle is

X If the vehicle in front pulls away: remove accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted
your foot from the brake pedal. if changing lanes takes too long or if the dis-
tance between your vehicle and the vehicle in
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards front becomes too small.
you ?.
Driving and parking
or G WARNING
X Accelerate briefly. DISTRONIC PLUS and Active Blind Spot Assist
Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its are only an aid designed to assist driving.
speed to that of the vehicle in front. They do not relieve you of the responsibility
of paying attention. The driver remains fully
Driving responsible for the vehicle's distance from
If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC other vehicles, the vehicle's speed and for
PLUS operates in the same way as cruise braking in good time. Always pay attention to
control. traffic conditions and your surroundings. Oth-
If a slower-moving vehicle is detected in front, erwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in
DISTRONIC causes your vehicle to brake. This time, cause an accident and injure yourself
maintains the preset distance to the vehicle and others.
in front. Vehicles with COMAND Online
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-moving i The following function is not operational
vehicle in front, it increases the driving speed
in all countries.
of your vehicle, but only up to the desired
speed you have stored. DISTRONIC PLUS uses additional information
from your navigation system so that it can
G WARNING react appropriately to certain traffic situa-
If you depress the brake, DISTRONIC PLUS is tions. This is the case if, while following a
deactivated unless your vehicle is stationary. vehicle, DISTRONIC PLUS is active and you:
DISTRONIC PLUS then no longer brakes your Rapproach or drive through a roundabout
vehicle. In such cases, control the distance
Rapproach a T junction
from vehicles travelling in front with the brake
alone. You could otherwise cause an accident Rturn off at a motorway exit
and thereby injure yourself and others. The Even if the vehicle in front leaves the detec-
driver remains fully responsible for the vehi- tion range, DISTRONIC PLUS temporarily
cle's distance from other vehicles, the speed maintains the current driving speed and does
being driven and for braking in good time. not accelerate. This is based on the current
map data in the navigation system.
Changing lanes
If you wish to change to the passing lane (in
countries where traffic drives on the right, the
passing lane is the left-hand lane), DIS-
TRONIC PLUS supports you if:
Ryou are driving faster than 60 km/h.
RDISTRONIC PLUS is maintaining the dis-
tance to a vehicle in front.
Ryou switch on the appropriate turn signals.
RDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger
of collision.
Driving systems 187
If you wish to leave the vehicle or park it,

deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the
vehicle against rolling away.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle
Driving and parking

in front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until
it is stationary.
Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains
stationary and you do not need to depress the
brake.
Example: roundabout i Depending on the specified minimum dis-
The current speed is maintained: tance, your vehicle will come to a standstill
at a sufficient distance behind the vehicle
Rapproximately 10 seconds before the in front. The specified minimum distance is
roundabout/T junction and for approx- set using the control on the cruise control
imately 1.5 seconds when driving on the lever.
roundabout
Rapproximately 12 seconds before reaching
You will see a warning message in the multi-
function display if DISTRONIC PLUS is acti-
a motorway exit and approximately 4 sec-
vated and:
onds after the motorway exit
Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's
Afterwards, the vehicle accelerates back to
the set speed you specified. seat belt is unfastened.
Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-
Stopping matically switched off by the ECO start/
G WARNING stop function.
Never get out of the vehicle when DISTRONIC Rthe bonnet is opened.
PLUS is activated. Select Park (P)

DISTRONIC PLUS must also never be oper- X Move the selector lever to P to prevent the
ated, activated or deactivated by a passenger vehicle from rolling away.
or from outside the vehicle. DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. The warn-
DISTRONIC PLUS does not replace the parking message in the multifunction display
ing brake and must not be used for parking. disappears.
The DISTRONIC PLUS braking effect is can- The horn will also sound at regular intervals if
celled and the vehicle can start moving if: DISTRONIC PLUS is activated and you:
RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated using the Rswitch the engine off, open the driver's
cruise control lever. door and take off your seat belt
Ryou accelerate. Ropen the bonnet
Rthere is a malfunction in the system or an The sounding of the horn alerts you to the fact
interruption in the power supply, e.g. bat- that the vehicle has been parked while DIS-
tery failure. TRONIC PLUS is still activated. The sound
Rthe electrical system in the engine com- becomes louder if you attempt to lock the
partment, the battery or the fuses are tam- vehicle. The vehicle is not locked until DIS-
pered with. TRONIC PLUS is deactivated.
Rthe battery is disconnected.
Z
188 Driving systems
i If the engine has been switched off, it Storing the current speed or calling up
cannot be started again until DISTRONIC the stored speed
PLUS has been deactivated.
G WARNING
If DISTRONIC PLUS is activated and a fault
Only call up a stored speed if you know what
occurs in the system or if there is a disruption
Driving and parking
that speed is and if it is suitable for the current

in the power supply, the Brake immedi‐
traffic and driving situation. You can other-
ately message is shown in the multifunction wise endanger yourself or others by uninten-
display. Immediately depress the brake firmly tionally triggering sudden acceleration or
until the warning message in the multifunc- braking.
tion display goes out or shift the transmission
to position P. DISTRONIC PLUS is deactiva- X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
ted. you ?.
Setting a speed pedal.
X Press the cruise control lever up : for a DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first
higher speed or down A for a lower speed. time it is activated, the current speed is
X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until
stored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruise
speed to the previously stored value.
the desired speed is reached.
X Release the cruise control lever.
The new speed is stored. DISTRONIC PLUS Setting the specified minimum distance
is activated and adjusts the vehicle's speed You can set the specified minimum distance
to the new speed stored. for DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span
between one and two seconds. With this func-
Making adjustments in 1 km/h incre- tion, you can set the minimum distance that
ments DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in
front, dependent on vehicle speed. You can
X Briefly press the cruise control lever to the see this distance in the multifunction display
pressure point, up : for a higher speed or (Y page 189).
down A for a lower speed.
reduced.

ments
beyond the pressure point, up : for a
higher speed or down A for a lower speed.
reduced.
Driving systems 189
X To increase: turn control ; in direction Displaying DISTRONIC PLUS in the mul-

=. tifunction display
DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greater
distance between your vehicle and the General notes
vehicle in front. In the Assistance menu (Y page 236) of the
Driving and parking

X To decrease: turn control ; in direc-
on-board computer, you can select the dis-
tance display.
tion :.
DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorter Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deacti-
distance between your vehicle and the vated
vehicle in front. X Select the Distance display function
i Make sure that you maintain a sufficient using the on-board computer
and safe distance from the vehicle in front. (Y page 237).
Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front if When DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you
necessary. will see the following in the multifunction dis-
play:
Displaying DISTRONIC PLUS in the
speedometer
Example: vehicles with automatic transmission

: Symbol for activated PRE-SAFE® Brake
Example: vehicles with automatic transmission ; Vehicle in front, if detected
When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one or = Distance indicator: current distance to
two segments ; in the set speed range light the vehicle in front
up. ? Specified minimum distance to the vehi-
cle in front; adjustable
i For design reasons, the speed displayed
A Own vehicle
in the speedometer may differ slightly from
the speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS. Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activa-
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front, ted
segments ; between speed of the vehicle in X Select the Distance display function
front : and stored speed = light up. using the on-board computer
(Y page 237).
You will see the stored speed for about five
seconds when you activate DISTRONIC PLUS.
After this time, you will see the following in
the multifunction display while DISTRONIC
PLUS is activated:
Z
190 Driving systems
i The last speed stored remains stored until

you switch off the engine.
i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you
depress the accelerator pedal. If you accel-
erate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUS
Driving and parking
adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last

speed stored after you have finished over-
taking.
DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactiva-
ted if:
: DISTRONIC PLUS activated
Ryou apply the parking brake.
; Own vehicle
Ryou are driving slower than 25 km/h and
= Specified minimum distance to the vehi- there is no vehicle in front, or if the vehicle
cle in front; adjustable in front is no longer detected.
? Vehicle in front, if detected RESP® intervenes or if you deactivate ESP®.
Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N position.
Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS
Rthe vehicle is near a radio telescope facility
(Y page 389).
Ryou switch off the radar sensor system
(Y page 242).
Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards
you in order to pull away and the front-
passenger door or one of the rear doors is
open.
Rthe vehicle has skidded.
If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will

hear a warning tone. The DISTRONIC PLUS
There are several ways to deactivate DIS- off message is shown in the multifunction
TRONIC PLUS: display for approximately five seconds.
X Briefly press the cruise control lever for- If the vehicle has been stopped by DISTRONIC
wards :. PLUS and a fault occurs in the system, the
Brake immediately message appears in the
or
multifunction. Depress the brake pedal
X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary. immediately so that the vehicle does not roll
or away. DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated,
X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the and the message disappears.
direction of arrow =.
Variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. LIM Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS
indicator lamp ; in the cruise control lever
lights up. General notes
The following contains descriptions of certain
When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, the
road and traffic conditions in which you must
DISTRONIC PLUS off message is shown in
be particularly attentive. In such situations,
the multifunction display for approximately
brake if necessary. DISTRONIC PLUS is then
five seconds.
deactivated.
Driving systems 191
Cornering, going into and coming out of a DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the vehi-
bend cle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehicle
will be too short.
Narrow vehicles
Driving and parking

The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehi-
cles when cornering is limited. Your vehicle
may brake unexpectedly or late.
DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected the
Vehicles travelling on a different line vehicle in front on the edge of the carriage-
way, because of its narrow width. The dis-
tance to the vehicle in front will be too short.
Obstructions and stationary vehicles
DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicles

travelling on a different line. The distance to
the vehicle in front will be too short.
Other vehicles changing lane DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obsta-
cles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the
detected vehicle turns a corner and reveals
an obstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONIC
PLUS will not brake for these.
Z
192 Driving systems
Crossing vehicles
Driving and parking
Example: position of dynamic handling package

with sports mode button
DISTRONIC PLUS may detect vehicles that
X Start the engine.
are crossing your lane by mistake. Activating
DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights with cross-
ing traffic, for example, could cause your vehi- Sports tuning
cle to pull away unintentionally. The firmer setting of the suspension tuning in
sports mode ensures even better contact
with the road. Select this mode when employ-
Dynamic handling package with ing a sporty driving style, e.g. on winding
sports mode country roads.
General notes Your selection remains stored until you
switch off the engine.
The most important part of the dynamic han-
X Press button ;.
dling package with sports mode is the adjust-
able suspension system. This automatically Indicator lamp : lights up. Sports suspen-
controls and adapts the suspension to the sion tuning is selected. Depending on the
respective driving situation. engine output, the accelerator pedal is
The calibration of the suspension depends more responsive. On vehicles with auto-
on: matic transmission, drive program S is
selected.
Ryour driving style
Rthe road surface conditions Comfort tuning
Ryour individual selection; see the following
description In comfort mode, the driving characteristics
of your vehicle are more comfortable. Select
If your vehicle is equipped with automatic
this mode if you prefer a more comfortable
transmission, the dynamic handling package
driving style, but also when driving fast on
with sports mode also includes steering
straight roads, e.g. motorways.
wheel gearshift paddles (Y page 164) with a
manual drive program (Y page 166). X Press button ;.
Indicator lamp : goes out. Comfortable
suspension tuning is selected. On vehicles
with automatic transmission, drive pro-
gram E is selected.
Driving systems 193
HOLD function X Quickly depress the brake pedal further

until HOLD display : appears in the multi-
General notes function display.
The HOLD function can assist the driver in the The HOLD function is activated. You can
following situations: release the brake pedal.
Driving and parking

Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep i If depressing the brake pedal the first
slopes time does not activate the HOLD function,
Rwhen manoeuvring on steep slopes wait briefly and then try again.
Rwhen waiting in traffic
G WARNING
The vehicle is kept stationary without the The vehicle's brakes are applied when the
driver having to depress the brake pedal. HOLD function is activated. For this reason,
The braking effect is cancelled and the HOLD deactivate the HOLD function if the vehicle is
function is deactivated when you depress the to be set in motion by other means (e.g. in a
accelerator pedal to pull away. car wash or by towing).
Activation conditions Deactivating the HOLD function

You can activate the HOLD function if: The HOLD function is deactivated automati-
Rthe vehicle is stationary. cally if:
Rthe engine is running or if it has been auto- Ryou accelerate. On vehicles with automatic
matically switched off by the ECO start/ transmission: only when the transmission
stop function. is in position D or R.
Rthe driver's door is closed or if your seat Ryou shift the transmission to position P on
belt is fastened. vehicles with automatic transmission.
Rthe parking brake is not applied. Ryou apply the brakes again with a certain
Rthe bonnet is closed. amount of pressure until HOLD disappears
Rthe selector lever is in position D, R or N on from the multifunction display.
vehicles with automatic transmission. Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS.
RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.
G WARNING
Never get out of the vehicle when the HOLD
Activating the HOLD function function is activated.
X Make sure that the activation conditions The HOLD function must never be operated
are met. or deactivated by a passenger or from outside
X Depress the brake pedal. the vehicle.
The HOLD function does not replace the park-
ing brake and must not be used for parking.
Z
194 Driving systems
The braking effect of the HOLD function is The sounding of the horn alerts you to the fact
cancelled and the vehicle could roll away if: that the vehicle has been parked while the
Rthe
HOLD function is still activated. If you attempt
HOLD function is deactivated by
to lock the vehicle, the tone becomes louder.
depressing the accelerator pedal or the
The vehicle is not locked until the HOLD func-
brake pedal.
Driving and parking
tion is deactivated.
Rthere is a malfunction in the system or an
interruption in the power supply, e.g. bat- i If the engine has been switched off, it
tery failure. cannot be started again until the HOLD
Rthe electrical system in the engine com- function has been deactivated.
partment, the battery or the fuses are tam- If there is a fault in the system or power supply
pered with. while the HOLD function is activated, the
Rthe battery is disconnected. Brake immediately message is shown in
If you leave the vehicle or park it, deactivate the multifunction display. Immediately
the HOLD function and secure the vehicle depress the brake firmly until the warning
against rolling away. message in the multifunction display goes
out.
You will see a warning message in the multi- On vehicles with automatic transmission, you
function display if the HOLD function is acti- can also shift into position P. This deactivates
vated and: the HOLD function.
Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's
seat belt is unfastened.
RACE START
Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-
matically switched off by the ECO start/ Important safety notes
stop function.
i RACE START is only available in AMG vehi-
Rthe bonnet is opened.
cles.
For vehicles with manual transmission:
Brake immediately RACE START enables optimal acceleration
from a standing start. The precondition for
X Immediately depress the brake pedal firmly
this is a suitable high-grip road surface.
until the warning message in the multifunc-
tion display goes out. This deactivates the G WARNING
HOLD function. RACE START is only available when SPORT
On vehicles with automatic transmission: handling mode is activated. SPORT handling
Select Park (P) mode will only be able to stabilise the vehicle
to a limited degree if the vehicle starts to skid
X Move the selector lever to P to prevent the
or a wheel starts to spin. The vehicle is there-
vehicle from rolling away. fore harder to control at the threshold range.
The HOLD function is deactivated. The You could lose control of the vehicle and
warning message in the multifunction dis- cause an accident.
play disappears.
RACE START should only be used on closed
A horn will also sound at regular intervals if off circuits. Always adapt your driving style to
the HOLD function is activated and you: suit the prevailing road and weather condi-
Rswitch the engine off, open the driver's tions.
door and take off your seat belt
Ropen the bonnet
Driving systems 195
Conditions for activation XDepress the accelerator pedal fully.

The engine speed rises to approximately
RACE START can be activated when:
4000 rpm.
Rthe doors are closed. The multifunction display shows the RACE
Rthe engine is running and it has reached an START Release brake to start mes-
Driving and parking

operating temperature of approximately sage.
80 †. This is the case when the engine oil i If you do not release the brake pedal
temperature in the multifunction display within seven seconds, RACE START is can-
stops flashing. celled. The multifunction display shows the
RSPORT handling mode is activated.
RACE START cancelled message.
(Y page 76)
X Take your foot off the brake, but keep the
Rthe steering wheel is in the straight-ahead
accelerator pedal depressed.
position. The vehicle pulls away at maximum accel-
Rthe vehicle is stationary and the brake
eration.
pedal is depressed (left foot). The multifunction display shows the RACE
Rthe transmission is in position D.
START active message.
RACE START is deactivated when the vehicle
Activating RACE START
reaches a speed of approximately 50 km/h.
X Depress the brake pedal with your left foot, Drive program S+ is activated. SPORT han-
and keep it depressed. dling mode remains activated.
X Turn the drive program selector clockwise RACE START is deactivated immediately if
(Y page 163) until the RS lamp lights up. you release the accelerator pedal during
The multifunction display shows the RACE RACE START or if any of the activation condi-
START Confirm: Paddle UP Cancel: tions are no longer fulfilled. The multifunction
Paddle DOWN message. display shows the RACE START not possi‐
i If the conditions for activation are no lon- ble See Owner's Manual message.
ger fulfilled, RACE START is cancelled. The i If RACE START is used repeatedly in a
multifunction display shows the RACE short period of time, it is only available
START cancelled message. again after having driven the vehicle a cer-
X To cancel: pull the left steering wheel shift tain distance.
paddle (Y page 164).
or
4MATIC (permanent all-wheel drive)
XTo confirm: pull the right steering wheel
shift paddle (Y page 164). 4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are per-
The multifunction display shows the RACE manently driven. Together with ESP®, it
START available Depress accelera‐ improves the traction of your vehicle when-
tor message. ever a drive wheel spins due to insufficient
i If you do not depress the accelerator grip.
pedal fully within two seconds, RACE G WARNING
START is cancelled. The multifunction dis-
4MATIC cannot reduce the risk of an accident
play shows the RACE START not possi‐
if you drive too fast.
ble See Owner's Manual message.
If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip:
Z
196 Driving systems
Ronly depress the accelerator pedal as far as PARKTRONIC is activated automatically if

necessary when pulling away. you:
Raccelerate less when driving. Rswitch on the ignition
Radapt your driving style to suit road and Rshift to position D, R or N on vehicles with
traffic conditions. automatic transmission
Driving and parking
Rrelease the parking brake

! Never tow the vehicle with one axle
PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above
raised. This may damage the transfer case.
18 km/h. It is reactivated at lower speeds.
Damage of this sort is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz implied warranty. All PARKTRONIC monitors the area around your
wheels must remain either on the ground vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper
or be fully raised. Observe the instructions and four sensors in the rear bumper.
for towing the vehicle with all wheels in full
contact with the ground.
i In wintry driving conditions, the maximum
effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if
you use winter tyres (M+S tyres), with snow
chains if necessary.
PARKTRONIC
: Example: sensors in the front bumper,
G WARNING left-hand side
PARKTRONIC is only an aid and may not
detect all obstacles. It is not a substitute for Range of the sensors
attentive driving.
General notes
You are always responsible for safety and
must continue to pay attention to your imme- The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and
diate surroundings when parking and slush; otherwise, they may not function cor-
manoeuvring. You could otherwise endanger rectly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking
yourself and others. care not to scratch or damage them
(Y page 330).
G WARNING
Make sure that no persons or animals are in
the manoeuvring range. Otherwise, they
could be injured.
PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with

ultrasonic sensors. It indicates visually and
audibly the distance between your vehicle
and an object.
Example: side view (Saloon)

Driving systems 197
the minimum, the distance may no longer be

shown.
Warning displays
The warning displays show the distance
Driving and parking

between the sensors and the obstacle. The
warning display for the front area is located
on the dashboard above the centre air vents.
The warning display for the rear area is loca-
ted on the roof lining in the rear compart-
Example: top view (Saloon) ment.
Front sensors
Centre approximately 100 cm
Corners approximately 60 cm
Rear sensors
! When parking, pay particular attention to Warning display for the front area
objects above or below the sensors, such : Segments on the left-hand side of the
as flower pots or trailer drawbars. PARK- vehicle
TRONIC does not detect such objects when ; Segments on the right-hand side of the
they are in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle
vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or = Segments showing operational readiness
the objects.
The warning display for each side of the vehi-
The sensors may not detect snow and
cle is divided into five yellow and two red seg-
objects which absorb ultrasonic sources.
ments. PARKTRONIC is operational if yellow
Ultrasonic sources, such as an automatic segments showing operational readiness =
car wash, a lorry's compressed-air brakes
light up.
or a pneumatic drill, could cause PARK-
TRONIC to malfunction. The gear lever position or the transmission
position of the automatic transmission deter-
PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on
mines which warning display is active when
uneven terrain.
the engine is running.
Minimum distance
If there is an obstacle within this range, the

relevant warning displays light up and a warn-
ing tone sounds. If the distance falls below
Z
198 Driving systems
Manual transmission: Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC

Gear lever posi- Warning display
tion
Forwards gear Front area activated
Driving and parking
or
Neutral
Reverse gear, or Rear and front areas
the vehicle is rolling activated
backwards
Automatic transmission: : Indicator lamp

; To deactivate/activate PARKTRONIC
Transmission Warning display
position If indicator lamp : lights up, PARKTRONIC is
deactivated. Parking Guidance is also deacti-
D Front area activated vated.
R, N or the vehicle Rear and front areas i PARKTRONIC is automatically activated
is rolling back- activated when you turn the key to position 2 in the
wards ignition lock.
P No areas activated
Towing a trailer
One or more segments light up as the vehicle PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear area
approaches an obstacle, depending on the when you establish an electrical connection
vehicle's distance from the obstacle. between your vehicle and a trailer.
From the: ! Fold in the ball coupling if the trailer tow
Rsixthsegment onwards, you will hear an hitch is not required. PARKTRONIC meas-
intermittent warning tone for approx- ures the minimum detection range to an
imately two seconds. obstacle from the bumper, not the ball cou-
Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a
pling.
warning tone for approximately two sec-
onds. This indicates that you have now
reached the minimum distance.
Driving systems 199
Problems with PARKTRONIC

Only the red segments PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.
in the PARKTRONIC X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified
Driving and parking

warning displays are lit. specialist workshop.
You also hear a warning
tone for approximately
two seconds.
PARKTRONIC is deacti-
vated after approx-
imately 20 seconds,
and the indicator lamp
in the PARKTRONIC
button lights up.
Only the red segments The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.
in the PARKTRONIC X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 330).
warning displays are lit. X
Switch the ignition back on.
PARKTRONIC is deacti-
vated after approx- The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or
imately 20 seconds. ultrasound waves.
X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.
Parking Guidance when the vehicle parked in front of or behind

the space changes its position or when an
Important safety notes obstacle is moved into the parking space.
Parking Guidance is an electronic parking aid Parking Guidance does not relieve you of the
with ultrasound. Ultrasound is used to meas- responsibility for paying attention. If you rely
ure the road on both sides of the vehicle. A solely on Parking Guidance, you could cause
suitable parking space is indicated by the an accident and injure yourself and others.
parking symbol. You receive steering instruc- You are always responsible for safety and
tions when parking. You may also use PARK- must continue to pay attention to your imme-
TRONIC (Y page 196). diate surroundings when parking and
G WARNING manoeuvring.
Parking Guidance is merely an aid and may
G WARNING
recommend parking spaces that are not suit-
able for parking. For example, these might be Objects located above the height range of
spaces where parking is prohibited, drive- Parking Guidance will not be detected when
ways, unsuitable surfaces, etc. the parking space is measured. These are not
taken into account when the parking proce-
Parking Guidance measures the parking
dure is calculated, e.g. overhanging loads, tail
space as you drive past it. Any later changes
sections or loading ramps of goods vehicles.
to the parking space are not taken into
In some circumstances, Parking Guidance
account. For instance, this may be the case
Z
200 Driving systems
might therefore issue steering instructions lead you across or onto the kerb. If neces-
too soon. This may lead to a collision. For this sary, cancel the parking procedure with
reason, you should avoid using Parking Guid- Parking Guidance.
ance in such situations. ! If unavoidable, you should drive over
obstacles such as kerbs slowly and not at
Driving and parking
G WARNING a sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage

Make sure that no persons or animals are in the wheels or tyres.
the manoeuvring range. Otherwise, they
could be injured. Detecting parking spaces
When PARKTRONIC is deactivated, Parking
Guidance is also unavailable.
Use Parking Guidance for parking spaces:
Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel
Rthat are on straight roads, not bends
Rthat are on the same level as the road, i.e.
not on the pavement, for example. Parking Example: vehicles with automatic transmission
Guidance may not detect flat kerbs : Detected parking space on the left
Parking tips: ; Parking symbol
Ron narrow roads, drive as closely as possi- = Detected parking space on the right
ble past the parking space. Parking Guidance is automatically activated
Rparking spaces that are littered, overgrown when you drive forwards. The system is
or partially occupied by trailer drawbars operational at speeds of up to approximately
might be identified incorrectly or not at all. 35 km/h. While in operation, the system inde-
Rsnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking pendently locates and measures parking
space being measured inaccurately. spaces on both sides of the vehicle. When
Rpay attention to the PARKTRONIC driving at speeds below 30 km/h, you will see
(Y page 197) warning messages during the parking symbol ; as a status indicator in the
parking procedure. instrument cluster.
Rwhen transporting a load which protrudes When a parking space has been detected, an
from your vehicle, you must not use Parking arrow towards the right = or the left : also
Guidance. appears. Parking Guidance only displays
Rnever use Parking Guidance with snow parking spaces on the front-passenger side
chains or an emergency spare wheel fitted. as standard. Parking spaces on the driver's
Rmake sure that the tyre pressures are side are displayed as soon as the turn signal
always correct. This has a direct effect on on the driver's side is activated. To park on
the steering instructions. the driver's side, you must leave the driver's
side turn signal switched on until you have
Rthe way your vehicle is positioned in the
engaged reverse gear.
parking space after parking is dependent
on various factors. These include the posi-
tion and shape of the vehicles parked in
front and behind it and the conditions of the
location. In some cases, Parking Guidance
may guide you too far or not far enough into
a parking space. In some cases, it may also
Driving systems 201
Parking Guidance will only detect parking

spaces:
Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel
Rthat are at least 1.5 m wide
Rthat are at least 1.3 m longer than your
Driving and parking

vehicle
A parking space is displayed while you are Example: vehicles with automatic transmission
driving past it, and until you are approx- X If necessary, reverse towards the parking
imately 15 m away from it. space. This is indicated by an arrow point-
ing backwards.
Parking Continue reversing until you hear a tone.
Stop – the parking position has been
G WARNING reached. The arrow is white.
PARKTRONIC and Parking Guidance are
The Please steer to the right or
merely parking aids and may not detect all
Please steer to the left message
obstacles. They do not relieve you of the
responsibility of paying attention.
must continue to pay attention to your imme-
diate surroundings when parking and
manoeuvring. You could otherwise endanger
yourself and others.
X Stop the vehicle when the parking space

symbol shows the desired parking space in Example: vehicles with automatic transmission
the instrument cluster. X While the vehicle is stationary, turn the
X Vehicles with manual transmission: shift to steering wheel in the specified direction
reverse gear. until the arrow is white and a warning tone
Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift sounds.
into position R. X To reverse into the parking space: main-
The following message appears in the mul- tain the steering wheel angle and reverse
tifunction display: Check vehicle sur‐ carefully.
roundings Confirm with OK. X Stop as soon as you hear a warning tone.
X Press the a button on the multifunction The vehicle has reached the position in
steering wheel to confirm. which you need to countersteer.
The multifunction display switches to Park- The Please steer to the left or
ing Guidance. Please steer to the right message
Depending on your distance from the park- appears in the multifunction display.
ing space, the Please drive backwards X Countersteering: while the vehicle is sta-
message appears in the multifunction dis- tionary, turn the steering wheel in the
play. specified direction until the arrow is white
and a warning tone sounds.
Z
202 Driving systems
X To reverse into the parking space: main- Reversing camera

tain the steering wheel angle and reverse
carefully. Important safety notes
X Stop as soon as you hear a warning tone, The reversing camera is an optical parking
at the latest when PARKTRONIC sounds the aid. It shows the area behind your vehicle in
Driving and parking
continuous warning tone. the COMAND Online display.

The Parking Guidance finished mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display G WARNING
and a warning tone sounds. You may be Make sure that no persons or animals are in
asked to steer in a different direction and the manoeuvring range. Otherwise, they
then change gear. In this case, further dis- could be injured.
plays in the multifunction display will direct
you to the final position. The reversing camera is located in the handle
strip of the boot lid/tailgate.
X Manoeuvre if necessary.
X Always observe the warning messages dis-
played by PARKTRONIC (Y page 197).
Cancelling Parking Guidance

X Press the PARKTRONIC button on the
centre console (Y page 198).
Parking Guidance is cancelled immediately
and PARKTRONIC is deactivated.
Parking Guidance is cancelled automatically
if it is no longer possible to guide you into the : Reversing camera
parking space, or if a malfunction occurs.
The parking space symbol goes out and a View through the camera
warning tone sounds. The Parking Guid‐
The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a
ance cancelled message appears in the
mirror image, as in the rear-view mirror.
G WARNING
Towing a trailer The reversing camera is only an aid and may
display obstacles in a distorted or incorrect
For vehicles with a trailer tow hitch, the min-
manner, or may not even display them at all.
imum length for parking spaces is slightly
The reversing camera does not relieve you of
increased.
the responsibility to pay attention. The cam-
If you have attached a trailer to your vehicle, era cannot show objects:
you should not use Parking Guidance. When
Rvery near to the rear bumper
the electrical connection is established
Rbelow the rear bumper
between your vehicle and the trailer, Parking
Guidance ceases to be available. PARK- Rin the area immediately above the boot lid
TRONIC is deactivated for the rear area. handle/tailgate handle recess
must continue to pay attention to your imme-
diate surroundings when parking and
manoeuvring. This applies to the areas
Driving systems 203
behind, in front of and next to the vehicle. You ATTENTION ASSIST

could otherwise endanger yourself and oth-
ers. Important safety notes
ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,
G WARNING monotonous journeys such as on motorways
Driving and parking

Under the following circumstances, the and trunk roads. It is active in the 80 km/h
reversing camera will not function, or will to 180 km/h range.
function in a limited manner: If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typical indica-
Rif the boot lid/tailgate is open tors of fatigue or increasing lapses in con-
centration on the part of the driver, it sug-
Rin heavy rain, snow or fog
gests taking a break.
Rat night or in very dark places
Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light G WARNING
Rif the area is lit by fluorescent light (the dis- ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid and may
play may flicker) detect your tiredness or lapses in concentra-
tion too late or not at all. It is not a substitute
Rif there is a sudden change in temperature,
for a well rested and attentive driver.
e.g. when driving into a heated garage in
winter Fatigue may cause you to recognise hazard-
ous situations too late, misjudge a situation
Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed
or react slower. For this reason, make sure
Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this
you feel rested before you begin driving and
event, have the camera position and setting during your journey. Always take breaks in
checked at a qualified specialist workshop. good time and regularly, especially during
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use long journeys. Otherwise, you may fail to rec-
a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this ognise dangers in time, cause an accident and
purpose. injure yourself and others.
Do not use the reversing camera in these
types of situation. You could otherwise injure ATTENTION ASSIST assesses your level of
others or damage objects and your vehicle fatigue or lapses in concentration by taking
while you are parking. the following criteria into account:
Ryour personal driving style, e.g. steering
Activating the reversing camera characteristics
Rdriving conditions, e.g. time, driving time
the ignition lock. The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is
X Make sure that the "Reversing camera" restricted, and warnings may be delayed or
function is selected in COMAND Online not occur at all:
(see the separate operating instructions for Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the sur-
COMAND Online). face is uneven or if there are potholes
X Engage reverse gear. Rif there is a strong side wind
The area behind the vehicle is shown in the Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style
COMAND Online display. with high cornering speeds or high rates of
acceleration
Rif you are predominantly driving slower
than 80 km/h or faster than 180 km/h
Rif you are currently using COMAND Online
or making a telephone call with it
Z
204 Driving systems
Rif the time has been set incorrectly Speed Limit Assist
Rin active driving situations, such as when
you change lanes or change your speed Important safety notes
Speed Limit Assist shows you detected speed
Warning and display messages in the limits in the multifunction display. Data from
Driving and parking
multifunction display the navigation system is also used for this

purpose. The display appears if a traffic sign
indicating a speed limit or the end of a speed
limit is detected. If Speed Limit Assist does
not detect any traffic signs, the speed limit
from the digital road map is taken and shown
in the display.
Speed Limit Assist detects the traffic signs
Example: vehicles with automatic transmission with a camera attached behind the top of the
windscreen.
X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-
board computer (Y page 238).
Symbol : appears in the multifunction
display.
If ATTENTION ASSIST is active, you will be
warned no sooner than 20 minutes after your
journey has begun. You will then hear an
intermittent warning tone twice, and the
Attention Assist: Drowsiness detec‐
ted message appears in the multifunction
display.
X If necessary, take a break. : Speed Limit Assist camera
X Press the a button to confirm the mes-
G WARNING
sage.
Speed Limit Assist is only an aid and may
On long journeys, take regular breaks in good detect speed limit signs incorrectly or not at
time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you all.
do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST The system may be impaired or may not func-
still detects typical indicators of fatigue or tion if:
increasing lapses in concentration, you will be
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow,
warned again after 15 minutes at the earliest.
rain, fog or spray.
ATTENTION ASSIST is reset and starts
Rthere is glare, e.g. from the sun or from
assessing your tiredness again when you con-
tinue your journey if: oncoming traffic.
Rthe windscreen is dirty, misted up or cov-
Ryou switch off the engine.
ered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity
Ryou take off your seat belt and open the of the camera.
driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or Rthe traffic signs are covered, for instance
to take a break.
by dirt, snow or trees.
Driving systems 205
Rthe traffic signs are poorly illuminated. X Activate the Speed Limit Assist warning
Rthere are ambiguous traffic signs, for function using the on-board computer
instance near roadworks or on multi-lane (Y page 236).
roads. Symbol ; appears.
Traffic signs always have priority over the
Driving and parking

Permanently showing detected traffic
Speed Limit Assist display. Speed Limit Assist signs in the multifunction display
cannot detect road and traffic conditions. It is
If Speed Limit Assist is selected in the on-
not a substitute for attentive driving.
board computer, a traffic sign indicating the
Always pay attention to traffic conditions and speed limit or end of a speed limit zone :
your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to
appears in the multifunction display as soon
recognise dangers in time, cause an accident
as it is detected.
and injure yourself and others.
Traffic sign indicating a speed limit : is gen-
erally displayed until:
Information in the multifunction display
Ra traffic sign indicating the end of the speed
limit is detected.
Ryou make a turn.
Ryou leave or enter a town.
Rthe road type changes (e.g. motorway,
country road).
Ryou have travelled a certain minimum dis-
tance without the traffic sign being repea-
ted or detected again.
X Display Speed Limit Assist using the on-
board computer (Y page 236).
Example: vehicles featuring automatic transmis-
sion with a selector lever i You can also activate Speed Limit Assist
: Traffic sign indicating a speed limit or the using COMAND Online. The maximum per-
end of a speed limit missible speed is shown in the COMAND
; Speed Limit Assist is available and the display; see the COMAND operating
warning function is switched on in the on- instructions.
board computer
= Units used in the traffic sign displayed
Lane Tracking package
Briefly showing detected traffic signs in
the multifunction display General notes
When you activate the Speed Limit Assist The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind
warning function, a traffic sign indicating the Spot Assist (Y page 205) and Lane Keeping
speed limit or end of speed limit zone : may Assist (Y page 208).
appear in the multifunction display. The traffic
sign appears for approximately five seconds Blind Spot Assist
as soon as it is detected. Other items in the
multifunction display are suppressed during Important safety notes
this time. Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system
to monitor the areas on both sides of your
vehicle. It supports you from speeds of
Z
206 Driving systems
30 km/h. A warning display in the exterior

mirrors draws your attention to vehicles
detected in the monitored area. If you then
switch on the corresponding turn signal to
change lane, you will also receive an optical
Driving and parking
and audible collision warning. For monitoring,

Active Blind Spot Assist uses sensors in the
rear bumper.
G WARNING
Blind Spot Assist is only an aid designed to
assist driving. It may fail to detect some vehi-
cles and is no substitute for attentive driving.
Blind Spot Assist cannot detect road and traf-
fic conditions. It may fail to detect narrow
vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, or
only detect them too late. Example: Saloon
Monitoring may be affected by dirty sensors, G WARNING
strong spray or poor visibility caused by snow,
Blind Spot Assist monitors certain areas in the
rain or mist, for example. In this case, vehicles
immediate vicinity of your vehicle. Vehicles
are detected late or not at all.
that approach and drive past at high speeds
Always pay attention to traffic conditions and are not detected. There is no display and no
your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to warning.
If the lanes are very wide, it may not be pos-
sible to monitor the complete width of the
The radar sensor system is automatically neighbouring lane. For this reason, vehicles in
deactivated near radio telescope facilities the next lane may not be detected, especially
(Y page 389). if they are driving in a staggered formation in
different lanes. This may be the case if vehi-
For Blind Spot Assist to assist you when driv-
cles are driving at the edge of their lane that
ing, the radar sensor system must be activa-
is furthest away from your vehicle.
ted (Y page 242) and operational.
Always pay attention to traffic conditions and
Monitoring range of the sensors your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to
Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident
three metres behind your vehicle and directly and injure yourself and others.
next to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram.
If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the
lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may
be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not
driving in the middle of their lane. This may
be the case if the vehicles are driving on the
inner side of their lane.
Driving systems 207
Due to the nature of the system: the warning only occurs if the difference in
Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv- speed is less than 12 km/h.
ing close to crash barriers or similar solid The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse
lane borders. gear is engaged. Blind Spot Assist is then
Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving deactivated.
Driving and parking

alongside long vehicles, such as lorries, for The brightness of the indicator/warning
a prolonged time. lamps is adjusted automatically according to
The two sensors for Blind Spot Assist are the ambient light.
integrated into the sides of the rear bumper. G WARNING
Make sure that the bumper is free of dirt, ice Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below
or slush in the vicinity of the sensors. The 30 km/h, and the indicator lamps in the exte-
radar sensors must not be covered, for exam- rior mirrors are yellow. Vehicles in the moni-
ple by cycle racks or overhanging loads. Fol- toring range are then not indicated.
lowing a severe impact or in the event of dam-
age to the bumpers, have the function of the
radar sensors checked at a qualified special-
ist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre. Blind Spot Assist may otherwise not
work properly. Collision warning
Indicator and warning display If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range
of Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the turn
signal, a double warning tone sounds. Red
warning lamp : flashes. If the turn signal
remains on, detected vehicles are indicated
by the flashing of red warning lamp :. There
are no further warning tones.
Switching on Blind Spot Assist
X On vehicles without a navigation system,
make sure that the Becker® MAP PILOT is
connected; see the separate operating
: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp instructions for Audio 20.
X Make sure that the radar sensor system
If Blind Spot Assist is switched on, indicator
lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up yel- (Y page 242) and Blind Spot Assist
(Y page 238) are activated in the on-board
low up to a speed of 30 km/h. At speeds
computer.
above 30 km/h, the indicator lamp goes out
and Blind Spot Assist is operational.
lock.
If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring
Warning lamps : light up red in the exte-
range of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above
30 km/h, warning lamp : on the corre- rior mirrors for approximately 1.5 seconds
and then turn yellow.
sponding side lights up in red. This warning is
always emitted when a vehicle enters the Trailer towing
blind spot monitoring range from behind or
If you attach a trailer, make sure that you have
from the side. When you overtake a vehicle,
correctly established the electrical connec-
tion. This can be accomplished by checking
Z
208 Driving systems
the trailer lighting. Blind Spot Assist is then G WARNING

deactivated. The indicator lamp in the exte- Lane Keeping Assist does not keep your vehi-
rior mirrors lights up yellow, and the Blind cle in its lane. It is only an aid and may detect
Spot Assist currently unavailable the lane markings on the road incorrectly or
See Owner's Manual message appears in not at all.
Driving and parking

The system may be impaired or may not func-
i You can deactivate the indicator lamps in tion if:
the exterior mirrors. Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi-
To do so, switch off Blind Spot Assist if: cient illumination of the road, or due to
Rthe key is in position 2 in the ignition snow, rain, fog or spray.
lock. Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,
Rthe engine is not running. the sun, or reflection from other vehicles.
Rthe electrical connection to the trailer Rthe windscreen is dirty, misted up or cov-
has been established. ered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity

of the camera
Lane Keeping Assist Rseveral or no lane markings for a single lane
are present.
Important safety notes Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or
Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow.
front of your vehicle by means of a camera at Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too
the top of the windscreen. Lane Keeping small and the lane markings thus cannot be
Assist detects lane markings on the road and detected.
warns you before you leave your lane unin- Rthe lane markings on the road are unclear,
tentionally.
e.g. near roadworks.
Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.
lanes branch off, cross one another or
merge.
Rthe road is narrow and winding.
Lane Keeping Assist cannot detect road and

traffic conditions. It is not a substitute for
attentive driving. You are responsible for the
vehicle's speed, braking in good time, and
steering correctly. Always adapt your driving
style to suit the prevailing road and weather
: Lane Keeping Assist camera conditions. Always pay attention to traffic
conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise,
If you have chosen the Display unit
you may fail to recognise dangers in time,
Speed-/odometer(Y page 239) function in
cause an accident and injure yourself and oth-
the on-board computer and select km as the
ers.
unit of measurement, Active Lane Keeping
Assist is active from speeds of 60 km/h. If A warning may be given if a front wheel
the miles display unit is selected, the assis- passes over a lane marking. It will warn you
tance range begins at 40 mph. by means of intermittent vibration in the
steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.
Driving systems 209
In order that you are warned only when nec- Active Driving Assistance package
essary and in good time if you cross the lane
marking, the system recognises certain con- General notes
ditions and warns you accordingly. The Active Driving Assistance package con-
The warning vibration occurs earlier if: sists of DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 183), Active
Driving and parking

Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a Blind Spot Assist (Y page 209) and Active
bend. Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 212).
Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a motor-
way. Active Blind Spot Assist
Rthe system recognises solid lane markings.
The warning vibration occurs later if: Active Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor
Rthe road has narrow lanes. system to monitor the side areas of your vehi-
Ryou cut the corner on a bend. cle which are in back of the driver. A warning
No warning vibration occurs if: display in the exterior mirrors draws your
attention to vehicles detected in the moni-
Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake, or tored area. If you then switch on the corre-
accelerate. sponding turn signal to change lane, you will
Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. also receive an optical and audible collision
Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as warning. If a risk of lateral collision is detec-
ABS, BAS or ESP®. ted, corrective braking may help you avoid a
Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In collision. To support the course-correcting
this event, the warnings are suppressed for brake application, Active Blind Spot Assist
a certain period of time. also uses the forward-facing radar sensor sys-
tem. Active Blind Spot Assist supports you
Activating Lane Keeping Assist from a speed of approximately 30 km/h.
G WARNING
Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid and may
detect vehicles/obstacles incorrectly or not
at all.
The system may be impaired or may not func-
tion if:
Example: vehicles with automatic transmission Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow,
X Activate Lane Keeping Assist using the on- rain, fog or spray.
board computer (Y page 238). Rthe rear and/or front sensors are dirty.
Symbol : appears in the multifunction Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect nar-
display. row vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles,
If you drive at speeds above 60 km/h and or only detect them too late. It cannot detect
lane markings are detected, symbol : is vehicles which are overtaken at a small dis-
shown in green. Lane Keeping Assist is tance and then enter the blind spot area.
ready for use. Active Blind Spot Assist cannot detect road
and traffic conditions. It is not a substitute for
attentive driving. You are responsible for the
vehicle's speed, braking in good time, and
steering correctly. Always adapt your driving
Z
210 Driving systems
style to suit the prevailing road and weather neighbouring lane. For this reason, vehicles in
conditions. Always pay attention to traffic the next lane may not be detected, especially
conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, if they are driving in a staggered formation.
you may fail to recognise dangers in time, This may be the case if vehicles are driving at
cause an accident and injure yourself and oth- the edge of their lane that is furthest away
Driving and parking
ers. from your vehicle.

The radar sensor system is automatically your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to
deactivated near radio telescope facilities recognise dangers in time, cause an accident
(Y page 389). and injure yourself and others.
For Active Blind Spot Assist to assist you
when driving, the radar sensor system must If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the
be activated (Y page 242) and operational. lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may
be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not
Monitoring range driving in the middle of their lane. This may
Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up be the case if there are vehicles at the edge
to three metres behind your vehicle and of their lane nearest your vehicle.
directly next to your vehicle as shown in the Due to the nature of the system:
diagram. For this purpose, Active Blind Spot
Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv-
Assist uses radar sensors in the rear bumper.
ing close to crash barriers or similar solid
lane borders.
Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving
alongside long vehicles, such as lorries, for
a prolonged time.
Two Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors
are integrated into the front and rear bumpers
respectively. An additional radar sensor is
located behind the cover in the radiator grille.
Make sure that the bumpers are free of dirt,
ice or slush around the sensors. The rear sen-
sors must not be covered, e.g. by bicycle
racks or overhanging loads. Following a
severe impact or in the event of damage to
the bumpers, have the function of the radar
sensors checked at a qualified specialist
Example: Saloon workshop. Blind Spot Assist may otherwise
not work properly.
G WARNING
Active Blind Spot Assist monitors certain
areas in the immediate vicinity of your vehicle.
Vehicles that approach and drive past at high
speeds are not detected. No visual nor audi-
ble warnings are emitted and the system does
not brake the vehicle to correct your course.
If the lanes are very wide, it may not be pos-
sible to monitor the complete width of the
Driving systems 211
Indicator and warning display Visual and acoustic collision warning

If you switch on the appropriate turn signals
and a vehicle is detected in the side monitor-
ing range, you will receive a visual and acous-
tic collision warning. You will hear a double
Driving and parking

warning tone and red warning lamp :
flashes. If the turn signal remains on, detec-
ted vehicles are indicated by the flashing of
red warning lamp :. There are no further
warning tones.
Course-correcting brake application
: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a
When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated, lateral collision in the monitoring range, a
indicator lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights course-correcting brake application is carried
out. This is designed to help you avoid a col-
up in yellow at speeds of up to 30 km/h. At
lision.
speeds above 30 km/h, the indicator lamp
goes out and Active Blind Spot Assist is The course-correcting brake application is
operational. available in the range between 30 km/h and
200 km/h.
If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring
range of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above If a course-correcting brake application
30 km/h, warning lamp : on the corre- occurs, red warning lamp : flashes in the
sponding side lights up red. This warning is exterior mirror and the following is shown in
always emitted when a vehicle enters the the multifunction display, for example:
blind spot monitoring range from behind or
from the side. When you overtake a vehicle,
the warning only occurs if the difference in
speed is less than 12 km/h.
The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse
gear is engaged. Active Blind Spot Assist is
then no longer active.
The brightness of the indicator/warning Example: vehicles with automatic transmission
lamps is adjusted automatically according to G WARNING
the ambient light. Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid
G WARNING designed to assist driving. It is not a substitute
for attentive driving. Automatic braking by the
Active Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds
system may not always be sufficient to avoid
below 30 km/h. The indicator lamps in the
a collision. In such cases, you need to steer,
exterior mirrors are yellow. Vehicles in the
brake or accelerate yourself.
monitoring range are then not indicated.
In very rare cases, the system may detect a
risk of collision where there is none and brake
in error near crash barriers or similar road
boundaries. Active Blind Spot Assist cannot
detect all traffic situations and road users.
Ensure at all times that there is sufficient lat-
eral distance between you and other road
Z
212 Driving systems
users or obstacles. You can, for example, Trailer towing

countersteer gently or depress the accelera- If you attach a trailer, make sure that you have
tor pedal at any time to cancel inappropriate correctly established the electrical connec-
braking action. tion. This can be accomplished by checking
You are responsible for the vehicle's speed, the trailer lighting. Active Blind Spot Assist is
Driving and parking
correct steering and for braking in good time. then deactivated. The indicator lamp in the
Always adapt your driving style to suit the exterior mirrors lights up yellow, and the
prevailing road and weather conditions. Active Blind Spot Assist currently
Always pay attention to traffic conditions and unavailable See Owner's Manual mes-
your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to sage appears in the multifunction display.
and injure yourself and others. Active Lane Keeping Assist
Either a very slight course-correcting brake Important safety notes

application, or none at all, may occur if: Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area
Rthere are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash in front of your vehicle by means of a camera
barriers, on both sides of your vehicle. at the top of the windscreen. Active Lane
Ra vehicle approaches too closely on the
Keeping Assist detects lane markings on the
road and warns you before you leave your
side.
lane unintentionally. If you do not react to the
Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with
warning, a lane-correcting application of the
high cornering speeds. brakes can bring the vehicle back into the
Ryou brake or accelerate decisively. original lane.
Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as
ESP® or PRE-SAFE® Brake.
RESP® is deactivated.
Ra loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre is
detected.
Activating Active Blind Spot Assist
X On vehicles without a navigation system,
make sure that the Becker® MAP PILOT is
connected; see the separate operating
instructions for Audio 20.
: Active Lane Keeping Assist camera
X Make sure that the radar sensor system
(Y page 242) and Active Blind Spot Assist If you have selected the Display unit
(Y page 238) are activated in the on-board Speed-/odometer(Y page 239) function in
computer. the on-board computer and select km as the
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition unit of measurement, Active Lane Keeping
lock. Assist is active from speeds of 60 km/h. If
Warning lamps : light up red in the exte- the miles display unit is selected, the assis-
rior mirrors for approximately 1.5 seconds tance range begins at 40 mph.
and then turn yellow. G WARNING
Active Lane Keeping Assist does not keep
your vehicle in its lane. It is only an aid and
Driving systems 213
may detect the lane markings on the road marking, the system recognises certain con-
incorrectly or not at all. ditions and warns you accordingly.
The system may be impaired or may not func- The warning vibration occurs earlier if:
tion if: Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a
Rseveral or no lane markings for a single lane bend.
Driving and parking

are present. Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a motor-
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi- way.
cient illumination of the road, or due to Rthe system recognises solid lane markings.
snow, rain, fog or spray. The warning vibration occurs later if:
Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,
Rthe road has narrow lanes.
the sun, or reflection from other vehicles.
Ryou cut the corner on a bend.
Rthe windscreen is dirty, misted up or cov-
No warning vibration occurs if:
ered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity
of the camera. Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake, or
Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or accelerate.
covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow. Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.
Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as
small and the lane markings thus cannot be ABS, BAS or ESP®.
detected. Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In
Rthe lane markings on the road are unclear, this event, the warnings are suppressed for
e.g. near roadworks. a certain period of time.
Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.
Lane-correcting brake application
lanes branch off, cross one another or
merge. If you leave your lane under certain circum-
stances, the vehicle will brake briefly on one
Rthe road is narrow and winding.
side. This is designed to help you bring the
Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot detect vehicle back into the original lane.
road and traffic conditions. It is not a substi-
This function is available in the range between
tute for attentive driving. You are responsible
60 km/h and 200 km/h.
for the vehicle's speed, braking in good time,
and steering correctly. Always adapt your A lane-correcting brake application can only
driving style to suit the prevailing road and be made after driving over a solid, recognis-
weather conditions. Always pay attention to able lane marking. Before this, a warning
traffic conditions and your surroundings. Oth- must be emitted by means of intermittent
erwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in vibration in the steering wheel. In addition, a
time, cause an accident and injure yourself lane with lane markings on both sides must
and others. be recognised. The brake application also
slightly reduces driving speed.
Warning vibration in the steering wheel If a lane-correcting brake application occurs,
A warning may be given if a front wheel the following appears in the multifunction dis-
passes over a lane marking. You will then be play:
warned by means of an intermittent vibration
in the steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.
In order that you are warned only when nec-
essary and in good time if you cross the lane
Z
214 Driving systems
No lane-correcting brake application occurs

if:
Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake, or
accelerate.
Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.
Driving and parking
Ryou have switched on the turn signals.

Example: vehicles with automatic transmission Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as
i A further lane-correcting brake applica- ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind

tion can only occur after your vehicle has Spot Assist.
returned to the original lane. Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with
high cornering speeds or high rates of
G WARNING acceleration.
Active Lane Keeping Assist does not keep Ron vehicles with a trailer tow hitch, the
your vehicle in its lane. It is only an aid electrical connection to the trailer has been
designed to assist driving. It is not a substitute correctly established.
for attentive driving. Corrective braking may RESP® is deactivated.
not always be sufficient to return your vehicle
Rthe transmission is not in position D.
to its original lane. In such cases, you must
steer the vehicle yourself to ensure that it Ra loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre
does not leave the lane. has been detected and displayed.
Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot detect the Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect
current traffic situation or other road users. road and traffic conditions. An inappropriate
Ensure at all times that there is sufficient lat- brake application may be interrupted at any
eral distance between you and other road time if:
users or obstacles. In rare cases, broken lines Ryou steer slightly in the opposite direction.
or certain structures on the road surface may Ryou use a turn signal.
be detected by the system as solid lane mark-
Ryou clearly brake or accelerate.
ings. You can, for example, countersteer gen-
tly at any time to cancel inappropriate braking A lane-correcting brake application is inter-
action, e.g. if you intentionally drive across a rupted automatically if:
solid lane marking. Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as
Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot take ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind
weather conditions into account. Spot Assist.
You are responsible for the vehicle's speed, Rlane markings can no longer be recognised.
correct steering and for braking in good time.
Always adapt your driving style to suit the Activating Active Lane Keeping Assist
prevailing road and weather conditions.

Towing a trailer 215
X Activate Active Lane Keeping Assist using G WARNING

the on-board computer (Y page 238). If the Check trailer hitch locking
Symbol : appears in the multifunction mechanism message appears in the multi-
display. function display while the vehicle is in motion,
If you drive at speeds above 60 km/h and pull over immediately and check whether the
Driving and parking

lane markings are detected, symbol : is ball coupling is correctly engaged.
shown in green. Active Lane Keeping Assist
is ready for use. G WARNING
Always observe the maximum speed permit-
Trailer towing ted in Germany for vehicle/trailer combina-
If you attach a trailer, make sure that you have tions, even in countries where higher speeds
correctly established the electrical connec- are permitted. This lowers the risk of an acci-
tion. This can be accomplished by checking dent.
the trailer lighting.
G WARNING
Never depress the brake pedal continuously
Towing a trailer while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. never cause
Notes on towing a trailer the brakes to rub by applying constant slight
Important safety notes to overheat, increases the braking distance
and can lead to the brakes failing completely.
G WARNING
When reversing the vehicle towards the G WARNING
trailer, make sure there is nobody between
On no account should you attempt to draw the
the trailer and the vehicle.
vehicle/trailer combination out by increasing
Couple and uncouple the trailer carefully. If speed.
you do not couple the trailer to the towing
vehicle correctly, the trailer could become G WARNING
detached.
If you exceed the maximum noseweight when
Make sure that the following values are not using a carrier system on the ball coupling:
exceeded: Rthe carrier system may be thrown around.
Rthe permissible trailer drawbar noseweight Rthe ball coupling and the carrier system
Rthe permissible trailer load may become detached from the vehicle.
Rthe permissible rear axle load of the towing As a result, you may injure others or cause an
vehicle accident.
Rthe maximum permissible gross vehicle Do not exceed the maximum noseweight.
weight of both the towing vehicle and the When driving with a loaded carrier system,
trailer always adjust your driving style to the prevail-
You will find the applicable permissible val- ing road, traffic and weather conditions and
ues, which must not be exceeded, in the vehi- drive particularly carefully.
cle documents.
You can use carrier systems, e.g. bicycle
You will find the values approved by the man-
racks or load-bearing implements on the ball
ufacturer on the vehicle identification plates
coupling. The maximum noseweight of 75 kg
and those for the towing vehicle in the "Tech-
applies when using carrier systems on the ball
nical data" section.
coupling.
Z
216 Towing a trailer
General information when towing a trailer. Refer to the "Technical

data" section to find out whether this applies
i When towing a trailer, set the tyre pres-
to your vehicle. If you utilise any of the added
sure on the rear axle of the towing vehicle
maximum rear axle load when towing a trailer,
for a maximum load; see the tyre pressure
the vehicle/trailer combination may not
table in the fuel filler flap (Y page 361).
Driving and parking
exceed a maximum speed of 100 km/h for

You will find installation dimensions and loads reasons concerning the operating permit.
in the "Technical data" section This also applies in countries in which the
(Y page 387). permissible maximum speed for vehicle/
The maximum permissible trailer drawbar trailer combinations is above 100 km/h.
noseweight on the ball coupling is 75 kg. When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling
However, the actual noseweight must not characteristics will be different in comparison
exceed the value given on the trailer tow hitch to when driving without a trailer.
and trailer identification plates. The lowest The vehicle/trailer combination:
weight applies.
Ris heavier
! Use a noseweight as close as possible to Ris restricted in its acceleration and gradi-
the maximum permissible noseweight. Do ent-climbing capability
not use a noseweight of less than 50 kg, Rhas an increased braking distance
otherwise the trailer may come loose.
Ris affected more by strong crosswinds
Bear in mind that the payload and the rear
Rdemands more sensitive steering
axle load are reduced by the actual nose-
weight. Rconsumes more fuel
Please note that when towing a trailer, PARK- On long and steep downhill gradients, you
TRONIC (Y page 196), parking guidance must shift to a lower gear in good time, or on
(Y page 199) and Blind Spot Assist vehicles with automatic transmission, select
(Y page 205) are only available with limita- the shift range 1, 2 or 3.
tions, or not at all. i This also applies if you have activated
i The height of the ball coupling changes cruise control, SPEEDTRONIC or DIS-
with the load of the vehicle. If necessary, TRONIC PLUS.
use a trailer with a height-adjustable draw- This will use the braking effect of the engine,
bar. so less braking will be required to maintain
the speed. This relieves the load on the brake
Driving tips system and prevents the brakes from over-
heating and wearing too quickly. If you need
i Observe the notes on ESP® trailer stabi- additional braking, depress the brake pedal
lisation (Y page 77). repeatedly rather than continuously.
In Germany, the maximum permissible speed
for vehicle/trailer combinations depends on
the type of trailer, and is either 80 km/h or
100 km/h. In some countries, higher maxi-
mum speeds are permissible for vehicle/
trailer combinations. Before beginning the
journey, check the trailer's documents to see
what the maximum permitted speed is.
For certain Mercedes-Benz vehicles, the max-
imum permissible rear axle load is increased
Driving tips
RMaintain a greater distance from the vehi-
cle in front than when driving without a
trailer.
RAvoid braking abruptly. If possible, brake
Driving and parking

gently at first to allow the trailer to run on.
Then, increase the braking force rapidly.
RThe values given for gradient-climbing
capabilities from a standstill refer to sea
level. When driving in mountainous areas,
note that the power output of the engine, Saloon
and consequently the vehicle's gradient-
climbing capability, decrease with increas-
ing altitude.
If the trailer swings from side to side:
X Do not accelerate.
X Do not counter-steer.
X Brake if necessary.
Folding out the ball coupling

Estate
Before you can tow a trailer with your vehicle,
X To open the cover (Saloon): turn han-
you must fold out the ball coupling.
dle : anti-clockwise and fold down
The release wheel is located behind the left-
cover ;.
hand side trim panel in the boot/luggage
compartment. X To open the cover (Estate): pull han-
dle : in the direction of the arrow and fold
G WARNING down cover ;.
Make sure that the ball coupling is engaged,
either in its folded-out or folded-in position,
and that the indicator lamp is off.
Do not turn the release wheel when a trailer
is coupled up. Otherwise, the trailer might
detach.
X Pull out release wheel =.

X Turn release wheel = anti-clockwise until
the ball coupling releases and folds out
from under the rear bumper. Indicator
lamp ? flashes.
Z
X Establish the electrical connection

between the vehicle and the trailer.
X Check that the trailer lighting system is
working.
Driving and parking
Decoupling a trailer
G WARNING
As soon as you raise the trailer drawbar, the
unladen vehicle rises slightly. The vehicle then
X Pull the ball coupling in the direction of the lowers to driving level.
arrow until it engages in a vertical position. Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the
Indicator lamp ? goes out. The power wheel arch or the underbody. You could oth-
socket folds down automatically. erwise trap yourself or others.
Vehicles with a 4-button multifunction
steering wheel: the Trailer hitch G WARNING
Check lock mech. message is shown in The vehicle is lowered as soon as you discon-
the multifunction display until the ball cou- nect the trailer cable. Make sure that nobody
pling has engaged. is in the vicinity of the wheel arch or the
Vehicles with a 12-button multifunc- underbody. You could otherwise trap yourself
tion steering wheel: the Trailer hitch or others.
Check lock mech. message is shown in As soon as you decouple the trailer, the unla-
the multifunction display until the ball cou- den vehicle rises slightly. Make sure that you
pling has engaged. or others are not injured in the process.
X Remove the protective cap from the ball
coupling and store it in a safe place. ! Do not disconnect a trailer with an
X Make sure that the ball of the ball coupling engaged overrun brake. Otherwise, your
is clean and that, depending on the trailer vehicle could be damaged by the rebound-
specification, it is greased or dry (without ing of the overrun brake.
grease) when used. X Make sure that the transmission is in posi-
tion P.
X Apply the parking brake.
Coupling up a trailer X Secure the trailer against rolling away.
G WARNING X Remove the trailer cable and decouple the
Do not disconnect a trailer with an engaged trailer.

overrun brake. Otherwise, your hand could
become trapped between the bumper and
trailer drawbar. Folding in the ball coupling
i Fold the ball coupling back in if you are
X Make sure that the transmission is in posi-
not using the trailer tow hitch.
tion P.
X Apply the parking brake. G WARNING
X Position the trailer level behind the vehicle. Make sure that no persons or animals are in
X Couple up the trailer. the pivoting range of the ball coupling. Other-
wise, they could be injured.
X Place the protective cap on the ball cou- X Pull out release wheel =.
pling. X Turn release wheel = anti-clockwise.
The release wheel is located behind the left- The ball coupling unlocks and lowers. Indi-
hand side trim panel in the boot/luggage cator lamp ? flashes.
compartment.
Driving and parking

X Press the ball coupling in the direction of
Saloon
the arrow until it engages behind the
bumper.
Indicator lamp ? goes out and the mes-
sage in the multifunction display disap-
pears.
Trailer power supply

When it leaves the factory, your vehicle's
trailer socket is equipped with a permanent
power supply and a power supply that is
Estate switched on via the ignition lock.
X To open the cover (Saloon): turn han- The permanent power supply is supplied via
dle : anti-clockwise and fold down trailer socket pin 9.
cover ;. The power supply that is switched on via the
X To open the cover (Estate): pull han- ignition lock is supplied via trailer socket pin
dle : in the direction of the arrow and fold 10.
down cover ;. ! You can connect consumers with a power
rating of up to 240 W to the permanent
power supply and up to 180 W to the power
supply that is switched on via the ignition
lock.
You must not charge a trailer battery using
the power supply.
The trailer's permanent power supply is
switched off in the event of low vehicle supply
voltage and after six hours at the latest.
Z
You can obtain further information about X Open the socket cover.
installing the trailer electrics from a qualified X Insert the connector with lug : into
specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz groove ; on the socket and turn the con-
Service Centre. nector clockwise to the stop.
X To switch the connected power supply X Let the cover engage.
Driving and parking
on or off: turn the key in the ignition lock X If you are using an adapter cable, secure
to position 2 or 0 respectively.
the cable to the trailer with cable ties.
! Make sure that there is sufficient cable
Bulb failure indicator for LED lamps play so that the cable cannot become
detached when cornering.
i If LED lamps are fitted in the trailer, an
error message may appear in the multi-
function display even if there is no fault. The
reason for the error message may be that
the current has fallen below the minimum
of 50 milliamperes (mA).
To ensure reliable operation of the bulb failure
indicator, each LED chain in the trailer lighting
must be guaranteed a minimum current of
50 mA.
Trailer with 7-pin connector

General information
If your trailer has a 7-pin connector, you can
connect it to the 13-pin socket on the ball
coupling using an adapter or, if necessary, an
adapter cable. Both of these can be obtained
at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a
Fitting the adapter

221
On-board computer and displays

Displays and operation (4-button
multifunction steering wheel) ......... 222
Displays and operation (12-button
multifunction steering wheel) ......... 226
Display messages ............................. 248
Warning and indicator lamps in the
instrument cluster ............................ 291
222 Displays and operation (4-button multifunction steering wheel)
Useful information make sure that your vehicle is safe to use. You
could otherwise cause an accident by driving

i This Owner's Manual describes all models an unsafe vehicle.
and all standard and optional equipment
available to your vehicle at the time of pub- G WARNING
lication of the Owner's Manual. Country- The operating safety of your vehicle could be
specific deviations are possible. Please impaired if maintenance work is carried out
note that your vehicle may not be equipped incorrectly. This could cause you to lose con-
with all features described. This also trol of your vehicle and cause an accident.
applies to safety-relevant systems and Moreover, the safety systems may no longer
functions. be able to protect you or others as they are
i Please read the information on qualified designed to do.
specialist workshops (Y page 28). Always have service work carried out at a

Displays and operation (4-button mul-
You will find an illustration of the instrument tifunction steering wheel)
cluster in the "At a glance" section
(Y page 34). Coolant temperature gauge
The coolant temperature gauge is in the
G WARNING
instrument cluster on the left-hand side.
Only use the on-board computer when road
Under normal operating conditions and with
and traffic conditions permit. You would oth-
the specified coolant level, the coolant tem-
erwise be distracted and unable to concen-
perature may rise to 120 †.
trate properly on driving, and could cause an
accident. The coolant temperature may rise to the top
end of the scale at high outside temperatures
G WARNING and on long uphill stretches.
No messages will be displayed if either the
instrument cluster or the multifunction dis-
Rev counter
play is inoperative.
As a result, you will not be able to see infor- The red band in the rev counter indicates the
mation about your driving conditions, such as engine's overrevving range.
speed, outside temperature, warning and indi- ! Do not drive in the overrevving range.
cator lamps, display messages or system fail- Doing so will damage the engine.
ures. Driving characteristics may be impaired.
Adjust your driving style and vehicle speed The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the
accordingly. engine when the red band is reached.
Contact a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
Outside temperature display
G WARNING The outside temperature display is in the
The on-board computer only records and dis- instrument cluster (Y page 34).
plays malfunctions and warnings from certain
systems. For this reason, you should always
Displays and operation (4-button multifunction steering wheel) 223
G WARNING

At temperatures just above freezing point, the
street may be icy, especially in wooded areas
or on bridges. If you do not adapt your driving
style to the conditions, the vehicle could skid.
For this reason, adapt your driving style and
speed to the weather conditions.
Changes in the outside temperature are dis-

played after a short delay.
Operating the on-board computer

The on-board computer is activated as soon
as you turn the key to position 1 in the ignition
lock. You can use the on-board computer to : Multifunction display
call up information relating to your vehicle ; W Increases the volume
and to make and adjust settings.
= X Decreases the volume
i You can have certain functions set at a ? C Scrolls through lists/adjusts val-
qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a
ues/confirms display messages
A V Selects a menu
Example:
Rautomatic door lock
i If you press and hold the V button, the
Rspeed limit for winter tyres
standard display appears.
You can obtain information about this at i In the Day. driv. lights: menu, you
any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. can use the W or X button to switch
the function on or off. You cannot adjust
You can control the multifunction display and
the volume when in the Day. driv.
the settings in the on-board computer using
lights: menu.
the buttons on the multifunction steering
wheel.
Multifunction display
To activate the multifunction display:
Rswitch on the ignition.
Rswitch on the lights.
Ropen the driver's door.
Z
224
On-board computer and displays Displays and operation (4-button multifunction steering wheel)
Values and settings as well as display mes-

sages are shown in multifunction display :.
Menu overview

Function
: Standard display(Y page 225)
Shows the standard display or resets the trip meter
; Trip computer(Y page 226)
Displays or resets the trip computer
= Range(Y page 226)
? Current fuel consumption
A Digital speedometer
B Message memory(Y page 248)
C Service(Y page 326)
Calls up the service due date
D Tyre pressure loss warning system(Y page 362)
E Daytime driving lights(Y page 226)
Standard display X Press and hold the V button on the

steering wheel, until the standard display
with trip meter : and total distance
recorder ; is shown.
Z
X To reset the trip meter: press and hold Ã position, the daytime driving lights are
the V until the standard display automatically switched on during daylight

appears. hours when the engine is running. When it is
X Press and hold the C button until the dark, the side lamps and the dipped-beam
value has been reset. headlamps are switched on automatically.
On vehicles with daytime driving lamps, the
factory setting is on.
Trip computer If you want to change the setting for the Day.
driv. lights: function, you have to turn
X Press the V button on the steering
the key in the ignition lock to position 1.
wheel repeatedly until the trip computer
appears.
wheel repeatedly until the Day. driv.
lights: menu appears.
You will see the selected setting: on or
off.
X Press the W or X button to change
the setting.
: Distance
; Average speed Displays and operation (12-button
multifunction steering wheel)
= Time
? Average fuel consumption Coolant temperature gauge
X To reset the trip computer: press and The coolant temperature gauge is in the
hold the C button on the steering wheel instrument cluster on the left-hand side.
until the values have been reset. Under normal operating conditions and with
the specified coolant level, the coolant tem-
perature may rise to 120 †.
Calling up the range At high outside temperatures and when driv-
ing uphill, the coolant temperature may rise
to the end of the scale.
wheel repeatedly until the approximate
range appears.
The approximate range which can be covered Rev counter
depends on the fuel level and your current
driving style. If there is only a small amount The red band in the rev counter indicates the
of fuel left in the fuel tank, the display shows engine's overrevving range.
a vehicle being refuelled C instead of the ! Do not drive in the overrevving range.
range. Doing so will damage the engine.
The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the
engine when the red band is reached.
Switching the daytime driving lights
on/off
If you have activated the Day. driv.
lights: function and the light switch is in the
Outside temperature display

The outside temperature display is in the mul-
tifunction display (Y page 228).
G WARNING
At temperatures just above freezing point, the
street may be icy, especially in wooded areas
or on bridges. If you do not adapt your driving
style to the conditions, the vehicle could skid.
For this reason, adapt your driving style and
speed to the weather conditions.
Changes in the outside temperature are dis-

played after a short delay.
Speedometer with segments : Multifunction display

; Switches on LINGUATRONIC; see the sep-
The segments in the speedometer indicate
arate operating instructions
which speed range is available.
= Right control panel
Cruise control (Y page 178) activated:
? Left control panel
The segments light up from the stored speed
to the maximum speed. A Back button
Variable SPEEDTRONIC (Y page 180) activa-
ted: Left control panel
The segments light up from the start of the = RCalls up the menu and menu bar
scale to the selected limit speed.
;
DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 183) activated:
One or two segments in the set speed range 9 Press briefly:
light up. : RScrolls through lists
DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front: RSelects a submenu or function
The segments between the speed of the vehi- RIn the Audio menu: selects a
cle in front and the stored speed light up. stored station, an audio track or
a video scene
RIn the Tel (telephone) menu:
Operating the on-board computer switches to the phone book and
Overview selects a name or telephone
number
The on-board computer is activated as soon
as you turn the key to position 1 in the ignition
lock.
You can control the multifunction display and
the settings in the on-board computer using
the buttons on the multifunction steering
wheel.
Z
9 Press and hold: Back button

: RIn the Audio menu: selects the % Press briefly:

previous/next station or selects RBack
an audio track or a video scene
RSwitches off LINGUATRONIC
using rapid scrolling
RIn the Tel (telephone) menu: RHides display messages or calls
starts rapid scrolling through the up the last Trip menu function
phone book used
RExits the telephone book/redial
a RConfirms selection/display mes-
memory
sage
RIn the Tel (telephone) menu: % Press and hold:
switches to the telephone book RCalls up the standard display in
and starts dialling the selected the Trip menu
number
RIn the Audio menu: stops the
station search function at the Multifunction display
desired station
Values and settings as well as display mes-
sages are shown in the multifunction display.
Right control panel
~ RRejectsor ends a call

RExits
telephone book/redial
memory
6 RMakes or accepts a call
RSwitches to the redial memory
W RAdjusts the volume
X
8 RMute
: Description field
; Menu bar
= Drive program
? Outside temperature or speed
(Y page 239)
A Transmission position
X To show menu bar ;: press the =
or ; button on the steering wheel.
Vehicles with manual transmission: the
indicators in the lower part of the multifunc-
tion display differ from the display shown
here.
The following messages can appear in the

multifunction display:
Z Shift recommendation
(Y page 161)
XjY Parking Guidance (Y page 199)
è Rear window wiper (Y page 130)
_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist
(Y page 122)
À ATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 203)
¤ ECO start/stop function
(Y page 156)
Ä Speed Limit Assist (Y page 204)
Ã Lane Keeping Assist
(Y page 208) or Active Lane Keep-
ing Assist (Y page 212)
HOLD HOLD function (Y page 193)
Ä PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 78)
120km/h! Maximum permissible speed
exceeded (only for certain coun-
tries)
Z
Menu overview
The number of menus shown depends on the optional equipment in the vehicle.
Function
: Trip menu (Y page 231)
; Navi menu (navigation details) (Y page 232)
= Audio menu (Y page 233)
? Tel menu (telephone) (Y page 235)
A Assist. menu (assistance) (Y page 236)
B Serv. menu (Y page 238)
Rcalls up display messages (Y page 249)
Rtyre pressure loss warning (Y page 362)
Rtyre pressure monitor (Y page 363)
RASSYST PLUS service interval display (Y page 326)
C Settings menu (Y page 238)

D AMG menu in AMG vehicles (Y page 245)
The Audio, Navi and Tel menus differ slightly in vehicles with an audio system and vehicles
with COMAND Online. The examples given in this Owner's Manual apply to vehicles equipped
with COMAND Online.
Trip menu Rthe ignition has been switched off for more

than four hours.
Standard display R999 hours have been exceeded.
R9999 kilometres have been exceeded.
The From reset trip computer is reset if the

trip exceeds 9999 hours or 99,999 kilome-
tres.
Displaying the range and current fuel

consumption
X Press and hold the % button on the
steering wheel until the Trip menu with X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
total distance recorder : and trip ing wheel to select the Trip menu.
meter ; is shown. X Press the 9 or : to select the cur-
rent fuel consumption15 and the approxi-
Trip computer "From start" or "From mate range.
reset"
The values in the From start submenu are
calculated from the start of a journey, whilst
the values in the From reset submenu are
calculated from the last time the submenu
was reset (Y page 232).
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
The approximate range which can be covered
ing wheel to select the Trip menu. depends on the fuel level and your current
X Press 9 or : to select From start driving style. If there is only a small amount
or From reset. of fuel left in the fuel tank, the display shows
a vehicle being refuelled C instead of the
range.
Digital speedometer
ing wheel to select the Trip menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
Trip computer "From start" (example)
: Distance
digital speedometer.
; Time
= Average speed
? Average fuel consumption
The From start trip computer is reset auto-
matically when:
15 Not AMG vehicles.
Z
information, see the separate operating

instructions.
X Switch on the audio system with Becker®
MAP PILOT or COMAND Online (see the
separate operating instructions).
: Shift recommendation ing wheel to select the Navi menu.

; Digital speedometer
Route guidance not active
i If the gearshift recommendation is shown
in the multifunction display, it is not shown
in the status bar.
For further information on gearshift recom-
mendations, see (Y page 161).
Reset
: Direction of travel
You can reset the values of the following func-
tions: ; Current street
Rtrip meter
Rtrip
Activated route guidance
computer "From start"
Rtrip computer "From reset" No change of direction announced
ing wheel to select the Trip menu.
function that you wish to reset.
X Press a.
: Distance to the destination

; Distance to the next change of direction
= Current street
? Symbol for "follow the road's course"
Resetting the trip computer "From start" (example)

X Press : to select Yes and press a
to confirm.
Navigation menu
Displaying navigation instructions
In the Navi menu, the multifunction display
shows navigation instructions. For more
Change of direction announced without a

lane recommendation
Lane recommendation display (example)

: Lane continues through change of direc-
: Road to which the change of direction tion
leads ; New lane during a change of direction
; Distance to change of direction and visual
distance display Other status indicators of the naviga-
= Current street tion system
? Change-of-direction icon RO: you have reached the destination or an
When a change of direction has been intermediate destination.

announced, you will see visual distance dis- RNew route... or Calculating route: a
play ; next to the symbol for change of new route is being calculated.
direction ?. This decreases in size as you ROff map or Off road: the vehicle position
approach the announced change of direction. is outside the area of the digital map (off-
map position).
Change of direction announced with a RNo route: no route could be calculated to
lane recommendation
the selected destination.
Lane recommendations are only displayed if
the relevant data is available on the digital
map. Audio menu
Selecting a radio station
You can only change the waveband and store
new stations using the audio system or
COMAND Online.
X Switch on the audio system or COMAND
Online and select Radio (see the separate
: Road to which the change of direction
operating instructions).
leads
; Distance to change of direction and visual
distance display ing wheel to select the Audio menu.
= Lane recommendation
? Change-of-direction icon
On multi-lane roads, lane recommendation
= may be shown for the next change of
direction. During the change of direction,
additional lanes may be displayed.
Z
X To select the next/previous track:

briefly press the 9 or : button.

X To select a track from the track list
(rapid scrolling): press and hold the
9 or : button until the desired track
has been reached.
: Waveband If you press and hold the 9 or : but-
; Station16 ton, the rapid scrolling speed is increased.
Not all audio devices or media support this
X To select a stored station: briefly press function.
the 9 or : button. If track information is stored on the audio
X To select a station from the station device or medium, the multifunction display
list: press and briefly hold the 9 will show the number and name of the track.
or : button. The current track does not appear in audio
X To select a station using station AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: external
search17: press and briefly hold the 9 audio source connected).
or : button.
Video DVD operation
i DAB radio mode (Digital Audio Broadcast-
ing); see the separate operating instruc-
X Switch on COMAND Online and select
tions. video DVD (see the separate operating
instructions).
Audio player or audio media operation
ing wheel to select the Audio menu.
Audio data from various audio devices or
media can be played, depending on the equip-
ment fitted in the vehicle.
X Switch on the audio system or COMAND
Online and select the audio device or
medium (see the separate operating
instructions).
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- DVD changer display (example)
ing wheel to select the Audio menu. : Current scene
X To select the next or previous scene:
briefly press the 9 or : button.
X To select a scene from the scene list
(rapid scrolling): press and hold the
9 or : button until the desired
scene has been reached.
CD changer display (example)
: Current track
16 If the station has been stored, the memory position will also be displayed.
17 Only if no station list is received.
Telephone menu RTelephone ready or the name of the net-

work provider: the mobile phone has found
Introduction a network and is ready to receive.
Functions and displays are dependent on the RTelephone No Service: no network is
optional equipment installed in your vehicle. available, or the mobile phone is searching
You can place your mobile phone in the for a network.
mobile phone bracket (Y page 318), or set
up a Bluetooth® connection to the audio sys- Accepting a call
tem or COMAND Online (see the separate If someone calls you when you are in the
operating instructions). Telmenu, a display message appears in the
i You can obtain further information about multifunction display, for example:
suitable mobile phones and connecting
mobile phones via Bluetooth®:
Rinany Mercedes Benz Service Centre
Ron the Internet at http://
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect
G WARNING
Observe the legal requirements of the country X Press the 6 button on the steering
in which you are currently driving regarding wheel to accept an incoming call.
the use of mobile phones in the vehicle. If you are not in the Tel menu, you can still
If it is permitted to use mobile phones while accept a call.
the vehicle is in motion, you should only use
them when the road and traffic conditions Rejecting or ending a call
allow. Otherwise, you may be distracted from
the traffic conditions, cause an accident and X Press the ~ button on the steering
injure yourself and others. wheel.
If you are not in the Tel menu, you can still
X Switch on the mobile phone and audio sys- reject or end a call.
tem or COMAND Online (see the separate
operating instructions). Dialling a number from the phone book
ing wheel to select the Tel menu. If your mobile phone is able to receive calls,
you can search for and dial a number from the
You will see one of the following display mes- phone book in the audio system or COMAND
sages in the multifunction display: Online at any time.
RPlease enter PIN: the mobile phone has
been placed in the mobile phone bracket
ing wheel to select the Tel menu.
and the PIN has not been entered.
X Press the 9, : or a button to call
X Enter the PIN using the mobile phone, LIN-
up the phone book.
GUATRONIC, the audio system or
COMAND Online.
The mobile phone will search for a network. desired name.
To start scrolling rapidly, press and hold the
9 or : button for longer than one
Z
second. After a short time, the rapid scroll Assistance menu

speeds up.
Rapid scrolling stops when you release the Introduction
button or reach the end of the list.
X If only one telephone number is stored
for a name: press the 6 or a button
to start dialling.
or
X If there is more than one number for a
particular name: press the 6 or a
button to display the numbers. In the Assist. menu you can:
Rdisplay Speed Limit Assist and activate/
deactivate the message function of Speed
number you want to dial.
Limit Assist
X Press the 6 or a button to start dial-
Rshow the distance display
ling.
Ractivate/deactivate ESP®
or
Ractivate/deactivate PRE-SAFE® Brake
X If you do not want to make a call: press
Ractivate/deactivate ATTENTION ASSIST
the ~ or % button.
Ractivate/deactivate Blind Spot Assist or
Redialling Active Blind Spot Assist

Ractivate/deactivate Lane Keeping Assist or
The on-board computer saves the last names Active Lane Keeping Assist
or numbers dialled in the redial memory.
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- Speed Limit Assist
ing wheel to select the Tel menu.
X Press the 6 button to switch to the
Displaying Speed Limit Assist
redial memory. In the Speed Lim. Asst. function, a detec-
ted speed limit is displayed under certain
conditions (Y page 204).
desired name or number.
X Press = or ; on the steering wheel
X Press the 6 or a button to start dial-
ling. to select the Assist. menu.
X Press 9 or : to select Speed Lim.
or
Asst..
X If you do not want to make a call: press
X Press a.
the ~ or % button.
The multifunction display shows Speed
Limit Assist.
Activating/deactivating the Speed Limit

Assist message function
You can set Speed Limit Assist (Y page 204)
to display a detected speed limit automati-
cally for five seconds. Other messages in the
multifunction display will be faded out for this
length of time.
X Press = or ; on the steering wheel Activating/deactivating ESP® on AMG vehi-

to select the Assist. menu. cles (Y page 76).
X Press 9 or : to select Speed Lim. For further information about ESP®, see
Asst.. (Y page 75).
X Press a. X Start the engine.
The multifunction display shows Speed X Press = or ; on the steering wheel
Limit Assist. to select the Assist. menu.
X Press :. X Press the 9 or : button to select
The current selection is displayed. ESP.
X To activate or deactivate: press a. X Press the a button.
If Speed Limit Assist is operational and the X To deactivate: press a again.
message function is activated, the multifunc- The å warning lamp in the instrument
tion display shows the Ä symbol when the cluster comes on.
ignition is switched on.
G WARNING
Showing distance display If the å warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up when the engine is running,
This function is only available with DIS-
ESP® is deactivated or is unavailable due to a
TRONIC PLUS.
malfunction. The risk that your vehicle may
start to skid then increases in certain situa-
to select the Assist. menu. tions.
X Press the 9 or : button to select Always adapt your driving style to the prevail-
Distance display. ing road and weather conditions.
X Press a.
The DISTRONIC PLUS distance display X To activate: press a again.
(Y page 189) appears in the multifunction The å warning lamp in the instrument
display. cluster goes out.
Deactivating/activating ESP® Activating/deactivating the PRE-SAFE®

Brake
G WARNING
PRE-SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicles
If the ÷ warning lamp in the instrument
with DISTRONIC PLUS.
cluster flashes, proceed as follows:
RUnder no circumstances should you deac-
tivate ESP®. to select the Assist. menu.
X Press 9 or : to select PreSafe
RWhen pulling away, only depress the accel-
erator pedal as far as is necessary. Brake.
RAdapt your driving style to the prevailing X Press the a button.
road and weather conditions. The current selection is displayed.

The vehicle may otherwise begin to skid. X To activate/deactivate: press a
If you drive too fast, ESP® cannot reduce the

again.
risk of an accident. ESP® cannot override the When PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 78) is acti-
laws of physics. vated, the multifunction display shows the
Z
Ä symbol as long as the HOLD function is (Y page 208) or Active Lane Keeping Assist
not activated (Y page 193). (Y page 212).

Vehicles with Parking Guidance: if PARK- X Press = or ; on the steering wheel
TRONIC is activated and you are driving at a to select the Assist. menu.
speed under 35 km/h, the j Parking Guid- X Press 9 or : to select Lane Keep.
ance symbol is shown instead of the Ä Asst..
symbol. X Press a.
If the function is activated, the lane marking
Activating/deactivating ATTENTION symbol in the multifunction display lights
ASSIST up red.
X Press = or ; on the steering wheel X To activate/deactivate: press a
to select the Assist. menu. again.
X Press the 9 or : button to select When Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane
Attention Asst.. Keeping Assist is activated, the Ã symbol
X Press a. appears in the multifunction display when the
The current selection is displayed. ignition is on.
X To activate/deactivate: press a
again.
Service menu
When ATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 203) is
activated, the À symbol appears in the
multifunction display when the ignition is on.
Activating/deactivating Blind Spot

Assist
You can use the Blind Spot Asst. function
to activate or deactivate Blind Spot Assist In the Service menu you can:
(Y page 205) or Active Blind Spot Assist Rcall up display messages (Y page 248)
(Y page 209).
Rreset the tyre pressure loss warning system
(Y page 362) or check the tyre pressure
to select the Assist. menu. electronically (Y page 363)
X Press 9 or : to select Blind Spot Rcall up the service due date (Y page 326)
Asst..
X Press a.
If the function is activated, the monitored Settings menu
areas in the multifunction display light up
Introduction
red.
X To activate/deactivate: press a
again.
Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping

Assist
You can use the Lane Keep. Asst. function
to activate/deactivate Lane Keeping Assist The Settings menu can be used for:
Rchanging the instrument cluster settings i Vehicles for the United Kingdom: this

Rchanging the light settings function is not available.
Rchanging the vehicle settings The Dig. speedom [mph]: function allows
Rchanging the auxiliary heating settings you to choose whether the status area in the
Rchanging the convenience settings multifunction display always shows the speed
Rrestoring the factory settings
in mph instead of the outside temperature.
Instrument cluster ing wheel to select the Settings menu.

X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Selecting the unit of measurement for dis- Inst. cluster submenu.
tance X Press the a button to confirm.
The Display unit Speed-/odometer: X Press : or 9 to select the Dig.
function allows you to choose whether cer-
tain displays appear in kilometres or miles. speedo [mph]: function.
The selected unit of measurement for dis-
off.
tance applies to:
X Press the a button to save the setting.
Rthe digital speedometer in the Trip menu
Rthe total distance recorder and the trip Selecting the permanent display function
meter Only vehicles with automatic transmission
Rthe trip computer have this function.
Rthe current consumption and the range
i Vehicles for the United Kingdom: this
Rthe navigation instruction in the Navi menu function is not available.
Rcruise control
The Permanent display: function allows
RSPEEDTRONIC you to choose whether the multifunction dis-
RDISTRONIC PLUS play always shows the outside temperature
RASSYST PLUS service interval display or the speed in mph.
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Settings menu. ing wheel to select the Settings menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Inst. cluster submenu. Inst. cluster submenu.

X Press the a button to confirm. X Press the a button to confirm.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the X Press : or 9 to select the Perma‐
Display unit Speed-/odometer func- nent display function.

tion. You will see the selected setting: outside
You will see the selected setting: km or temperature or Dig. speedom [mph].
miles. X Press the a button to save the setting.
Lights
Switching the additional speedometer
on/off Switching the daytime driving lights on/
Only vehicles with manual transmission have off
this function. If you have activated the Day lights func-
tion and the light switch is set to Ã, the
Z
daytime driving lights are automatically image of the vehicle for the Intell. Light
switched on during daylight hours when the Sys. function in the Light submenu.
engine is running. When it is dark, the side
lamps and the dipped-beam headlamps are Setting the dipped-beam headlamps for
also switched on automatically. driving on the left/right
X Switch off the engine.
This function is only available on vehicles with
the Intelligent Light System.
You can use this function to switch between
ing wheel to select the Settings menu.
symmetrical beam and asymmetrical dipped
beam (Y page 118).
Light submenu. If you set the dipped-beam headlamps for
X Press the a button to confirm. driving on the right/left, then motorway
X Press the : or 9 button to select the mode and the extended range foglamps are
Day lights function. not available.
If the Day lights have been switched on, X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
the cone of light and the W symbol in ing wheel to select the Settings menu.
the multifunction display are shown in red. X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Light submenu.
X Press the a button to confirm.
Switching the Intelligent Light System
on/off X Press : or 9 to select the Dipped
If you activate the Intell. Light Sys. beams Setting for function.
function, you activate the following functions: You will see the selected setting: Right-
Rmotorway mode side traffic or Left-side traffic.
Ractive light function
Rcornering light function
When you change the setting, conversion
does not take place until the next time the
Rextended range foglamps
vehicle is stationary.
You can also have the dipped-beam head-
ing wheel to select the Settings menu. lamps set for driving on the right or left at a
X Press the : or 9 button to select the qualified specialist workshop.
Light submenu.
Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/
off
X Press : or 9 to select the Intell.
Light Sys. function. ing wheel to select the Settings menu.
If the Intell. Light Sys. function has
been switched on, the cone of light and the
L symbol in the multifunction display Light submenu.
are shown in red. X Press the a button to confirm.
X Press the a button to save the setting. X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Adapt. main beam function.
If you set the dipped-beam headlamps for
If the Adapt. main beam function has
driving on the right/left (Y page 240), the
been switched on, the cone of light and the
multifunction display shows the System
inoperative display message under the
_ symbol in the multifunction display Deactivating delayed switch-off of the exte-

are shown in red. rior lighting temporarily:
X Press the a button to save the setting. X Before leaving the vehicle, turn the key to
position 0 in the ignition lock.
Activating/deactivating the surround X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lighting and exterior lighting delayed
lock and back to position 0.
switch-off
The exterior lighting delayed switch-off is
If you have activated the Surround light‐ deactivated.
ing function and the light switch is set to
Ã, the following functions are activated Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting is
when it is dark: reactivated the next time you start the
engine.
RSurround lighting: the exterior lighting
remains lit for 40 seconds after unlocking Activating/deactivating the interior light-
with the key. The exterior lighting switches ing delayed switch-off
off when you open the driver's door. If you activate the Light. delay function,
RExterior lighting delayed switch-off: the the interior lighting remains on for 20 sec-
exterior lighting remains lit for 60 seconds onds after you remove the key from the igni-
after the engine has been switched off. If tion lock.
you close all the doors, the exterior lighting X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
goes off after 15 seconds. ing wheel to select the Settings menu.
If you activate the Surround lighting func- X Press the : or 9 button to select the
tion, the following light up depending on the
Light submenu.
vehicle's equipment:
Rthe side lamps
Rthe foglamps
Light. delay function.
Rthe daytime driving lights
When the Light. delay function is acti-
Rthe surround lighting in the exterior mirrors
vated, the vehicle interior is displayed in
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- red in the multifunction display.
ing wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the a button to save the setting.
Light submenu. Vehicle
Setting permanent SPEEDTRONIC
Surround lighting function. You can set permanent SPEEDTRONIC
When the Surround lighting function is (Y page 183) using the Limit speed (win‐
activated, the light cone and the area ter tyres) function.
around the vehicle are displayed in red in X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
the multifunction display. ing wheel to select the Settings menu.
X Press the a button to save the setting. X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Vehicle submenu.
X Press : or 9 to select the Limit
speed (winter tyres): function.
You will see the current setting.
Z
X Press the a button to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the

X Press : or 9 to adjust permanent Acoustic Lock function.

SPEEDTRONIC in increments of 10 If the Acoustic Lock function is activated,
(230 km/h to 160 km/h). The Off setting the & symbol in the multifunction dis-
switches permanent SPEEDTRONIC off. play lights up red.
X Press the a button to store the entry. X Press the a button to save the setting.
Switching the automatic locking feature Activating/deactivating the radar sensor

on/off system
If you select the Automatic door lock func- i You must deactivate the radar sensor sys-
tion, the vehicle is centrally locked above a tem in certain countries and near radio
speed of around 15 km/h. telescope facilities. For further informa-
tion, see (Y page 389).
i For further information on the automatic
locking feature, see (Y page 90). When you are close to radio telescope facili-
ties, the radar sensor system will be deacti-
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- vated automatically.
ing wheel to select the Settings menu.
The following systems are switched off when
the radar sensor system is deactivated:
Vehicle submenu.
RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 183)
RBAS PLUS (Y page 73)
RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 78)
Automatic door lockfunction.
RBlind Spot Assist (Y page 205)
When the Automatic door locks func-
tion is activated, the vehicle doors are dis- RActive Blind Spot Assist (Y page 209)
played in red in the multifunction display. X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
X Press the a button to save the setting. ing wheel to select the Settings menu.
Activating/deactivating the acoustic Vehicle submenu.
locking confirmation
If you activate the Acoustic Lock function,
X Press the 9 or : button to select
an audible signal sounds depending on the
vehicle's date of manufacture: Radar sensor (See Owner's Man.):.
Rwhen locking
off.
or
Ronce when unlocking and three times when
locking
Heating menu
ing wheel to select the Settings menu. Auxiliary heating departure time
X Press the : or 9 button to select the This function is only available on vehicles with
Vehicle submenu. auxiliary heating (Y page 143).
X Press the a button to confirm. In the Heating submenu, you can select a
stored departure time or change a departure
time.
The auxiliary heating timer function calcu- Selecting the departure time or deactivat-

lates the switch-on time according to the out- ing a selected departure time
side temperature so that the vehicle is pre- X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
heated by the departure time. When the ing wheel to select the Settings menu.
departure time is reached, the auxiliary heat- X Press the : or 9 button to select the
ing continues to heat for a further five
Heating submenu.
minutes and then switches off. The auxiliary
heating adopts the THERMATIC or
THERMOTRONIC temperature setting. You will see the selected setting.
You can switch off the auxiliary heating by X Press the a button to confirm.
using the remote control or the auxiliary heat- X Press the : or 9 button to select
ing button on the centre console. one of the three departure times or Timer
off (no timer active).
G WARNING
Exhaust fumes are produced when the auxili-
ary heating is in operation. Inhaling these When a departure time is selected, the yel-
exhaust fumes can be poisonous. You should low indicator lamp lights up on the auxiliary
therefore switch off the auxiliary heating in heating button.
confined spaces without an extraction sys-
Changing the departure time
tem, e.g. a garage.
G WARNING ing wheel to select the Settings menu.

When operating the auxiliary heating parts of X Press the : or 9 button to select the
the vehicle can get very hot. Make sure that Heating submenu.
the exhaust system does not under any cir- X Press the a button to confirm.
cumstances come into contact with easily You will see the selected setting.
ignitable material such as dry grass or fuels. X Press the a button to confirm.
The material could otherwise ignite and set
X Press the : or 9 button to select
the vehicle alight. Choose your parking spot
accordingly. Change A, B or C.
Operating the auxiliary heating is thus pro-
hibited at filling stations or when your vehicle You can now change the departure time.
is being refuelled. You must therefore switch X Press the = or ; button to select the
off the auxiliary heating at filling stations. display to be changed: hours, minutes.
X Press the : or 9 button to set the
! Operating the auxiliary heating/ventila- selected display.
tion draws on the vehicle battery. After you X Press the a button to store the entry.
have heated or ventilated the vehicle a
The yellow indicator lamp on the auxiliary
maximum of two times, drive for a longer
heating button lights up.
distance.
i Switch the auxiliary heating on regularly Convenience
once a month for about 10 minutes.
Activating/deactivating the EASY-
ENTRY/EXIT feature
You can use the Easy Entry/Exit: function
to activate or deactivate the EASY ENTRY/
EXIT feature (Y page 111).
Z
G WARNING open the driver's or front-passenger door, the

The steering wheel moves when the EASY- exterior mirrors fold out again.
ENTRY/EXIT feature is active. There is a risk If you have switched the function on and you
of occupants becoming trapped. Before acti- fold the exterior mirrors in using the button
vating the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature, make on the door (Y page 113), they will not fold
sure that nobody can become trapped. out automatically. The exterior mirrors can
Do not leave children unsupervised in the then only be folded out using the button on
vehicle, even if they are secured in a child the door.
restraint system. The children could open the X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
driver's door and thereby unintentionally acti- ing wheel to select the Settings menu.
vate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature and X Press the : or 9 button to select the
become trapped. Convenience submenu.
ing wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 to select the
X Press the : or 9 button to select the Auto. fold in function.

Convenience submenu. If the Auto. fold in function is activated,
the vehicle's exterior mirror is displayed in
red in the multifunction display.
Easy Entry/Exit function.
If the Easy Entry/Exit function is activa-
ted, the vehicle steering wheel is displayed Resetting to factory settings
in red in the multifunction display. For safety reasons, not all functions are reset:
X Press the a button to save the setting. the Limit Speed (winter tyres) function
in permanent SPEEDTRONIC can only be set
Switching the belt adjustment on/off in the Vehicle submenu. If you want to reset
For further information on belt adjustment, the Daytime driving lights function in
see (Y page 55). the Light submenu, you must turn the key in
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- the ignition lock to position 1.
ing wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
X Press the : or 9 button to select the ing wheel to select the Settings menu.
Convenience submenu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the
X Press the a button to confirm. Factory setting submenu.

X Press the : or 9 button to select the X Press the a button to confirm.
Belt adjustment function. The Reset all settings? message

When the Belt adjustment function is appears.
activated, the vehicle seat belt is displayed X Press the : or 9 button to select
in red in the multifunction display. No or Yes.
X Press the a button to save the setting. X Press the a button to confirm the selec-
tion.
Switching the fold in mirrors when lock- If you select Yes, the multifunction display
ing function on/off shows a confirmation message.
If you switch on the Auto. fold in function,
the exterior mirrors fold in when you lock the
vehicle. When you unlock the vehicle and then
AMG menu in AMG vehicles

AMG displays
to select the AMG menu.
: Drive program (C/S/S+/M)

; ESP® mode (ON/OFF) or SPORT handling
mode (SPORT)
RACETIMER
: Digital speedometer Displaying and starting the RACETIMER
; Gear indicator You can use the RACETIMER to store lap
= Upshift indicator times.
? Engine oil temperature X Press = or ; on the steering wheel
A Coolant temperature to select the AMG menu.
X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the
Upshift indicator UP = indicates that the
engine has reached the overrevving range RACETIMER is shown.
when in the manual gearshift program. i If RACETIMER is selected, the menu bar
Upshift indicator UP = fades out other mes- cannot be called up with the =
sages until you have shifted up. and ; buttons.
When the engine oil temperature is below
80 †, the oil temperature is shown in blue.
Avoid driving at full engine output during this
time.
SETUP
SETUP shows the drive program, the ESP®
(Electronic Stability Program) mode and the : Lap
SPORT handling mode. ; RACETIMER
X Press = or ; on the steering wheel You can start the RACETIMER when the
to select the AMG menu. engine is running or if the key is in position
X Press the 9 button repeatedly until 2 in the ignition lock.
SETUP is displayed. X To start: press the a button to start the
RACETIMER.
Z
Displaying the intermediate time Resetting the current lap

X Stop the RACETIMER.

X Press = or ; to select Reset Lap.
X Press a to reset the lap time to "0”.
Deleting all laps

If you switch off the engine, the RACETIMER
is reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps are
X Press = or ; to select Interm. deleted.
Time. You cannot delete individual stored laps. If
X Press the a button to confirm. you have stopped 16 laps, the current lap
The intermediate time is displayed for five does not have to be reset.
seconds. X Reset the current lap.
X Press a to confirm Reset.
Starting a new lap
It is possible to store a maximum of sixteen Reset Race Timer? appears in the multi-
laps. function display.
X Press a to confirm New Lap.
X Press the : button to select Yes and

: RACETIMER press the a button to confirm.
All laps are deleted.
; Fastest lap time (best lap)
= Lap
Overall evaluation
Stopping the RACETIMER This function is shown if you have stored at
X Press the % button on the steering least one lap and stopped the RACETIMER.
wheel. X Press = or ; on the steering wheel
overall evaluation is shown.
X Press a to confirm YES.

The RACETIMER interrupts timing when you
stop the vehicle and turn the key to position
1 in the ignition lock. When you turn the key : RACETIMER overall evaluation
to position 2 or 3 and then press the a to ; Total time driven
confirm Start, timing is continued.
= Average speed

? Distance covered
A Top speed
Lap evaluation
This function is only available if you have
stored at least two laps and have stopped the
RACETIMER.
lap evaluation is shown.
Each lap is shown in a separate submenu.
The fastest lap is indicated by flashing sym-
bol :.
: Lap
; Lap time
= Average lap speed
? Lap length
A Top speed during lap
X Press the 9 or : button to select a
different lap evaluation.
Z
248 Display messages
Display messages
General notes
Display messages appear in the multifunction display.
Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Owner's Manual
and may differ from the messages shown in the multifunction display.
Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in
this Owner's Manual.
Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.
When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on the HOLD function
(Y page 193) and parking (Y page 174).
Hiding display messages

You can hide some display messages with a low priority.
X Vehicles with a 4-button multifunction steering wheel: press C on the steering
wheel to clear the display message.
The display message is cleared.
X Vehicles with a 12-button multifunction steering wheel: press a or % on the
steering wheel to clear the display message.
The display message is cleared.
Display messages with a high priority are shown in red.
You cannot hide display messages of the highest priority. The multifunction display shows
these messages continuously until the causes for the messages have been remedied.
Message memory
Vehicles with a 4-button multifunction steering wheel
The on-board computer saves certain display messages. You can call up these display mes-
sages in the message memory.
X Press the V button on the steering wheel repeatedly until the message memory is
shown.
If there are no display messages, you will see No messages. If there are display messages,
the multifunction display shows 2 messages, for example.
X Using the C button, scroll through the display messages.
For some display messages, the + symbol appears in the multifunction display. You will
find detailed information about these display messages in the section which follows.
When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted apart from some high-
priority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been
rectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted.
Display messages 249
Vehicles with a 12-button multifunction steering wheel

The on-board computer saves certain display messages. You can call up the display messages
in the message memory.
X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu.
If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 messages, for example.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 messages.
X Confirm with a.
X Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages.
When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted apart from some high-
priority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been
rectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted.
Z
Safety systems (4-button multifunction steering wheel)


ABS G Risk of accident
curr. unavail. ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-
gram), BAS (Brake Assist), PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill
start assist and ESP® trailer stabilisation are temporarily not avail-
able.
The adaptive brake lights may also have failed.
In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in
the instrument cluster.
The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you
brake hard, for example.
X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steer-
ing movements, at a speed above 20 km/h.
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned
above are available again.
If the display message continues to be displayed:
X Drive on carefully.
G Risk of accident
ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist
and ESP® trailer stabilisation are temporarily not available.
For example, the on-board voltage may be insufficient.

ABS G Risk of accident
inoperative ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist
and ESP® trailer stabilisation are not available due to a malfunc-
tion.
In addition, the ÷, å, ! and J warning lamps light
up in the instrument cluster.
EBD and ABS G Risk of accident

inoperative EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS,
PRE-SAFE®, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilisation are not
available due to a malfunction.
the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
J You are driving with the parking brake applied. A warning tone also
sounds.
Release parking X Release the parking brake.
brake
Z

J A malfunction has occurred while the HOLD function is active.

or
Brake immediately
Vehicles with manual transmission: with the HOLD function
activated, you have:
Ropened the driver's door and released the seat belt or
Rswitched off the engine or
Ropened the bonnet
A tone may also sound at regular intervals. The tone becomes

louder if you attempt to lock the vehicle.
You cannot start the engine.
X Paying attention to the traffic situation, immediately depress the
brake pedal firmly and hold until the display message disap-
pears.
X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away before you leave it
(Y page 342).
You can restart the engine.
J G Risk of accident
Check brake fluid There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. In addi-
level tion, the red J warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster
and a warning tone sounds.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
X Do not top up the brake fluid. This does not correct the error.
# The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.

Check brake wear
PRE-SAFE G Risk of injury
inoperative Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupant
safety systems, e.g. airbags, remain available.
ü If the symbol appears in the multifunction display, a seat belt

tongue has been clipped into a rear seat belt buckle.
For further information on the status indicator for the rear seat
belts: (Y page 56).

ý G Risk of injury
If the symbol appears in the multifunction display, a seat belt
tongue has not been clipped into a rear seat belt buckle.
X If necessary, ask the occupants in the rear to fasten their seat
belts.
belts: (Y page 56).
Child seat position G Risk of injury
Vehicles with automatic child seat recognition on the front-
passenger seat: the child seat is positioned incorrectly.
X Fit the child seat in the correct position.
G Risk of injury
passenger seat: the automatic child seat recognition sensor is
faulty.
6 G Risk of injury
Malfunction -Work‐ There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-
shop- tem). The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument clus-
ter.
6 G Risk of injury
FL malfunc. -Work‐ SRS has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The 6
shop- or FR mal‐ warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
func. -Workshop- X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
6 G Risk of injury
RL malfunc. -work‐ SRS has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or right. The 6
shop- or RR mal‐ warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
func. -Workshop- X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Z

6 G Risk of injury
R.cent.malf. - SRS has malfunctioned at the rear centre. The 6 warning lamp
Workshop- also lights up in the instrument cluster.
Left windowbag mal‐ G Risk of injury

function:wkshp
There is a malfunction in the left-hand and/or right-hand window-
or
bag. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument clus-
Right windowbag
malfunction:wkshp ter.
Safety systems (12-button multifunction steering wheel)

!÷ G Risk of accident
currently unavail‐ ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-
able See Owner's gram), BAS (Brake Assist), PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill
Manual start assist and ESP® trailer stabilisation are temporarily not avail-
able.
The adaptive brake lights, BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may
also have failed.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G Risk of accident
ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist
and ESP® trailer stabilisation are temporarily not available.
also have failed.
For example, the on-board voltage may be insufficient.
Z


!÷ G Risk of accident
inoperative See ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist
Owner's Manual and ESP® trailer stabilisation are not available due to a malfunc-
tion.
also have failed.
In addition, the J, ÷, å and ! warning lamps light
up in the instrument cluster.
÷ G Risk of accident
currently unavail‐ ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and
able See Owner's ESP® trailer stabilisation are temporarily not available.
Manual The adaptive brake lights, BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may
also have failed.
In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the
instrument cluster.
functions listed above.

inoperative See ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and
Owner's Manual ESP® trailer stabilisation are not available due to a malfunction.
also have failed.
In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the
instrument cluster.
T! G Risk of accident
÷ EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-
SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabi-
inoperative See lisation are not available due to a malfunction.
Owner's Manual
also have failed.
the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.
J You are driving with the parking brake applied. A warning tone also
sounds.
Release parking X Release the parking brake.
brake
Z

J A malfunction has occurred while the HOLD function or DIS-

TRONIC PLUS is active.
Brake immediately or
Vehicles with manual transmission: with the HOLD function acti-
vated, you have either:
Ropened the bonnet

X Paying attention to the traffic situation, immediately depress the
brake pedal firmly and hold until the display message disap-
pears.
X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away before you leave it
(Y page 342).
Check brake fluid There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. In addi-
level tion, the red J warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights
up and a warning tone sounds.
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
X Do not top up the brake fluid. This does not correct the error.
# The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.

Check brake wear
PRE-SAFE G Risk of injury
inoperative See Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupant
Owner's Manual safety systems, e.g. airbags, remain available.

PRE-SAFE G Risk of accident
Functions cur‐ PRE-SAFE® Brake is temporarily inoperative if:
rently limited See
Rthe DISTRONIC PLUS cover in the radiator grille is dirty.
Owner's Manual
Rthe sensors in the bumpers are dirty.
Rits function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-
tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
Ryou switch off ESP® (AMG vehicles only).
Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.
Rthe on-board voltage is too low.
PRE-SAFE® Brake is operational again and the display message

disappears if:
Rthe dirt (e.g. slush) drops away while the vehicle is in motion.
Rthe system detects that the sensors are fully available again.
Ryou reactivate ESP® (AMG vehicles only).
Rthe system is within the operating temperature range.

X Clean the DISTRONIC PLUS cover in the radiator grille
(Y page 330).
X Clean the bumpers (Y page 330).
X Restart the engine.
X Wait until the battery is sufficiently charged.
PRE-SAFE G Risk of accident

Functions limited PRE-SAFE® Brake is faulty. BAS PLUS or the distance warning sig-
See Owner's Manual nal may also have failed.
ü If the symbol appears in the multifunction display, a seat belt

tongue has been clipped into a rear seat belt buckle.
belts: (Y page 56).
Z

ý G Risk of injury
If the symbol appears in the multifunction display, a seat belt
tongue has not been clipped into a rear seat belt buckle.
X If necessary, ask the occupants in the rear to fasten their seat
belts.
belts: (Y page 56).
Child seat in G Risk of injury
wrong position
See Owner's Manual passenger seat: the child seat is positioned incorrectly.
X Fit the child seat in the correct position.
G Risk of injury
passenger seat: the automatic child seat recognition sensor is
faulty.
6 G Risk of injury
Restraint sys. mal‐ There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-
function Consult tem). The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument clus-
workshop ter.
6 G Risk of injury
Front left malfunc‐ SRS has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The 6
tion Consult work‐ warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
shoporFront right X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
malfunction Con‐
sult workshop
6 G Risk of injury
Rear left malfunc‐ SRS has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or right. The 6
tion Consult work‐ warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
shoporRear right X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
malfunction Con‐
sult workshop

6 G Risk of injury
Rear centre mal‐ SRS has malfunctioned at the rear centre. The 6 warning lamp
function Consult also lights up in the instrument cluster.
workshop X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
6 G Risk of injury
Left windowbag mal‐ There is a malfunction in the left-hand and/or right-hand window-
function Consult bag. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument clus-
workshoporRight ter.
windowbag malfunc‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
tion Consult work‐
shop
Lights (4-button multifunction steering wheel)

i Display messages about LEDs:
This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed.
b The left or right-hand cornering light is faulty.

X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself
Left corner. light
(Y page 125).
or Right corner.
light or
b The left or right-hand dipped-beam headlamp is faulty.

Left dipped beam or
(Y page 125).
Right dipped-beam
or
b The left or right-hand trailer tail lamp is faulty.

X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself.
Trailer left tail
lamp or Trailer or
right tail lamp X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b The left or right-hand trailer turn signal lamp is faulty.

Trailer left indic.
or Trailer right or
indic. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Z

b The trailer brake lamp is faulty.

Trailer brake lamp
or
b The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is faulty.

Rear left indicator
(Y page 125).
or Rear right indi‐
cator or
b The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is faulty.

Front left indica‐
(Y page 125).
tor or Front right
indicator or
b The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is

faulty.
Left mirror indica‐ X
Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself
tor or Right mir‐
(Y page 125).
ror indicator
or
b The third brake lamp is faulty.

Third brake lamp
(Y page 125).
or
b The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is faulty.

Tail/brake lamp,
(Y page 125).
left or Tail/brake
lamp, right or
b The left or right-hand high beam is faulty.

Left main beam or
(Y page 125).
Right main beam
or

b The left-hand or right-hand front foglamp is faulty.
Left fog lamp or
(Y page 125).
Right fog lamp
or
b The rear foglamp is faulty.

Rear fog lamp
(Y page 125).
or
b The front left or front right parking lamp is faulty.

Front left parking
(Y page 125).
lamp or Front
right parking lamp or
b The reversing lamp is faulty.

Reversing light
(Y page 125).
or
b The rear left or right side marker lamp is faulty.

Rear left marker
(Y page 125).
lamp or Rear right
marker lamp or
b The left or right daytime driving lamp is defective.

Left daytime driv‐
(Y page 125).
ing lamp
or or
Right dayt. driv‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
ing lamp
b The exterior lighting is faulty.

Malfunction
Z

Vehicles with trailer tow hitch: a fuse may have blown.

X Check the fuses (Y page 354).
X If necessary, replace the blown fuse. Observe the warning notes
as you do so.
b The light sensor is faulty.

AUTO lights inoper‐
ative
b The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A
warning tone also sounds.
Switch off lights X Turn the light switch to Ã.
Lights (12-button multifunction steering wheel)

i Display messages about LEDs:
This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed.
b The left or right-hand cornering light is faulty.

Left cornering
(Y page 125).
light or Right cor‐
nering light or
b The left or right-hand dipped-beam headlamp is faulty.

Left dipped beam or
(Y page 125).
Right dipped beam
or
b The left or right-hand trailer tail lamp is faulty.

Trailer left tail
lamp or Trailer or
right tail lamp X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b The left or right-hand trailer turn signal lamp is faulty.
Trailer left indi‐
cator or Trailer or
right indicator X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b The trailer brake lamp is faulty.

Trailer brake lamp
or
b The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is faulty.

Rear left indicator
(Y page 125).
or Rear right indi‐
cator or
b The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is faulty.

Front left indica‐
(Y page 125).
tor or Front right
indicator or
b The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is

faulty.
Left mirror indica‐ X
Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself
tor or Right mir‐
(Y page 125).
ror indicator
or
b The third brake lamp is faulty.

Third brake lamp
(Y page 125).
or
b The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is faulty.

Left-hand tail
(Y page 125).
lamp/brake lamp or
Right-hand tail or
lamp/brake lamp X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Z

b The left or right-hand high beam is faulty.

Left main beam or
(Y page 125).
Right main beam
or
b The left-hand or right-hand front foglamp is faulty.

Left fog lamp or
(Y page 125).
Right fog lamp
or
b The rear foglamp is faulty.

Rear fog lamp
(Y page 125).
or
b The front left or front right parking lamp is faulty.

Front left parking
(Y page 125).
lamp or Front
right parking lamp or
b The reversing lamp is faulty.

Reversing light
(Y page 125).
or
b The rear left or right side marker lamp is faulty.

Rear left side
(Y page 125).
marker lamp or
Rear right side or
marker lamp X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b The left or right-hand daytime driving lamp is defective.

Left daytime driv‐
(Y page 125).
ing lamp or Right
daytime driving or
lamp X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b The Intelligent Light System is faulty. The lights remain available
without the Intelligent Light System.
Intell. Light Sys‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
tem inoperative
b The exterior lighting is faulty.

Malfunction See
Owner's Manual Vehicles with trailer tow hitch: a fuse may have blown.
X Check the fuses (Y page 354).
X If necessary, replace the blown fuse. Observe the warning notes
as you do so.
b The light sensor is faulty.

AUTO lights inoper‐
ative
b The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A
Switch off lights X Turn the light switch to Ã.
Adaptive Main-beam Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty.

Assist inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Adaptive Main-beam Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoper-

Assist currently ative. Possible causes:
unavailable See Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision.
Owner's Manual Rvisibility
is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
X Clean the windscreen.
If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again,

the Adaptive Main-beam Assist available again message
is displayed.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.
Z
Engine (4-button multifunction steering wheel)


Top up The coolant level is too low.
coolant X Top up the coolant, observing the warning notes when doing so
(Y page 324).
X If the coolant needs topping up more often than usual, have the
engine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
? The coolant is too hot.

A warning tone also sounds.
Stop vehicle Sw.
X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traf-
eng. Off
fic conditions, and switch off the engine.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not
blocked, e.g. by frozen slush.
X Wait until the display message disappears before restarting the
engine. Otherwise, there is a risk of engine damage.
X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.
X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist
workshop immediately.
The poly-V-belt may have torn.

X Open the bonnet.
X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn.
If the poly-V-belt is torn:

! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.
If the poly-V-belt is OK:
? The fan motor is faulty.

X If the coolant temperature is less than 120 †, you can continue
driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.

# The battery is not being charged.
Possible causes:
Rfaulty alternator
Rtorn poly-V-belt
Ra malfunction in the electronics

X Open the bonnet.

4 The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.

Check eng. oil
X Check the oil level when next refuelling, at the latest
level
(Y page 323).
X If necessary, top up the engine oil (Y page 324).
X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if
the engine oil needs topping up more often than usual.
8 The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.

Operation of the auxiliary heating is deactivated when the fuel level
Reserve fuel level drops into the reserve range.
C There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.

The auxiliary heating cannot be operated.
X Refuel at the nearest filling station without fail.
¸ Vehicles with a diesel engine: the engine air filter is dirty and must
be replaced.
Replace air cleaner X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
! Vehicles with a diesel engine: there is water in the fuel filter. The
water must be drained off.
Clean the fuel fil‐ X
ter
Z
Engine (12-button multifunction steering wheel)

+ The coolant level is too low.

X Top up the coolant, observing the warning notes when doing so
Top up coolant See
(Y page 324).
Owner's Manual
X If the coolant needs topping up more often than usual, have the
engine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
? The coolant is too hot.

Coolant Stop vehi‐
cle Switch engine
off fic conditions, and switch off the engine.
X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist
workshop immediately.
The poly-V-belt may have torn.

X Open the bonnet.

? The fan motor is faulty.


# The battery is not being charged.
Possible causes:
Rfaulty alternator
Rtorn poly-V-belt
Ra malfunction in the electronics

X Open the bonnet.

4 The oil level has dropped to the minimum level.

Check eng. oil
X Check the oil level, at the latest when next refuelling
level when next
refuelling (Y page 323).
X If necessary, top up the engine oil (Y page 324).
X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if
the engine oil needs topping up more often than usual.

Operation of the auxiliary heating is deactivated when the fuel level
Reserve fuel level drops into the reserve range.
C There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.

The auxiliary heating cannot be operated.
X Refuel at the nearest filling station without fail.
¸ Vehicles with a diesel engine: the engine air filter is dirty and must
be replaced.
Replace air cleaner X
! Vehicles with a diesel engine: there is water in the fuel filter. The
water must be drained off.
Clean the fuel fil‐ X
ter
Z
Driving systems (4-button multifunction steering wheel)


HOLD The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding.
Off A warning tone also sounds.
X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 193).
The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmly

depressed, an activation condition is not fulfilled.
X Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function
(Y page 193).
Cruise ctrl. / LIM Cruise control and SPEEDTRONIC are malfunctioning.

inoperative A warning tone also sounds.
Limit While depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point
--- km/h (kickdown), SPEEDTRONIC cannot be activated.
Cruise control A condition for activating cruise control has not been met.
- - - km/h You have tried to store a speed below 30 km/h, for example.
X If conditions permit, drive faster than 30 km/h and store the
speed.
X Check the activation conditions for cruise control
(Y page 178).
120 km/h Only for certain countries: the maximum speed has been excee-
120 km/h ded.
X Drive slower.
Driving systems (12-button multifunction steering wheel)

À Based on specific criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has determined that

the driver is tired or paying less attention. A warning tone also
Attention Assist: sounds.
Drowsiness detec‐ X If necessary, take a break.
ted
During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get
enough rest.
À ATTENTION ASSIST has failed.

Attention Assist
inoperative
Speed Limit Assist Speed Limit Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.
currently unavail‐ Possible causes:
able See Owner's Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision.
Manual Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
If the display message does not disappear:
attention to road and traffic conditions.
If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the dis-
play message disappears.
Speed Limit Assist is operational again.
Speed Limit Assist: Speed Limit Assist is only available in certain countries.
Unavailable in X Drive on.
this country Speed Limit Assist is available again when you drive in a country
in which its use is approved.
Speed Limit Assist Speed Limit Assist is faulty.

inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
HOLD The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding.

Off A warning tone also sounds.
X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 193).
Z

The HOLD function is deactivated. If the brake pedal is firmly

depressed, an activation condition is no longer fulfilled.
X Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function
(Y page 193).
Radar sensor deac‐ Vehicles with a navigation system: the vehicle is close to a radio
tivated autom. See telescope facility and is therefore prohibited from transmitting any
Owner's Manual radar signals. The radar sensor system has switched off automat-
ically (Y page 389).
DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 183) is deactivated automatically if it is
activated. A warning tone also sounds.
Blind Spot Assist (Y page 205) or Active Blind Spot Assist
(Y page 209) is deactivated automatically if it is activated. The
yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors.
BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS) (Y page 73) and PRE-SAFE® Brake
(Y page 78) are then also not available.
X Drive on.
Once you have moved far enough away from the radio telescope,
the above functions are available again.
Vehicles with Becker® MAP PILOT: if the Becker® MAP PILOT is

not connected, the radar sensor system is deactivated automati-
cally.
BAS PLUS, DISTRONIC PLUS, Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind
Spot Assist and PRE-SAFE® Brake are not available.
X Connect the Becker® MAP PILOT; see the separate operating
instructions.
Radar sensor The radar sensor system is deactivated.

deactivated See X Check whether or not the radar sensor system may be activated
Owner's Manual (Y page 389).
X Switch on the radar sensor system (Y page 242).

Lane Keeping Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated
Assist currently and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes:
unavailable See Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision.
Owner's Man‐ Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
ualorActive Lane
Keeping Assist cur‐ Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period.
rently unavailable Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.
See Owner's Manual If the display message does not disappear:
If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the dis-
play message disappears.
Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is operational
again.
Lane Keeping Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is faulty.
Assist inopera‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
tiveorActive Lane
Keeping Assist
inoperative
Z

Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inop-
currently unavail‐ erative. Possible causes:
able See Owner's Ryou have established the electrical connection between the
ManualorActive trailer and your vehicle.
Blind Spot Assist Rthe sensors are dirty.
currently unavail‐
Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
able See Owner's
Manual Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature
range.
The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mir-
rors.
X When towing a trailer, confirm the display message with a.
If you are driving without a trailer and the display message does
not disappear:
X Clean the sensors (Y page 330).
If the system detects that the sensors are fully operational, the
display message disappears.
Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again.
Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is faulty.
inopera‐ The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mir-
tiveorActive Blind rors.
Spot Assist inoper‐ X
ative
Parking Guidance Parking Guidance is malfunctioning (Y page 199).

inoperative X Restart the engine.

Parking Guidance Parking Guidance is deactivated. Possible causes:
cancelled Rthe vehicle is skidding.
Rthe sensors are dirty.
Ra malfunction has occurred.

X Reactivate Parking Guidance later (Y page 199).
If the parking space symbol does not appear in the multifunction

display at speeds below 30 km/h:
X Clean the sensors (Y page 330).
If the parking space symbol still does not appear in the multifunc-
tion display at speeds below 30 km/h:
Parking Guidance has been deactivated because you are no longer

following the recommended path.
X Park again and, while doing so, observe the display messages
in the multifunction display.
Parking Guidance The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds.

finished The display message disappears automatically.
DISTRONIC PLUS DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 183). If it was
off deactivated automatically, a warning tone also sounds.
DISTRONIC PLUS DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been tempo-
available again rarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS
(Y page 183).
Z

DISTRONIC PLUS DISTRONIC is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possible

currently unavail‐ causes:
able See Owner's Rthe DISTRONIC PLUS cover in the radiator grille is dirty.
Manual Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
Rthe sensors in the bumpers are dirty.
Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.
Rthe on-board voltage is too low.

If the display message does not disappear:
X Clean the DISTRONIC PLUS cover in the radiator grille
(Y page 330).
X Clean the bumpers (Y page 330).
If the system detects that the sensors are fully operational, the
display message disappears.
DISTRONIC is operational again.
DISTRONIC PLUS DISTRONIC PLUS is faulty. BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may
inoperative also have failed.
DISTRONIC PLUS You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is no
suspended longer controlling the speed of the vehicle.
X Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
DISTRONIC PLUS An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled.

--- km/h X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS
(Y page 183).
DISTRONIC PLUS and DISTRONIC PLUS and SPEEDTRONIC are faulty. A warning tone
SPEEDTRONIC also sounds.

Cruise control and Cruise control and SPEEDTRONIC are malfunctioning.
SPEEDTRONIC A warning tone also sounds.
Limit SPEEDTRONIC cannot be activated while you are pressing the

--- km/h accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown).
Cruise control A condition for activating cruise control has not been met.
--- km/h You have tried to store a speed below 30 km/h, for example.
X If conditions permit, drive faster than 30 km/h and store the
speed.
X Check the activation conditions for cruise control
(Y page 178).
120 km/h Only for certain countries: the maximum speed has been excee-
Maximum speed ded.
exceeded In addition, the multifunction display shows 120 km/h.
X Drive slower.
Z
Tyres (4-button multifunction steering wheel)


Check G Risk of accident
tyres The tyre pressure loss warning system has detected a significant
loss in pressure.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do
so.
X Check the tyres and, if necessary, change the wheel
(Y page 365).
X Check the tyre pressures and, if necessary, set to the correct
tyre pressure.
X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system when the tyre
pressure is correct (Y page 362).
Check tyres The tyre pressure loss warning system generated a display mes-
Restart system sage and has not been restarted since.
X Set the correct tyre pressure in all four tyres.
X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (Y page 362).
Run Flat Indicator The tyre pressure loss warning system is faulty.
Tyres (12-button multifunction steering wheel)

Tyre pressure G Risk of accident
Check tyres The tyre pressure loss warning system has detected a significant
loss in pressure.
so.
X Check the tyres and, if necessary, change the wheel
(Y page 365).
X Check the tyre pressures and, if necessary, set to the correct
tyre pressure.
X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system when the tyre
pressure is correct (Y page 362).
Check tyre pres‐ The tyre pressure loss warning system generated a display mes-
sures sage and has not been restarted since.
then restart Run X Set the correct tyre pressure in all four tyres.
Flat Indicator X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (Y page 362).
Run Flat Indicator The tyre pressure loss warning system is faulty.
Tyre pressures The tyre pressure monitor is measuring the tyre pressure.
will be displayed X Drive on.
after a few The tyre pressures appear in the multifunction display after you
minutes of driving have been driving for a few minutes.
Tyre press. monitor The tyre pressure monitor is faulty.

Tyre press. monitor The wheels fitted do not have a suitable tyre pressure sensor. The
inoperative No tyre pressure monitor is deactivated.
wheel sensors X Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors.
The tyre pressure monitor is activated automatically after driv-
ing for a few minutes.
Z

Check G Risk of accident

tyre(s) The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped significantly.
The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.
so.
X Correct the tyre pressure (Y page 363).
X If necessary, change a wheel (Y page 365).
Caution, G Risk of accident

tyre defect The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly. The
wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.
so.
Rectify The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the tyre
tyre pressure pressure difference between the wheels is too great.
X Check the tyre pressures at the next opportunity. If necessary,
correct the tyre pressure (Y page 363).
Wheel sensor(s) There is no signal from the tyre pressure sensor of one or several
missing wheels. The pressure of the affected tyre is not displayed in the
X Have the faulty tyre pressure sensor replaced at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Tyre press. monitor Due to a source of radio interference, no signals can be received
currently unavail‐ from the wheel sensors. The tyre pressure monitor is temporarily
able malfunctioning.
X Drive on.
The tyre pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the
problem has been solved.

h G Risk of accident
Tyre pressure, Cau‐ The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly.
tion tyre malf. A warning tone also sounds.
so.
Tyre pressure The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped significantly.
Check tyre(s) X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
so.
X Check the tyre pressure. If necessary, correct the tyre pressure
(Y page 363).
h The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the tyre
pressure difference between the wheels is too great.
Please correct X Check the tyre pressures at the next opportunity. If necessary,
tyre pressure
correct the tyre pressure (Y page 363).
Vehicle (4-button multifunction steering wheel)

To start engine, You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in
shift to P or N position R or D.
X Shift the transmission to position P or N.
P You have switched off the engine with the Start/Stop button and
Select Park (P) opened the driver's door.
You wanted to lock the vehicle.
or
You have switched off the engine with the Start/Stop button and
opened the driver's door with the transmission in position N.
Z

With the Hold function activated, you have either:

Ropened the bonnet

N Saloon: the boot lid is open.

A Estate: the tailgate is open.

X Close the tailgate.
Mor? G Risk of accident

Vehicles with an anti-theft alarm system: the bonnet is open. A
X Close the bonnet.
C At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.

X Close all doors.
Rear left seat G Risk of injury

backr. not locked
Vehicles with the through-loading feature in the rear bench seat:
or Rear right seat
backrest not locked The backrest in the rear is not engaged on the left-hand and/or
right-hand side. A warning tone also sounds.
X Push the backrest back until it engages .

Check trailer G Risk of accident
hitch lock Vehicles with a retractable trailer coupling:
The trailer tow hitch is not correctly engaged.
X Allow the trailer tow hitch ball coupling to engage in the end
position (Y page 217).
Pwr. steering G Risk of accident

malfunc. The power steering assistance is faulty. You will need to use more
force to steer.
X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.
X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified
X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
Top up The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped
washer fluid below the minimum.
X Top up the washer fluid (Y page 325).
Vehicle (12-button multifunction steering wheel)

To start engine, You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in
shift to either P position R or D.
or N X Shift the transmission to position P or N.
P You have switched off the engine with the Start/Stop button and
Select Park (P) opened the driver's door.
You wanted to lock the vehicle.
or
You have switched off the engine with the Start/Stop button and
opened the driver's door with the transmission in position N.
Z

While the HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is active, you have:

Ropened the bonnet

N Saloon: the boot lid is open.

A Estate: the tailgate is open.

X Close the tailgate.
Mor? G Risk of accident

Vehicles with an anti-theft alarm system: the bonnet is open. A
X Close the bonnet.
C At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.

X Close all doors.
_ G Risk of injury
Rear left seat Saloon with through-loading feature in the rear bench seat:
backrest not locked The backrest in the rear is not engaged on the left-hand and/or
or Rear right seat right-hand side. A warning tone also sounds.
backrest not locked X Push the backrest back until it engages.

j G Risk of accident
Check trailer The trailer tow hitch is not correctly engaged.
hitch lock A warning tone also sounds.
X Allow the trailer tow hitch ball coupling to engage in the end
position (Y page 217).
D G Risk of accident
Power steering mal‐ The power steering assistance is faulty.
function See Own‐ You will need to use more force to steer.
er's Manual A warning tone also sounds.
X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.
X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified
X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
& The on-board voltage is too low. The auxiliary heating has switched
itself off or cannot be switched on (Y page 143).
inoperative Bat‐ X Drive for a longer distance.
tery low
The battery is being charged. The auxiliary heating is operational
again as soon as the on-board electrical system voltage is suf-
ficient.
& The fuel level in the fuel tank is too low. The auxiliary heating can-
not be switched on (Y page 143).
inoperative Refuel X Refuel at the nearest filling station.
vehicle
& The auxiliary heating has a temporary malfunction or is faulty.

X When the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled
inoperative See
down, make up to four attempts to switch on the auxiliary heat-
Owner's Manual
ing, waiting several minutes between each attempt
(Y page 143).
X If the auxiliary heating does not switch on, consult a qualified
Z

Telephone No Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/

Service receiver range.
X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol
¥ The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped
below the minimum.
Top up washer fluid X
Top up the washer fluid (Y page 325).
Key (4-button multifunction steering wheel)

Key does not You have put the wrong key in the ignition lock.
belong to vehicle X Use the correct key.
+ The key needs to be replaced.

Replace key
+ The batteries of the KEYLESS-GO key are discharged.

X Change the batteries (Y page 86).
Change battery
Key not detected The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the vehicle.
(Red display message) A warning tone also sounds.
If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle
centrally or start the engine.
X Locate the KEYLESS-GO key.
The KEYLESS-GO key is not detected while the engine is running

because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves.
X Operate the vehicle with the key in the ignition lock if necessary.

Key not detected The KEYLESS-GO key cannot be detected at present.
(White display mes- X Change the location of the key with the KEYLESS-GO functions
sage) in the vehicle.
If the KEYLESS-GO key is still not detected:
X Change the location of the key with the KEYLESS-GO functions
in the vehicle.
+ The KEYLESS-GO key has been detected inside the vehicle during
locking.
Key still in vehi‐ X Remove the KEYLESS-GO key from the vehicle.
cle
+ KEYLESS-GO is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. A warn-

ing tone also sounds.
Insert key X Insert the key into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired
position.
Close doors At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.
to lock veh. X Close all doors and lock the vehicle again.
Key (12-button multifunction steering wheel)
Â You have put the wrong key in the ignition lock.

X Use the correct key.
Key does not
belong to vehicle
Â The key needs to be replaced.

Replace key
Â The batteries of the KEYLESS-GO key are discharged.

X Change the batteries (Y page 86).
Change key batter‐
ies
Z

Â The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the vehicle.

Key not detec‐
ted(red display mes- If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle
sage) centrally or start the engine.
X Locate the KEYLESS-GO key.
The KEYLESS-GO key is not detected while the engine is running

because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves.
Â The KEYLESS-GO key cannot be detected at present.

X Change the location of the key with the KEYLESS-GO functions
Key not detected
in the vehicle.
(White display mes-
sage) If the KEYLESS-GO key is still not detected:
Â The KEYLESS-GO key has been detected inside the vehicle during
locking.
Key still in vehi‐ X Remove the KEYLESS-GO key from the vehicle.
cle
Â KEYLESS-GO is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. A warn-

ing tone also sounds.
Remove starting X Insert the key into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired
button, then
position.
insert key
Â At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.

X Close all doors and lock the vehicle again.
Close doors to
lock vehicle
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 291
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Seat belts

7 The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger
Only for certain coun- to fasten their seat belts.
tries: the red seat belt X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 53).
warning lamp lights up
for six seconds after
the engine starts.
7 G Risk of injury
Only for certain coun- The driver's seat belt is not fastened.
tries: the red seat belt
warning lamp lights up X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 53).
after the engine starts. The warning tone ceases.
In addition, a warning
tone sounds for up to
six seconds.
7 G Risk of injury
The red seat belt warn- The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.
ing lamp lights up after
X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 53).
the engine starts, as
soon as the driver's or The warning lamp goes out.
the front-passenger
door is closed. G Risk of injury
There are objects on the front-passenger seat.
X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow
them in a secure place.
The warning lamp goes out.
Z
292 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

7 G Risk of injury
The red seat belt warn- The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. At
ing lamp flashes and an the same time, you are driving faster than 25 km/h or have briefly
intermittent audible driven faster than 25 km/h.
warning sounds.
X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 53).
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone
ceases.
G Risk of injury
There are objects on the front-passenger seat. At the same time,
you are driving faster than 25 km/h or have briefly driven faster
than 25 km/h.
X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow
them in a secure place.
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone
ceases.
Safety systems

The red brake system There is insufficient brake fluid in the fluid reservoir.
warning lamp comes on
while the engine is run- X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
ning. A warning tone attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
also sounds. under any circumstances.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
Do not top up the brake fluid. This does not correct the error.
! G Risk of accident
The yellow ABS warning ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) has been deactivated due to a fault.
lamp is lit while the
For this reason, BAS (Brake Assist), BAS PLUS, ESP® (Electronic
engine is running.
Stability Program), PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD func-
tion, hill start assist, the adaptive brake lights and ESP® trailer
stabilisation are also deactivated, for example.
display.
If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other
systems, such as the navigation system or the automatic trans-
mission, will not be available.
Z

The yellow ABS warning
ABS is temporarily unavailable. Therefore, BAS, BAS PLUS, ESP®,
EBD (electronic brake force distribution), PRE-SAFE®,
engine is running.
PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill start assist, the adaptive
brake lights and ESP® trailer stabilisation, for example, are also
deactivated.
Self-diagnosis is not yet complete or the on-board voltage may be
insufficient, for example.
The functions mentioned above are available again when the
warning lamp goes out.
If the warning lamp is still on:
display.
The yellow ABS warning
EBD is faulty. Therefore, ABS, BAS, BAS PLUS, ESP®, PRE-SAFE®,
PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill start assist, the adaptive
engine is running. A
warning tone also brake lights and ESP® trailer stabilisation, for example, are not
sounds. available either.
display.

J÷å! G Risk of accident
The red brake warning
ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Therefore, BAS, BAS PLUS,
lamp, the yellow ESP®
EBD, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill start
and ESP® OFF warning
assist, the adaptive brake lights and ESP® trailer stabilisation, for
lamps and the yellow
example, are not available either.
ABS warning lamp are
lit while the engine is The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
running. functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you
display.
The yellow ESP® warn- ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of
ing lamp flashes while skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin.
the vehicle is in motion.
Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.
X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when
pulling away.
X Accelerate more gently during the journey.
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
X Vehicles with a 12-button multifunction steering wheel only: do
not deactivate ESP®.
Exceptions: (Y page 75).
å G Risk of accident
Vehicles with a 12-but-
ESP® and ESP® trailer stabilisation are deactivated. ESP® will not
ton multifunction steer-
stabilise the vehicle if it starts to skid or if a wheel starts to spin.
ing wheel only:
X Reactivate ESP®.
The yellow ESP® OFF
warning lamp is lit while For exceptions, see: (Y page 75).
the engine is running. X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
If ESP® cannot be activated:
X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Z

M G Risk of accident
AMG vehicles only:
SPORT handling mode is activated. ESP® only stabilises the vehi-
The yellow SPORT han- cle in extreme situations. ESP® intervention may not be able to
dling mode warning provide sufficient assistance in such situations, and the vehicle
lamp is lit while the may start to skid.
engine is running.
X Reactivate ESP®.
For exceptions, see: (Y page 75).
If ESP® cannot be activated:
X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
÷å G Risk of accident
The yellow ESP® and ESP®, BAS, BAS PLUS, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD
ESP® OFF warning function, hill start assist, the adaptive brake lights and ESP® trailer
lamps are lit while the
stabilisation are not available due to a malfunction. ESP® will not
engine is running.
stabilise the vehicle if it starts to skid or if a wheel starts to spin.
display.

÷å G Risk of accident
The yellow ESP® and ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and
ESP® OFF warning ESP® trailer stabilisation are temporarily not available.
lamps are lit while the
engine is running. The adaptive brake lights, BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may
also have failed.
ESP® will not stabilise the vehicle if it starts to skid or if a wheel
starts to spin.
Self-diagnosis is not yet complete.
The functions mentioned above are available again when the
warning lamp goes out.
If the warning lamp is still on:
display.
J You are driving with the parking brake applied.

The red brake system X Release the parking brake.
warning lamp comes on The warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases.
while the vehicle is
moving. A warning tone
also sounds.
6 G Risk of injury
The red SRS warning The restraint systems are malfunctioning. The airbags or belt ten-
lamp is lit while the sioners may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of
engine is running. an accident, may not be triggered at all.
Z
Engine

; There may be a fault, for example:
The yellow engine diag- Rin the engine management
nostics warning lamp Rin the fuel injection system
lights up while the Rin the exhaust system
engine is running.
Rin the ignition system (for vehicles with petrol engines)
Rin the fuel system
The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may
be running in emergency mode.
X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified
Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel tank has been run dry
(Y page 173).
X Start the engine three to four times after refuelling.
If the yellow engine diagnostics warning lamp goes out, emer-
gency running mode is cancelled. The vehicle need not be
checked.
The yellow reserve fuel Operation of the auxiliary heating is deactivated when the fuel level
warning lamp lights up drops into the reserve range.
while the engine is run- X Refuel at the nearest filling station.
ning.
? The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is

The red coolant warn- faulty.
ing lamp lights up while The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a
the engine is running risk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high.
and the coolant tem- X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traf-
perature gauge is at the fic conditions, and switch off the engine. Do not continue driving
start of the scale. under any circumstances.

? The coolant level is too low.
The red coolant warn- If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator
ing lamp comes on may be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be mal-
while the engine is run- functioning.
ning. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled
sufficiently.
display.
X Let the engine and coolant cool down.
X Check the coolant level and top up the coolant (Y page 324).
Observe the warning notes as you do so.
X If you have to top up the coolant frequently, have the engine
cooling system checked.
? The coolant temperature has exceeded 120 †. The airflow to the
The red coolant warn- engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too
ing lamp comes on low.
while the engine is run- The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.
ning. A warning tone X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
also sounds. display.
X Let the engine and coolant cool down.
X Check the coolant level and top up the coolant (Y page 324).
Observe the warning notes as you do so.
X If you have to top up the coolant frequently, have the engine
cooling system checked.
Z
Driving systems

· G Risk of accident
The red distance warn- The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed
ing lamp lights up while selected.
X Increase the distance.
· G Risk of accident
The red distance warn- The warning is issued if you approach a stationary vehicle or a
ing lamp lights up while vehicle driving ahead of you at too high a speed.
X Be prepared to brake immediately.
A warning tone also
sounds. X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to
brake or take evasive action.
More information about DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 183) and
PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 78).
Tyres

The yellow tyre pres- The tyre pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at
sure monitor warning least one of the tyres.
lamp is on.
so.
display.
X Check the tyre pressure. If necessary, correct the tyre pressure
(Y page 363).
301

Loading guidelines ............................ 302
Stowage areas .................................. 302
Features ............................................. 314
Stowing and features

302 Stowage areas
Useful information or the permissible axle loads for the vehicle

(including occupants).
i This Owner's Manual describes all models Rposition heavy loads as far forwards as pos-
and all standard and optional equipment sible and as low down in the boot/luggage
available to your vehicle at the time of pub- compartment as possible.
lication of the Owner's Manual. Country- Rthe load must not protrude above the upper
specific deviations are possible. Please edge of the seat backrests.
note that your vehicle may not be equipped Ralways place the load against the rear or
with all features described. This also front seat backrests. Make sure that the
applies to safety-relevant systems and seat backrests are securely locked into
functions. place.
i Please read the information on qualified Ralways place the load behind unoccupied
specialist workshops (Y page 28). seats if possible.
Rsecure the load with sufficiently strong and
wear-resistant lashing material. Pad sharp
Loading guidelines edges for protection.
i Load restraints are available at any quali-
G WARNING
fied specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-
Secure and position the load as described in Benz Service Centre.
the loading guidelines.
Otherwise, vehicle occupants could
be injured by the load being thrown around in Stowage areas
the event of sharp braking, a sudden change
in direction or an accident. Stowage compartments
You will find further information in the "Secur- Important safety notes
ing a load" section.
Even if you follow all the loading guidelines, G WARNING
the load will increase the risk of injury in the The stowage compartments must be closed
event of an accident. when items are stored in them. Luggage nets
are not designed to secure heavy items of
G WARNING luggage.
Keep the boot lid/tailgate closed while the You or other vehicle occupants could be
vehicle is in operation. Otherwise, exhaust injured by objects being thrown around if you:
fumes could enter the vehicle interior and poi- Rbrake sharply
son you. Rchange direction suddenly
Rare involved in an accident
The handling characteristics of a laden vehi-
cle are dependent on the distribution of the Sharp-edged and fragile objects must not be
load within the vehicle. For this reason, you placed in the luggage net.
should observe the following notes when Do not place hard objects in the map pockets.
transporting a load: Objects must not protrude from the map
Rwhen transporting a load, never exceed the pockets.
maximum permissible gross vehicle weight
Stowage areas 303
Front stowage compartments

Glove compartment
i The glove compartment can be cooled
(Y page 148).

X To open: pull down spectacles compart-
ment : by the handle.
Stowage compartment in the centre con-

sole
X To open: pull handle : and open glove
compartment flap ;.
X To close: fold glove compartment flap ;
upwards until it engages.
The glove compartment can only be locked
and unlocked using the emergency key ele-
ment.
X To open: slide cover : back.
Stowage compartment/telephone com-

partment under the armrest
i Depending on the vehicle's equipment, a
USB port and an AUX-IN jack or a Media
Interface are installed in the stowage com-
partment. A Media Interface is a universal
X To lock: insert the emergency key element interface for portable audio equipment, e.g.
into the lock and turn it 90° clockwise to for an iPod® or MP3 player (see the sepa-
position 2. rate Audio or COMAND operating instruc-
X To unlock: insert the emergency key ele- tions).
ment into the lock and turn it 90° anti-
clockwise to position 1.
Spectacles compartment
There is a compartment to stow spectacles in
the roof lining on the driver's side.
Z
304 Stowage areas
Rear stowage compartments

Stowage compartment in the rear com-
partment
X To open: press left-hand button ; or right-

hand button :.
The stowage compartment opens.
Stowage compartment under the front X To open: fold down seat armrest ;.
seats X Fold cover : of the armrest upwards.
G WARNING
Only load the stowage compartment with the
maximum permissible load of 1.5 kg. Other- Luggage nets
wise, the transported load could, for example,
be thrown out of the stowage compartment if G WARNING
you change direction suddenly or brake Only place lightweight objects in the luggage
sharply and could injure you or others. net. Do not use it to transport heavy, sharp-
edged or fragile objects. The luggage net can-
i On vehicles with a fire extinguisher not secure the objects sufficiently in the event
instead of a stowage compartment, the fire of an accident.
extinguisher is installed under the driver's
seat. Luggage nets are located in the front-
passenger footwell, on the rear of the driver's
and front-passenger seat backrests and on
the left-hand side in the boot (Saloon) or on
the left and right-hand side of the luggage
compartment (Estate).
Through-loading facility in the rear

bench seat
X To open: pull handle : up and fold G WARNING
cover ; forwards. Do not carry heavy or hard objects inside the
vehicle or in the boot unless they are secured.
Otherwise, you and other vehicle occupants
could be injured by objects being thrown
around the vehicle in the event of sharp brak-
Stowage areas 305
ing, a sudden change in direction or an acci-

dent.
G WARNING
Always drive with the boot lid closed. Exhaust
fumes could otherwise enter the vehicle inte-
rior.
The left-hand and right-hand rear seat backr-

ests can be folded down separately to
increase the boot capacity.
X Fold rear seat backrest ; forwards.
Folding the seat backrest forwards X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
back if necessary.
Folding back the seat backrest
! Before you fold down the rear seat back-

rest, remove the side head restraints for
the integrated child seat; see the "Side
head restraints for integrated child seat" X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
section. The side head restraints could oth- forward if necessary.
erwise be damaged.
! Make sure that the seat belt does not
X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat become trapped when folding the rear seat
forward if necessary. backrest back. Otherwise, it could be dam-
X Open the boot. aged.
X Pull right-hand or left-hand rear seat back-
X Fold rear seat backrest : back until it
rest release handle :.
engages.
The corresponding rear seat backrest is
released. G WARNING
X Fully insert the rear seat backrest head Make sure that the rear seat backrest is cor-
restraints. rectly engaged. Otherwise, vehicle occupants
around if you:
Rbrake sharply
Rchange direction suddenly
Z
306 Stowage areas
If the rear seat backrest is not engaged, this section. The side head restraints could oth-
will be shown in the multifunction display in erwise be damaged.
the instrument cluster. The left-hand and right-hand rear seat backr-
ests can be folded forwards separately to
i You should always engage the rear seat increase the luggage compartment capacity.
backrests if you do not need the through-
loading feature. This will prevent unauthor- Folding the rear seat backrest forward
ised access to the boot from the vehicle
interior. If the combined luggage cover and net is fit-
ted with the luggage compartment cover and
X Adjust the head restraints if necessary

safety net, both rear seat backrests can be
(Y page 107).
folded forwards only if you first fold the right-
X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
hand rear seat backrest forwards. Otherwise,
back if necessary. only the right-hand backrest can be folded
forwards individually.
Enlarging the luggage compartment

(Estate)
G WARNING
Do not carry heavy or hard objects inside the
vehicle or in the luggage compartment unless
they are secured.
Otherwise, you and other vehicle occupants
around the vehicle in the event of sharp brak- X Fully insert the backrest head restraints
ing, a sudden change in direction or an acci- (Y page 107).
dent. X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
When using the enlarged luggage compart- forward if necessary.
ment, always clip in the safety net. X Pull left-hand or right-hand release han-
When transporting objects in the luggage dle ; of the seat backrest forwards.
compartment, the combined luggage cover Corresponding seat backrest : is
and net (luggage compartment cover and released.
safety net) must be attached to the rear seat X Fold seat backrest : forwards.
backrest. X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
back if necessary.
G WARNING
Always drive with the tailgate closed. Exhaust
fumes could otherwise enter the vehicle inte-
rior.
! Before you fold down the rear seat back-

rest, remove the side head restraints for
the integrated child seat; see the "Side
head restraints for integrated child seat"
Stowage areas 307
Folding the rear seat backrest back Otherwise, vehicle occupants could be
injured by objects being thrown around if you:
Rbrake sharply
Please observe the loading guidelines.
Observe the following notes on securing

loads:

Rsecure the load using the lashing eyelets.
Rdo not use elastic straps or nets to secure
X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat a load, as these are only intended as an
forward if necessary. anti-slip protection for light loads.
Rdo not route lashing materials across sharp
! Make sure that the seat belt does not
edges or corners.
become trapped when folding the rear seat
Rpad sharp edges for protection.
backrest back. Otherwise, it could be dam-
aged. There are four lashing eyelets in the boot or
luggage compartment.
X Fold seat backrest : back until it engages.
Red lock status indicator ; is no longer
visible.
G WARNING
Make sure that the seat backrest is correctly
engaged. The red lock verification indicators
on the left and right sides should no longer be
visible. If they are visible, the backrests are
not locked in position.
Occupants could otherwise be injured in the
event of an accident, e.g. by objects being Saloon with through-loading feature in the rear
thrown forwards through the vehicle interior bench seat
from the luggage compartment. : Lashing eyelets
X Adjust the head restraints if necessary

(Y page 107).
X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
back if necessary.
Securing a load
Lashing eyelets
G WARNING
Distribute the load on the lashing eyelets Estate without EASY-PACK load-securing kit
evenly. : Lashing eyelets
Z
308 Stowage areas
Saloon
Estate with EASY-PACK load-securing kit

: Lashing eyelets : Bag hook
; Mounting elements
= Lashing eyelets
Estate
X Estate with EASY-PACK load-securing

kit: insert mounting elements ; and slide
to the desired position (Y page 310).
Bag hooks in the boot/luggage com-

partment
G WARNING
Only hang light loads on the bag holders. Do
not use them to transport heavy, sharp-edged X To open: press bag hook : (arrow).
or fragile objects. When braking sharply, Bag hook : slides out.
changing direction quickly or in the event of X To close: press bag hook : until it
an accident, the bag hooks will not secure the
engages.
items sufficiently. This could result in injury to
yourself or others.
! The bag hook can bear a maximum load Luggage compartment cover (Estate)
of 5 kg. Do not use it to secure a load. Important safety notes
G WARNING
The luggage compartment cover is not a
restraint system. Secure the load under the
luggage compartment cover by suitable
means. Make sure that the luggage compart-
ment cover is engaged securely. If luggage is
not sufficiently secured, it can be thrown over
the backrest into the passenger compart-
ment, for instance during heavy braking, sud-
den changes of direction or in the event of an
Stowage areas 309
accident. You could cause an accident or X To retract: press handle ; briefly.

cause injury to yourself and others. The luggage compartment cover rolls up
automatically.
! When loading the vehicle, make sure that X If necessary, fold cover shield : upwards
you do not stack the load in the luggage or downwards to the detent.
compartment higher than the lower edge of
the side windows. Do not place heavy
objects on top of the luggage compartment Removing the combined luggage cover
cover. and net

The luggage compartment cover and the X Make sure that the safety net and the lug-
safety net are attached to the rear bench seat gage compartment cover are rolled up.
backrest as a combined luggage cover and X Fold the left and right rear seat backrest
net. forwards (Y page 306).
Extending and retracting the luggage

compartment cover
X Push combined luggage compartment

cover and net ; to the left until it extends
out of guide rails :.
X To extend: position cover shield : hori- X Remove combined luggage compartment
zontally. cover and net ;.
X Pull luggage compartment cover back
using grab handle ; until it engages in the
guides on the left and right-hand sides. Safety net (Estate)
G WARNING
The safety net cannot secure heavy loads. You
should therefore always lash down the load.
You could otherwise be injured by objects
which have not been sufficiently secured
being thrown around in the event of sharp
braking, a sudden change of direction or an
accident.
Z
310 Stowage areas
G WARNING Coat hooks on the tailgate

In the event of sharp braking, a sudden
G WARNING
change of direction, or an accident, light loads
can be thrown about. The tailgate may close if too great a load is
placed on the coat hooks.
This could result in injury to yourself or others.
This could cause you or others to be trapped
Therefore, if you are transporting light loads,
and injured.
use the safety net.
If you use the coat hooks, only hang light
When transporting objects in the luggage
clothing on them. Make sure that nobody can
compartment, the combined luggage cover
become trapped.
and net must be attached to the rear seat
backrest.
Safety net without luggage compart-

ment enlargement
: Coat hooks
EASY-PACK load-securing kit (Estate)

X Pull the safety net up by tab : and hook it Components and storage
into eyelets ;. The EASY-PACK load-securing kit allows you
to use your luggage compartment for a variety
Safety net with luggage compartment of purposes. The accessory parts are located
enlargement under the luggage compartment floor.
X Open the luggage compartment floor
(Y page 312).
X Fold the left and right rear seat backrest

forwards (Y page 306).
X Guide the safety net up by tab : and hook
it into eyelets ;.
Stowage areas 311
Otherwise, vehicle occupants could be

injured by objects being thrown around if you:
Rbrake sharply
Please observe the loading guidelines.
Luggage holder

The luggage holder can be used to secure
EASY-PACK load-securing kit accessory parts light loads against the side wall of the luggage
: Brackets compartment to prevent them from moving
; Luggage holder around.
= Telescopic rod ! Only use the luggage holder to secure
loads with a maximum weight of 7 kg and
Inserting the brackets into the loading with dimensions that the luggage holder
rail can safely and securely contain.
X Insert bracket : into the centre of loading X To install: insert two brackets A into the
rail ?. left or right loading rail (Y page 310).
X Press release button ; and push X Press release button : of the luggage
bracket : into the desired position in load- holder and pull the strap out slightly.
ing rail ?. X Insert luggage holder ; into brackets A
X Let go of release button ;. and press down until it engages.

X Press release button : of the luggage
X Press locking button =.
holder and pull the strap out in the direction
Bracket : is locked in loading rail ?.
of the arrow.
X If necessary, fold lashing eyelet A
X Place the load between the strap and the
upwards. luggage compartment side wall.
G WARNING X Using one hand, press locking button : of
Distribute the load on the lashing eyelets the luggage holder.

evenly.
Z
312 Stowage areas
X With your other hand, let the strap go slowly

until the load is secured.
X Make sure that locking button ? on brack-
ets A is pressed.
This keeps brackets A in place on the
loading rail.
X To remove: press release button = on
respective bracket A and remove luggage
holder ; by pulling upwards and out.
X To open: pull handle : upwards.

Telescopic rod
The telescopic rod can be used to secure the
load against the rear seats to prevent it from
moving around.
X Hook handle : into rain trough ;.

! Remove the handle again before closing
the boot lid and snap it in tightly to prevent
X To install: insert one bracket ; into both the handle flap from protruding. Otherwise,
the left and the right loading rails and slide you could damage the handle.
it to the desired position (Y page 310).
X Insert telescopic rod : into brackets ;
and press downwards until it engages. Stowage well under the luggage com-
partment floor (Estate)
X Make sure that locking button = on brack-
ets ; is pressed. G WARNING
This keeps brackets ; in place on the Never drive with the luggage compartment
loading rail. floor open.
X To remove: press release button ? on Otherwise, you and other vehicle occupants
respective bracket ; and remove tele- could be injured by objects being thrown
around the vehicle in the event of sharp brak-
scopic rod : by pulling it upwards and out.
ing, a sudden change in direction or an acci-
dent.
Stowage well under the boot floor A removable insert under the luggage com-
The TIREFIT kit, the vehicle tool kit, etc. are partment floor contains the parts of the EASY-
located in the stowage compartment. PACK load-securing kit and a folding box.
TIREFIT, the vehicle tool kit, etc. are stored
beneath this insert.
Stowage areas 313
This helps to prevent damage to the vehi-

cle.
Position the load on the roof carrier in such
a way that the vehicle will not sustain dam-
age even when it is in motion.
Make sure that if the roof carrier is fitted:
Rthe sliding sunroof/panorama sliding
sunroof can be fully raised, depending on
the vehicle's equipment.

Rthe boot lid/ tailgate can be fully opened.
X To open: open the tailgate. Rthe aerial on the roof does not touch the
X Holding the ribbing, press handle : down- roof carrier.

wards ;. ! To avoid damaging or scratching the cov-
Handle : folds upwards. ers, do not use metallic or hard objects to
X Swing the luggage compartment floor open them.
upwards using handle : until it rests
against the luggage compartment cover. Attaching the roof carrier (Saloon)
X To close: fold the luggage compartment
floor down.
X Press the luggage compartment floor
down ; until it engages.
Roof carrier
G WARNING
An incorrectly secured roof carrier, ski rack or X Open covers : carefully in the direction of
load could become detached from the vehi- the arrow.
cle. These objects might then be thrown X Fold covers : upwards.
around and could injure you or others or X Only secure the roof carrier to the anchor-
cause an accident. Follow the roof carrier/ski age points under covers :.
rack manufacturer's installation instructions
X Observe the manufacturer's installation
and special instructions for use.
instructions.
The roof load raises the vehicle's centre of
gravity, thereby affecting vehicle handling.
You must always observe the maximum roof Attaching the roof carrier (Estate)
load of 100 kg. Always adapt your driving style X Secure the roof carrier to the roof rails.
to the prevailing road, traffic and weather X Observe the manufacturer's installation
conditions and drive with particular care if the
instructions.
roof is laden.
! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you

only use roof carriers that have been tested
and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Z
314 Features
Features Removing and fitting the cup holder

Removing
Cup holders
G WARNING
Keep the cup holder closed while the vehicle
is in motion. Otherwise, vehicle occupants
around if you:
Rbrake sharply
X Pry groove ; away carefully on the front-
Only use the cup holders for containers of a
passenger side using a suitable tool until
suitable size and which have lids. The drinks
lug = becomes visible.
could otherwise spill.
X Pull the cup holder upwards slightly, to the
Cup holders should not be used for hot drinks.
You may otherwise scald yourself. stop.
X Pry groove : away carefully on the driver's
Cup holder in the front centre console side using a suitable tool. At the same time,
pull the cup holder upwards slightly, to the
stop.
X Pry groove on driver's side : and front-
passenger side ; away alternately. When
doing so, lift the cup holder upwards until
it can be removed.
Fitting
: Cup holders
; Cover
X To open: slide cover ; back.
X Insert left-hand and right-hand grooves ;

of the cup holder into lateral springs =.
Insert the cup holder so that the wedge of
Features 315
the upper section of cup holder : faces

forwards.
X Press the cup holder downwards until it
engages on the front-passenger side.
Cup holder in the rear seat armrest

! Do not sit on or support your body weight
on the rear seat armrest when it is folded
down, as you could otherwise damage it.

! Close the cup holder before folding the : Mirror light
rear seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cup ; Bracket
holder could be damaged.
= Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket
? Vanity mirror
A Mirror cover
Vanity mirror in the sun visor

Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor
is clipped into retainer ; and mirror cover
A has been folded up.
Glare from the side

X Fold down the rear seat armrest. X Fold down the sun visor.
X To open: raise the rear seat armrest cover. X Pull the sun visor out of retainer ;.
X Press release catch :. X Swing the sun visor to the side.
Cup holder ; folds out forwards.
X Fold the cover of the rear seat armrest back
down again if necessary. Sunblinds on the rear side windows
X To close: lift the cover of the rear seat arm-
rest.
Swing cup holder ; back until it engages.
Sun visors
Sun visor overview
G WARNING
Keep the mirrors in the sun visors covered
while driving. You could otherwise be dazzled,
X To extend: pull the roller sunblind out by
which may impair your view of traffic condi-
tions and as a result could cause an accident.
tab : and hook it onto retainers ; at the
top of the window.
Z
316 Features
! Always guide the roller sunblind by hand. Ashtray

Do not let it snap back suddenly as this
would damage the automatic roller mech- Ashtray in the front centre console
anism. i You can remove the ashtray insert and
! Do not drive the vehicle with the roller use the resulting compartment for stow-
sunblind hooked in and the side windows age.
opened simultaneously. The roller sunblind ! The stowage space under the ashtray is
can jump out of the retainers and spring not heat resistant. Before placing lit ciga-
back suddenly when driving at high speeds, rettes in the ashtray, make sure that the
e.g. when driving on the motorway. This ashtray is properly engaged. Otherwise, the
could damage the inertia reel. Therefore, stowage space could be damaged.
either close the side window or retract the
roller sunblind before driving at high
speeds.
Rear window roller sunblind (Saloon)

Extending/retracting the roller sun-
blind
! Make sure that the roller sunblind can
move freely. Otherwise, the roller sunblind
or other objects could be damaged. X To open: slide cover : forwards until it
engages.
X To remove the insert: hold insert = by
the ribbing at the sides and lift it up ; and
out.
X To refit the insert: press insert = into the
holder until it engages.
X To close: press cover : briefly at the
front.
The cover moves back.

lock.
X To extend or retract: briefly press but-
ton :.
The roller sunblind fully extends or fully
retracts.
Features 317
Ashtray in the rear-compartment centre X Press in cigarette lighter ;.

console Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automati-
cally when the heating element is red-hot.
X To close: press cover : briefly at the
front.
12 V sockets

Points to observe before use
The sockets can be used for accessories with
a maximum current draw of 180 W (15 A), e.g.
X To open: pull cover ; out by its top edge. lamps or chargers for mobile phones.
X To remove the insert: press release but- If you use the sockets for long periods when
ton = and lift the insert up and out. the engine is switched off, the battery may
X To fit the insert: fit insert : from above discharge.
into the holder and press down into the X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition
holder until it engages. lock.
i An emergency cut-off ensures that the on-
Cigarette lighter board voltage does not drop too low. If the
on-board voltage is too low, the power to
G WARNING the sockets is automatically cut. This
Only hold the hot cigarette lighter by its knob. ensures that there is sufficient power to
Otherwise, you might burn yourself. start the engine.
Make sure that children travelling in the vehi-
cle are not able to injure themselves on the Socket in the front centre console
hot cigarette lighter or cause a fire with it.
X To open: slide cover : forwards until it

engages.
X Lift up the cover of socket ;.
lock.
X To open: slide cover : forwards until it X To close: press cover : briefly at the
engages. front.
Z
318 Features
Socket in the rear-compartment centre motion, you must only do so if the traffic sit-
console uation permits. Otherwise, you could be dis-
A socket is fitted in the centre console in the tracted from the traffic conditions, cause an
rear compartment in vehicles with an ashtray accident and injure yourself and others.
and a cigarette lighter. Two-way radios and fax equipment used with-
out low-reflection exterior aerials can inter-
fere with the vehicle's electronics and thereby
jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle
and your safety. Therefore, you must only use
this equipment if it is correctly connected to

a separate reflection-free exterior aerial.
G WARNING
Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation
may cause damage to your health and the
health of others. Using an exterior aerial takes
X Pull cover ; out by its top edge. into account current scientific discussions
relating to the possible health risk posed by
X Lift up the cover of socket :. electromagnetic fields.
Socket in the luggage compartment Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of an

(Estate) approved exterior aerial. This ensures:
Roptimal mobile phone reception quality in
the vehicle
Rmutual influences between the vehicle
electronics and mobile phones are mini-
mised
An exterior aerial has the following advan-
tages:
Rit conducts the electromagnetic fields gen-
erated by a wireless device to the exterior.
Rthe field strength in the vehicle interior is
X Lift up the cover of socket :. lower than in a vehicle that does not have
an exterior aerial.
i There are various mobile phone brackets
Mobile phone that may be fitted to your vehicle; in some
cases, these are country-specific.
Important notes
i Even if your vehicle is equipped with con-
G WARNING venience telephony, you can connect a
Observe the legal requirements of the country Bluetooth® capable mobile phone to Audio
in which you are currently driving regarding 20 or COMAND Online via the Bluetooth®
operating mobile communications equipment interface.
in a vehicle.
If it is permitted by law to operate communi-
cations equipment while the vehicle is in
Features 319
More information on suitable mobile phones, If you take the key out of the ignition lock, the
mobile phone brackets and on connecting mobile phone stays on but you can no longer
Bluetooth® capable mobile phones to Audio use the hands-free system.
20 or COMAND Online can be obtained: If you are making a call and you would like to
Rat your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre take the key out of the ignition lock, first
Ron remove the mobile phone from the bracket.
the Internet at http://www.mercedes-
Otherwise, the call will be ended.
benz.com/connect
i The functions and services available when i When a mobile phone bracket is used that
is connected to the mobile phone via Blue-
you use the phone depend on your mobile

phone model and service provider. tooth®: if you want to continue a call in
"Private mode", you have to perform the
necessary steps on the mobile phone (see
Inserting the mobile phone
the separate mobile phone operating
X Open the telephone compartment instructions).
(Y page 303). You can fold the pre-installed bracket up to
X Place the mobile phone bracket into the improve access to the stowage space
pre-installed bracket (see the separate beneath it. Depending on the vehicle's equip-
mobile phone bracket installation instruc- ment, a USB connection and an AUX-IN con-
tions). nection/Media Interface are fitted in the
X Insert the mobile phone into the mobile stowage compartment (Y page 303).
phone bracket (see the separate mobile
phone bracket installation instructions).
If the mobile phone is inserted in the mobile
phone bracket, you can speak to the person
you are calling using the hands-free system.
i On some mobile phone brackets, you first
have to connect the mobile phone via Blue-
tooth® to a mobile phone bracket (see the
separate operating instructions for the
mobile phone bracket).
On these mobile phone brackets, the X To fold the bracket up: press button :.
mobile phone does not have to be inserted X To fold the bracket down: press the
into the bracket for you to be able to use
bracket down and allow it to engage.
the telephone functions. In this case, the
charging function and aerial function are
not available.
Floormat on the driver's side
Operating the mobile phone G WARNING
You can operate the telephone using the Make sure that there is sufficient clearance
6 and ~ buttons on the luxury multi- around the pedals when floormats are used,
function steering wheel. You can operate and that the floormats are properly secured.
other mobile phone functions via the on- The floormats must be correctly secured at all
board computer (Y page 235). times using retainers and press-studs.
Z
320 Features
Before you drive off, check the floormats and

secure if necessary. A floormat which is not
properly secured can slip and, thereby, inter-
fere with the movement of the pedals.
Do not place floormats on top of one another.
X Slide the seat backwards.

X To fit: place the floormat in the footwell.
X Press studs : onto retainers ;.
X To remove: pull the floormat off retain-

ers ;.
X Remove the floormat.
Retrofitted anti-glare film

Anti-glare film retrofitted to the inside of the
windows can interfere with radio/mobile
phone reception. This is particularly the case
for conductive or metallic-coated films. Infor-
mation about anti-glare film can be obtained
from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
321

Engine compartment ........................ 322
Maintenance ...................................... 326
Care .................................................... 327
Maintenance and care

322 Engine compartment
Useful information Vehicles with a petrol engine: The elec-

tronic ignition system uses high voltage. For
i This Owner's Manual describes all models this reason, you must never touch ignition
and all standard and optional equipment system components (ignition coil, ignition
available to your vehicle at the time of pub- cables, spark plug connectors or test socket)
lication of the Owner's Manual. Country- while:
specific deviations are possible. Please Rthe engine is running
note that your vehicle may not be equipped Rthe engine is being started
Rthe ignition is switched on and the engine
functions. is being cranked by hand
You could otherwise suffer an electric shock
i Please read the information on qualified and be seriously or even fatally injured.
Vehicles with a diesel engine: The elec-
tronic injection control uses high voltage. For
this reason, you must never touch injection
Engine compartment
system components while:
Bonnet Rthe engine is running
Opening the bonnet Rthe engine is being started
Rthe ignition is switched on
G WARNING
You could otherwise suffer an electric shock
Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle and be seriously or even fatally injured.
is in motion. If you do so, the bonnet may open
up and block your view. X Make sure that the windscreen wipers are
switched off.
G WARNING
There is a risk of injury if the bonnet is open, G WARNING
even if the engine is not running. The windscreen wipers and wiper linkage
Some engine components can become very could be set in motion.
hot. When the bonnet is open, you or others could
To avoid the risk of burns, only touch those be injured by the wiper linkage.
components described in the Owner's Manual Make sure that the windscreen wipers are
and observe the relevant safety notes. switched off. Remove the key or make sure
that no ignition position has been selected
G WARNING with KEYLESS-GO. All indicator lamps must be
The radiator fan between the radiator and the off in the instrument panel.
engine can start automatically, even if the key
has been removed from the ignition lock. For
this reason, you must not reach into the fan
rotation area. You could otherwise be injured.
Engine compartment 323
X Lower the bonnet and let it fall from a

height of approximately 20 cm.
X Check that the bonnet has engaged prop-
erly.
If the bonnet can be raised slightly, it is not
properly engaged. Open it again and close
it with a little more force.
Radiator
X Pull release lever : on the bonnet. i Vehicles with diesel engine: do not

The bonnet is released. cover the radiator. Do not use thermal
mats, insect protection covers or anything
! Make sure that the windscreen wipers are similar. Doing so can cause the Onboard
not folded away from the windscreen. Oth- Diagnostics System to display inaccurate
erwise, you could damage the windscreen values. Some of these values are legally
wipers or the bonnet. required and must be correct.
Engine oil
Notes on the oil level
Depending on driving style, the vehicle con-
sumes a maximum of 0.8 l oil per 1000 km.
The oil consumption may be higher than this
when the vehicle is new or if you frequently
drive at high engine speeds.
X Reach into the gap, pull bonnet catch han- Checking the oil level using the oil dip-
dle ; up and lift the bonnet. stick
If you lift the bonnet by approximately
40 cm, the bonnet is opened and held open
automatically by the gas-filled strut.
Closing the bonnet

G WARNING
as you close the bonnet.
Example: vehicles with a petrol engine
Z
324 Engine compartment
Example: vehicles with a diesel engine Example: engine oil cap

X Park the vehicle on a level surface. X Turn cap : anti-clockwise and remove it.
To check the oil level with the engine at X Top up the engine oil.
normal operating temperature, switch the If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark
engine off and wait for approximately five on the dipstick, top up with
minutes. 0.5 to 1.0 litres of engine oil.
X Pull oil dipstick : out of the oil dipstick X Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn
tube. clockwise.
X Wipe off oil dipstick :. Make sure that the cap locks into place
X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide securely.
X Check the oil level again with the oil dip-
tube to the stop, and take it out again.
If the level is between MIN mark = and stick (Y page 323).
MAX mark ;, the oil level is correct. Further information on engine oil
X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark (Y page 381).
= or below it, top up with
0.5 to 1.0 litres of engine oil.
Checking and adding other service
products
Adding engine oil
Checking the coolant level
G WARNING
If engine oil comes into contact with hot Only check the coolant level when the vehicle
engine parts, it may ignite and you could burn is on a level surface and the engine has cooled
yourself. Do not spill any engine oil on hot down.
engine parts. X Turn the key to position 2 (Y page 153) in
the ignition lock.
H Environmental note On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the
When topping up the oil, take care not to spill Start/Stop button twice (Y page 153).
any. If oil enters the soil or waterways, it is X Check the coolant temperature display in
harmful to the environment. the instrument cluster.
! Do not add too much oil. If the oil level is G WARNING
above the "max" mark on the dipstick, too The cooling system is pressurised. Therefore,
much oil has been added. This can lead to only unscrew the cap once the engine has
damage to the engine or the catalytic con- cooled down. The coolant temperature gauge
verter. Have excess oil siphoned off.
Engine compartment 325
must display less than 70 † . Otherwise, you You can identify service products approved
could be scalded if hot coolant escapes. by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscrip-
tions on the container:
RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 371.0)
RMB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 371.0)
Other labels and recommendations that

make reference to quality level or a speci-
fication according to an MB Sheet no. (e.g.
MB 371.0) are not necessarily approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
You can obtain further information from

G WARNING
X Slowly turn cap : half a turn anti-clock-
Windscreen washer fluid is highly flammable.
wise and allow excess pressure to escape. Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibi-
X Turn cap : further anti-clockwise and ted when handling washer fluid concentrate.
remove it.
If the coolant is at the level of marker bar ! Only use washer fluid concentrate which
= in the filler neck when cold, there is is suitable for plastic lamp lenses. Unsuit-
enough coolant in coolant expansion able washer fluid concentrate could dam-
tank ;. age the plastic lamp lenses of the head-
If the coolant level is approximately 1.5 cm lamps.
above marker bar = in the filler neck when ! Do not use distilled or de-ionised water in
warm, there is enough coolant in coolant the washer fluid reservoir. Otherwise, the
expansion tank ;. level sensor may be damaged.
X If necessary, top up with coolant that has i Add windscreen washer concentrate, e.g.
been tested and approved by Mercedes- MB SummerFit, to the washer fluid all year
Benz. round.
X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far
as it will go.
For further information on coolant, see
(Y page 383).
Windscreen washer system and head-

lamp cleaning system
The washer fluid reservoir is used for both the
windscreen washer system and the headlamp
cleaning system.
i Components and service products must Example: washer fluid reservoir
be matched. Mercedes-Benz recommends X Mix the windscreen washer fluid in a con-
that you use products tested and approved tainer beforehand.
by Mercedes-Benz. They are listed in this X At temperatures above freezing: fill the
Mercedes-Benz Owner's Manual in the washer fluid reservoir with a mix of water
appropriate section.
Z
326 Maintenance
and windscreen washer concentrate (e.g. Maintaining the time-dependent service

MB SummerFit). schedule:
X At temperatures below freezing: fill the X Note down the service due date displayed
washer fluid reservoir with a mix of water in the multifunction display before discon-
and windscreen washer concentrate (e.g. necting the battery.
MB WinterFit). Adapt the mixing ratio to the or
outside temperatures.
X Subtract the battery disconnection periods
X To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab.
from the service date shown on the display
X Top up with the premixed washer fluid. after reconnecting the battery.
X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck
i The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
until it engages.
does not show any information on the

engine oil level. Observe the notes on the
engine oil level (Y page 323).
Maintenance
ASSYST PLUS service interval display Hiding a service message
Service messages X 4-button multifunction steering wheel:

press C.
Information on the type of service and service X 12-button multifunction steering
intervals (see separate Service Booklet). wheel: press % or a.
You can obtain further information from a
Displaying service messages
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
informs you when the next service is due. X Switch on the ignition.
If a service due date has been exceeded, you
also hear an acoustic signal.
X Use V to select the Service menu.
The multifunction display shows a service
The service due date appears in the multi-
message for a few seconds, e.g.
function display.
Next service A due in .. days
Service A due 12-button multifunction steering wheel
Service A overdue by ... days X Press the = or ; button to select the
The letter indicates which service is due. A Service menu.
stands for a minor service and B for a major X Press the 9 or : button to select the
service. A number or another letter may be ASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm by
displayed after the letter. This figure indicates pressing the a button.
any necessary additional maintenance work The service due date appears in the multi-
to be performed. function display.
If you report this displayed information to a
qualified specialist workshop, for example a Points to remember
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, they can
inform you of the costs the service will incur. Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service inter-
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display val display
does not take into account any periods of A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a
time during which the battery is disconnec- Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, will reset the
ted. ASSYST PLUS service interval display after
Care 327
the necessary service work has been carried H Environmental note

out. Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning
You can obtain further information, e.g. cloths in an environmentally responsible man-
regarding service work, from a Mercedes- ner.
Benz Service Centre or directly from
Mercedes-Benz. ! Do not park up the vehicle for an extended
! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval dis- period straight after cleaning it, particularly
after having cleaned the wheels with wheel
play has been inadvertently reset, this set-
cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause
ting can be corrected at a Mercedes-Benz
increased corrosion of the brake discs and
Service Centre.
brake pads/linings. For this reason, you
Have service work carried out as described should drive for a few minutes after clean-

in the Service Booklet. This may otherwise ing. Braking heats the brake discs and the
lead to increased wear and damage to the brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The
major assemblies or the vehicle. vehicle can then be parked up.
Driving abroad
An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network
Care of the exterior
is also available in other countries. The
Service Hotline's current telephone numbers Automatic car wash
for use when you are abroad are to be found
in the "Mercedes-Benz Service24h" section G WARNING
of the Service Booklet. Braking efficiency is reduced after washing
the vehicle. This could cause an accident. For
this reason, following a car wash, drive with
Care particular care until the brakes are dry.
Notes on care You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car
Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for wash from the very start.
retaining the quality in the long term. If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before
Use care products and cleaning agents rec- cleaning it in an automatic car wash.
ommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. ! Make sure that the automatic transmis-
! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any sion is in position N when washing your
of the following: vehicle in a tow-through car wash. The vehi-
cle could be damaged if the transmission is
Rdry, rough or hard cloths
in another position.
Rabrasive cleaning agents
Rsolvents
! Make sure that:
Rthe side windows and sliding sunroof are
Rcleaning agents containing solvents
closed completely.
Do not scrub.
Rthe blower for the ventilation/heating is
Do not touch the surfaces or protective switched off (OFF button is depressed).
films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice
Rthe windscreen wiper switch is at posi-
scraper. You could otherwise scratch or
damage the surfaces and protective film. tion 0.
The vehicle could otherwise be damaged.
After using an automatic car wash, wipe off
wax from the windscreen and the wiper
Z
328 Care
blades. This will prevent smears and reduce Do not aim directly at any of the following:
wiping noises caused by residue on the wind- Rtyres
screen. Rdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints etc.
Relectrical components
Washing by hand
Rbattery
In some countries, washing by hand is only Rconnectors
allowed at specially equipped washing bays.
Rlights
Observe the legal requirements for each indi-
vidual country. Rseals
X Do not use hot water and do not wash the Rtrim elements
vehicle in direct sunlight. Rventilation slots

X Use a soft sponge to clean. Damaged seals or electrical components

X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car can lead to leaks or failures.
shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.
X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a Cleaning the wheels
gentle jet of water. ! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products
X Do not point the water jet directly towards to remove brake dust. This could damage
the air inlet. wheel bolts and brake components.
X Use plenty of water and rinse out the
! Do not park up the vehicle for an extended
sponge frequently. period straight after cleaning it, particularly
X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry after having cleaned the wheels with wheel
thoroughly with a chamois. cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause
X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the increased corrosion of the brake discs and
paintwork. brake pads/linings. For this reason, you
When using the vehicle in winter, remove all should drive for a few minutes after clean-
traces of road salt deposits carefully and as ing. Braking heats the brake discs and the
soon as possible. brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The
vehicle can then be parked up.
High-pressure cleaning equipment
Cleaning the paintwork
G WARNING Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected
Do not use high-pressure cleaners with circu- by corrosion and damage caused by inade-
lar-jet nozzles (dirt grinders) to clean your quate care cannot always be completely
vehicle, in particular the tyres. You could oth- repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified spe-
erwise damage the tyres and cause an acci- cialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz
dent. Service Centre.
X Remove impurities immediately, where
! Always maintain a distance of at least
30 cm between the vehicle and the high- possible, whilst avoiding rubbing too hard.
pressure cleaner nozzle. Information about X Soak insect remains with insect remover
the correct distance is available from the and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
equipment manufacturer. X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse
Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzle off the treated areas afterwards.
around when cleaning your vehicle.
Care 329
X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, i The vehicle should preferably be washed
oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently by hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo
with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or and plenty of water.
lighter fluid.
i Use only insect remover and car shampoo
X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.
from the range of recommended and
X Use silicone remover to remove wax. approved Mercedes-Benz care products.
! Do not affix:
Cleaning the windows
Rstickers
Rfilms G WARNING
Rmagnetic plates or similar items Switch off the windscreen wipers and remove

the key from the ignition lock before cleaning
to painted surfaces. You could otherwise
the windscreen or the wiper blades. On vehi-
damage the paintwork.
cles with KEYLESS-GO, press the Start/Stop
button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in
Care and treatment of matt paintwork
the instrument cluster have gone off. The
If your vehicle has a clear matt finish, observe windscreen wipers could otherwise move and
the following instructions in order to avoid injure you.
damage to the paintwork due to incorrect
care. ! Only fold the windscreen wipers away
These notes also apply to light alloy wheels from the windscreen when vertical. Other-
with a clear matt finish. wise, you will damage the bonnet.
X Clean the inside and outside of the win-
! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy
dows with a damp cloth and a cleaning
wheels. Polishing makes the paintwork
agent that is recommended and approved
shiny.
by Mercedes-Benz.
! The following may cause the paint to
become shiny and thus reduce the matt ! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,
effect: solvents or cleaning agents containing sol-
vents to clean the inside of the windows.
RVigorous rubbing with unsuitable mate- Do not touch the insides of the windows
rials. with hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or
RFrequent use of car washes. ring. There is otherwise a risk of damaging
RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight. the windows.
! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or pol- ! Clean the water drainage channels of the
ishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g. windscreen and the rear window at regular
wax. These products are only suitable for intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals
high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles and pollen may under certain circumstan-
with matt finish leads to considerable sur- ces prevent water from draining away. This
face damage (shiny, spotted areas). can lead to corrosion damage and damage
Always have paintwork repairs performed to electronic components.
at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Cleaning the wiper blades
! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax G WARNING
treatment under any circumstances. Switch off the windscreen wipers and remove
the key from the ignition lock before cleaning
Z
330 Care
the windscreen or the wiper blades. On vehi- Cleaning the sensors

cles with KEYLESS-GO, press the Start/Stop
button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in
the instrument cluster have gone off. The
windscreen wipers could otherwise move and
injure you.
! Only fold the windscreen wipers away

from the windscreen when vertical. Other-
wise, you will damage the bonnet.
! Do not pull on the wiper blade. Otherwise,
the wiper blade could be damaged.

! Do not clean wiper blades too often and
do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the
graphite coating could be damaged. This
could cause wiper noise.
X Fold the wiper arms away from the wind- X Clean sensors : of the driving systems
screen. with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.
X Clean the wiper blades carefully using a
damp cloth. ! If you clean the sensors with a high-pres-
X Fold the windscreen wipers back again sure cleaner, make sure that you keep a
before switching on the ignition. distance of at least 30 cm between the
vehicle and the high-pressure cleaner noz-
! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding zle. Information about the correct distance
back. The windscreen could be damaged if is available from the equipment manufac-
the wiper arm hits against it suddenly. turer.
Cleaning the exterior lighting Cleaning the reversing camera

X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior
lighting using a wet sponge and a mild
cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car
shampoo or cleaning cloths.
! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning
cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.
Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning
cloths could scratch or damage the plastic
lenses of the exterior lighting.
Example: Saloon
X Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean
camera lens :.
! Do not clean the camera lens and the area
around the reversing camera with a high-
pressure cleaner.
Care 331
Cleaning the exhaust tail pipes H Environmental note

Impurities combined with the effects of road Dispose of oily and greasy cloths in an envi-
grit and corrosive environmental factors may ronmentally-responsible manner.
cause flash rust to form on the surface. You
can restore the original shine of the exhaust
tail pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in Interior care
winter and after washing.
Cleaning the display
! Do not clean the exhaust tail pipes with
alkaline-based cleaning agents, such as X Before cleaning the display, make sure that
wheel cleaner. it is switched off and has cooled down.
X Clean the display surface using a commer-

X Clean the exhaust tail pipes with a chrome
cially-available microfibre cloth and TFT/
care product tested and approved by
LCD display cleaner.
Mercedes-Benz.
X Dry the display surface using a dry micro-
fibre cloth.
Cleaning the trailer tow hitch
! For cleaning, do not use any of the fol-
The ball coupling must be cleaned if it
becomes dirty or corroded. lowing:
Ralcohol-based thinner or petrol
X Remove rust, e.g. with a wire brush.
Rabrasive cleaning agents
X Remove dirt with a clean, lint-free cloth or
a brush. Rcommercially-available household clean-
ing agents
! Do not clean the ball coupling with a high- These may damage the display surface. Do
pressure cleaner. Do not use solvents. not put pressure on the display surface
when cleaning. This could lead to irrepara-
ble damage to the display.
Cleaning the plastic trim

G WARNING
When cleaning the steering wheel boss and
dashboard, do not use cockpit sprays or
cleaning agents containing solvents. Cleaning
agents containing solvents cause the surface
to become porous, and as a result plastic
X After cleaning, lightly oil or grease ball cou- parts may break away and be thrown around
pling :. the interior when an airbag is deployed, which
X Check that the vehicle's trailer tow hitch is may result in severe injuries.
working properly.
! Do not affix the following to plastic surfa-
! Observe the note on care provided by the ces:
trailer manufacturer. Rstickers
i You can also have the maintenance work Rfilms

on the ball coupling and the trailer tow hitch Rscented oil bottles or similar items
carried out by a qualified specialist work- You could otherwise damage the plastic.
shop.
Z
332 Care
! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent that have been tested and approved by
or sunscreen to come in contact with the Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain these
plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality from a qualified specialist workshop, e.g.
look of the surfaces. a Mercedes-Benz Service centre.
Rclean artificial leather covers with a cloth
X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free
cloth, e.g. a microfibre cloth. moistened with a solution containing 1%
X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning
detergent (e.g. washing-up liquid).
Rclean cloth covers with a microfibre cloth
products recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz. moistened with a solution containing 1%
The surface may change colour tempora- detergent (e.g. washing-up liquid). Rub
rily. Wait until the surface is dry again. carefully and always wipe entire seat sec-
tions to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave

the seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning
Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or
results depend on the type of dirt and
selector lever
how long it has been there.
X Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use Rclean Alcantara® covers with a damp
leather care agents that have been recom- cloth. Make sure you wipe entire seat
mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. sections to avoid leaving visible lines.
i Note that regular care is essential to
Cleaning wooden trim and trim ele- ensure that the appearance and comfort of
ments the covers is retained over time.
X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with
a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfibre Cleaning the seat belts
cloth. X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solu-
X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning
tion.
products recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz. ! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical
cleaning agents. Do not dry the seatbelts
! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents at temperatures above 80 † or by exposing
such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, pol- them to direct sunlight.
ishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of
damaging the surface. Cleaning the roof lining and carpets
Cleaning the seat covers X Roof lining: use a soft brush or a cleaning
agent recommended and approved by
! Do not use microfibre cloths to clean gen- Mercedes-Benz to remove heavy soiling.
uine leather, artificial leather or
Alcantara® covers. If used often, these can X Carpets: use the carpet and textile clean-
damage the cover. ing agents recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
! Observe the following when cleaning:
Rclean genuine leather covers carefully
with a damp cloth and then wipe the cov-
ers down with a dry cloth. Make sure that
the leather does not become soaked. It
may otherwise become rough and
cracked. Only use leather care agents
333

Where will I find...? ........................... 334
Flat tyre ............................................. 337
Battery ............................................... 346
Jump-starting .................................... 350
Towing and tow-starting .................. 351
Electrical fuses ................................. 354
Breakdown assistance
334 Where will I find...?
Useful information
i This Owner's Manual describes all models

and all standard and optional equipment
available to your vehicle at the time of pub-
functions.
X Remove warning triangle : from the stow-
i Please read the information on qualified age well.
Setting up the warning triangle

Where will I find...?
Warning triangle
Removing the warning triangle
Saloon: the warning triangle is secured on
the inside of the boot lid.
X Open the boot lid.
X Fold feet = down and out to the side.

X Pull side reflectors ; upwards to form a
triangle and lock them at the top using
upper press-stud :.
First-aid kit
Saloon: depending on the vehicle's equip-
X Press warning triangle holder : up in the
ment, the first-aid kit is located either in an
direction of the arrow, open it and remove
open stowage space or behind the left-hand
the warning triangle.
side trim panel.
Estate: the warning triangle is located in the X Saloon: open the boot lid.
stowage well under the luggage compartment
floor.
X Open the tailgate.
X Lift the luggage compartment floor up
(Y page 312).
Where will I find...? 335
Example: first-aid kit behind the side trim panel X Remove first-aid kit =.
X To open the cover: turn rotary knob : in
i Check the expiry date on the first-aid kit
the direction of the arrow and fold down
cover ;. at least once a year. Replace the contents
if necessary, and replace missing contents.
X Remove the first-aid kit.
Fire extinguisher
The fire extinguisher is located underneath
the front of the driver's seat.
Example: first-aid kit in an open stowage space

X Remove first-aid kit :.
X Estate: open the tailgate.
X Pull tab : upwards.

X Remove fire extinguisher ;.
i Have the fire extinguisher refilled after
each use and checked every one or two
years. It may otherwise fail in an emer-
gency.
Observe the legal requirements in all coun-
tries concerned.
X Pull handle :.
Vehicle tool kit
X Fold down cover ;.
The vehicle tool kit can be found in the stow-
age well under the boot floor/luggage com-
partment floor.
336 Where will I find...?
i Vehicles without a spare wheel are not

equipped with the tools needed to change
a wheel when they leave the factory, e.g. a
jack or wheel wrench. Country-specific dif-
ferences are possible. Some tools for
changing a wheel are specific to the vehi-
cle. To obtain tools approved for your vehi-
cle, visit a qualified specialist workshop,
e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
X Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: lift up the
boot floor/luggage compartment floor : Vehicle tool kit tray
(Y page 312) or (Y page 312).
; Stowage well
= Spare wheel/"Minispare" emergency
spare wheel
The vehicle tool kit contains:
RFoldable wheel chock
RFuse allocation chart
RJack
ROne pair of gloves
RWheel wrench
RTowing eye
: Tyre sealant filler bottle
; Tyre inflation compressor
= Towing eye Spare wheel/"Minispare" emergency
spare wheel
? Folding wheel chock
A Wheel wrench The spare wheel or "Minispare" emergency
spare wheel is located in the stowage well
B Jack
under the boot/luggage compartment floor.
C One pair of gloves (behind jack)
X Saloon: lift up the floor of the boot
X Vehicles with a spare (Y page 312).
wheel/"Minispare" emergency spare X Estate: lift up the floor of the luggage com-
wheel: lift up the boot floor/luggage compartment (Y page 312).
partment floor (Y page 312) or
(Y page 312).
Flat tyre 337
X Remove stowage well :. X Stop the vehicle as far away as possible

from traffic on solid, non-slippery and level
ground.
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.
X Firmly depress the parking brake.
X Bring the front wheels into the straight-
ahead position.
X Vehicles with manual transmission:
engage first or reverse gear.
X Vehicles with automatic transmission:
move the selector lever to P.
X To remove the spare wheel or X Switch off the engine.
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel:
X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove
remove vehicle tool kit tray :.
the key from the ignition lock.
X Turn stowage well ; anti-clockwise and
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the
remove it. driver's door.
X Remove the spare wheel or "Minispare" The on-board electronics have status 0,
emergency spare wheel =. which is the same as the key having been
For further information on changing a wheel removed.
and fitting the spare wheel, see X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the
(Y page 341). Start/Stop button from the ignition lock
(Y page 153).
X All occupants must get out of the vehicle.
Flat tyre Make sure that they are not endangered as
Preparing the vehicle they do so.
X Make sure that no one is near the danger
Your vehicle may be equipped with:
area whilst a wheel is being changed. Any-
Ra TIREFIT kit one who is not directly assisting in the
Ran emergency spare wheel wheel change should, for example, stand
Ra spare wheel behind the barrier.
RMOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat char- X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traf-
acteristics) (Y page 345) fic conditions when doing so.

X Close the driver's door.
i Vehicle preparation is not necessary on
X Place the warning triangle (Y page 334) a
vehicles with MOExtended tyres.
suitable distance away. Observe legal
i Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not requirements.
equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory.
It is therefore recommended that you addi-
tionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit TIREFIT kit
if you fit tyres that do not feature run-flat
properties, e.g. winter tyres. A TIREFIT kit Using the TIREFIT kit
can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz
You can use the TIREFIT kit to seal small
Service Centre.
punctures, particularly those in the tyre tread.
338 Flat tyre
You can use TIREFIT at outside temperatures G WARNING

down to Ò20 †. TIREFIT must not come into contact with your
G WARNING skin, eyes or clothing.
RIf TIREFIT comes into contact with your
In the following situations, your safety is at
particular risk as tyre sealant is unable to pro- eyes or skin, immediately rinse thoroughly
vide sufficient breakdown assistance: with clean water.
RChange out of clothing which has come into
Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tyre
contact with TIREFIT immediately.
greater than 4 mm.
RIf an allergic reaction occurs, consult a doc-
Rthe wheel rim is damaged.
tor immediately.
Ryou have driven at very low tyre pressures
Keep TIREFIT away from children.
or on a flat tyre.
RIf TIREFIT is swallowed, immediately rinse
Do not drive any further. Consult a qualified
your mouth out thoroughly and drink plenty
specialist workshop which has the necessary

of water.
specialist knowledge and tools to carry out
RDo not induce vomiting. Consult a doctor
the work required.
immediately.
RDo not inhale TIREFIT fumes.
i If TIREFIT leaks out, allow it to dry. It can
at a qualified specialist workshop. then be removed like a layer of film.
If you get TIREFIT on your clothing, have it
X Do not remove any foreign objects which cleaned as soon as possible with perchloro-
have penetrated the tyre, e.g. screws or ethylene.
nails. Your vehicle is provided with one of two dif-
X Remove the tyre sealant bottle, the accom- ferent TIREFIT kits:
panying "max. 80 km/h" sticker and the RVersion 1: the tyre inflation compressor
tyre inflation compressor from the stowage
and the tyre filler bottle both have their own
well underneath the boot floor/luggage
fixed hoses.
compartment floor (Y page 335).
RVersion 2: the tyre inflation compressor
and the tyre filler bottle do not come with
a fixed hose. This is in the housing of the
tyre inflation compressor.
TIREFIT kit version 1
X Affix part : of the sticker within the driv-

er's field of vision.
X Affix part ; of the sticker near the valve
on the wheel with the defective tyre.
Flat tyre 339
X Pull plug ? with the cable and hose A out The tyre inflation compressor can be oper-
of the housing. ated again once it has cooled down.
X Screw hose A onto flange B of tyre seal- If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has
ant bottle :. been achieved after five minutes, see
X Insert tyre sealant bottle : head down- (Y page 340).
wards into recess ; of the tyre inflation If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has
compressor. not been achieved after five minutes, see
(Y page 340).
TIREFIT kit version 2
X Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty
tyre.
X Screw filler hose D onto valve C.
X Remove filler hose B and plug = from the
X Insert plug ? into the cigarette lighter bottom section of the tyre inflation com-
socket (Y page 317) or into a 12 V socket pressor housing.
in your vehicle (Y page 317). X Slide the yellow filler hose connector into
X Turn the key to position 1 (Y page 153) in the mounting on yellow cap A of tyre seal-
the ignition lock. ant bottle : until the plug engages.
X Press on/off switch = on the tyre inflation X With the sealing rings in front, slide yellow
compressor to I. cap A of tyre sealant bottle : into the
The tyre inflation compressor is switched mounting of tyre inflation compressor ;
on. The tyre is inflated. until the cap and both hooks engage.
i First, TIREFIT is pumped into the tyre. The
pressure can briefly rise to approximately
500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).
Do not switch off the tyre inflation com-
pressor during this phase.
X Allow the tyre inflation compressor to run
for five minutes. The tyre should then have
attained a pressure of at least 180 kPa
(1.8 bar/26 psi).
! Do not operate the tyre inflation com-
pressor for longer than six minutes at a X Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty
time without a break. It may otherwise tyre.
overheat.
X Screw filler hose D onto valve.
Z
340 Flat tyre
X Insert plug = into the socket of the ciga- G WARNING

rette lighter (Y page 317) or into a 12 V If after five minutes a pressure of 180 kPa
power socket in your vehicle (Y page 317). (1.8 bar/26 psi) cannot be achieved, the tyre
X Turn the key to position 1 (Y page 153) in is too severely damaged.
the ignition lock. Do not drive any further. Consult a qualified
X Press on/off switch ? on the tyre inflation specialist workshop which has the necessary
compressor to ON. specialist knowledge and tools to carry out
The tyre inflation compressor is switched the work required. Mercedes-Benz recom-
on. The tyre is inflated. mends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service
i First, TIREFIT is pumped into the tyre. The Centre for this purpose. In particular, work
pressure can briefly rise to approximately relevant to safety or on safety-related sys-
500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi). tems must be carried out at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Do not switch off the tyre inflation com-
pressor during this phase.

Tyre pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/
X Allow the tyre inflation compressor to run
26 psi) is reached
for five minutes. The tyre should then have
attained a pressure of at least 180 kPa X Switch off the tyre inflation compressor.
(1.8 bar/26 psi). X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of
the faulty tyre.
! Do not operate the tyre inflation com-
pressor for longer than six minutes at a ! After use, excess TIREFIT may run out of
time without a break. It may otherwise the filler hose. This may cause stains.
overheat. Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic
The tyre inflation compressor can be oper- bag which contained the TIREFIT kit.
ated again once it has cooled down.
X Stow the tyre sealant bottle, the tyre infla-
If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has tion compressor and the warning triangle.
been achieved after five minutes, see X Pull away immediately.
(Y page 340).
If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has G WARNING
not been achieved after five minutes, see Do not exceed the maximum speed of
(Y page 340). 80 km/h.
The "max. 80 km/h" label must be affixed in
Tyre pressure of at least 180 kPa the driver's field of vision.
(1.8 bar/26 psi) not reached The vehicle's handling characteristics may be
If, after five minutes, a pressure of 180 kPa affected.
(1.8 bar/26 psi) has not been achieved:
X Stop after driving for approximately ten
X Switch off the tyre inflation compressor. minutes and check the tyre pressure with
X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the tyre inflation compressor.
the faulty tyre.
X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse G WARNING
approximately 10 m. If the tyre pressure is less than 130 kPa
X Pump up the tyre again. (1.3 bar/20 psi), the tyre is too severely dam-
aged. Do not drive any further. Consult a
qualified specialist workshop which has the
necessary specialist knowledge and tools to
Flat tyre 341
carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz X TIREFIT kit version 2: to remove the tyre
recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz sealant bottle from the tyre inflation com-
Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, pressor, press together the locking tabs on
work relevant to safety or on safety-related the yellow cap.
systems must be carried out at a qualified X TIREFIT kit version 2: pull the tyre sealant
specialist workshop. bottle out of the tyre inflation compressor.
The filler hose stays on the tyre sealant
X Correct the tyre pressure if it is still at least bottle.
130 kPa (1.3 bar/20 psi) (for the values,
see the fuel filler flap). X Stow the tyre sealant bottle, the tyre infla-
tion compressor and the warning triangle.
X To increase the tyre pressure: switch on
X Drive to the nearest workshop and have the
the tyre inflation compressor.
tyre changed there.
X Have the tyre sealant bottle and the filler
hose replaced as soon as possible at a
qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a
H Environmental note
Have the used tyre sealant bottle disposed of
professionally, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre.
X Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced every

Example: TIREFIT kit, version 2 four years at a qualified specialist work-
X To reduce the tyre pressure: press pres- shop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service
sure release button : next to pressure Centre.
gauge ;.
X TIREFIT kit version 1: pull the tyre sealant Changing a wheel and fitting the spare
bottle from the recess of the tyre inflation wheel
compressor.
X TIREFIT kit version 1: unscrew the hose Preparing the vehicle
from the tyre inflation compressor to the
flange of the tyre sealant bottle. G WARNING
The wheel and tyre size of the emergency
spare wheel/spare wheel may differ to that of
the damaged wheel. When using an emer-
gency spare wheel/spare wheel the handling
characteristics of the vehicle may change.
Adapt your style of driving accordingly.
Never operate the vehicle with more than one
emergency spare wheel/spare wheel that dif-
fers in size.
Only use an emergency spare wheel/spare
wheel of a differing size briefly and do not
TIREFIT kit version 2 switch off ESP®.
Z
342 Flat tyre
When using an emergency spare wheel you The folding wheel chock is an additional
must not exceed the maximum speed of securing measure to prevent the vehicle from
80 km/h. rolling away, for example when changing a
wheel.
G WARNING
Have the emergency spare wheel/spare
wheel replaced with a new wheel as soon as
possible at a qualified specialist workshop
which has the necessary specialist knowledge
and tools to carry out the work required.

X Fold both plates upwards :.
i Vehicles without an emergency spare X Fold out lower plate ;.
wheel/spare wheel are not equipped with
X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into
wheel-changing tools at the factory. For
more information on which tools are the openings in base plate =.
required to perform a wheel change on your
vehicle, e.g. wheel chock, wheel wrench or
centring pin, consult a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre.
X Prepare the vehicle as described
(Y page 337).
X If a trailer is coupled to the vehicle, uncou-
ple it.
X Remove the following items (depending on
the vehicle's equipment) from the stowage
well under the boot/luggage compartment Securing the vehicle on level ground (example:
floor: Saloon)
Rthe emergency spare wheel or spare X On level ground: place chocks or other
wheel suitable items under the front and rear of
Rthe folding wheel chock the wheel that is diagonally opposite the
Rthe wheel wrench wheel you wish to change.
Rthe jack
X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling

away.
Securing the vehicle to prevent it from

rolling away
If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock,
it can be found in the vehicle tool kit
(Y page 335).
Flat tyre 343
points. Before positioning the jack, remove

any dirt that may have collected in the jacking
points. Please note that you must position the
jack in the opening of the jacking point.
Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradients

(example: Saloon)
X On downhill gradients: place chocks or
other suitable items in front of the wheels
of the front and rear axle.
X Using wheel wrench :, loosen the bolts on
Raising the vehicle the wheel you wish to change by about one
full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts com-
G WARNING pletely.
The jack is intended only for lifting the vehicle The jacking points are located just behind the
briefly for wheel changes. front wheel arches and just in front of the rear
The vehicle must be placed on stands if you wheel arches (arrows).
intend to work under it.
Make sure that the jack is placed on a firm,
non-slip, level surface. Do not use wooden
blocks or similar objects as a jack underlay.
The vehicle could otherwise slip off the jack
and seriously injure you.
Do not start the engine at any time while the
wheel is being changed.
Do not lie under the vehicle when it is being
supported by the jack. If you do not raise the
vehicle as described, it could slip off the jack
(e.g. if the engine is started or a door or the Jacking points (example: Saloon)
boot lid/tailgate is opened or closed) and
seriously injure you.
G WARNING
If you fail to position the jack correctly, the
vehicle may:
Rslip off the jack
Rinjure you or others
Rbe damaged.
Therefore, make sure that the jack is posi-

tioned correctly in the respective jacking X Position jack = at jacking point ;.
Z
344 Flat tyre
G WARNING
Only use wheel bolts that have been designed
for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea-
sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you
only use wheel bolts which have been
approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the
respective wheel. Other wheel bolts could
work loose or damage the brake system.
Do not tighten the wheel bolts completely
while the vehicle is still jacked up. The vehicle
could topple off the jack.
X Make sure that the base of the jack is posi-
tioned directly under the jacking point. X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact
X Turn crank ? clockwise until jack = sits surfaces.
completely on jacking point ; and the

base of the jack lies evenly on the ground.
X Turn crank ? until the tyre is raised a max-
imum of 3 cm from the ground.
Removing a wheel
X Unscrew the wheel bolts.
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt.
The threads of the wheel bolts and wheel
hubs could otherwise be damaged when
the bolts are tightened. X Slide the emergency spare wheel/spare
wheel onto the wheel hub and push it on.
X Remove the wheel.
X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are fin-
Fitting a new wheel ger-tight.
G WARNING Lowering the vehicle

Replace damaged or corroded wheel bolts.
X Turn the crank of the jack anti-clockwise
Never oil or grease wheel bolts. This could until the vehicle is once again standing
cause the bolts to loosen in the wheel hub. firmly on the ground.
X Place the jack to one side.
G WARNING
If a wheel hub thread is damaged, you must
not drive the vehicle any further. Consult a
carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz
recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre or Service 24h for this pur-
Flat tyre 345
tioning sensors. The defective wheel

should no longer be in the vehicle.
MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat

characteristics)
MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat char-
acteristics) allow you to continue driving the
vehicle even when one or more tyres lose all
air pressure.
X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a cross- MOExtended tyres may only be used in con-
wise pattern in the sequence indicated junction with the activated tyre pressure loss
(: to A ). The tightening torque must be warning system or with the tyre pressure
monitor.
130 Nm.
The maximum permissible distance which
G WARNING can be driven in run-flat mode depends on the
Have the tightening torque checked immedi- load in the vehicle. It is 80 km if the vehicle
ately after a wheel is changed. The wheels is partially laden and 30 km if fully laden.
could work loose if they are not tightened to The maximum permissible distance which
a torque of 130 Nm. can be driven in run-flat mode is counted from
the moment the tyre pressure loss warning
X Turn the jack back to its initial position and appears in the multifunction display.
store it together with the rest of the tyre- You must not exceed a maximum speed of
change tool kit in the boot/luggage com- 80 km/h.
partment.
G WARNING
X Transport the faulty wheel in the boot/lug-
gage compartment. The handling characteristics of your vehicle
deteriorate in run-flat mode, for example:
or
Rwhen cornering
X Depending on the size of the wheel, you
may also be able to secure the faulty wheel Rwhen braking
in the spare wheel well. In this case, you Rwhen accelerating rapidly
will have to remove the stowage well casing Adapt your driving style accordingly and avoid
from the spare wheel well and stow it sudden changes in direction and sudden
securely in the boot/luggage compart- acceleration, as well as driving over obstacles
ment. (i.e. kerbs, potholes), and driving off-road.
This is particularly the case when the vehicle
i When you are driving with the collapsible
is heavily laden.
emergency spare wheel fitted, the tyre
pressure loss warning system or the tyre The maximum permissible distance that can
pressure monitor cannot function reliably. be driven in run-flat mode depends to a large
Only restart the tyre pressure loss warning extent on the loads placed on the vehicle. It
system/tyre pressure monitor when the can be shorter due to high speeds, a heavy
defective wheel has been replaced with a load, sudden changes in direction, the road
new wheel. surface condition, outside temperature, etc.,
or further if you drive carefully and conserva-
Vehicles with tyre pressure monitor: all fit-
tively.
ted wheels must be equipped with func-
Z
346 Battery
Do not continue to drive in run-flat mode if: Consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre if
Ryou
you wish to leave your vehicle parked up for
hear banging noises.
a long period of time.
Rthevehicle starts to shake.
Ryou see smoke and smell rubber. G WARNING
RESP® Comply with safety precautions and take pro-
is intervening constantly.
tective measures when handling batteries.
Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tyre.
Risk of explosion
After driving in run-flat mode, you must have
the wheel(s) checked for damage at a quali-
fied specialist workshop which has the nec-
essary specialist knowledge and tools to carry Fire, naked flames and
out the work required. The faulty tyre must be smoking are prohibited
replaced in every case. when handling the battery.
Avoid creating sparks.

Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this pur- Battery acid is caustic.
pose. In particular, work relevant to safety or Avoid contact with the skin,
on safety-related systems must be carried out eyes or clothing.
at a qualified specialist workshop. Wear suitable protective
clothing, in particular
i When replacing one or all tyres, make gloves, an apron and a face
sure that you only use tyres marked mask.
MOExtended and of the specified size for
Immediately rinse acid
the vehicle.
splashes off with clean
i Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not water. Consult a doctor if
equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. necessary.
It is therefore recommended that you addi- Wear eye protection.
tionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit
if you fit tyres that do not feature run-flat
properties, e.g. winter tyres. A TIREFIT kit
can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz Keep children away.
Service Centre.
Observe this Owner's Man-

Battery ual.
In order for the battery to achieve the maxi-
mum possible service life, it must always be H Environmental note
sufficiently charged. Batteries contain pollutants.
Have the battery charge checked more fre- It is against the law to dis-
quently if you use the vehicle mainly for short pose of them with the house-
trips or if you leave it standing idle for a hold rubbish. They must be
lengthy period. collected separately and
Only replace a battery with a battery that has
been recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
Battery 347
recycled in an environmen- may otherwise destroy electronic compo-

tally responsible manner. nents, such as the alternator.
Dispose of batteries in an i When you park the vehicle, remove the
environmentally responsible key if you do not require any electrical con-
manner. Take discharged sumers. The vehicle will then use very little
batteries to a qualified spe- energy, thus conserving battery power.
cialist workshop, e.g. a
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you do not
Mercedes-Benz Service
carry out work on batteries yourself, e.g.
Centre, or to a special col-
removing or charging. Have this work per-
lection point for old batter-
formed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g.
ies.
a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
G WARNING
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- Installation location of the battery
mends that you only use batteries which have
been tested and approved for your vehicle by Your vehicle is equipped with a battery in the
Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide engine compartment. It is fitted in front of the
increased impact protection to prevent vehi- front bulkhead on the right-hand side of the
cle occupants from suffering acid burns vehicle when viewed in the direction of travel.
should the battery be damaged in the event AMG vehicles: the battery is in the boot/
of an accident. luggage compartment in the spare wheel well
To prevent acid burns, observe the following on the right-hand side under the boot/lug-
safety notes when handling batteries: gage compartment floor.
Rdo not lean over the battery. X Apply the parking brake firmly and, on vehi-
Rdo not place any metal objects on a battery.

cles with automatic transmission, shift the
transmission to position P.
Otherwise, you could cause a short circuit
X Switch off all electrical consumers (e.g.
and the battery's gas mixture could ignite.
Rmake sure that you do not create an elec-
radio, blower, etc.).
X Turn the key to position 0(Y page 153) in
trostatic charge, e.g. by wearing synthetic
clothing or as a result of friction on fabrics. the ignition lock and remove it, or, on vehi-
Therefore, you should not pull or slide the cles with KEYLESS-GO, make sure that the
battery over carpets or other synthetic ignition has been switched off
materials. (Y page 153). All indicator lamps in the
Rnever touch the battery first. To discharge
instrument cluster must be off.
a possible electrostatic charge, step out of X Battery in the engine compartment:
the vehicle first and touch the bodywork. open the bonnet (Y page 322).
Rdo not wipe the battery using a cloth. The
battery may explode as a result of electro-
static charge or due to flying sparks.
! Switch off the engine and remove the key

before disconnecting the terminal clamps
from the battery. On vehicles with KEY-
LESS-GO, make sure that the ignition is
switched off. Check that all the indicator
lamps in the instrument cluster are off. You
Z
348 Battery
X Release clamps ; on filter box : using a AMG vehicles

suitable object, such as a screwdriver. X Loosen the negative terminal clamp on the
X Remove filter box :. battery and remove it from negative termi-
X AMG vehicles: open the boot/luggage

nal =.
compartment (Y page 92). X Remove cover ; from the positive termi-
X Lift the boot/luggage compartment floor nal clamp.

(Y page 312). X Loosen the positive terminal clamp on bat-
X Remove the cover from the spare wheel tery : and remove it from the positive ter-
well. minal.
X Remove breather hose ? from the side of
battery :
Disconnecting the battery
! Always disconnect the battery in
the order described below. Never swap the Removing/fitting the battery
terminal clamps. You may otherwise dam- X To remove: disconnect the battery
age the vehicle electronics. (Y page 348).
In vehicles with automatic transmission, X Loosen the bolt that holds the battery in
the transmission is locked in position P place.
after disconnecting the battery. The vehicle X AMG vehicles: loosen the tensioning strap
is secured against rolling away. You can that also secures the battery.
then no longer move the vehicle.
X Remove the battery.
X To fit: follow the steps described in "To
remove" in reverse order.
Reconnecting the battery

! Always connect the battery in the order
described below. Never swap the terminal
clamps. You may otherwise damage the
vehicle electronics.
Battery in the engine compartment
Battery 349
X Switch off all electrical consumers (e.g. G WARNING

radio, blower, etc.). Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with the
X Connect the positive terminal clamp and skin, eyes or clothing.
secure the cover.
X Connect the negative terminal clamp. ! Only charge the installed battery with a
X Battery in the engine compartment: put battery charger which has been tested and
the filter box back in place. approved by Mercedes-Benz. These battery
chargers allow the battery to be charged
X Clip in the filter box's retaining clamps and
while still installed.
close them.
X Close the bonnet. ! Only use battery chargers with a maxi-
X AMG vehicles: fold down and close the mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
boot/luggage compartment floor. ! Only charge the battery using the jump-
X Close the boot/luggage compartment. start connection point.
i If the power supply has been interrupted, The jump-starting connection point is in the
e.g. if you reconnect the battery, you will engine compartment (Y page 350).
have to: X Open the bonnet (Y page 322).
Rset the clock; see the separate operating X Connect the battery charger to the positive
instructions. terminal and earth point in the same order

Rreset
as when connecting the donor battery in
the function for automatically fold-
the jump-starting procedure
ing the exterior mirrors in/out by folding
(Y page 350).
the mirrors out once (Y page 113).
X Read the battery charger's operating
instructions before charging the battery.
Charging the battery
G WARNING
Only charge the battery in a well-ventilated
area. As the battery is being charged, gases
can escape and generate minor explosions.
This could injure you and other persons or
cause damage to the paintwork or acid cor-
rosion on the vehicle.
You can obtain information about battery
chargers which allow the battery to be
charged while still installed from a qualified
specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre.
G WARNING
There is a risk of acid burns during the charg-
ing process due to the gases which escape
from the battery. Do not lean over the battery
during the charging process.
Z
350 Jump-starting
Jump-starting
G WARNING
There is a risk of acid burns when jump-starting a vehicle due to the gases which escape from
the battery. Do not lean over the battery while the engine is being jump-started.
G WARNING
Gases escaping from the battery during jump-starting may cause minor explosions. Avoid cre-
ating sparks. Keep naked flames away from the battery, and do not smoke.
Comply with safety precautions when handling batteries. You will find these under "Battery" in
the index.
! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may dam-
age the catalytic converter18 and create a risk of fire.

Do not use a rapid-charging device to start the engine.
Make sure the jump leads are not damaged.
Make sure the jump leads are not touching any other metal objects when they are connected
to the battery.
If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle
or from a second battery using jump leads.
Observe the following points:
X The battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible,
jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.
X Only jump-start the vehicle when the engine is cold and the catalytic converter system has
cooled down19 .
X Do not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.
X Jump-starting may only be performed from batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V.
X Only use jump leads which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.
X Make sure that the jump leads cannot come into contact with parts, such as the pulley or
the fan. These parts move when the engine is started and while it is running.
X If the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected
for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the empty battery a little.
i Jump leads and further information about jump-starting can be obtained from any
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, for example.
X Make sure that the two vehicles do not touch.
X Apply the parking brake firmly.
X Manual transmission: engage neutral.
X Automatic transmission: move the selector lever to P.
X Switch off all electrical consumers (e.g. radio, blower, etc.).
X Open the bonnet (Y page 322).
18 Only vehicles with a petrol engine.

19 Only vehicles with a petrol engine.
Towing and tow-starting 351
Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-
starting device.
X Slide cover : of positive terminal ; in the direction of the arrow.
X Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery B
using the jump lead, beginning with your own battery.
X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.
X Connect negative terminal ? of donor battery B to earth point A of your vehicle using
the jump lead, connecting the jump lead to donor battery B first.
X Start the engine.
X Allow the engine to run for a few minutes before disconnecting the jump lead.
X First, remove the jump lead from earth point A and negative terminal ?, then from positive
terminal ; and positive terminal =, each time disconnecting from the contacts on your
own vehicle first.
X After removing the jump lead, close cover : on positive terminal ;.
X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre. The jump-starting procedure is not a standard operating state; therefore, have the
battery checked.
Towing and tow-starting Rthe engine is not running.

Rthere is a brake system malfunction.
Rthere is a malfunction in the power supply
Observe the legal requirements for the rele- or the vehicle's electrical system.
vant countries when towing and tow-starting.
The power assistance for the steering and the
G WARNING brake force booster do not work when the
If you tow the vehicle, you must use a rigid engine is not running. You will need more
towing bar if: force to steer and brake, you may have to
depress the brake pedal with maximum force.
Z
352 Towing and tow-starting
Before towing away, make sure that the steer- Vehicles with automatic transmission:
ing can be moved and is not locked. release the selector lever lock manually to
If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, its move it out of position P (Y page 168).
weight must not exceed the maximum per- i Before the vehicle is towed, switch off the
missible gross vehicle weight of your vehicle. automatic locking feature (Y page 90). You
could otherwise be locked out when push-
G WARNING ing or towing the vehicle.
The vehicle is braked when the HOLD function Deactivate tow-away protection
or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Therefore, (Y page 81) before the vehicle is towed.
deactivate HOLD and DISTRONIC PLUS if the
vehicle is to be towed.
Fitting/removing the towing eye
It is better to have the vehicle transported
than to have it towed. Fitting the towing eye
! You may tow the vehicle for a maximum Vehicles with a trailer tow hitch: if you intend
of 50 km. A towing speed of 50 km/h must to use the vehicle for towing, fold out the ball
not be exceeded. coupling and connect the towbar to it
For towing distances over 50 km, the entire (Y page 217).
vehicle must be lifted up and transported. X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle
! Only secure the tow rope or towing bar to tool kit (Y page 335).
the towing eyes. The vehicle may otherwise G WARNING
be damaged.
The exhaust tail pipe may be hot. You could
! Do not use the towing eye for recovery, burn yourself if you touch the tail pipe. Be
as this could damage the vehicle. If in particularly careful when removing the rear
doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane. cover.
! Pull away smoothly when towing away or The mountings for the removable towing eyes
tow-starting a vehicle. If the tractive power are located in the bumpers. They are at the
is too high, the vehicles could be damaged. front and at the rear, under the covers.
! On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the
key instead of the Start/Stop button. Turn
the key to position 2 in the ignition lock and
shift the automatic transmission to N.
Then, turn the key back to 0 and leave it in
the ignition lock.
When towing a vehicle with an automatic
transmission, the transmission must be in
position N.
The battery must be connected and charged.
Otherwise, you:
Rcannot turn the key in the ignition lock to
position 2
Rcannot shift the transmission to position
N on vehicles with automatic transmission
Example: Saloon
Towing and tow-starting 353
X Press the mark on cover : inwards in the much more effort to brake and steer the vehi-
direction of the arrow. cle. Adapt your style of driving accordingly.
X Take cover : off the opening. XSwitch on the hazard warning lamps
X Screw the towing eye in clockwise to the (Y page 121).
stop and tighten it. i When towing with the hazard warning
lamps switched on, use the combination
Removing the towing eye switch as usual to signal a change of direc-
X Loosen the towing eye and unscrew it. tion. In this case, only the turn signals for
the desired direction flash. When the com-
X Attach cover : to the bumper and press bination switch is reset, the hazard warning
until it engages. lamps start flashing again.
X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock.
X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the
Towing the vehicle with the rear axle brake pedal and keep it depressed.
raised X Vehicles with manual transmission:
Only possible on vehicles without depress the clutch pedal.
4MATIC. X Engage neutral.
When towing your vehicle with the rear axle or
raised, it is important that you observe the X Vehicles with automatic transmission:
safety instructions (Y page 351). shift the automatic transmission to posi-
! The ignition must be switched off if you tion N.
are towing the vehicle with the rear axle X Release the brake pedal.
raised. Intervention by ESP® could other- X Release the parking brake.
wise damage the brake system.
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps
(Y page 121). Transporting the vehicle
X Turn the key in the ignition lock to position
The towing eyes or trailer tow hitch can be
0 and remove the key from the ignition used to pull the vehicle onto a trailer or trans-
lock. porter if you wish to transport it.
X When leaving the vehicle, take the key or
X Vehicles with manual transmission:
the KEYLESS-GO key with you. shift to neutral.
X Vehicles with automatic transmission:
turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
Towing the vehicle with both axles on lock.
the ground
X Move the selector lever to N.
It is important that you observe the safety
As soon as the vehicle is loaded:
instructions when towing away your vehicle
(Y page 351). X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by
applying the parking brake.
G WARNING X Vehicles with manual transmission:
The power assistance for the steering and the shift to first gear or reverse gear.
brake force booster do not work when the
engine is not running. You will then need
Z
354 Electrical fuses
X Vehicles with automatic transmission: Before tow-starting the following conditions

move the selector lever to P. must be fulfilled:
X Turn the key in the ignition lock to position Rthe battery is connected.
0 and remove the key from the ignition Rthe engine has cooled down.
lock. Rthe catalytic converters have cooled down.
X Secure the vehicle.
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps
! Only lash the vehicle down by the wheels (Y page 121).
or wheel rims, not by parts of the vehicle X Fit the towing eye (Y page 352).
such as axle or steering components. Oth- X Secure the rigid towing bar or the towing
erwise, the vehicle could be damaged. rope.
X Depress and hold the brake pedal.
Notes for 4MATIC vehicles
lock.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed X Depress the clutch pedal and keep it
with the front or rear axle raised; otherwise, depressed.
the transmission may be damaged.
X Shift to neutral.
If the vehicle has transmission damage or X Release the brake pedal.
damage to the front or rear axle, have it trans-
X Tow-start the vehicle.
ported on a transporter or trailer.
X Engage second gear.
In the event of damage to the electrical
X Release the clutch pedal slowly; do not
system
operate the accelerator pedal while doing
If the battery is defective, the automatic
so.
transmission will be locked in position P. To
The engine is started.
shift the automatic transmission to position
X Depress the clutch pedal and shift to neu-
N, you must provide power to the vehicle's
electrical system in the same way as when tral.
jump-starting (Y page 350). X Stop at a suitable place.
Have the vehicle transported on a transporter X Apply the parking brake.

or trailer. X Remove the rigid towing bar or towing rope.
X Remove the towing eye (Y page 353).
X Switch off the hazard warning lamps.
Tow-starting (emergency engine
starting)
When tow-starting, it is important that you Electrical fuses
observe the safety instructions (Y page 351)
and the legal requirements in each respective Important safety notes
country. The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down
! Vehicles with automatic transmission faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo-
must not be tow-started. The transmission nents on the circuit and their functions stop
may otherwise be damaged. operating.
G WARNING
Only use fuses that have been approved for
Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the
correct fuse rating for the systems con-
Electrical fuses 355
cerned. Do not attempt to repair or bridge Dashboard fuse box

faulty fuses. Otherwise, a circuit overload
! Do not use a pointed object such as a
could cause a fire. Have the cause traced and
screwdriver to open the cover in the dash-
rectified at a qualified specialist workshop,
board. You could damage the dashboard or
e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
the cover.
Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of
the same rating, which you can recognise by
the colour and value. The fuse ratings are lis-
ted in the fuse allocation chart. A Mercedes-
Benz Service Centre will be happy to advise
you.
If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the
cause traced and rectified at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre.
! Only use fuses that have been approved X To open: pull out cover : slightly at the
for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which bottom in the direction of arrow =.
have the correct fuse rating for the system
X Pull cover : outwards in the direction of
concerned. Otherwise, components or sys-
tems could be damaged. arrow ; and remove it.
X To close: clip in cover : on the front of
the dashboard.
Before changing a fuse
X Fold cover : inwards until it engages.
X Park the vehicle and apply the parking
brake.
X Switch off all electrical consumers. Fuse box in the engine compartment
X Make sure that the windscreen wipers are
The fuses are located in various fuse boxes: turned off.
Rfuse box on the driver's side of the dash-
G WARNING
board
Rfuse box in the engine compartment on the
Make sure that the windscreen wipers are
turned off and the key is pulled out of the igni-
left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed
tion lock before you open the cover of the fuse
in the direction of travel
box. Otherwise, the windscreen wipers and
Rfuse box in the boot/luggage compartment
the wiper rods above the cover could be set
on the right-hand side of the vehicle, when in motion. This could lead to you or others
viewed in the direction of travel being injured by the wiper rods.
The fuse allocation chart is located in the
vehicle tool kit (Y page 335) in the stowage X Open the bonnet (Y page 322).
compartment under the boot/luggage com-
partment floor.
Z
356 Electrical fuses
X To open: turn rotary catch : clockwise.

X Open cover ; downwards in the direction
of the arrow.
Fuse box in the luggage compartment

(Estate)
X Open the tailgate (Y page 92).
X Remove any existing moisture from the

fuse box using a dry cloth.
X Take lines ; from the guides.
X To open: open clamps :.

X Remove the fuse box cover forwards.
! Make sure that no moisture can enter the

fuse box when the cover is open.
X To close: check whether the rubber seal is
lying correctly in the cover. X To open: pull handle :.
X Insert the cover at the rear of the fuse box X Open cover ; downwards.
into the retainer.
X Fold down the cover and close clamps :.
X Secure lines ; in the guides.
! The cover must be fitted properly, other-

wise moisture or dirt could impair the func-
tion of the fuses.
X Close the bonnet (Y page 323).
Fuse box in the boot (Saloon)

X Open the boot lid (Y page 92).
357

Operation ........................................... 358
Winter operation ............................... 359
Tyre pressure .................................... 361
Changing a wheel ............................. 365
Wheel and tyre combinations .......... 366
Wheels and tyres

358 Operation
Useful information vehicle as soon as possible to check the

wheels and tyres for damage. Hidden tyre
i This Owner's Manual describes all models damage could also be causing the unusual
and all standard and optional equipment handling characteristics. If you find no
available to your vehicle at the time of pub- signs of damage, have the wheels and tyres
lication of the Owner's Manual. Country- examined at a qualified specialist work-
specific deviations are possible. Please shop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service
note that your vehicle may not be equipped Centre.
with all features described. This also RWhen parking your vehicle, make sure that
applies to safety-relevant systems and the tyres do not get deformed by the kerb
functions. or other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive
over kerbs, speed humps or similar eleva-
tions, try to do so slowly and at an obtuse
angle. Otherwise, the tyres, particularly the
sidewalls, can get damaged.
Notes on regularly inspecting wheels
G WARNING and tyres
Wheels and tyres
Tyres, wheels or accessories which have not

RRegularly check the wheels and tyres of
been approved by Mercedes-Benz for your
your vehicle for damage (e.g. cuts, punctu-
vehicle or are not used as they should be, can
res, tears, bulges on tyres and deformation,
impair driving safety. As a result, you could
cracks or severe corrosion on wheels), at
cause an accident. Before purchasing and
least every 14 days, as well as after driving
using them, enquire about their suitability,
off-road or on rough roads. Damaged
legal stipulations and factory recommenda-
wheels can cause a loss of tyre pressure.
tions at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
RRegularly check the tyre tread depth and
Modification work on the brake system and the condition of the tread across the whole
wheels is not permitted, nor is the use of width of the tyre (Y page 359). If neces-
spacer plates or brake dust shields. This inva- sary, turn the front wheels to full lock in
lidates the General Operating Permit for the order to inspect the inner side of the tyre
vehicle. surface.
RAll wheels must have a valve cap to protect
i Further information about tyres and
wheels can be obtained from any the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. fit anything onto the valve (such as tyre
pressure monitoring systems) other than
the standard valve cap or other valve caps
Operation approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehi-
cle.
Notes on driving RRegularly check the pressure of all the tyres
RWhile driving, pay attention to vibrations, including the emergency spare wheel or the
noises and unusual handling characteris- spare wheel, particularly prior to long trips,
tics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indi- and correct the pressure as necessary
cate that the wheels or tyres are damaged. (Y page 361).
If you suspect that a tyre is defective,
reduce your speed immediately. Stop the
Winter operation 359
Tyre tread vehicle even when one or more tyres lose all
air pressure.
G WARNING MOExtended tyres may only be used in con-
Bear in mind that: junction with the tyre pressure loss warning
Rtyre grip decreases rapidly on wet roads system or with the tyre pressure monitor and
when the tread depth is less than 3 mm. on wheels specifically tested by Mercedes-
Thus, you should replace tyres that have Benz.
insufficient tread. i Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not
Rwinter tyres should be replaced when the equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory.
tread depth is 4 mm or less as they no lon- It is therefore recommended that you addi-
ger provide adequate grip. tionally equip your vehicle with the TIREFIT
Rthe tread on a tyre may not wear evenly. kit if you fit tyres that do not feature run-
Thus, you should regularly check the tread flat properties, e.g. winter tyres. A TIREFIT
depth and the condition of the tread across kit can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz
the entire width of all tyres. If necessary, Service Centre.
turn the front wheels to full lock in order to Notes on driving with MOExtended tyres in
inspect the tyre tread more easily. the event of a flat tyre can be found in the
Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehi- "Breakdown assistance" section
cle and cause an accident due to the reduced
Wheels and tyres

(Y page 345).
grip of the tyres on the road.
Winter operation
Notes on selecting, fitting and replac-
ing tyres Points to remember
ROnly fit tyres and wheels of the same type At the onset of winter, have your vehicle win-
and make. terproofed at a qualified specialist workshop,
e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
ROnly fit tyres of the correct size onto the
wheels. Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"
section (Y page 365).
RAfter fitting new tyres, run them in at mod-
erate speeds for the first 100 km, as they
only reach their full performance after this Driving with summer tyres
distance.
RDo not drive with tyres which have too little At temperatures below +7 †, summer tyres
tread depth, as this significantly reduces lose elasticity and therefore traction and
the traction on wet roads (aquaplaning). braking power; change the tyres on your vehi-
RReplace the tyres after six years at the lat-
cle to M+S tyres. Using summer tyres at very
cold temperatures could cause tears to form,
est, regardless of wear. This also applies to
thereby damaging the tyres permanently.
the emergency spare wheel/spare wheel.
Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility
for this type of damage.
MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat
characteristics)
MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat char-
acteristics) allow you to continue driving the
Z
360 Winter operation
M+S tyres G WARNING

At temperatures below +7 †, use winter tyres If you fit the spare wheel when driving with M
or all-season tyres. Both types of tyre are +S tyres, bear in mind that driving stability will
identified by the M+S marking. be impaired due to unstable cornering char-
acteristics caused by the different tyres. You
Only winter tyres bearing the i snowflake
should therefore adapt your driving style and
symbol in addition to the M+S marking pro-
drive carefully.
vide the best possible grip in wintry road con-
ditions. Only these tyres will allow driving Have the spare wheel replaced at the nearest
safety systems such as ABS and ESP® to
function optimally in winter. These tyres have
been developed specifically for driving in
snow.
Service Centre for this purpose. In particular,
Use M+S tyres of the same make and tread work relevant to safety or on safety-related
on all wheels to maintain safe handling char- systems must be carried out at a qualified
acteristics. specialist workshop.
G WARNING
M+S tyres with a tread depth of less than
4 mm must be replaced. They are no longer Snow chains
Wheels and tyres
suitable for winter use and can no longer pro- For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
vide sufficient grip. This could cause you to mends that you only use snow chains that
lose control of your vehicle and cause an acci- have been specially approved for your vehicle
dent. by Mercedes-Benz, or that are of a corre-
sponding standard of quality.
Always observe the maximum permissible
speed specified for the M+S tyres you have If you intend to fit snow chains, please bear
fitted. the following points in mind:
If you fit M+S tyres that have a lower maxi- Ritis not permissible to attach snow chains
mum permissible speed than that of the vehi- to all wheel-tyre combinations; see the
cle, affix an appropriate warning sign in the information under "Wheel/tyre combina-
driver's field of vision. This can be obtained tions" in the "Wheels and tyres" section.
at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a Rsnow chains must not be fitted to emer-
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. gency spare wheels, e.g. a "Minispare"
Under these circumstances, you should also emergency spare wheel.
restrict the maximum speed of the vehicle Ronly fit snow chains in pairs and to the rear
using permanent SPEEDTRONIC so that it wheels, even on vehicles with 4MATIC.
does not exceed the maximum permissible Observe the manufacturer's installation
speed for the M+S tyres(Y page 183). instructions.
When you have fitted M+S tyres: ! Vehicles with steel wheels: if you wish
X Check the tyre pressures (Y page 361). to fit snow chains to steel wheels, make
X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning sys- sure that you remove the respective
tem (Y page 362). wheels' hubcaps first. The hubcaps may
X Restart the tyre pressure monitor
otherwise be damaged.
(Y page 365). Do not exceed the maximum permissible
speed of 50 km/h.
Tyre pressure 361
i You may wish to deactivate ESP® G WARNING

(Y page 75) when pulling away with snow Tyre pressure that is either too high or too low
chains fitted. This way you can allow the has a negative effect on the vehicle's driving
wheels to spin in a controlled manner, ach- safety, which could lead you to cause an acci-
ieving an increased driving force (cutting dent. Therefore, you should regularly check
action). the pressure of all the tyres, particularly prior
to long trips, and correct the pressure as nec-
essary.
Tyre pressure
To test tyre pressure, use a suitable pressure
Tyre pressure specifications
gauge. The outer appearance of a tyre does
You will find a table of tyre pressures for var- not permit any reliable conclusion about the
ious operating conditions on the inside of tyre pressure. On vehicles fitted with the elec-
your vehicle's fuel filler flap. tronic tyre pressure monitor, the tyre pres-
Operation with emergency spare wheel: sure can be checked using the on-board com-
the applicable value for the emergency spare puter.
wheel is stated on the spare wheel and in the G WARNING
technical data section.
Do not fit anything else to the tyre valve other
Operation with a trailer: the applicable than the standard valve cap. In particular, ret-
Wheels and tyres

value for the rear tyres is the maximum tyre rofitted tyre pressure monitors which are
pressure value stated on the table inside the screwed on to the valve may overload it and
fuel filler flap. cause it to fail. Due to their design, the valve
The table inside the fuel filler flap may state is kept open continuously, which may lead to
tyre pressures for different load conditions. air loss.
These are defined in the table as different
numbers of passengers and amounts of lug- G WARNING
gage. The actual number of seats may vary – Should the tyre pressure drop repeatedly:
for more information, please refer to the vehi-
Rcheck the tyre for foreign bodies.
cle's registration documents.
Rcheck whether the wheel is losing air or the
If no other data is stated, the tyre pressures
specified on the fuel filler flap apply for all valve is leaking.
tyres approved for this vehicle. Rmake sure that only a valve cap approved
by Mercedes-Benz is fitted on the tyre
valve.
Tyre pressures that are too low have a nega-
tive effect on vehicle safety, which could lead
you to cause an accident.
If possible, only correct tyre pressures when

the tyres are cold.
The tyres are cold:
Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tyres
out of direct sunlight for at least three
If a tyre size precedes a tyre pressure, the tyre hours and
pressure information following is only valid Rif the vehicle has not been driven further
for that tyre size. than 1.6 km
Z
362 Tyre pressure
Depending on the ambient temperature, the G WARNING

speed you are driving at and the load on the The tyre pressure loss warning system does
tyres, the tyre temperature and thus the tyre not warn you of an incorrectly set tyre pres-
pressure may change by approximately sure. The table on the inside of the fuel filler
10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi) per 10 †. Take this flap will help you decide whether the tyre
into account when checking the pressure of pressures should be corrected.
warm tyres and only correct it if it is too low
The tyre pressure loss warning system does
for the current operating conditions.
not replace the need to regularly check your
Driving with tyre pressure that is too high or vehicle's tyre pressures, since an even loss of
too low can: pressure on several tyres at the same time
Rshorten the service life of the tyres cannot be detected by the tyre pressure loss
Rcause increased tyre damage warning system.
Rhave a negative effect on handling charac- The tyre pressure monitor is not able to warn
teristics and thus the driving safety (e.g. by you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the
causing aquaplaning) tyre is penetrated by a foreign object.
In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring
i The tyre pressure values given for low
the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Do
loads are minimum values which offer you
not make any sudden steering movements
good ride comfort characteristics.
when doing so.
Wheels and tyres
However, you can also use the values given

for higher loads. These are permissible and The function of the tyre pressure loss warning
will not adversely affect the running of the system is limited or delayed if:
vehicle. Rsnow chains are fitted to your vehicle's
H Environmental note tyres.
Check the tyre pressure regularly, at least Rroad conditions are wintry.
every 14 days. Ryou are driving on sand or gravel.
Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (cor-
You will find information on tyre pressures for
nering at high speeds or driving with high
the vehicle's factory-mounted tyres on the
rates of acceleration).
plates described here.
Ryou are towing a very heavy or large trailer.
Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the
Tyre pressure loss warning system vehicle or on the roof).
Important safety notes Restarting the tyre pressure loss warn-

While the vehicle is in motion, the tyre pres- ing system
sure loss warning system monitors the set Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system
tyre pressure using the rotational speed of if you have:
the wheels. This enables the system to detect
Rchanged the tyre pressure
significant pressure loss in a tyre. If the speed
of rotation of a wheel changes as a result of Rchanged the wheels or tyres
a loss of pressure, a corresponding warning Rfitted new wheels or tyres
message will appear in the multifunction dis- X Before restarting, consult the table of tyre
play. pressures on the inside of the fuel filler flap
to ensure that the tyre pressure in all four
Tyre pressure 363
tyres is set correctly for the respective Restarting with the 12-button multifunc-
operating conditions. tion steering wheel
X Observe the notes in the section on tyre X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in
pressures (Y page 361). the ignition lock.
X Press the = or ; button to select the
G WARNING
Service menu.
The tyre pressure loss warning system can
only give reliable warnings if you have set the
correct tyre pressure. Tyre pressure.
X Press the a button.
If an incorrect tyre pressure is set, these
incorrect values will be monitored. The Run Flat Indicator active
A tyre with insufficient pressure results in
Restart with OK message appears in the
vehicle instability when driving, thus increas-
ing the risk of an accident. If you wish to confirm the restart:
Restarting using the 4-button multifunc-
tion steering wheel The Tyre press. now OK? message
the ignition lock.
Wheels and tyres

X Press the V button to select Tyre
Yes.
pressure Menu: R.
X Press the C button.
The Run Flat Indicator restarted
message appears in the multifunction dis-
The RFI active Restart: R message
play.
After a teach-in period, the tyre pressure
X Press the C button.
loss warning system will monitor the set
The Tyre press. OK? message appears in tyre pressures of all four tyres.
or
If you wish to confirm the restart:
If you wish to cancel the restart:
X Press the W button.
X Press the % button.
The Run Flat Indicator restarted
message appears in the multifunction dis- or
play. X If the Tyre press. now OK? message
After a teach-in period, the tyre pressure appears, use 9 or : to select Can‐
loss warning system will monitor the set cel.
tyre pressures of all four tyres. X Press the a button.
or The tyre pressure values stored at the last

restart will continue to be monitored.
If you wish to cancel the restart:
X Press the X button.
The tyre pressure values stored at the last Tyre pressure monitor
restart will continue to be monitored.
If a tyre pressure monitor system is fitted, the
vehicle's wheels have sensors fitted that
monitor the tyre pressures in all four tyres.
Z
364 Tyre pressure
The tyre pressure monitor warns you when X Press the 9 or : button to select
the pressure drops in one or more of the Tyre pressure.
tyres. The tyre pressure monitor only func- X Press the a button.
tions if the correct sensors are fitted to all The current tyre pressure for each wheel
wheels. will be displayed in the multifunction dis-
G WARNING play.
The tyre pressure monitor does not warn you If the vehicle has been parked for longer than
of an incorrectly set tyre pressure. The table 20 minutes, the Tyre pressures will be
on the inside of the fuel filler flap will help you displayed after a few minutes of
decide whether the tyre pressures should be driving message appears.
corrected. After a teach-in period, the tyre pressure
The tyre pressure monitor is not able to warn monitor automatically recognises new
you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the wheels or new sensors. As long as a clear
tyre is penetrated by a foreign object. In the allocation of the tyre pressure values to the
event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the individual wheels is not possible, the Tyre
vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Do not pressure monitor active display mes-
make any sudden steering movements when sage is shown instead of the tyre pressure
doing so. display. The tyre pressures are already being
monitored.
Wheels and tyres
Information on tyre pressures is displayed in

the multifunction display. After a few minutes i If a spare wheel/emergency spare wheel
of driving, the current tyre pressure of each is fitted, the system may continue to show
tyre is shown in the multifunction display. the tyre pressure of the wheel that has
been removed for a few minutes. If this
i The tyre pressure values indicated by the occurs, note that the value displayed for
on-board computer may differ from those the position where the spare wheel/emer-
measured at a filling station with a pressure gency spare wheel is fitted is not the same
gauge. The tyre pressures shown by the on- as the spare wheel/emergency spare
board computer refer to those measured at wheel's current tyre pressure.
sea level. At high altitudes, the tyre pres-
sure values indicated by a pressure gauge Tyre pressure monitor warning mes-
are higher than those shown by the on- sages
board computer. In this case, do not reduce
the tyre pressures. If the tyre pressure monitor detects a signifi-
cant pressure loss on one or more tyres, a
i The operation of the tyre pressure moni- warning message is shown in the multifunc-
tor can be affected by interference from tion display. A warning tone also sounds and
radio transmitting equipment (e.g. radio the tyre pressure warning lamp lights up in
headphones, two-way radios) that may be the instrument cluster.
being operated in or near the vehicle.
Each tyre that is affected by a significant loss
of pressure is highlighted in the pressure dis-
Checking tyre pressure electronically play.
X Make sure that the key is in position 2 If the Please correct tyre pressure
(Y page 153) in the ignition lock. message appears in the multifunction dis-
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- play:
ing wheel to select the Servicemenu. X Check the tyre pressure on all four wheels
and correct it if necessary.
Changing a wheel 365
i If the wheel positions on the vehicle are If you wish to confirm the restart:
interchanged, the tyre pressures may be X Press the a button.
displayed for the wrong positions for a The Tyre press. monitor restarted
short time. This is rectified after a few message appears in the multifunction dis-
minutes of driving, and the tyre pressures play.
are displayed for the correct positions.
After you have driven for a few minutes, the
system checks whether the current tyre
Restarting the tyre pressure monitor
pressures are within the specified range.
When you restart the tyre pressure monitor, The new tyre pressures are then accepted
all existing warning messages are deleted and as reference values and monitored.
the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses If you wish to cancel the restart:
the currently set tyre pressures as the refer-
ence values for monitoring. In most cases, the X Press the % button.
tyre pressure monitor will automatically The tyre pressure values stored at the last
detect the new reference values after you restart will continue to be monitored.
have changed the tyre pressure.
i For an overview of the menus, see Radio type approval for the tyre pres-
(Y page 230). sure monitor
Wheels and tyres

If you wish to define the new reference values In certain countries, a radio type approval for
manually: the tyre pressure monitor may be required.
The radio type approval number for the tyre
X Use the table on the inside of the fuel filler pressure monitor can be found online at:
flap to ensure that the tyre pressure is set http://www.mercedes-benz.de/
correctly in all four tyres for the current betriebsanleitung.
operating conditions.
Also observe the notes in the section on
tyre pressures (Y page 361). Changing a wheel
the ignition lock. Flat tyre
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- The "Breakdown assistance" section
ing wheel to select the Servicemenu. (Y page 337) contains information and notes
on how to deal with a flat tyre. It also provides
instructions on changing a wheel or fitting the
Tyre pressure. spare wheel or emergency spare wheel.
The multifunction display shows the cur-
rent tyre pressure of the individual tyres or Interchanging the wheels
the Tyre pressures will be dis‐
played after a few minutes of driv‐ G WARNING
ing message. Interchange the front and rear wheels only if
X Press the : button. they have the same dimensions, for example
size, offset, etc.
The Use current pressures as new
reference values message appears in After every wheel interchange/change, have
the multifunction display. the tightening torque checked at a qualified
specialist workshop that has the necessary
specialist knowledge and tools to carry out
Z
366 Wheel and tyre combinations
the work required. Mercedes-Benz recom- An arrow on the sidewall of the tyre indicates
mends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service its correct direction of rotation.
Centre for this purpose. In particular, work You may fit an emergency spare wheel/spare
relevant to safety or on safety-related sys- wheel against the direction of rotation.
tems must be carried out at a qualified spe- Observe the time restriction on use as well as
cialist workshop. the speed limitation specified on the emer-
The wheels could work loose if they are not gency spare wheel/spare wheel.
tightened to a torque of 130 Nm.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you only use wheel bolts of the Storing wheels
correct size which have been approved for Store wheels that are not being used in a cool,
Mercedes-Benz vehicles. dry and preferably dark place. Protect the
tyres against oil, grease, petrol and diesel.
The wear patterns on the front and rear tyres
differ, depending on the operating conditions.
Interchange the wheels before a clear wear Cleaning the wheels
pattern has formed on the tyres. Front tyres
typically wear more on the shoulders and the G WARNING
rear tyres in the centre. Do not use high-pressure cleaners with circu-
Wheels and tyres
On vehicles that have the same size front and lar-jet nozzles (dirt grinders) to clean your
rear wheels, you can interchange the wheels vehicle, in particular the tyres. You could oth-
every 5000 km to 10,000 km depending on erwise damage the tyres and cause an acci-
the degree of tyre wear. Do not reverse the dent.
direction of tyre rotation.
Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and
the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel Wheel and tyre combinations
is interchanged. Check the tyre pressure and,
Points to remember
if necessary, restart the tyre pressure loss
warning system or the tyre pressure monitor. ! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz rec-
! On vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure ommends that you only use tyres and
wheels which have been approved by
monitor, electronic components are loca-
Mercedes-Benz specifically for your vehi-
ted in the wheel.
cle.
Tyre-fitting tools should not be applied in
These tyres have been specially adapted
the area of the valve, as this could damage
for use with the control systems, such as
the electronic components.
ABS or ESP®, and are marked as follows:
Always have the tyres changed at a quali-
RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original
fied specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-
Benz Service Centre. RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
(tyres with run-flat characteristics)
RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer-
Direction of rotation tain AMG tyres)
Tyres with a specified direction of rotation Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tyres
have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk may only be used on wheels that have been
of aquaplaning. You will only gain these ben- specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.
efits if the correct direction of rotation is Only use tyres, wheels or accessories tes-
observed. ted and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cer-
Wheel and tyre combinations 367
tain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle i Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not
noise emissions or fuel consumption, may equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory.
otherwise be adversely affected. In addi- It is therefore recommended that you addi-
tion, when driving with a load, tyre dimen- tionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit
sion variations could cause the tyres to if you fit tyres that do not feature run-flat
come into contact with the bodywork and properties, e.g. winter tyres. A TIREFIT kit
axle components. This could result in dam- can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz
age to the tyres or the vehicle. Service Centre.
Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for i Overview of abbreviations used in the fol-
damage resulting from the use of tyres, lowing tyre tables:
wheels or accessories other than those tes-
RBA: both axles
ted and approved.
RFA: front axle
Further information about tyres, wheels
and approved combinations can be RRA: rear axle
obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service In the following table, the wheel/tyre combi-
Centre. nations are allocated to the vehicle models
! Retreaded tyres are neither tested nor through variants, e.g. V1, V2 etc.:
recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since
Saloon
previous damage cannot always be detec-
Wheels and tyres

ted on retreaded tyres. As a result, V1 C 18020, C 180 KOMPRESSOR20, 21,
Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehicle C 180 CDI20, 21, C 200 CDI20
safety if retreaded tyres are fitted. Do not
fit used tyres if you have no information V2 C 20020, C 220 CDI20, C 25021, C
about their previous usage. 25020, C 250 CDI20, C 250 CDI
! Large wheels: the lower the section width 4MATIC20
for a certain wheel size, the lower the ride V3 C 30020, 21, C 300 4MATIC20, 21
comfort is on poor road surfaces. Roll com-
fort and suspension comfort are reduced V4 C 300 CDI 4MATIC20, C 35020, C 350
and the risk of damage to the wheels and 4MATIC20, C 350 CDI20
tyres as a result of driving over obstacles
increases. V5 C 63 AMG
i You will find a table of tyre pressures on

the inside of your vehicle's fuel filler flap. Estate
For further information on tyre pressure, V1 C 18020, C 180 KOMPRESSOR20, 21,
see (Y page 361).
C 180 CDI20, 21
i Notes on the vehicle equipment – always
V2 C 200 CDI20, C 20020, C 220 CDI20,
fit the vehicle:
C 25020, C 250 CDI20,
Rwith tyres of the same size on a given axle
C 250 CDI 4MATIC20
(left/right)
Rwith the same type of tyres at a given V3 C 30020, 21, C 300 CDI 4MATIC20,
time (summer tyres, winter tyres, C 35020, C 350 CDI20
MOExtended tyres)
V4 C 63 AMG
20 BlueEFFICIENCY
21 Only in certain countries.
Z
i Not all wheel/tyre combinations can be

mounted at the factory in all countries.
Wheels and tyres
Tyres
Saloon
Summer tyres Light-alloy V1 V2 V3 V4 V5

wheels
BA 195/60 R16 89 V22 6.0 J x 16 H2 ET 39 # — — — —
BA 205/55 R16 91 V22 7.0 J x 16 H2 ET 43 # # — — —
BA 205/55 R16 91 W22 7.0 J x 16 H2 ET 43 # # # — —
BA 225/50 R16 92 V22 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 53 # # — — —
BA 225/50 R16 92 W22 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 53 # # # — —
BA 225/45 R17 91 W22 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 47 # # # # —
BA 225/45 R17 91 W 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 47 # # # # —
MOExtended22, 23
# # # #
Wheels and tyres

FA 225/45 R17 91 W 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 47 —
RA 245/40 R17 91 W24 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 58
FA 225/45 R17 91 W MOExtended23 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 47 # # # # —
RA 245/40 R17 91 W 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 58
MOExtended23, 24
BA 225/40 R18 92 Y XL22, 25 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 47 # # # # —
FA 225/40 R18 92 Y XL25, 26 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 47 # # # # —
RA 245/35 R18 92 Y XL24, 25, 26 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 58
FA 225/40 R18 92 Y XL25 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 47 # # # # —

RA 245/35 R18 94 Y XL24, 25, 27 8.5J x 18 H2 ET 54
FA 225/40 ZR18 92 Y XL25 8.0 J x 18 H2 ET 50 # # # # —

RA 255/35 ZR18 94 Y XL24, 25, 27 8.5J x 18 H2 ET 54
22 Not in combination with sports suspension code 486 or dynamic handling package code 483.
23 MOExtended tyres (tyres featuring run-flat characteristics) only in combination with an activated tyre pres-
sure loss warning system or tyre pressure monitor.
24 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.
25 Observe notes on "large wheels" in the "Wheel/tyre combinations" section.
26 Not for vehicles with 4MATIC.
27 Additional measures necessary (hub caps on rear axle, code 776).
Z
Summer tyres Light-alloy V1 V2 V3 V4 V5

wheels
FA 235/40 ZR18 95 Y XL 8.0 J x 18 H2 ET 45 — — — — #
RA 255/35 ZR18 94 Y XL24, 25 9.0 J x 18 H2 ET 54
FA 235/35 ZR19 XL25 8.0 J x 19 H2 ET 45 — — — — #
RA 255/30 ZR19 XL24, 25 9.0 J x 19 H2 ET 54
Winter tyres Light-alloy V1 V2 V3 V4 V5

wheels
BA 195/60 R16 89 H M+Si 6.0 J x 16 H2 ET 39 # — — — —
BA 205/55 R1 6 91 H M+Si 7.0 J x 16 H2 ET 43 # # — — —
BA 205/55 R16 92 H M+Si 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 53 # # # — —
BA 225/45 R17 91 H M+Si 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 47 # # # # —
# # # #
Wheels and tyres
BA 225/45 R17 91 H 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 47 —

M+SiMOExtended23
BA 225/40 R18 92 H XL M+Si25 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 47 # # # # —
BA 225/40 R18 92 H XL M+Si25 8.0 J x 18 H2 ET 50 # # # # —
BA 225/40 R18 92 V XL M+Si25 8.0 J x 18 H2 ET 45 — — — — #
BA 235/40 R18 95 V XL M+Si 8.0 J x 18 H2 ET 45 — — — — #
FA 235/40 R18 95 V XL M+Si 8.0 J x 18 H2 ET 45 — — — — #

RA 255/35 R18 94 V XL 9.0 J x 18 H2 ET 54
M+Si24, 25
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel24

Tyres Wheels V1 V2 V3 V4 V5
T 125/90 R16 99 M 3.5 B x 16 H2 ET 20 # # # — —
Tyre pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi)
T 125/80 R17 99 M 3.5 B x 17 H2 ET 20 — — # # —
28
T 125/70 R18 99 M 3.5 B x 18 H2 ET 20 — — — — #
Your vehicle may be equipped with TIREFIT or a "Minispare" emergency spare wheel, depend-
ing on the country, the engine and the wheels fitted.
i The specified tyre pressure is printed in yellow on the emergency spare wheel.
Estate
Wheels and tyres

Summer tyres Light-alloy wheels V1 V2 V3 V4
BA 205/55 R16 91 V 7.0 J x 16 H2 ET 43 # — — —
BA 205/55 R16 91 W 7.0 J x 16 H2 ET 43 — # — —
BA 225/50 R16 92 V 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 53 # — — —
BA 225/50 R16 92 W 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 53 — # — —
BA 225/45 R17 91 W 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 47 # # — —
BA 225/45 R17 91 W MOExtended23 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 47 # # — —
BA 225/45 R17 91 Y 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 47 # # — —
BA 225/45 R17 91 Y MOExtended23 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 47 # # # —
FA 225/45 R17 91 W 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 47 # # # —
RA 245/40 R17 91 W24 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 58
FA 225/45 R17 91 W MOExtended23 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 47 # # — —
RA 245/40 R17 91 W 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 58
MOExtended23, 24
FA 225/45 R17 91 Y 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 47 — — # —
RA 245/40 R17 91Y24 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 58
28 Use only in conjunction with Sports package optional equipment.
Z
Summer tyres Light-alloy wheels V1 V2 V3 V4

FA 225/45 R17 91 Y MOExtended23 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 47 — — # —
RA 245/40 R17 91 Y 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 58
MOExtended23, 24
BA 225/40 R18 92 Y XL25 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 47 # # — —
FA 225/40 R18 92 Y XL25, 26 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 47 # # # —
RA 245/35 R18 92 Y XL25, 26 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 58
FA 225/40 R18 92 Y XL25 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 47 # # # —

RA 245/35 R18 94 Y XL25, 27 8.5J x 18 H2 ET 54
FA 225/40 ZR18 92 Y XL25 8.0 J x 18 H2 ET 50 — — # —

RA 255/35 ZR18 94 Y XL24, 25 8.5J x 18 H2 ET 54
FA 235/40 ZR18 95 Y XL 8.0 J x 18 H2 ET 45 — — — #

RA 255/35 ZR18 94 Y XL24, 25 9.0 J x 18 H2 ET 54
Wheels and tyres
FA 235/35 ZR19 XL25 8.0 J x 19 H2 ET 45 — — — #

RA 255/30 ZR19 XL24, 25 9.0 J x 19 H2 ET 54
Winter tyres Light-alloy wheels V1 V2 V3 V4

BA 205/55 R1 6 91 H M+Si 7.0 J x 16 H2 ET 43 # # — —
BA 205/55 R16 92 H M+Si 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 53 # # — —
BA 225/45 R17 91 H M+Si 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 47 # # # —
BA 225/45 R17 91 H 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 47 # # # —
M+SiMOExtended23
BA 225/40 R18 92 H XL M+Si25 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 47 # # # —
BA 225/40 R18 92 H XL M+Si25 8.0 J x 18 H2 ET 50 # # # —
BA 225/40 R18 92 V XL 8.0 J x 18 H2 ET 45 — — — #

M+Si25, 29
26 Not for vehicles with 4MATIC.
27 Additional measures necessary (hub caps on rear axle, code 776).
29 Maximum permissible speed 220 km/h.
Winter tyres Light-alloy wheels V1 V2 V3 V4

BA 235/40 R18 95 V XL M+Si 8.0 J x 18 H2 ET 45 — — — #
FA 235/40 R18 95 V XL M+Si 8.0 J x 18 H2 ET 45 — — — #

RA 255/35 R18 94 V XL 9.0 J x 18 H2 ET 54
M+Si24, 25
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel24

Tyres Wheels V1 V2 V3 V4
T 125/90 R16 99 M 3.5 B x 16 H2 ET 20 # # — —
T 125/80 R17 99 M 3.5 B x 17 H2 ET 20 — #28 # —
T 125/70 R18 99 M 3.5 B x 18 H2 ET 20 — — — #
Wheels and tyres

Your vehicle may be equipped with TIREFIT or a "Minispare" emergency spare wheel, depend-
ing on the country, the engine and the wheels fitted.
i The specified tyre pressure is printed in yellow on the emergency spare wheel.
28 Use only in conjunction with Sports package optional equipment.
Z
374
375

Notes on the technical data ............. 376
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ......... 376
Vehicle electronics ........................... 377
Vehicle identification plates ............ 379
Service products and capacities ..... 379
Vehicle data ...................................... 384
Boot lid and tailgate opening
dimensions ........................................ 386
Trailer tow hitch ................................ 387
24-GHz radar sensor system (coun-
try overview) ..................................... 389
Technical data
376 Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
Useful information approved parts may invalidate the vehicle's

general operating permit. This is the case if:
i This Owner's Manual describes all models Rthey cause a change of the vehicle type
and all standard and optional equipment from that for which the vehicle's general
available to your vehicle at the time of pub- operating permit was granted.
lication of the Owner's Manual. Country- Rother road users could be endangered.
specific deviations are possible. Please Rthe emission or noise levels are adversely
note that your vehicle may not be equipped affected.
applies to safety-relevant systems and G WARNING
functions. Driving safety may be impaired if non-
approved parts, tyres and wheels or safety-
relevant accessories are used.
This could lead to malfunctions in safety-rel-
evant systems, e.g. the brake system. This
Notes on the technical data could cause you to lose control of your vehicle
and cause an accident.
You can find technical data on the Internet at: For this reason, Mercedes-Benz recommends
http://www.mercedes-benz.com that you use genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or
parts of equal quality. Only use tyres, wheels
i The technical data was determined in and accessories that have been specifically
accordance with EC Directives. All data approved for your vehicle.
applies to the vehicle's standard equip-
Technical data
ment. Therefore, the data may differ for ! Airbags and seat belt tensioners, as well
vehicles with optional equipment. You can as control units and sensors for these
obtain further information from a restraint systems may be installed in the
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. following areas of your vehicle:
Rdoors
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts Rdoor pillars

Rdoor sills
Mercedes-Benz tests genuine parts and con- Rseats
version parts and accessories which have Rdashboard
been specifically approved for your vehicle for Rinstrument cluster
their reliability, safety and suitability. Despite
Rcentre console
ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is
unable to evaluate other parts. Mercedes- Do not install accessories such as audio
Benz therefore accepts no responsibility for systems in these areas. Do not carry out
the use of such parts in Mercedes-Benz vehi- repairs or welding. You could impair the
cles, even if they have been independently or operating efficiency of the restraint sys-
officially approved. tems.
In Germany and some other countries, certain Have aftermarket accessories installed at
parts are only officially approved for installa- a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-
tion or modification if they comply with legal Benz recommends that you use a
requirements. All genuine Mercedes-Benz Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this pur-
parts meet this requirement. The use of non- pose.
Vehicle electronics 377
H Environmental note If your vehicle has fittings for two-way radio

Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned equipment, use the power supply or aerial
assemblies and parts which are of the same connections intended for use with the basic
quality as new parts. For these, the same war- wiring. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's
ranty applies as for new parts. additional instructions when installing the fit-
tings.
Always specify the vehicle identification num- ! Have aftermarket radio frequency trans-
ber (VIN) (Y page 379) and the engine num- mitting equipment installed at a qualified
ber (Y page 379) when ordering genuine specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz rec-
Mercedes-Benz parts. ommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre for this purpose.
Vehicle electronics The transmission output at the aerial base
must not exceed the maximum values below.
Tampering with the engine electron-
ics Waveband Maximum trans-
mission output
G WARNING (PEAK)
Only have work on the engine electronics and Short wave 100 W
related components carried out at a qualified (f < 54 MHz)
specialist workshop which has the necessary
specialist knowledge and tools to carry out 4 m waveband 30 W
the work required. Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service
2 m waveband 50 W
Technical data
Centre for this purpose. In particular, work Trunked radio/Tetra 35 W
relevant to safety or on safety-related sys-
tems must be carried out at a qualified spe- 70 cm waveband 35 W
cialist workshop. Otherwise, the vehicle's GSM 900/AMPS 10 W
roadworthiness could be affected.
GSM 1800 10 W
! Only have maintenance work on the
engine electronics and its associated parts, UMTS 10 W
such as control units, sensors and connec-
tor leads, carried out at a qualified special- The following aerial positions may be used if
ist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service RF transmitters have been properly installed:
Centre. Vehicle components may other-
wise wear more quickly and the vehicle's
operating permit may be invalidated.
Retrofitting of two-way radios and

mobile phones (RF transmitters)
Use the Technical Specification
ISO/TS 2160930 implementation regulation
when retrofitting RF (radio frequency) trans-
mitters.
30 ISO/TS 21609 – Technical Specification for Road Vehicles (EMC) guidelines for installation of aftermarket
radio frequency transmitting equipment.
Z
378 Vehicle electronics
G WARNING
Incorrect retrofitting of RF transmitters can
lead to increased electromagnetic radiation in
the vehicle interior. Using an exterior aerial
takes into account current scientific discus-
sions relating to the possible health hazards
that may result from electromagnetic fields.
Have aftermarket radio frequency transmit-
ting equipment installed at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recom-
Saloon mends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service
: Front roof area31, 32 Centre for this purpose.
; Rear roof area32 Deviations with respect to aerial locations,
= Rear wing33 output and frequencies must be approved by
? Boot lid Mercedes-Benz.
There is no restriction for aerial positions in
the outer area of the vehicle for these wave-
bands: trunked radio/Tetra, 70 cm wave-
band, GSM 900/AMPS, GSM 1800 and
UMTS.
Legal provisions for fittings must be
observed.
Technical data
RF transmitters with a maximum transmis-

sion output of 100 mW (PEAK) may be used
in the vehicle without restrictions.
Estate ! The operating permit may be invalidated

: Front roof area31, 32 if the instructions for installation and use of
RF transmitters are not observed, e.g.
; Rear roof area
approved wavebands, maximum output
= Rear wing33 and aerial positions on the vehicle.
G WARNING
Incorrect retrofitting of RF transmitters can
cause the vehicle electronics to malfunction.
The vehicle's operating safety and thus your
own safety are impaired.
Have aftermarket radio frequency transmit-
ting equipment installed at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre for this purpose.
31 Vehicles
with a sliding sunroof: observe the roof's sweep.
32 Vehicles
with a panorama sliding sunroof: this area is not permitted.
33 Recommended installation position: on the side which faces the centre of the road.
Service products and capacities 379
Vehicle identification plates number (VIN) is also stamped onto the vehicle
body.
Vehicle identification plate with vehi- It is located on the floor in front of the right-
cle identification number (VIN) and hand front seat.
paint code number
X Slide the right-hand front seat to its rear-

X Open the front right-hand door. most position.
You will see vehicle identification plate :. X Fold floor covering : upwards.
You will see vehicle identification number
(VIN) ;.
Technical data
Engine number
The engine number is stamped into the crank-
case. More information can be obtained from
Vehicle identification plate (example) Service products and capacities

: Vehicle identification plate
; Vehicle manufacturer
Service products include the following:
= EU type approval number
Rfuels (e.g. petrol, diesel)
? Vehicle identification number (VIN)
Rlubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)
A Maximum permissible gross vehicle
Rcoolant
weight
B Gross combination mass Rbrake fluid
Rwindscreen washer fluid
C Maximum permissible front axle load
D Maximum permissible rear axle load Vehicle components and their respective
lubricants must match. Mercedes-Benz rec-
E Paint code
ommends that you use products that have
been tested and specially approved by
Mercedes-Benz. These products are listed in
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
this Mercedes-Benz Owner's Manual in the
In addition to being stamped on the vehicle relevant section.
identification plate, the vehicle identification
Z
380 Service products and capacities
You can recognise service products approved It is hazardous to your health if your skin
by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscrip- comes into direct contact with fuels or you
tion on the containers: breathe in fuel vapours.
RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51) Tank capacity
Other designations or recommendations
relate to a level of quality or a specification in Total capacity 59 l
accordance with an MB Sheet number (such C 18034
as MB 229.5). They have not necessarily been C 20034
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
C 25034
You can obtain further information from any
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. C 180 CDI34, 35
C 200 CDI34
G WARNING
C 220 CDI34
When handling, storing and disposing of any
service products, please observe the relevant C 250 CDI34
regulations, as you could otherwise endanger C 250 CDI 4MATIC34
yourself and others.
Total capacity 66 l
Keep service products away from children.
all other models
To protect your health, do not allow service
products to come into contact with your eyes
AMG vehicles
or open wounds. See a doctor immediately if Reserve fuel in AMG vehi- Approx-
any service product is swallowed. cles
Technical data
imately 14 l
H Environmental note Reserve fuel in all other Approx-

Dispose of service products in an environ-
models imately 8 l
mentally-responsible manner.
! Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a
diesel engine. Do not use diesel to refuel
Fuel vehicles with a petrol engine. Even small
amounts of the wrong fuel result in damage
Important safety notes to the fuel system and the engine.
G WARNING Further information on refuelling and on fuels
(Y page 168).
Fuel is highly flammable. Fire, naked flames
and smoking are therefore prohibited when
handling fuels. Notes on fuel consumption
Switch off the engine and the auxiliary heating The vehicle will use more fuel than usual in
before refuelling. the following situations:
Ratvery low outside temperatures
G WARNING Rinurban traffic
Do not come into contact with fuels.
Ron short journeys
34 BlueEFFICIENCY
35 Only for certain countries.
Rwhen towing a trailer engine oils that correspond to the current

Rin mountainous terrain technical standard.
Therefore, only Mercedes-Benz approved
i Only for certain countries: you can find
engine oils may be used in Mercedes-Benz
the current consumption and emission val-
engines.
ues of your vehicle in the COC documents
(EU CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). These Further information on tested and approved
documents are delivered with your vehicle. engine oils can be obtained from any
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Mercedes-
The consumption figures were in each case
Benz recommends that you have the oil
based on the currently applicable version:
change carried out at a Mercedes-Benz
Rfor vehicles up to and including the EURO
Service Centre. Mercedes-Benz approval is
4 standard, in accordance with EU Direc- indicated on the oil container by the inscrip-
tive 80/1268/ECC tion "MB Approval" and the corresponding
Rfor vehicles above the EURO 5 standard, designation, e.g. MB Approval 229.51.
in accordance with Regulation (EC) No. The table shows which engine oils have been
715/2007 approved for your vehicle.
Deviations from these values may occur
under normal operating conditions. Petrol engines MB Approval
! Do not use any fuel additives, as they can C 180 229.3, 229.31,
cause malfunctions and engine damage. KOMPRESSOR36, 37 229.5, 229.51
H Environmental note C 18036 229.3, 229.5,

CO2 (carbon dioxide) is the gas which scien- C 20036 229.51
Technical data
tists believe to be principally responsible for C 25036
global warming (the greenhouse effect). Your
vehicle's CO2 emissions are directly related C 350 4MATIC36 229.3, 229.5
to fuel consumption and therefore depend on: C 35036
Refficient use of the fuel by the engine
C 63 AMG38 229.5
Rdriving style
Rother non-technical factors, such as envi-
Missing values were not available at time of
ronmental influences or road conditions
going to print.
You can minimise your vehicle's CO2 emis-
sions by driving carefully and having it serv- Petrol engines MB Approval
iced regularly.
C 25037
C 300 4MATIC36, 37
Engine oil C 30036, 37
Please bear the following in mind

The quality of engine oils is decisive for the
function and service life of an engine. After
extensive tests, Mercedes-Benz approves
36 BlueEFFICIENCY.
38 Restriction: only SAE 0W-40/SAE 5W-40 engine oils may be used.
Z
382 Service products and capacities
Diesel engines MB Approval Model Capacity

Vehicles with a diesel particle filter C 180 KOMPRESSOR36, 37 5.5 l
C 180 CDI36, 37 228.51, C 18036
C 200 CDI36 229.31, 229.51 C 20036
C 220 CDI36 C 25036
C 250 CDI36 C 30036, 37 6.5 l
C 250 CDI 4MATIC36 C 300 4MATIC36, 37
C 350 CDI36 C 35036
C 300 CDI 4MATIC36 C 350 4MATIC36
C 180 CDI36, 37
You can call up an overview of approved C 200 CDI36
engine oils on the Internet at
C 220 CDI36
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com by enter-
ing the designation, e.g. 229.5. C 250 CDI36
i If the engine oils listed in the table are not C 250 CDI 4MATIC36
available, you may add the following engine C 25037 8.0 l
oils until the next oil change:
C 350 CDI36
Rvehicles with a petrol engine: MB C 300 CDI 4MATIC36
Approval 229.1 or ACEA A3
Technical data
Rvehicles with a diesel engine: MB C 63 AMG39 8.5 l

Approval 229.1 or ACEA C3
Engine oil may only be added once, and no Additives
more than 1.0 l may be added.
! Do not use additives in engine oil. This
could damage the engine.
Capacities
The following values refer to an oil change Engine oil viscosity
including the oil filter.
Viscosity describes the flow characteristics
of a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity
rating, it flows slowly; the lower the viscosity,
the faster it flows.
Engine oil selection is based on the respective
outside temperatures and in accordance with
the SAE classification (viscosity). The table
below shows you which SAE classifications
are to be used. The low-temperature proper-
ties of engine oils can be significantly
impaired during operation due to, for exam-
ple, ageing or soot and fuel accretion. It is
36 BlueEFFICIENCY.
39 Including external oil cooler.
therefore strongly recommended to observe Coolant

regular oil changes using an approved engine
oil with the appropriate SAE classification. Important safety notes
The coolant is a mixture of water and anti-
freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the
following tasks:
Ranti-corrosion protection
Rantifreeze protection
Rraising the boiling point
i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is fil-

led with a coolant mixture that ensures
adequate antifreeze and corrosion protec-
tion.
! Only add coolant that has been premixed
Brake fluid with the desired antifreeze protection. The
engine could otherwise be damaged.
G WARNING
Further information on coolants and on fill-
Over a period of time, the brake fluid absorbs
ing can be found in the Mercedes-Benz
moisture from the air; This lowers its boiling
Specifications for Service Products, MB
point.
Approval 310.1, e.g. on the Internet at
If the boiling point of the brake fluid is too low, http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. You can
Technical data
vapour pockets may form in the brake system also consult a Mercedes-Benz Service
when the brakes are applied hard (e.g. when Centre.
driving downhill). This impairs braking effi-
ciency. ! Always use a suitable coolant mixture,
You should have the brake fluid renewed at even in countries where high temperatures
regular intervals. The brake fluid change inter- prevail.
vals can be found in the Service Booklet. Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not
sufficiently protected from corrosion and
Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes- overheating.
Benz. Information about approved brake flu- If antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor is present in
ids can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz the correct concentration, the boiling point of
Service Centre or on the Internet at the coolant during operation will be around
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com 130 †.
i There is usually a notice in the engine The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentra-
compartment to remind you when the next tion in the engine cooling system should:
brake fluid change is due. Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine
cooling system against freezing down to
around -37 †.
Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection
down to -45 † ); otherwise, heat will not be
dissipated as effectively.
If the vehicle has lost coolant, top it up with
equal amounts of water and antifreeze/cor-
Z
384 Vehicle data
rosion inhibitor. Mercedes-Benz recom- All models

mends an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor
which has been approved for Mercedes-Benz. Vehicle width with- 1770 mm
out exterior mirrors
! The engine cooling system is filled with
coolant that must be renewed after 15 Wheelbase, except 2760 mm
years, or after 250,000 km at the latest. for AMG vehicles
Maximum roof load 100 kg
Vehicle data Maximum boot load 100 kg
Please note that for the specified vehicle

data: C 180 KOMPRESSOR BlueEFFI-
Rthe heights specified may vary as a result CIENCY40
of: Manual transmission
- tyres
Unladen weight, 1480 kg
- load
Saloon
- condition of the suspension
- optional equipment Unladen weight, 1530 kg
Ritems of optional equipment increase the
Estate
unladen weight and reduce the maximum Automatic transmission
payload. The unladen weight is specified in
accordance with EC directive and includes: Unladen weight, 1495 kg
Technical data
Saloon
- driver (68 kg)
- luggage (7 kg) Unladen weight, 1545 kg
- all fluids (fuel tank 90% full) Estate
Rvehicle-specific weight information can be
found on the vehicle identification plate C 180 BlueEFFICIENCY
(Y page 379).
Ronly for certain countries: you can find vehi- Manual transmission
cle-specific vehicle data in the COC docu- Unladen weight, 1480 kg
ments (CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). Saloon
These documents are delivered with your
vehicle. Unladen weight, 1540 kg
Estate
All models
Vehicle length 4591 mm
(ECE), Saloon Unladen weight, 1495 kg
Saloon
(ECE), Estate Unladen weight, 1555 kg
Estate
Vehicle width 2008 mm
including exterior
mirrors

Vehicle data 385
C 200 BlueEFFICIENCY C 180 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY

Manual transmission C 200 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY
Unladen weight, 1500 kg Automatic transmission

Saloon Unladen weight, 1590 kg
Unladen weight, 1560 kg Saloon
Estate Unladen weight, 1645 kg
Automatic transmission Estate

Saloon C 220 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY
Unladen weight, 1565 kg Manual transmission

Estate Unladen weight, 1600 kg
Saloon
C 250 BlueEFFICIENCY Unladen weight, 1655 kg
Unladen weight, 1505 kg Estate
Saloon Automatic transmission
Unladen weight, 1575 kg Unladen weight, 1610 kg
Estate Saloon
Technical data
C 350 BlueEFFICIENCY Estate
Saloon C 250 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY
Unladen weight, 1670 kg Manual transmission
Estate
Saloon
C 350 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY
Unladen weight, 1670 kg Estate
Saloon
C 180 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY Unladen weight, 1615 kg

Saloon
C 200 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY
Manual transmission
Estate
Saloon
Estate
Z
386 Boot lid and tailgate opening dimensions
C 250 CDI 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY C 63 AMG

Unladen weight, 1675 kg Unladen weight, 1795 kg
Saloon Estate
Unladen weight, 1735 kg Wheelbase 2765 mm
Estate
Missing values were not available at time of
C 300 CDI 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY going to print.
Unladen weight, 1735 kg C 25041

Saloon C 300 BlueEFFICIENCY41
Unladen weight, 1795 kg C 300 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY41
Estate
C 350 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY Boot lid and tailgate opening dimen-

sions
Saloon
Estate
Models with ECO start/stop function
Technical data

Saloon
Estate
C 63 AMG
(ECE), Saloon
Vehicle height, 1433 mm : Opening height
Saloon ; Maximum headroom
Unladen weight, 1730 kg : ;
Saloon
Saloon 1757 – —
1761 mm
(ECE), Estate
Estate 1990 – 1877 –
Vehicle height, 1448 mm
1994 mm 1881 mm
Estate

Trailer tow hitch 387
i The values specified may differ from the

actual values, depending on the tyres, load,
optional equipment and the state of the
suspension.
Trailer tow hitch

Mounting dimensions
G WARNING
Only have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted at a
Service Centre for this purpose. In particular,
work relevant to safety or on safety-related
systems must be carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop. Anchorage points for the trailer tow hitch (exam-
ple)
! If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted, : Anchorage points
changes to the cooling system may be nec- ; Overhang dimension
essary, depending on the vehicle type. = Rear axle centre line
Technical data
If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted,
observe the anchorage points on the chas- For trailer tow hitches fitted at the factory, the
sis frame. overhang dimension including protective cov-
ering is 1154 mm (Saloon without the AMG
sports package) or 1182 mm (Estate and
Saloon with the AMG sports package).
Z
388 Trailer tow hitch
Trailer loads
All models42
Permissible trailer load, 750 kg43, 44
unbraked
Permissible trailer load, 1800 kg46
braked45
Maximum drawbar 75 kg
noseweight47
Technical data
42 The C 63 AMG cannot be used to tow a trailer.

43 C180 KOMPRESSOR BlueEFFICIENCY Saloon with manual transmission and C180 BlueEFFICIENCY Saloon
with manual transmission: 740 kg.
44 C180 KOMPRESSOR BlueEFFICIENCY Saloon with automatic transmission and C180 BlueEFFICIENCY Saloon
with automatic transmission: 745 kg.
45 At a minimum gradient-climbing capability of 12% from a standstill.
46 C180 KOMPRESSOR BlueEFFICIENCY Saloon and Estate with manual transmission: 1700 kg.
47 The drawbar noseweight is not included in the trailer load.
24-GHz radar sensor system (country overview) 389
Permissible rear axle load when towing a trailer

Missing values were not available at time of going to print.
Saloon Estate
Manual trans- Automatic Manual trans- Automatic
mission transmission mission transmission
C 180 1180 kg 1185 kg 1245 kg 1250 kg
KOMPRESSOR48
C 18048 1180 kg 1185 kg 1245 kg 1250 kg
C 20048 1190 kg 1190 kg 1255 kg 1255 kg

C 250
C 25048 – 1195 kg – 1265 kg
C 30048
C 300 4MATIC48
C 35048 – 1220 kg – 1285 kg
C 350 4MATIC48 – 1215 kg – –
Technical data
C 180 CDI48 1205 kg 1200 kg 1260 kg 1260 kg
C 200 CDI48 1205 kg 1200 kg 1260 kg 1260 kg
C 220 CDI48 1200 kg 1205 kg 1270 kg 1275 kg
C 250 CDI48 1210 kg 1210 kg 1280 kg 1280 kg
C 250 CDI 4MATIC48 – 1205 kg – 1275 kg
C 300 CDI 4MATIC48 – 1235 kg – 1310 kg
C 350 CDI48 – 1250 kg49 – 1325 kg
24-GHz radar sensor system (country overview)
The 24 GHz radar sensor system requires separate approval for each country. When you are
driving in a country in which the radar sensor system is not approved, you must deactivate
the system using the on-board computer (Y page 242). The current country overview can be
obtained from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Vehicles with a navigation system: the radar sensor system is deactivated automatically
near radio telescope facilities.
48 BlueEFFICIENCY
49 For C 350 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY with ECO start/stop function: 1245 kg.
Z
390 24-GHz radar sensor system (country overview)
The currently active systems are automatically deactivated:

RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 183)
RBlind Spot Assist (Y page 205)
RActive Blind Spot Assist(Y page 209)
RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 51)
A display message appears in the multifunction display to tell you that the radar sensor system
is being switched off (Y page 274).
BAS PLUS (Y page 73) is then also unavailable.
If the deactivation does not occur automatically, you must deactivate the radar sensor system
Vehicles without navigation and vehicles for Australia: you must deactivate the radar
sensor system using the on-board computer when you are near a radio telescope facility
(Y page 242).
Country Radio telescope Geographical latitude and Distance to be
facilities longitude maintained
from the facility
Egypt – – –
Andorra – – –
Australia Parkes 32°59'59" S,148°15'44" E 10 km
Technical data
Narrabri 30°18'52" S,149°32'56" E 10 km

Canberra 35°23'54" S,148°58'40" E 3 km
Western Australia 26°37'13"S,117°30'40" E 10 km
Bahrain – – –
Belgium – – –
Bosnia-Herzego- – – –
vina
Bulgaria – – –
Denmark – – –
Germany Effelsberg 50°31'32" N, 06°53'00" E 6.5 km
Estonia – – –
Finland Metsähovi 60°13'04" N, 24°23'37" E 7 km
Tuorla 60°24'56" N, 22°26'31" E 5 km
France Plateau de Bure 44°38'01" N, 05°54'26" E 35 km
Floirac 44°50'10" N, 00°31'37" W 35 km
Gibraltar – – –

from the facility
Greece – – –
United Kingdom Cambridge 52°09'59" N, 00°02'20" E 9 km
Darnhall 53°09'22" N, 02°32'03" W 5 km
Jodrell Bank 53°14'10" N, 02°18'26" W 9 km
Knockin 52°47'24" N, 02°59'45" W 5 km
Pickmere 53°17'18" N, 02°26'38" W 5 km
Ireland – – –
Iceland – – –
Italy Medicina 44°31'14" N,11°38'49" E 20 km
Noto 36°52'34" N, 14°59'21" E 8 km
Sardinia 39°29'50" N, 09°14'40" E 15 km
Yemen – – –
Technical data
Jordan – – –
Canada – – –
Qatar – – –
Croatia – – –
Kuwait – – –
Latvia Ventspils 57°33'12" N, 21°51'17" E 8.5 km
Lebanon – – –
Lithuania – – –
Luxembourg – – –
Malaysia – – –
Malta – – –
Macedonia – – –
Mexico – – –
Mongolia – – –
New Zealand – – –
Netherlands – – –
Z
392 24-GHz radar sensor system (country overview)

from the facility
Norway – – –
Oman – – –
Austria – – –
Pakistan – – –
Poland Kraków-Fort Skała 50°03'18" N, 19°49'36" E 1 km
Toruń-Piwnice 52°54'48" N, 18°33'30" E 1 km
Portugal – – –
Romania – – –
Russia Dimitrov 56°26'00" N, 37°27'00" E 35 km
Kalyazin 57°13'22" N, 37°54'01" E 35 km
Pushchino 54°49'00" N, 37°40'00" E 35 km
Zelenchukskaya 43°49'53" N, 41°35'32" E 35 km
Technical data
Saudi Arabia – – –
Sweden Onsala 57°23'45" N, 11°55'35" E 12 km
Switzerland Bleien 47°20'26" N, 08°06'44" E 3 km
Singapore – – –
Slovakia – – –
Slovenia – – –
Spain Yebes 40°31'27" N, 03°05'22" W 15 km
Robledo 40°25'38" N, 04°14'57" W 7 km
South Africa – – –
Syria – – –
Czech Republic – – –
Turkey – – –
Ukraine – – –
Hungary Penc 47°47'22" N, 19°16'53" E 2 km
USA – – –

from the facility
United Arab Emi- – – –
rates
Cyprus – – –
Technical data
Z
394
395
396

Mercedes C Class Saloon 2011 w204 Owners Manual 01

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mercedes C Class Saloon 2011 w204 Owners Manual 01

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mercedes C Class Saloon 2011 w204 Owners Manual 01

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Disclaimer

Internal use only

The illustrations in this manual show a left-

Keep these documents in the vehicle at all

Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 31

Introduction ......................................... 26 Safety ................................................... 45

Opening and closing ........................... 83

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors . . 103

Lights and windscreen wipers ......... 117

Climate control ................................. 133

Driving and parking .......................... 151

On-board computer and displays .... 221

Stowing and features ....................... 301

Maintenance and care ...................... 321

Breakdown assistance ..................... 333

Wheels and tyres .............................. 357

Technical data ................................... 375

1, 2, 3 ... Switching on/off (on-board com-

Alarm system Automatic engine start (ECO start/

Problem (display message) ............ 147 Bonnet

High-performance brake system .... 177 Cell phone

Convenience opening/closing (air Convenience closing feature .............. 97

Cup holder Display message (12-button multi-

Setting the specified minimum Driving safety systems

Symmetrical dipped beam ............. 118 Emergency release

Deactivating/activating (except Raising the vehicle ......................... 343

Fuel reserve Adjusting (rear) .............................. 107

Instrument cluster lighting Emergency key element ................... 86

(12-button multifunction steering Limiting the speed

Manual transmission Multifunction steering wheel (12-

Menu overview .............................. 230 Outside temperature

Parking lamp Preventive occupant safety sys-

Rear foglamp Rev counter

Seat belt Service products

Speed, controlling Warning lamp ................................. 297

Surround lighting (12-button mul- Rejecting/ending a call ................. 235

Towing away Turn signal

U Video DVD (12-button multifunc-

Protection of the environment Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance

are listed in the original purchase agreement G WARNING

Data stored in the vehicle

Function Page Function Page

Instrument cluster (4-button steering wheel)

i Instrument cluster: kilometres Function Page

Warning and indicator lamps

Function Page Function Page

Instrument cluster (12-button steering wheel)

i Instrument cluster: miles Function Page

Warning and indicator lamps

Multifunction steering wheel

Function Page Function Page

12-button multifunction steering wheel

Function Page Function Page

D u Saloon: rear window J Audio/COMAND controller

Overhead control panel

Door control panel

Useful information .............................. 46

Useful information must wear their seat belt correctly at all

lication of the Owner's Manual. Country-